Jezyk Angielski Cwiczenia Oraz Repetytorium Gramatyczne Matasek

##7#52#aMTgwNTc1M0E2NjM4MzMzNA==
MACIEJ MATASEK
JĘZYK ANGIELSKI
ĆWICZENIA ORAZ
REPETYTORIUM
GRAMATYCZNE
1
Plik zabezpieczony watermarkiem jawnym i niejawnym: 1805753A66383334
© Copyright by Wydawnictwo HANDYBOOKS
Poznań 2014
Wszelkie prawa zastrzeżone. Każda reprodukcja lub adaptacja całości bądź części niniejszej
publikacji, niezależnie od zastosowanej techniki reprodukcji (drukarskiej, komputerowej,
fotograficznej itd.) wymaga pisemnej zgody Wydawcy.
ISBN 978-83-60238-49-3
Wydawnictwo HANDYBOOKS
Poznań, tel. /faks (061) 667 51 06
www.handybooks.pl
e-mail: wydawnictwo@handybooks.pl
2
Niniejsza książka powstała z myślą o osobach zgłębiających wiedzę o gramatyce oraz leksykonie
języka angielskiego „na własną rękę”. Materiał zawarty w ćwiczeniach pozwala na sprawdzenie lub
utrwalenie wiadomości o zagadnieniach gramatycznych na poziomie początkującym oraz średnio-
zaawansowanym (beginner / pre-intermediate / intermediate / upper-intermediate).
Książka podzielona została na dwie części: praktyczną oraz teoretyczną. Materiał testowy składa
się ze 160 jednostek zawierających bogactwo ćwiczeń umożliwiających rozwinięcie lub utrwalenie
kompetencji językowych w zakresie rozpoznawania form czasownikowych, konstruowania
poprawnej składni, parafrazowania zdań oraz wielu innych. Testy posegregowane zostały według
właściwych kategorii, obejmujących swym zakresem niemalże każdy aspekt gramatyki języka
angielskiego.
Z myślą o osobach bardziej zaawansowanych w książce zawarte zostały pojęcia takie jak formy
dokonane czasowników modalnych, imiesłowy, czasowniki złożone (phrasal verbs) oraz inwersja.
Obok ćwiczeń strukturalnych, książka zawiera także szereg zagadnień leksykalnych pod postacią
ćwiczeń obejmujących rzeczowniki, przymiotniki, przysłówki, przyimki oraz wyrażenia przyimkowe.
Jednostki te służą poszerzeniu wiedzy na temat nieregularnych form liczby mnogiej, szczególnych
przypadków zastosowania niektórych przymiotników oraz przysłówków, jak również przyimków.
Część ćwiczeniowa książki może stanowić bogatą bazę zadań dla nauczyciela prowadzącego zajęcia
w grupach o początkującym lub średnim poziomie zaawansowania. Rozwiązania zadań podane zostały
w kluczu na końcu książki.
Drugą część książki stanowi repetytorium gramatyczne w języku polskim. Każda jednostka
ćwiczeniowa posiada odpowiadającą jej jednostkę w repetytorium. Strona, na której odnaleźć można
teoretyczny opis danego zagadnienia gramatycznego podana została po prawej stronie tytułu każdego
‘unitu’ - za wskaźnikiem ‘‘’’ .
Uczniom początkującym zaleca się wcześniejsze odwołanie do objaśnień w repetytorium, zaś

osoby bardziej zaawansowane mogą potraktować treść wyjaśnień jako źródło dodatkowej wiedzy.
Po prawej stronie tytułu zagadnienia w repetytorium podane zostały numery jednostek testowych,
w których zawarty jest odpowiadający im materiał gramatyczny.
Repetytorium zaopatrzone zostało również w słowniczek czasowników złożonych (phrasal verbs),

pojawiających się w testach oraz tabelę czasowników nieregularnych.
3
SPIS TREŚCI
Unit 1 Przedimki nieokreślone a - an 9

Unit 2 Przedimki a - an - the (1) 10
Unit 5 Zaimki osobowe i dzierżawcze 13
Unit 6 Zaimki dzierżawcze - mine, yours etc. 14
Unit 7 Zaimki zwrotne / each other 15
Unit 8 Zaimki zwrotne i dzierżawcze 16
Unit 9 Zaimki pytające ‘Wh - ?’ 17
Unit 10 Konstrukcje pytające 18
Unit 11 Many - much - a lot of 19
Unit 12 A little - little - a few - few 20
Unit 13 Any - some - no - none 21
Unit 14 Another - the other - other(s) 22
Unit 15 Both - either - neither 23
Unit 16 So do I / Neither do I 24
Unit 17 All - every - each 25
Unit 18 Zaimki względne who - which - that 26
Unit 19 Who - whose - of which - whom - where 27
Unit 20 Who - which - that - whose - where 28
Unit 21 Zaimki złożone - someone 29
Unit 22 Who - which - what 30
Unit 23 There - It 31
Unit 24 Liczba mnoga rzeczowników (1) 32
Unit 25 Liczba mnoga rzeczowników (2) 33
Unit 26 Rzeczowniki 34
Unit 27 Przymiotniki 35
Unit 28 Przymiotniki i przysłówki (1) 36
Unit 29 Przymiotniki i przysłówki (2) 37
Unit 30 Przysłówek ‘badly, fairly, hardly’ 38
Unit 31 Stopniowanie - przymiotniki / przysłówki (1) 39
Unit 34 Stopniowanie opadające 42
Unit 35 Stopniowanie rosnące / opadające 43
Unit 36 The same ... as, as ... as, than 44
Unit 37 So, so ... that, such ... that 45
Unit 38 Przysłówek miejsca - somewhere 46
Unit 39 Przysłówki czasu 47
4
Unit 40 Przysłówki częstotliwości 48
Unit 41 Przysłówki sposobu 49
Unit 42 Kolejność przysłówków 50
Unit 43 Przymiotnik czy przysłówek? 51
Unit 44 Enough - too 52
Unit 45 Already - still - yet 53
Unit 46 Przyimki miejsca at - in - on 54
Unit 47 Przyimki miejsca at - in - on 55
Unit 48 Przyimki czasu at - in - on 56
Unit 49 Przyimki czasu at - in - on 57
Unit 50 Przyimki ruchu at - from - in - into - to 58
Unit 51 Przyimki during - for - from - since - till - to 59
Unit 52 Przyimki before - by - until - while 60
Unit 53 Przyimek ‘to’ 61
Unit 54 Inne użycie przyimków at - by - in - on 62
Unit 55 Czasownik + przyimek (1) 63
Unit 56 Czasownik + przyimek (2) 64
Unit 57 Przymiotnik + przyimek (1) 65
Unit 58 Przymiotnik + przyimek (2) 66
Unit 59 Rzeczownik + przyimek 67
Unit 60 Miejsce przyimka w zdaniu 68
Unit 61 ‘Be’ - czas teraźniejszy 69
Unit 62 ‘Be’ - czas przeszły 70
Unit 63 ‘Have’ - czas teraźniejszy 71
Unit 64 ‘Have’ - czas przeszły 72
Unit 65 ‘Have’ - forma ‘kauzatywna’ 73
Unit 66 Be / have 74
Unit 67 ‘Do’ - różne zastosowania 75
Unit 68 Can - may 76
Unit 69 Can - could - be able to 77
Unit 70 May - might 78
Unit 71 May - be allowed to 79
Unit 72 Must - have to 80
Unit 73 Mustn’t - needn’t - don’t have to 81
Unit 74 Should - ought to 82
Unit 75 Used to 83
Unit 76 May - might - could + have done 84
Unit 77 Could - could have done - be able to 85
Unit 78 Could not have done 86
Unit 79 Must have done - had to do 87
Unit 80 Should / ought to + have done 88
Unit 81 Didn’t have to - needn’t have done 89
5
Unit 82 Czasowniki modalne – formy dokonane (1) 90
Unit 83 Czasowniki modalne – formy dokonane (2) 91
Unit 84 Present Simple (1) 92
Unit 85 Present Simple (2) 93
Unit 86 Present Continuous 94
Unit 87 Present Simple - Present Continuous (1) 95
Unit 88 Present Simple - Present Continuous (2) 96
Unit 89 Past Simple - czasowniki regularne 97
Unit 90 Past Simple - czasowniki nieregularne 98
Unit 91 Present Simple - Past Simple 99
Unit 92 Past Continuous 100
Unit 93 Past Simple - Past Continuous 101
Unit 94 Present Perfect (1) 102
Unit 95 Present Perfect (2) 103
Unit 96 Present Perfect Continuous 104
Unit 97 Present Simple - Present Perfect (Continuous) 105
Unit 98 Present Perfect - Past Simple 106
Unit 99 Present, Past, Perfect - Simple 107
Unit 100 Future Simple 108
Unit 101 Present Continuous - Future Simple 109
Unit 102 Be going to - Future Simple 110
Unit 103 Be going to - Present Continuous 111
Unit 104 Future Continuous 112
Unit 105 Future Simple - Future Continuous 113
Unit 106 Will - shall 114
Unit 107 Future Perfect 115
Unit 108 Future Perfect Continuous 116
Unit 109 Past Perfect 117
Unit 110 Past Perfect Continuous 118
Unit 111 Past Perfect (Continuous) - Past Simple 119
Unit 112 Użycie różnych czasów (1) 120
Unit 116 Tryb warunkowy I 124
Unit 117 Tryb warunkowy II 125
Unit 118 Tryb warunkowy III 126
Unit 119 Tryby warunkowe I - II 127
Unit 120 Tryby warunkowe II - III 128
Unit 121 Tryby warunkowe I - II - III 129
Unit 122 If - unless 130
Unit 123 Wish + Past Simple / would 131
6
Unit 124 Wish + Past Perfect 132
Unit 125 Wish - if only 133
Unit 126 Mowa zależna (1) - twierdzenia 134
Unit 129 Mowa zależna (4) - pytania 137
Unit 130 Mowa zależna (5) - pytania 138
Unit 131 Mowa zależna (6) - sugestie, rady, polecenia 139
Unit 132 Had better 140
Unit 133 Would rather 141
Unit 134 (Would) prefer 142
Unit 135 It is (high) time 143
Unit 136 Strona bierna (1) - czasy ‘Present’ 144
Unit 137 Strona bierna (2) - czasy ‘Past’ 145
Unit 138 Strona bierna (3) - różne formy 146
Unit 139 Strona bierna (4) - różne formy 147
Unit 140 Konstrukcje bezokolicznikowe (1) 148
Unit 143 Konstrukcje ‘gerundialne’ 151
Unit 144 Bezokolicznik / Gerund (1) 152
Unit 145 Bezokolicznik / Gerund (2) 153
Unit 146 Imiesłów czynny 154
Unit 147 Imiesłów czynny i dokonany 155
Unit 148 Zdania czasowe (1) 156
Unit 149 Zdania czasowe (2) 157
Unit 150 Zdania celowe 158
Unit 151 Zdania wynikowe 159
Unit 152 Spójniki (1) 160
Unit 153 Spójniki (2) 161
Unit 154 Pytania rozłączne (1) - ‘Question tags’ 162
Unit 155 Pytania rozłączne (2) - ‘Question tags’ 163
Unit 156 Inwersja czasownika 164
Unit 157 Czasowniki złożone (1) 165
REPETYTORIUM GRAMATYCZNE 169
Klucz do ćwiczeń 279
Tabela czasowników nieregularnych 334
7
8
Unit 1 Przedimki nieokreślone a - an  172
I. Wstaw przedimek nieokreślony a lub an:
.............. book .............. lamp .............. union .............. ape
.............. pocket .............. boat .............. onion .............. fish
.............. shirt .............. apple .............. mouse .............. lorry
.............. eye .............. cap .............. hour .............. tin
.............. chicken .............. watch .............. figure .............. effect
II. Wstaw przedimek nieokreślony a lub an:

1. There is .................... place called Costa Brava.
2. Can he fly .................... aeroplane?
3. Do you live in .................... skyscraper?
4. Mr Thompson is going to buy .................... lawn-mower.
5. This is .................... iron bar.
6. I can see .................... bottle of milk in the fridge.
7. The knight in the picture is wearing .................... armour.
8. We are watching .................... interesting film on TV.
9. Has your brother got .................... new bicycle?
10. Their parents do not work in .................... factory.
11. .................... apple pie is what I would like to eat.
12. Mr Jenkins keeps .................... rabbit at home.
13. There is .................... owl on .................... oak tree.
14. Mr Thompson is .................... honourable guest.
15. This is .................... example of what I call .................... good humour.
III. Wstaw przedimki a, an jeżeli są wymagane:
There is .......... small village near .......... Coventry where .......... old
Mr Parker and his .......... beautiful daughter live in .......... house with ..........
garden. In this garden there is .......... high tree with .......... nest that was
built by .......... little bird. This bird is rather .......... funny with its yellow
.......... head and blue feathers. There is also .......... cat with .......... long tail
which always tries to catch this .......... little bird. .......... dog called Morris barks
at this .......... bad cat whenever he comes to .......... Mr Parker’s garden.
9
Unit 2 Przedimki a - an - the (1)  172, 173
I. Wstaw przedimki a , an lub the:
1. Is there .................... dressing-table in your apartment?
2. Brian is .................... honest man without doubt.
3. This is .................... nicest place in .................... world.
4. Does your father work in .................... office?
5. I am single. I do not have .................... husband.
6. .................... Johnsons are my relatives.
7. .................... snow tiger may soon die out.
8. I can see .................... newspaper in her hand.
9. .................... actress must have .................... good memory.
10. ................... boy who is playing .................... piano comes from France.
II. Wstaw a , an lub the jeżeli są wymagane:

1. I can see .................... van in front of the building. .................... van is rather
old.
2. .................... shirt that you bought yesterday was fairly expensive.
3. There were .................... mistakes in your exercise.
4. We are going to have .................... noisy party tomorrow.
5. This book is about .................... sailor. .................... sailor explores
.................... desert island and establishes .................... colony there.
6. .................... tall man in black trousers is my uncle.
7. They both work in .................... hospital but I don’t know in which one.
8. In .................... winter, our family is going to .................... mountains.
9. ‘What’s there inside this bag?’ ‘There’s .................... sugar, I suppose.’
10. George goes to .................... cinema once .................... week.
11. Look! What .................... wonderful monument!
12. Nothing has changed here since I left. Everything is .................... same.
13. ‘How do you travel to .................... work?’ ‘I go by .................... bus.’
14. .................... oranges are usually sweet, but .................... lemons are always
sour.
15. .................... older wine is, .................... better it tastes.
16. Last night I had .................... strange dream.
17. What’s .................... price of .................... tomatoes this year?
18. .................... accident like this has never happened at our airport.
19. What I need is .................... peace. I am terribly tired.
20. Have you tried on .................... shoes that I have bought for you?
10
I. Wpisz poprawne słowa dodając przedimek nieokreślony a lub an:
1. something that you can cut with is ....... _ _ _ f _
2. someone who lives in another country is ....... _ _ r _ _ g _ _ _
3. something that protects you from rain is ....... _ _ _ r _ _ _ _
4. something that you boil water in is ....... _ _ t _ _ _
5. someone who steals things from people is ....... _ h _ _ _
6. something that can be difficult to do is ....... _ x _ _ c _ _ _
7. someone who works in court of justice is ....... _ _ d _ _
8. something that you can paint with is ....... _ _ u _ _
9. something that men use to shave with is ....... _ _ z _ _
10. someone who designs buildings is ....... _ _ _ h _ _ _ c _
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując właściwe rzeczowniki z przedimkami a, an lub the:

capital front door idea note price snake trumpet truth
1. Could you close .............................. , please? There’s a terrible draught.
2. ‘Have you got .............................. who the man is?’ ‘Not really.’
3. ‘What is .............................. of Mexico?’ ‘It’s Mexico City.’
4. Mark Bailey is a musician. He plays .............................. in a band.
5. ‘What is .............................. of this camera?’ ‘It’s two hundred pounds.’
6. Next time that you go home earlier, remember to leave .............................. on
my desk.
7. Suddenly, I heard hissing. There was .............................. in the grass.
8. Don’t lie any more. Tell us .............................. only.
III. Uzupełnij zdania przedimkami a, an lub the jeżeli są wymagane:

1. Living in .......... countryside can be fun if you are fond of .......... nature.
2. .......... life can be difficult when you are short of .......... money.
3. I certainly prefer .......... reading books to .......... watching .......... television.
4. ‘What .......... time is it?’ ‘It’s .......... quarter past .......... six.’
5. This article is about .......... astronaut whose name is hardly known.
6. It’s much more expensive to hire .......... private tutor than take .......... course
in .......... foreign language.
7. Let’s call .......... police. .......... situation is getting out of hand.
8. Freddie’s interested in .......... politics. He’s going to study it at ..........
university.
11
I. Wstaw przedimek the jeżeli jest wymagany:
1. Look! .................... sea is rather rough today.
2. .................... mathematics is .................... most important subject in our
school.
3. .................... young should always help .................... old .
4. I like that candle-stick. It’s made of .................... silver.
5. Ask Mr Pale if he needs any more .................... information about taxes.
6. Of course, you can ski in .................... Alps.
7. Do you think .................... women are more ambitious than ....................
men?
8. .................... peace has been broken in .................... Middle East again.
9. He would like to go to .................... university to study there.
10. Everybody knows that .................... Thames is .................... longest river in
.................... United Kingdom.
II. Wstaw przedimki a, an, the jeżeli są wymagane:

Before we started making .................... preparations for .................... trip
around .................... European continent we had our .................... car checked
by .................... mechanic. .................... man did .................... good job and
said that .................... engine was still in .................... perfect condition and
that he did not expect such .................... old vehicle to be so well maintained.
.................... first capital in our itinerary was to be .................... Rome in

.................... Italy. Doing .................... sightseeing in .................... place like
this certainly takes a lot of .................... time, so without .................... single
objection we decided to spend at .................... least .................... three days
there and then move to .................... Greek capital - Athens where we hoped to
visit all .................... places of .................... historical interest.
However, .................... small argument broke out about .................... ending

place of our journey. Whereas me and Lucy opted for .................... Paris,
.................... children preferred having more of .................... good time on
.................... coast in Spain and .................... grandmother wished to pay
.................... visit to her old friend living somewhere in .................... northern
part of .................... Germany.
12
Unit 5 Zaimki osobowe i dzierżawcze  175
I. Wstaw poprawny zaimek osobowy:
1. This is me. .................... am seven years old and not very tall yet.
2. This is Pamela. .................... is my sister.
3. This is Eric. .................... is my older brother.
4. This is Frank Wells. .................... is my father.
5. This is Angela Wells. .................... is my mother.
6. .................... are a very happy family.
II. Wstaw odpowiednią odmianę zaimka osobowego:
1. This is David. Everybody likes .................... .
2. We all know Alice Thompson. .................... is our best friend.
3. The Browns are very funny. .................... always smile and joke.
4. I want to know the truth. Tell .................... everything that you know.
5. We are going to the beach. Would you like to go with ....................?
6. These boys behave well. .................... father is a teacher.
7. Neil’s brother lives in a village. .................... is a farmer.
8. She is nice to be with. We spend a lot of time with .................... .
9. Muriel loves Bob. She wants to marry .................... .
10. I don’t need these books any longer. You may take .................... back to the
library.
III. Wstaw odpowiednią odmianę zaimka osobowego lub zaimki dzierżawcze:

1. Helen’s mother is a hair-dresser and .................... father is a tax collector.
2. ‘Do you like this film?’ ‘Not, really. I think .................... is boring.’
3. This isn’t the Simpsons’ house. .................. villa is much bigger.
4. ‘How long have you known the people?’ ‘I’ve already known .................... for
two years.’
5. ‘What do you do in the evening?’ ‘I usually take .................... dog for a walk.
6. Children don’t want to play with Paul. They don’t like .................... at all.
7. The building looks nice even though .................... walls are a bit scratched.
8. ‘Do you often argue with .................... parents?’ ‘Well, they do make
.................... nervous sometimes.’
9. We repaired his bicycle and he paid .................... in cash.
10. Simon is still a small child. So, .................... mother is always very worried
about .................... .
13
Unit 6 Zaimki dzierżawcze - mine, yours etc.  175
I. Przepisz zdania według przykładu:

Those are her shoes.  Those shoes are hers.
1. This is her passport. ................................................................

2. That was my glass of beer. ................................................................
3. Are those your exercise-books? ................................................................
4. Is that their piano? ................................................................
5. Those are our reports. ................................................................
6. Is this his cassette? ................................................................
7. These are not your toys. ................................................................
8. Is this my ticket? ................................................................
9. This is their restaurant. ................................................................
10. Are these her newspapers? ................................................................
II. Wstaw zaimki dzierżawcze my, your etc. lub mine, yours etc.:
1. Jack must clean his room, but .................... sister needn’t do the same with
.................... .
2. The Maxwells didn’t sell .................... car, but Alex sold .................... last
week.
3. Ann had problems with .................... exams. I passed .................... very well.
4. ‘Is this Mr Watson’s wallet?’ ‘Yes, it’s .................... , for sure.’
5. We own these apartments. They are .................... .
6. Jim and Sally don’t like .................... biology teacher, but I quite like
.................... .
7. You say you will spend all .................... money. They say they are going to
save .................... .
8. This is an old cigar box. .................... lid is made of bronze.
9. I have found .................... luggage, but Susan cannot find .................... .
10. You will sleep in your tent and we’ll spend the night in .................... .
III. Wpisz poprawną formę zaimka dzierżawczego:

1. I forgot .................... (moją) credit card. Can I borrow .................... (waszą)?
2. Adrian told .................... (swoim) friends to meet him at five o’clock.
3. .................... (Moje) songs are much better than .................... (jego).
4. This is a new model of a bicycle. .................... (Jego) construction is very light.
5. In .................... (ich) garden, there are more apple trees than in ....................
(naszym).
14
Unit 7 Zaimki zwrotne / each other  175
I. Wpisz odpowiedni zaimek zwrotny:
1. Jules is still a small child. He cannot dress .............................. well yet.
2. Look at .............................. in the mirror! Your face is dirty all over.
3. Is anything wrong with Sylvia? Does she often speak to ..............................?
4. I really enjoyed .............................. at the anniversary reception yesterday.
5. ‘Did anyone help you with painting the walls?’ ‘No, we did everything by
.............................. .’
6. Tell Alex to make .............................. comfortable in the sitting-room. I’ll come
down in a minute.
7. Our children are old enough to take care of .............................. .
8. I cannot help .............................. . I think I’ve fallen in love with the girl.
9. ‘How do you amuse .............................. in the hotel, sir?’ ‘Well, I’ve found
a few of its attractions quite appealing.’
10. Don’t blame the dog. It cannot explain for .............................. .
II. Wstaw zaimki zwrotne lub each other:

1. ‘Do you know the man’s name?’ ‘No, he hasn’t introduced ............................ .’
2. Jacque and Sophia always argue with .............................. .
3. ‘Why is Mary crying?’ ‘She’s just hurt .............................. with a pin.’
4. There are sweets on the plate. Help .............................. to them, please.
5. As far as I know, Tom and Jerry do not like .............................. at all.
6. ‘Have you bought this book for ..............................?’ ‘No, I’ve bought it for
someone else.’
7. It was all my fault. I can only blame .............................. for the misfortune.
8. My boss and his attorney do not understand .............................. well. One of
them will have to quit, I guess.
9. ‘Is your sister still feeling low?’ ‘Unfortunately, yes. She hasn’t pulled
.............................. together yet.’
10. How will they recognise .............................. if they don’t know their names?
11. You can always understand him well. He can express ..............................
clearly.
12. You can do nothing when they both start fighting with .............................. .
13. Don’t do it for anybody else. Just do it for .............................. .
14. Both Paul and Chris are very conceited. They consider .............................. to
be the best players.
15. You can see Laura and Mickey love .............................. a lot by the way they
look at .............................. .
15
Unit 8 Zaimki zwrotne i dzierżawcze  175
I. Popraw niewłaściwe zaimki w zdaniach:
1. George can dress his faster than the other children in his group.
2. The teacher was angry because nobody was listening to herself.
3. ‘Who are they talking about?’ ‘About ourselves, I suppose.’
4. She’s too selfish to think about other people. She only thinks about hers.
5. ‘Are you giving this ring to Ann?’ ‘Yes, I’m giving its as a birthday present.’
6. ‘Did anyone help you with the preparations?’ ‘No, we did everything by us.’
7. Nobody likes this boy. We’re all afraid of his.
8. They are too proud of theirs. They are really pushy.
9. I’d rather you didn’t wash you that late at night.
10. I don’t know my friends’ opinions. I can only account for me.
II. Wybierz właściwą odpowiedź:

1. This dress is too long for myself / my / me . I must have it / its / itself
shortened.
2. Your / you / yours alarm-clock is out of order. You may use us / ourselves /
ours.
3. He says him / his / he chances are low, but I believe in me / myself / my .
4. Look! It’s Peter Coxton his / him / himself . He hasn’t come to our / ours /
ourselves pub for ages.
5. After you finish eating yours / yourself / your sandwiches, I will give you
myself / mine / me .
6. Don’t pay attention to his / he / himself behaviour. He’s just making a fool of
himself / his / him .
7. I’m living on myself / mine / my own. Nobody is living with my / me / mine .
8. They couldn’t offer us / ours / ourselves any help. They had no money on
their / them / themselves .
9. He doesn’t mind me / my / myself coming late as long as I do mine / myself /
my duties right.
10. Change you / your / yours behaviour or else the teachers will keep punishing
yourself / yours / you .
III. Uzupełnij zdanie właściwym zaimkiem dzierżawczym, zwrotnym lub osobowym:

1. I’ve bought this CD for .................... . I’m not giving .................... to anyone.
2. You should care for .................... reputation. Don’t let other people disrespect
.................... .
3. Let .................... speak. She wants to say something important.
4. I’ll put your papers on the rack. Don’t forget .................... when you get off.
5. It was an exhausting interview. I had to describe .................... in great detail.
16
Unit 9 Zaimki pytające ‘Wh - ?’  177
I. Utwórz pytania do podanych zdań:
1. Mr Palmer lives in Leeds. Where .................................................?

2. George went on holiday to Acapulco. Who ....................................................?
3. I have bought a new pair of glasses. What ...................................................?
4. We were cleaning the attic yesterday. When ..................................................?
5. Only Michael can speak Italian. Which of you .....................................?
6. They will arrive by plane. How ....................................................?
7. She is looking at the picture. What ...................................................?
8. We believe Brian. Whom .................................................?
9. The train was late. Why ....................................................?
10. The message made him very angry. What ...................................................?
II. Ułóż pytanie dotyczące wytłuszczonej części zdania:
1. Robert preferred to stay at home. .............................................................?

2. I met Sally in a department store. .............................................................?
3. She goes to the disco twice a week. .............................................................?
4. We were having dinner at two p.m. .............................................................?
5. Mike has damaged his tendon. .............................................................?
6. My son is returning in three days. .............................................................?
7. Brian’s project was the best. .............................................................?
8. Mrs Taylor is a hairdresser. .............................................................?
9. Jack’s brother is seven years old. .............................................................?
10. I will ask you ten questions. .............................................................?
III. Wstaw odpowiednie zaimki pytające:
1. ‘..................... does Betty keep her money?’ ‘In her purse.’

2. ‘..................... have you been friends?’ ‘For ten years.’
3. ‘..................... didn’t she buy any food?’ ‘Because, the shops were closed.’
4. ‘..................... are you going to visit your relatives in Venice?’ ‘Next month.’
5. ‘..................... do you like my new shoes?’ ‘They are nice, indeed.’
6. ‘..................... has she had that car?’ ‘Since last year.’
7. ‘..................... coffee do they drink in the morning?’ ‘They really drink a lot.’
8. ‘..................... of them likes jogging?’ ‘Peter does.’
9. ‘..................... far is the nearest bus stop?’ ‘About one mile from here.’
10. ‘..................... people were infected with flu?’ ‘About one hundred.’
17
Unit 10 Konstrukcje pytające  177
I. Napisz poprawne pytania do podanych odpowiedzi:
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: My name is Jeffrey MacAlister, sir.
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: I come from Manchester.
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: I live with my wife and my four children.
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: Yesterday evening? I was at a swimming pool.
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: I was with my best friend Thomas Dalton.
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: After that? We both went for a meal.
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: We took the same. Fried chicken and mushrooms.
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: No, not very often. We only meet each other once a week.
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: His telephone number? It’s 607846123
POLICEMAN: ....................................................................................................?
SUSPECT: Tomorrow, sir. I will certainly see Thomas tomorrow.
II. Napisz pytania dotyczące wytłuszczonych części zdań w tekście:

John Johnson is a traffic warden. He works in Arlington Police Department. He
has worked in this profession for about twenty years. John likes his job very much and he
says he would never change it. All his colleagues say that John is a
very decent man and a good policeman. Last month, he was given an honourable award
for his perfect duty. The Chief Constable thanked him warmly and even promised him a
promotion. John’s younger son, Mark, is also going to work for the Department when he
grows up.
1. .................................................? 6. .................................................?
2. .................................................? 7. .................................................?
3. .................................................? 8. .................................................?
4. .................................................? 9. .................................................?
5. .................................................? 10. .…............................................?
18
Unit 11 Many - much - a lot of  179
I. Wstaw many, much lub a lot of:
1. Are there .............................. eggs in the fridge?
2. Adam can tell .............................. funny jokes.
3. She hasn’t got .............................. friends in the city.
4. Did you catch .............................. fish last time?
5. Susan has read .............................. books in German.
6. Can you see .............................. faults in this design?
7. I don’t usually put ............................... sugar in my tea.
8. We spend .............................. time working in the garden.
9. There aren’t .............................. bottles of milk in the crate.
10. Dan saw .............................. wild animals in the zoo.
II. Wstaw many lub much:

1. A: How .............................. times have you seen the film?
B: I’ve seen it twice.
2. A: How .............................. money do you spend daily?
B: About fifteen pounds.
3. A: How .............................. time will we have if we leave now?
B: Twenty minutes, I guess.
4. A: How .............................. cubes of ice would you like in your drink?
B: Only one, please.
5. A: How .............................. travellers visit this place every year?
B: More than five thousand.
III. Wstaw many, much lub a lot (of):

1. She is good at molecular biology. She knows .............................. about it.
2. Were there .............................. people at the box office when you arrived?
3. Bob does not think .............................. of our plan. He says his one is better.
4. Before I moved out, I had tried to get a job in .............................. firms.
5. We haven’t yet done .............................. of what we’ve planned to do.
6. He will probably win the competition. He has scored ............................ points.
7. Did you get .............................. information from this encyclopaedia?
8. There’s .............................. hope that the letters will be delivered in time.
9. A great .............................. crops have gone to waste because of torrential
rains.
10. .............................. as I respect his wisdom, I disagree with him this time.
11. Linda has to type .............................. notes each day.
12. He hasn’t got .............................. to say. He isn’t the boss here.
19
Unit 12 A little - little - a few - few  179
I. Wstaw a little / little lub a few / few:
1. A: Are there many people in front of the bank?
B: No, there are .............................. of them.
2. A: I think he eats a lot of food.
B: You are wrong. He eats too .............................. .
3. A: Have you got any stamps?
B: Yes, I have got .............................. in my drawer.
4. A: Is there much ink in the bottle?
B: No, there is very .............................. of it.
5. A: Would you like some porridge?
B: Yes, I think I’ll take .............................. .
6. A: Shall we buy any flowers for Donna?
B: Yes, let’s buy .............................. .
7. A: Do you keep any exotic birds in the zoo?
B: Of course, we have got quite .............................. of them.
8. A: How much time did you sleep last night?
B: Not much. Very .............................. , really.
9. A: Has Iris prepared enough sandwiches for everybody?
B: Oh no. She’s made too .............................. , in fact.
10. A: I’ve heard you know a lot of important people.
B: Well, it’s true. I know quite .............................. of them.
II. Wybierz poprawną odpowiedź:

1. There is .................... a few / many / a lot of sand in the pit.
2. I’m not going to spend .................... few / much / many money in the shops.
3. David isn’t a good pupil. He doesn’t learn .................... much / a little / few.
4. We have got too .................... little / a few / few hours to finish the difficult
task in time.
5. She doesn’t know .................... a few / much / many of Spanish.
6. We still need .................... a little / much / a few volunteers to go with us.
7. You won’t get .................... many / a little / few days off, for sure.
8. The meeting was cancelled because very .................... little / a few / few
members came to take part in it.
9. In the end, he told us .................... many / a little / a few about himself.
10. Take more of the syrup. It won’t help if you take too .................... few / a little
/ little of it.
20
Unit 13 Any - some - no - none  180
I. Wstaw a, an lub some:
.............. jug .............. coffee .............. soup .............. cream

.............. door .............. tomato .............. towel .............. glove
.............. water .............. furniture .............. honey .............. bicycle
.............. ant .............. orange .............. waiter .............. apron
.............. food .............. road .............. sugar .............. flour
II. Wstaw any lub some:

1. Are there .............................. clean shirts in the wardrobe?
2. We ate .............................. bread and cheese for breakfast.
3. Did they buy .............................. gifts for their guests?
4. Diane says she hasn’t seen .............................. tickets on your desk.
5. Is he going to spend .............................. time in the mountains this summer?
6. We hadn’t got .............................. good ideas.
7. Jacque must know .............................. people from the office. He works there.
8. Did .............................. of you lose .............................. money?
9. Our uncle will certainly remember .............................. good jokes.
10. Give me .............................. good advice, please.
III. Zaprzecz podane zdania za pomocą no:
1. I haven’t visited any places here. .............................................................

2. There is some sweet juice in the jug. .............................................................
3. She hasn’t got any matches. .............................................................
4. Tom didn’t bring any gifts for us. .............................................................
5. She doesn’t keep any animals. .............................................................
IV. Wstaw any, some, no lub none:

1. We couldn’t make ..................... cake because we had .................... flour.
2. .................... time ago he said he would become a sailor.
3. .................... of us knew how to repair the damaged tyre, so I had to ask
another driver for help.
4. ‘Has anyone taken .................... photographs?’ ‘Nobody has, I’m afraid.’
5. .................... answer was good. That’s why nobody won the main prize.
6. This soup tastes good but I suggest adding .................... more salt.
7. Do you want me to believe in these crazy stories? .................... of them
sounds true to me.
8. She won’t help you. She’s got .................... experience in interviewing people.
21
Unit 14 Another - the other - other(s)  181
I. Wstaw another, other lub others:
1. This restaurant is not very attractive. Let’s go to .............................. one.
2. Two of us wanted to play football. The .............................. boys preferred
basketball.
3. Look! The shop’s closed. We’ll have to come on .............................. day.
4. Our class had a test last week. Peter got a better mark than the
.............................. .
5. Two blankets were torn. Three .............................. were dirty.
6. Could I get .............................. piece of the cake? It is delicious.
7. Take .............................. knife. This one is blunt.
8. I saw two burglars. One was much taller than the .............................. .
9. Why not buy these shoes? They’re stronger than any ..............................
ones.
10. Look! The policeman is waving at you. I hope you’re not going to pay
.............................. fine today.
II. Wybierz poprawną formę:

1. ‘Shall I bring you .................... other / another / others tea, sir?’ ‘Yes,
please.’
2. His strange suit made him look much different from .................... another /
the other / others men in the group.
3. Because the local club was too small we had to look for .................... the
other / others / another place for our wedding party.
4. It seems Peter and Jack don’t like one .................... other / another / the
other .
5. I have failed my exam this time. I’m going to take .................... other /
others / another chance next term.
6. I can see a few girls. One of them is a blonde and .................... another / the
others / other are black-haired.
7. She says she’s gone through the first report and is ready to read ....................
other / others / another one.
8. Some .................... other / another / others people told me to change my
mind.
9. Can you think about .................... other / another / the other answer to this
question?
10. What .................... another / others / other steps would you expect me to
take in this case?
22
Unit 15 Both - either - neither  182
I. Wstaw both, either lub neither:
1. .................... my father nor my mother can speak Spanish.
2. Steven is not .................... interested in the job or willing to take it.
3. There are two such handbags in stock. .................... of them are yellow.
4. ‘Which of the two jackets suits you the best?’ ‘................... . They’re both too
wide.
5. Why not visit .................... the Royal Palace and the Kensington Gardens if
we have so much time for ourselves?
6. ‘What’s his weight?’ ‘He’s .................... heavy nor light. Just average.’
7. .................... of these candidates is good enough at typing. We’d better take on
someone else.
8. My wife doesn’t like opera too much and I’m not very fond of it, .................... .
9. Don’t expect much from the Taylors. They’re .................... mean and stingy.
10. You are wrong. Betty isn’t .................... an actress or a singer.
II. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję neither ... nor ... :

1. She doesn’t sing or play the guitar. She neither sings nor plays the guitar.
2. It’s not cold or hot outside. ............................................................
3. There is not milk or juice in the fridge. ............................................................
4. I can’t ski and I can’t skate. ............................................................
5. We don’t live in a villa or a flat. ............................................................
6. He doesn’t work in a shop or a bank. ............................................................
7. You aren’t happy or sad now. ............................................................
8. I do not eat ice-cream or sweets. ............................................................
9. Tom doesn’t love Cathy or Muriel. ............................................................
10. Uncle Ted isn’t fat or thin. ............................................................
III. Ułóż zdania z konstrukcją both ... and ... :

1. Alice / is / rich / pretty Alice is both rich and pretty.
2. My son / works / studies ............................................................
3. The climate / is / hot / humid ............................................................
4. She / looked / nervous / worried ............................................................
5. John / speaks / English / French ............................................................
6. Her meals / were / tasty / nourishing ............................................................
7. We / like / fruit / vegetables ............................................................
8. Ike / studies / economics / sociology ............................................................
9 The advice / sounds / sensible / useful ............................................................
10. Harry / breeds / horses / sheep ............................................................
23
Unit 16 So do I / Neither do I  183
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując so lub neither oraz właściwy operator:
are / is / does / did / have / has
1. David wants to become a lawyer, .................... .................... his brother.
2. I took my dog for a walk, .................... .................... my neighbour.
3. Tom isn’t able to speak French, .................... .................... Judy.
4. We have forgotten about the homework, .................... .................... they.
5. The Parkers aren’t Irish, .................... ..................... the Lemmons.
6. My father smokes too much, .................... .................... my mother.
7. Your house has ten windows, .................... .................... our house.
8. Jeff hasn’t watered the flowers, .................... .................... Linda.
9. We aren’t going to Australia next summer, .................... .................... she.
10. Our grandfather died during the war, .................... .................... theirs.
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując wyrażenia z so lub neither:

1. I didn’t recognise you at the airport, .................... .................... my mother.
2. They will take part in the anniversary, .................... .................... we.
3. My wife prefers skiing to skating, .................... .................... I.
4. You should apologise to Mrs Connors, .................... ................... your friends.
5. The thieves had failed to escape, .................... .................... the dealers.
6. Mr and Mrs Jones were waiting patiently, ................... .................... their kids.
7. I asked for soda water, .................... .................... the other man.
8. The film wasn’t interesting, .................... .................... it well-directed.
9. Eric might come late, .................... .................... his companions.
10. I hadn’t been offered a rise before, .................... .................... my work-mates.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując wyrażenia z so oraz neither lub but:

0. Steven has visited Japan twice, so have I / but I haven’t.
1. Jules isn’t going to climb Mount Everest, .................................................. .
2. Rick bought a motorcycle last year, .................................................. .
3. Alice is still a primary school student, .................................................. .
4. Ronald’s family lives in Canada, .................................................. .
5. Timothy loves classical music, .................................................. .
6. David cannot stand on his head, .................................................. .
7. Lisa’s mother doesn’t work in a bank, .................................................. .
8. Brian is playing cards at the moment, .................................................. .
9. Sally was born in 1975, .................................................. .
10. Robert hasn’t seen a ghost yet, .................................................. .
24
Unit 17 All - every - each  184
I. Wstaw all, every lub each:
1. He is not too clever. .................... he can do is talk a lot.
2. There are two of us. .................... of us is ready to offer help.
3. .................... my schoolfriends come from the same city as I do.
4. The boys have a common hobby. .................... of them loves animals.
5. Mark goes to his doctor .................... two months.
6. Both Julia and Mary scored the maximum points, so we decided to reward
.................... .
7. Tell me .................... that you know about Miriam.
8. I’ve seen the play three times. .................... time my impressions were great.
9. Not .................... exported goods must be declared for clearance.
10. It was .................... we could do to support you.
11. That was terrible. .................... wheel of my car was punctured.
12. ‘How do they like the cruise?’ ‘ .................... of them seems to be enjoying it.’

1. Each / All Friday night, we go to bed earlier.
2. I’ll take both of these skirts. They each / every suit me very well.
3. All / Every of these tapes were flawed.
4. The reports are written each / every six weeks.
5. Each / Every now and then, they come to ask about my health.
6. All / Every of the families have to be moved out.
7. He’s got seven dogs. Every / Each of them has won medals at exhibitions.
8. All / Each the ordered goods must be delivered by Thursday.
9. Mother has made two cakes. I’ve tried each / every by now.
10. They are every / each as forgetful as their father is.
III. Przepisz zdania zaczynając je od podanych słów:

1. We all played well. Each ....................................................
2. Every student made a complaint. All ........................................................
3. All the codes are often changed. Each ....................................................
4. Each of us understands the lecture. We .......................................................
5. All people must learn to read. Every ...................................................
6. My every ring is made of gold. All ........................................................
7. All of them are paid a lot. Each ....................................................
8. Every wall was painted white. All ........................................................
9. All projects must be printed clean. Every ...................................................
10. Each of her decisions is right. All ........................................................
25
Unit 18 Zaimki względne who - which - that  185
I. Wstaw zaimki względne who, whom lub which:
1. The dog .................... bit me was quite big.
2. The city .................... we’re going to visit is called Prague.
3. She thanked the boy .................... helped her carry the bags.
4. Someone has eaten the blackberries .................... I picked in the woods.
5. Is there anyone .................... can show me the way?
6. What’s the real name of the boy .................... you call Huck?
7. The apples .................... you have bought are rather sour.
8. The people .................... came last were from our group.
9. The documents .................... we were shown were secret.
10. I couldn’t remember the name of the man .................... I met in Dallas.
11. Where did you buy the calculator .................... you had at school yesterday?
12. I’m not sure if there is someone .................... loves her as much as I do.
II. Połącz zdania za pomocą zaimków względnych who lub which:

1. Some people got lost in the mountains. They were from Sweden.
The people ......................................................................................................
2. She was watching a film. The film was rather boring.
The film ...........................................................................................................
3. A woman was taken to hospital. She is our neighbour.
The woman .....................................................................................................
4. We saw a bridge. The bridge is the biggest in the world.
The bridge ......................................................................................................
5. We will hire a room. It will be very spacious.
The room ........................................................................................................
III. Ułóż poprawne definicje:

a pillow makes monuments
a tailor you can shoot with
a kettle someone makes clothes
a mushroom who you carry your luggage in
a sculptor is can be poisonous
a brush that works in hospital
a rucksack something you use for cutting grass
a rifle you boil water in
a surgeon you paint with
a lawn-mower you put your head on
26
Unit 19 Who - whose - of which - whom  185
- where
I. Przepisz podane zdania jak w przykładzie:
The room whose windows look west is mine.
The room the windows of which look west is mine.
1. The car whose bumper is broken is not new.
.................................................................................................................
2. I like the mirror whose frame is ornamented.
.................................................................................................................
3. This is the city whose streets are very narrow.
.................................................................................................................
4. The skirt whose colour is pink looks really nice.
.................................................................................................................
5. He wore glasses whose lenses were broken.
.................................................................................................................
II. Wstaw whose, whom lub where:

1. This is the place .............................. my grandfather was born.
2. What’s the name of the girl .............................. you met at the party?
3. Do you know the man .............................. nickname is Shorty?
4. Somehow they have found the house .............................. we live.
5. The policeman is asking about the man .............................. car was stolen.
6. Is she the woman to .............................. you have told the whole truth?
7. Phone the friend .............................. radio you have borrowed.
8. Brazil is .............................. we are going to spend our next holidays.
9. Celine is the girl ............................... I loved a long time ago.
10. Where is the patient .............................. family is waiting in the hall?
III. Wstaw who, whom, whose lub which:

It happened a long time ago. Jim Bradbury .................... I had met at my studies in Oxford
was looking for someone .................... could help him in the business .................... he was
going to start. Of course, he did not know the place .................... I lived in, but he
remembered me as a person .................... ideas were always successful. The man
.................... gave Jim my phone number was Terry Block .................... worked as a
university clerk. Terry stored all the personal data of the best students .................... might
once become useful to the University. The room .................... he kept the files in was huge,
so it took him quite a while to find the information .................... Jim Bradbury had asked for.
Jim, .................... I did not recognise at first, really took me by surprise with his unexpected
visit in my office in Dover.
27
Unit 20 Who - which - that - whose - where  185
I. Połącz zdania przy pomocy zaimków względnych who lub which:
1. This is the girl. I smiled at her. This is the girl who I smiled at.
2. This is the child. You will look after him. ........................................................
3. There is the house. We live in it. ........................................................
4. I know the boy. She is talking to him. ........................................................
5. This is the book. I thought about it. ........................................................
6. This is the design. We have worked on it. ........................................................
7. He is the professor. We are afraid of him. ........................................................
8. There is the kid. You can play with him. ........................................................
9. This is the case. You must cope with it. ........................................................
10. She is the actress. I know a lot about her. ........................................................
II. Połącz zdania przy pomocy zaimków względnych jak w przykładzie:

Joan Butler always helps me. Joan is my neighbour.
Joan Butler, who is my neighbour, always helps me.
1. Ben Nevis is the highest mountain in Britain. I climbed Ben Nevis last spring.
........................................................................................................................
2. The new model of Ferrari will cost a lot. It will be produced next year.
........................................................................................................................
3. Mr Saxon is a taxi driver. His son teaches us mathematics.
........................................................................................................................
4. The Hilton Hotel is rather expensive. We have stayed there a few times.
........................................................................................................................
5. George has been my friend since 1990. I met him at a computer course.
........................................................................................................................
6. Mary is planning to move to Boston. I know Mary’s intentions.
........................................................................................................................
III. Wstaw przecinki w zdaniach, w których są one niezbędne:

1. The beer that we drank in the pub was quite cold.
2. The people who organised the demonstration were from our department.
3. Christopher Columbus who discovered America was a Spanish sailor.
4. The geraniums that you have planted in the garden are blooming.
5. Professor Jenkins whom I remember from a symposium in Stockholm has been
awarded the Nobel Prize.
6. My parents live in Newcastle which is not far from here.
7. Rome where we went on summer holidays appealed to us a lot.
8. Michael Jackson whose songs everybody knows is a famous pop-star.
28
Unit 21 Zaimki złożone - someone  180
I. Uzupełnij zdania pytające i przeczące:
1. The children are playing with someone in the backyard.
Are the children .........................................................................................?
The children aren’t .....................................................................................
2. Mandy wants to tell us something important.
.................................................... anything ................................................?
.................................................... anything .................................................
3. They have hidden their money somewhere.
Have they ...................................................................................................?
...................................................................................................... nowhere.
4. Bobby should ask somebody for help.
................................................... anybody ................................................?
................................................... nobody ...................................................
II. Uzupełnij pytania poprawnym zaimkiem:

1. ‘Do you know .................... here?’ ‘Yes, I know Alex Dickinson.’
2. ‘Is she going to eat ....................?’ ‘Yes, she’s going to take a roastbeef.’
3. ‘Does he work ....................?’ ‘Yes, he works in a bank.’
4. ‘Has .................... arrived yet?’ ‘Yes, Peter arrived an hour ago.’
5. ‘Will you stay ....................?’ ‘Yes, we will stay in Leicester.’
III. Uzupełnij dialogi poprawnymi zaimkami:

any / some / no + one / thing / where
1. A: Mrs Thompson, did you speak to .............................. about our secret
plans?
B: Of course not. .............................. knows about them, for sure.
2. A: Did .............................. interesting happen last night?
B: Don’t ask me. I know .............................. . I was asleep all night.
3. A: Are you going .............................. , Ann?
B: Yes, ............................ has asked me to meet them in the club at 7 o’clock.
4. A: Have you got .............................. interesting to tell me?
B: Not this time, Mr Duffy. I didn’t go .............................. and didn’t speak to
.............................. .
5. A: Is .............................. bringing any food to your party?
B: I’m sure Diane will bring .............................. to eat.
6. A: Have you bought .............................. for yourself in the store?
B: No. And I have bought .............................. for you, either.
29
Unit 22 Who - which - what  185
I. Wstaw zaimki what lub which:
1. .............................. time do you usually begin your classes?
2. .............................. of them is the tallest, Danny or Andy?
3. I asked him twice and he didn’t know .............................. to say.
4. We have got three souvenirs. .............................. one do you like the best?
5. .................... would you say if I came a little late?
6. She said something to us but nobody heard .............................. it was.
7. .................... of your four cars cost the most?
8. They have brought flowers, .............................. I appreciate very much.
9. It’s hard to say .............................. is .............................. . They are twins.
10. ............................... kind of food is his favourite?
11. ............................... planet is the smallest in our solar system?
12. The coat ............................... is hanging on the stand belongs to Muriel.
13. I’ve no idea .............................. it takes to become so popular.
14. There is orange juice and lemonade on the menu. .............................. do you
prefer, madam?
15. ‘.............................. do you think about Nick?’ ‘I like him, really.’
II. Połącz zdania przy pomocy zaimka which:

1. The people made a bonfire in the woods. This was very stupid.
.................................................................................................................
2. She has promised to stay with the children. This is very kind of her.
.................................................................................................................
3. The train came late again. This made me angry.
.................................................................................................................
4. He used to eat a lot of sweets. This damaged his teeth.
.................................................................................................................
5. The secretary took bribes. This spoiled her reputation.
.................................................................................................................
III. Wstaw zaimki who, which lub what:

1. A: .................... do you think is the most talented writer?
B: I appreciate John Steinbeck the most.
2. A: Have you undertaken any steps?
B: Not yet. We can’t decide .................... of the four options to choose.
3. A: .................... was the reason for your brother’s resignation?
B: He was tired, I guess.
30
Unit 23 There - It  188
I. Uzupełnij zdania korzystając z podanej informacji:
1. It is a sandy land. There .................................................. on the land.
2. It is a crowded beach. There ................................................ on the beach.
3. It is cloudy today. There .................................................. today.
4. It is a fatty salad. There .................................................. in the salad.
5. It is a smoky room. There .................................................. in the room.
6. There is a lot of salt in the soup. It ............................................... soup.

7. There is a lot of sun today. It ............................................... today.
8. There is a lot of dirt in the room. It ............................................... room.
9. There is a lot of grass on the field. It .......................................……. field.
10. There was frost in the morning. It ..................................………... morning.
II. Wstaw there lub it:

1. I find .................... very pleasant to read books at night.
2. Is .................... any free seat in this compartment?
3. .................... was three o’clock when the telephone rang.
4. ‘What was the weather like?’ ‘Terrible. .................... was a lot of rain.’
5. .................... is a funny thing that they should bow to their boss.
6. Hurry up! .................... is no more time left.
7. .................... is a new performance at the National Theatre this evening.
8. We came late. .................... had been traffic jams all along the way.
9. .................... was Michael who gave me a lift to the station.
10. .................... is strange that nobody has noticed the mistake before, isn’t
....................?
III. Wstaw there / it + be:

1. We won’t stay here. .............................. too noisy in this place.
2. .............................. much to be done yet?
3. .............................. a good idea to have a picnic tomorrow.
4. .............................. pretty nice here and .............................. a pleasant
breeze that I can feel.
5. I know .............................. obvious but I will repeat my warning anyway.
6. ‘How .............................. at the concert last night?’ ‘Quite nice, but
.............................. too big a crowd in the concert hall, I think.’
7. As .............................. nobody else willing to speak, we can end this meeting.
8. Stop sniggering all the time. .............................. not very nice of you.
31
Unit 24 Liczba mnoga rzeczowników (1)  189
I. Podaj formę liczby mnogiej następujących rzeczowników:
bottle .......... class .......... box .......... lady .......... day ..........
train .......... bus .......... brush .......... baby .......... play ..........
tin .......... mass .......... potato .......... cherry .......... key ..........
card .......... glass .......... branch .......... fly .......... abbey ..........
rose .......... pass .......... fox .......... berry .......... ray ..........
club .......... kiss .......... torch .......... body .......... guy ..........
chair .......... boss .......... marsh .......... pansy .......... prey ..........
mask .......... guess .......... tax .......... diary .......... turkey ..........
cigar .......... miss .......... tomato .......... enemy .......... alloy ..........
plug .......... dress .......... bush .......... colony .......... bay ..........
II. Uzupełnij zdania podanymi rzeczownikami w liczbie mnogiej:

bench dream ferry hero loss
match storm story toy wish
1. Don’t believe in any of Jack’s .................... . He is a notorious liar.

2. We have won all the .................... . We are the champions.
3. In this shipyard, we build .................... .
4. The baby cried because someone had taken her .................... away.
5. I’m afraid the strike will go on until the workers’ .................... are fulfilled.
6. Because the company had made too many ................... it was closed for good.
7. The climate is unpleasant. .................... and heavy winds are common here.
8. All the .................... in the classroom are already occupied by the pupils.
9. I don’t ever have bad .................... . I always sleep well.
10. The end of the film was rather sad. All the .................... were killed in battle.
III. Wybierz poprawną formę:

1. I’d like a light meal. Something with fish / fishes would do perfectly.
2. How many time / times have you visited the old town square?
3. Everybody knows that Mr Birch owns huge rich / riches .
4. Have you obtained any information / informations from the dealer?
5. The room looks stylish with its arches and old-fashioned furniture / furnitures.
6. Brian is the best at mathematic / mathematics in our class.
7. Will you do my hair / hairs, please?
8. I’m a bit worried about my luggage / luggages.
9. She needed advice / advices but there was nobody she could talk to.
10. The verdict says you have to pay damage / damages for destroying the tree.
32
Unit 25 Liczba mnoga rzeczowników (2)  189
I. Podaj formę liczby mnogiej następujących rzeczowników:
knife .............. shelf .............. foot .............. child ..............
crisis .............. mother-in-law .............. wife .............. man ..............
woman .............. louse .............. sheep .............. wolf ..............
tooth .............. forget-me-not .............. goose .............. deer ..............
mouse .............. phenomenon .............. aircraft .............. life ..............
II. Uzupełnij zdania podanymi rzeczownikami w liczbie mnogiej:
child goose handkerchief housewife leaf

loaf mouse sister-in-law spacecraft thief
1. The .................... who stole the pictures from the National Gallery were
captured by the police yesterday.
2. When autumn comes the .................... on the trees turn yellow and brown.
3. Mary is the favourite teacher. All the .................... like her very much.
4. How about buying a cat to catch the .................... in the cellar?
5. The baker tripped and a few .................... of bread fell down on the floor.
6. Judy and Cathy are my brothers’ wives. They are my .................... .
7. By the year 2010, more than ten .................... will have been launched to
explore Mars.
8. Neither Alice nor Lena go to work. They both are .................... .
9. They only keep poultry on the farm. Namely, hens, turkeys and .................... .
10. My nose is still bleeding. I need more .................... .
III. Uzupełnij zdania podanymi rzeczownikami:
goods gymnastics measles news outskirts

politics pyjamas savings scales spectacles
1. To buy the car I had to withdraw all my .................... from the bank.
2. ‘Have you got any .................... for me?’ ‘Yes, your mother-in-law is coming
next week.’
3. Let’s put the fish on the .................... and find out how much it weighs.
4. Happily, the police have recovered all the .................... stolen from our store.
5. Nick doesn’t watch any news on TV. He isn’t interested in .................... .
6. He got up a few minutes ago. He is still wearing his .................... .
7. She can’t see well. She has to wear her .................... all the time.
8. We don’t live in the city centre. We have a house on the .................... .
9. .................... is not a fatal disease when it’s treated properly.
10. She is the world champion. She has won three gold medals in .................... .
33
Unit 26 Rzeczowniki  189
I. Podaj formę rodzaju żeńskiego następujących rzeczowników:
actor .................... nephew .................... bridegroom ....................
hero .................... prince .................... host ....................
man .................... heir .................... ram ....................
uncle .................... manager .................... widower ....................
tiger .................... lion .................... bachelor ....................
II. Uzupełnij frazy rzeczownikami określającymi ilość (w niektórych przykładach

możliwych jest więcej niż jedna odpowiedź):
a bag a bar a bottle a bowl a cake

a can a carton a glass a jar a joint
a jug a loaf a piece a plate a sheet
1. ................ of Coke 6. ................ of soup 11. ................ of water

2. ................ of jam 7. ................ of milk 12. ................ of tea
3. ................ of chocolate 8. ................ of wine 13. ................ of beer
4. ................ of meat 9. ................ of sugar 14. ................ of soap
5. ................ of bread 10. ................ of cheese 15. ................ of paper
III. Połącz w pary podane rzeczowniki i wstaw je w poprawne zdania:
cube bread
grain cloth
roll of dust
slice ice
speck truth
1. ‘Are you very hungry Tom?’ ‘No, I’ve just eaten a ........................................ .’
2. There’s not a ........................................ in what he says. He is a liar.
3. I’d like my drink cold. Could you put a ........................................ in it, please?
4. My eye is aching. Perhaps, there’s a ........................................ inside.
5. The dressmaker says one ........................................ is enough to make twenty
skirts like this one.
34
Unit 27 Przymiotniki  192
I. Uzupełnij zdania poprawnymi przymiotnikami:
brave dirty dull hostile pure

rapid rude smart sour tame
1. Bob never washes his hands. They are always .............................. .

2. I think I am .............................. . I am not afraid of anything.
3. The two boys are really .............................. . They pull the girls by their hair.
4. I’m not going to eat this orange. It is too .............................. .
5. Professor Hick’s lecture was so .............................. that I nearly fell asleep.
6. ‘Jack’s a .............................. boy, isn’t he?’ ‘Sure, he’s a very good student.’
7. ‘Why is Dorothy so .............................. towards me?’ ‘She doesn’t like you.’
8. You can safely drink the stream water. It’s certainly very .............................. .
9. This monkey will not harm you, for sure. It’s really .............................. .
10. Their response was very .............................. . We didn’t have to wait long.
II. Uzupełnij zdania podanymi w nawiasach przymiotnikami w poprawnej kolejności:
1. This film is American. (old, interesting) This is .......................................

2. This plate is broken. (plastic, small) This is .......................................
3. This chair is elegant. (rocking, wooden) This is .......................................
4. This house is ruined. (brick, old-fashioned) This is .......................................
5. This wallet is brown. (leather, tiny) This is .......................................
6. This earring is lovely. (ancient, gold) This is .......................................
7. This doormat is oval. (strong, rubber) This is .......................................
8. This wine is delicious. (grape, French) This is .......................................
9. This pan is new. (frying, Teflon) This is .......................................
10. This statue is Greek. (marble, wonderful) This is .......................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami we właściwej formie:

feel look seem smell sound taste
1. It .................... so sweet in the garden. That’s because of all the flowers.
2. I wish I had taken my pullover. It .................... so cold here.
3. His theories .................... sensible but they are unlikely to be put into practice.
4. You .................... to be anxious about something. What is it, dear?
5. I’m not going to eat this soup. It .................... too salty for me.
6. What’s wrong with Andrew? Don’t you think he .................... pale?
35
Unit 28 Przymiotniki i przysłówki (1)  192, 195
I. Utwórz przysłówki z przymiotników użytych w zdaniach:
1. Freddie is a skilful player. Freddie plays .............................. .
2. This exercise is terrible. This exercise is .............................. difficult.
3. His answers were brilliant. He answered .............................. .
4. Ann is an excellent actress. Ann acts .............................. .
5. Your reaction was too hasty. You reacted too .............................. .

1. exhausted / exhausting
a) It was a very .............................. race that we had last weekend.
b) I was extremely .............................. after the race.
2. amazed / amazing
a) The results of our experiment were .............................. .
b) We were .............................. by the results of our experiment.
3. satisfied / satisfying
a) None of the pupils gave a .............................. answer.
b) The teacher wasn’t .............................. with any of the answers.
4. interested / interesting
a) Only few of us were .............................. in visiting the Museum of Science.
b) Only few of us found the idea of visiting the Museum of Science
.............................. .
5. frustrated / frustrating
a) The news that my boss announced was really .............................. .
b) I was .............................. when I heard the news from my boss.
6. bored / boring
a) It is the most .............................. performance that I have ever seen.
b) I haven’t ever felt so .............................. as during this performance.
7. depressed / depressing
a) We are .............................. because of the poor condition of our company.
b) The condition of our firm is rather .............................. .
8. embarrassed / embarrassing
a) Ellen thinks it’s .............................. to invite another boy to her party.
b) Ellen felt too .............................. to invite another boy to her party.
9. surprised / surprising
a) It was Tom who made such a .............................. suggestion.
b) Everyone was .............................. by Tom’s suggestion.
10. entertained / entertaining
a) Uncle George is a very .............................. person.
b) We always feel .............................. in uncle George’s company.
36
Unit 29 Przymiotniki i przysłówki (2)  192, 195
I. Wybierz poprawną formę:
1. This carpet looks nice / nicely . Why don’t we buy it?
2. What you say sounds interesting / interestingly to me.
3. It was raining heavy / heavily when I looked out of the window.
4. Nobody knew that Eric was able to act so brave / bravely .
5. You aren’t a good musician. You play the guitar bad / badly .
6. It was inconsiderate / inconsiderately of you to ask Mrs Sykes to do the task.
7. Our last meeting was really careful / carefully planned.
8. I can’t say she is nice. She answered all my questions cold / coldly .
9. It looks like we have taken a wrong / wrongly road again.
10. Aren’t you feeling too hot / hotly in the sun?
11. You must remember not to ever come late / lately to work again.
12. If you speak slow / slowly , I will take a few notes.
13. I am awful / awfully sorry to have called you a liar.
14. Can one feel safe / safely in Mr Todd’s company?
15. Don’t mention it. It’s a complete / completely different matter.
II. Utwórz poprawne przymiotniki przy pomocy następujących przyrostków:

-able -ful -ing -ish -ive -less -ous -y
1. Father was .................... (fury) when I told him I had lost the car keys.
2. Mr Spark can work hard. He is the most .................... (product) worker I know.
3. Sorry, I couldn’t do much about your problem. I was really .................... (help).
4. No wonder they were punished. Their behaviour was .................... (objection).
5. This is a very .................... (danger) task. I’m not sure if I want to do it.
6. Having a tooth pulled out can be .................... (pain) unless you are under an
anaesthetic.
7. You’d better take your duffel coat. It’s rather .................... (wind) outside.
8. Peter’s .................... (child) acting cannot be tolerated any longer.
9. The shop is a very .................... (success) enterprise. It brings big profits.
10. Finally, an agreement was reached and a .................... (last) peace was
established.
11. Brian is a .................... (reason) young man. I’m certain he can do his job with
care.
12. Your remarks were very ..................... (offend) . Sheila will never forgive them.
13. This is a very good map. We’ll certainly find it .................... (use) during our
journey.
14. Jack never lets other children play with his toys. He is very .................... (self) .
15. Be .................... (caution) when you talk to Mr Aldridge. He gets angry easily.
37
Unit 30 Przysłówek badly, fairly, hardly ...  195
I. Uzupełnij zdania poprawnymi przysłówkami:
badly fairly hardly lately well
1. It’s a .............................. quiet area although there are factories around.
2. I haven’t seen you for four weeks, John. What have you been doing
..............................?
3. Last evening, we needed your help .............................. but we couldn’t find
you anywhere.
4. I’m a bit ashamed to talk to him. I don’t know him too .............................. .
5. .............................. anyone could answer the teacher’s questions. They were
too difficult for us.
II. Wstaw podane w nawiasach przysłówki w poprawne miejsce w zdaniu:

1. Albert forgets to prepare his lessons. (seldom)
2. Is the porridge warm to give it to the baby? (enough)
3. Have you seen a flying saucer? (yet)
4. My family spends holidays at the seaside. (never)
5. We have enough bread to go round, I’m afraid. (scarcely)
6. There is a big crowd in front of the embassy. (usually)
7. Susan has visited China three times. (already)
8. I’m waiting for an important message. (still)
9. I’ve seen quite a few good films. (recently)
10. There were twenty complaints about your services. (nearly)
11. The tourists were amazed by the landscapes. (highly)
12. You must obey the captain’s orders. (always)
13. Sit down in the hall and wait a while. I’ll come back. (shortly)
14. She says she loves her boyfriend. (very much)
15. She writes letters to us. (hardly ever)
III. Uzupełnij zdania konstrukcją:

hardly + czasownik + anyone / anything / anywhere
buy eat know see walk
1. He comes to our shop rarely and he ........................................ here.
2. I’m a complete stranger. I ........................................ in this town.
3. He’s terribly hungry. He has ........................................ since yesterday.
4. He’s almost blind. He can ........................................ .
5. We don’t know the place yet. We have ........................................ yet.
38
Unit 31 Stopniowanie przymiotniki / przysłówki  192, 195
I. Podaj poprawny stopień wyższy następujących przymiotników:
nice .............. heavy .............. big .............. experienced ..............
low .............. dry .............. thin .............. careful ..............
hard .............. funny .............. fat .............. famous ..............
broad .............. dirty .............. mad .............. boring ..............
fast .............. silly .............. fit .............. necessary ..............
wide .............. happy .............. hot .............. sensible ..............
cold .............. tiny .............. sad .............. important ..............
soft .............. greedy .............. red .............. attractive ..............
great .............. cosy .............. grim .............. suitable ..............
close .............. lazy .............. wet .............. delicate ..............
II. Podaj poprawny stopień najwyższy następujących przymiotników:
tall ....................... heavy ....................... pleasant .......................

wise ....................... pure ....................... frightening .......................
thick ....................... sweet ....................... generous .......................
hot ....................... bright ....................... excellent .......................
bold ....................... long ....................... colourful .......................
easy ....................... rich ....................... humble .......................
slow ....................... fat ....................... essential .......................
funny ....................... warm ....................... obstinate .......................
deep ....................... strange ....................... incredible .......................
full ....................... crazy ....................... difficult .......................
III. Uzupełnij brakujące formy przymiotników i przysłówków nieregularnych:
.............................. worse ..............................

.............................. .............................. farthest
.............................. further ..............................
good .............................. ..............................
.............................. .............................. least
many .............................. ..............................
much .............................. ..............................
.............................. .............................. eldest
.............................. older ..............................
well .............................. ..............................
39
Unit 32 Stopniowanie przymiotniki /  192, 195
przysłówki
I. Ułóż porównania jak w przykładzie.
 a lion / a hare / big A lion is bigger than a hare.

1. an ocean / a lake / deep .................................................................
2. a bicycle / a car / slow .................................................................
3. a newspaper / a book / thick .................................................................
4. a stream / a river / wide .................................................................
5. an elephant / an ant / heavy .................................................................
6. an orange / a lemon / sweet .................................................................
7. a hill / a mountain / high .................................................................
8. a grandfather / a father / old .................................................................
9. a skyscraper / a cottage / small .................................................................
10. a plane / a lorry / fast .................................................................
II. Ułóż porównania jak w przykładzie:
 a plane / a ship / expensive A ship is more expensive then a plane.

1. a general / a captain / important ..............................................................
2. a stool / a sofa / comfortable ..............................................................
3. a tiger / a monkey / dangerous ..............................................................
4. jogging / walking / exhausting ..............................................................
5. a criminal / a judge / trustworthy ..............................................................
6. America / Poland / powerful ..............................................................
7. plastic / iron / fragile ..............................................................
8. bronze / gold / precious ..............................................................
9. a clock / a sundial / precise ..............................................................
10. the opera / the cinema / popular ..............................................................
III. Wstaw poprawny stopień podanych przymiotników i przysłówków w zdania:
bad good far many much
1. No wonder you have to take a school bus everyday. You live ............................
from school than the rest of us.
2. Only Adam has been promoted. His projects were of the .............................. quality.
3. The doctor says you shouldn’t take .............................. of the sleeping pills
than you really need.
4. If the patient’s condition gets .............................. , he will have to be operated on.
5. Bob had got the .............................. courage of all. He was the only one who stayed
in the woods at night.
40
Unit 33 Stopniowanie - przymiotniki / przysłówki  192, 195
I. Napisz trzy porównania podanych rzeczowników:
1. a bicycle / a car / a plane - expensive
........................................................ than ........................................................
........................................................ than ........................................................
.................................................................................................................... of all.
2. a mouse / a snake / a lion - dangerous
........................................................ than ........................................................

........................................................ than ........................................................
.................................................................................................................... of all.
3. beer / wine / whisky - strong
........................................................ than ........................................................
........................................................ than ........................................................
.................................................................................................................... of all.
II. Wstaw poprawny stopień przymiotnika oraz przysłówka:

Hello! My name is Dave Downey. I live in a .................... (small) village near Hamsworth
together with my wife Jenny and my four children. I must say Jenny is ...................
(beautiful) woman that I have ever known. To me, she is .................... (brilliant) than any
other wife from the neighbourhood. I love her and my four kids very much. Tony is
.................... (young) of all, but he is .................... (noisy) than any other child. Roy is two
years .................... (old) than Mary and Sheila is ................... (old) of all my children.
Honestly, Roy is .................... (diligent) than Sheila, but his school marks are usually
.................... (bad) than hers. Mary and Tony still attend a nursery school. Mary can paint
.................... (beautifully) than the other pupils, but Tony seems to be ................... (lazy)
child in the whole group.
III. Wstaw poprawny stopień przymiotnika lub przysłówka:

1. Cindy drives .................... (carefully) than her husband does.
2. George won the championship because he ran .................... (quickly) than the
rest of the competitors.
3. We like Lucy. She always behaves ................... (obediently) of all the children.
4. I usually sleep well but my wife sleeps even .................... (soundly) than I do.
5. This is .................... (badly) - written book that I have ever read.
6. We always invite Mrs Dean. She is ..................... (friendly) than the other
neighbours.
7. I like this dark suit. It’s .................... (elegant) of all.
8. George’s father earns .................... (much) money than our father does.
41
Unit 34 Stopniowanie opadające  198
I. Napisz porównania jak w przykładzie:
 a storm / a tornado / dangerous A storm is less dangerous than a

tornado.
1. a strawberry / a lemon / sour ..............................................................
2. Russian / English / popular ..............................................................
3. a puma / a cat / fierce ..............................................................
4. climbing / jogging / exhausting ..............................................................
5. a president / a minister / important ..............................................................
6. horse riding / car racing / risky ..............................................................
7. a drama / a comedy / amusing ..............................................................
8. a director / a clerk / influential ..............................................................
9. vegetables / fried food / healthy ..............................................................
10. wood / glass / fragile ..............................................................
II. Napisz trzy porównania opadające podanych rzeczowników:

1. a horse-cart / a bicycle / a car - modern
........................................................ than ........................................................

........................................................ than ........................................................
.................................................................................................................... of all.
2. the opera / the drama / the film - popular
........................................................ than ........................................................

........................................................ than ........................................................
................................................................................................................... of all.
3. a trainee / a secretary / a manager - competent
........................................................ than ........................................................

........................................................ than ........................................................
.................................................................................................................... of all.
III. Zastosuj stopniowanie opadające:

1. Young people are .................... (polite) than they should be these days.
2. This is .................... (sensible) article that I have ever read.
3. I guess you have taken .................... (demanding) task of all.
4. Try acting .................... (angrily) than you did last time, please.
5. We had to dismiss Howard because he was .................... (hard-working) of all
our employees.
6. He’s very good at economics. He says that it is .................... (difficult) subject
of all.
42
Unit 35 Stopniowanie rosnące / opadające  195, 198
I. Wstaw poprawny stopień przymiotnika:
A: I can see you’re working ................... (hard) than you usually do.
B: Oh, yes. Now, I need .................... (much) money than ever.
A: Why is it so? Do you want to be .................... (wealthy) than everybody
else?
B: Oh no. My wife is going to have a baby and so I hope to buy a ....................
(comfortable) flat than the one we’re living in at present.
A: Now, I see. You want your baby to grow in .................... (luxurious)
conditions than you did.
B: Sure, it’s going to be .................... (happy) baby in the world.
II. Wstaw poprawny stopień przymiotnika lub przysłówka:

Once I was invited by a friend from the East to visit his place. I cannot say I
was disappointed but, honestly, the area was .................... (attractive) than I
had expected. There were .................... (few) beauty spots than we have in
the West and the distance between the cities was .................... (large) than
what I considered as normal. Although the sun seemed to shine ....................
(brightly) than it did in the West, the whole atmosphere of the Eastern
metropolises appeared to be .................... (grim) than anywhere else in the
world. The citizens of these sad towns and villages looked like ....................
(broken-hearted) people you could ever meet in your life. I was even more
amazed seeing that the .................... (far) I went in the East, the
.................... (gloomy) the people and their homeland appeared to become.
However, ................... (astounding) of all my observations was that of the
technological advancement. Machines and computers were everywhere
around.
III. Wstaw poprawny stopień przymiotnika:

1. A: Look, I have won again.
B: That’s right. Your results are .............................. (good) than mine.
2. A: Would you like to buy the picture?
B: Certainly not. It’s .............................. (interesting) picture I’ve ever seen.
3. A: Is his condition really that serious?
B: Unfortunately yes. We’re expecting .............................. (bad) now.
4. A: How do you like my meals?
B: They’re perfect. They are .............................. (delicious) in the world.
5. A: Are you still on a diet?
B: Yes, I am. I hope to get .............................. (slim) soon.
43
Unit 36 The same ... as, as ... as, than  199
I. Przepisz zdania za pomocą konstrukcji as ... as:
1. I know a lot about politics but David knows more.

I don’t ...............................................................................................................
2. Sheila can speak French better than anyone else.
Nobody else .....................................................................................................
3. My brother learns more often than I do.
I don’t ...............................................................................................................
4. We own a few shops but our neighbour owns even more.
We don’t ...........................................................................................................
5. Tim receives a lot of letters but Patrick receives the most.
Tim doesn’t ......................................................................................................
II. Połącz zdania za pomocą konstrukcji the same ... as:
1. We are leaving on Tuesday and they are leaving on Tuesday, too.

............................................................................................................................
2. Frank bought his car in Leeds and I bought mine in Leeds, too.
............................................................................................................................
3. You are twelve years old. She is twelve years old, too.
............................................................................................................................
4. I attended a self-defence course in Dover and so did Peter.
............................................................................................................................
5. Rick comes form England. Audrey comes from England, too.
............................................................................................................................
III. Wstaw as lub than:
As soon as we arrived in the spa, it became obvious that nothing was so attractive ..........
the travel agent had promised it to be. The landscapes were more .......... disappointing and
the area seemed as dull .......... it usually was in winter time. But, it was summer and we
expected the same attractions .......... we had the previous year in Brighton. Forget it. The
water in the neighbouring lake wasn’t as clear .......... on the picture in the agent’s booklet
and there were usually more local people on the beach .......... tourists all together.
And the rooms in our hotel! It was all less comfortable inside there .......... if we had been
accommodated in military tents. Nor were the meals the same quality .......... in Brighton.
There was more fat on each dish .......... you can imagine and it was the extra price that we
had to pay for them that made our father as mad .......... a hatter in the end.
44
Unit 37 So, so ... that, such ... that  199
I. Wstaw so wraz z odpowiednim przymiotnikiem:
awful evident impractical jealous pleasant precious
1. The atmosphere at the barbecue was .............................. that we stayed there
till late at night.
2. Simon is .............................. that he always wants to get what other children
have got.
3. The weather is .............................. that I recommend our staying at home.
4. The necklace that she has lost is ............................. that she will do everything
to find it.
5. Their advice was .............................. that I forgot about it at once.
6. The man’s guilt was .............................. that the judge didn’t hesitate a second
to pass a sentence.
II. Połącz zdania za pomocą konstrukcji such ... that:

1. It was a boring film. We left before it ended.
......................................................................................................................
2. Tim is a talented player. He has been qualified for the national team.
......................................................................................................................
3. It is a very pleasant music. I could listen to it for hours.
......................................................................................................................
4. He is a good soloist. The audience always gives him a standing ovation.
......................................................................................................................
5. It is a very engrossing book. I have already read it three times.
......................................................................................................................
III. Wstaw such a / an lub so:

1. Bob’s story was .................... incredible that I could hardly believe it.
2. Karen is .................... funny person that we like having her at our parties.
3. Let me have a rest. I’m .................... tired that cannot walk any longer.
4. I like this area .................... much that I’m thinking of buying a house here.
5. I’m sure it was Stanley. Nobody else can run .................... quickly.
6. It’s a pity she has moved out. She was .................... kind neighbour.
7. We have worked together for .................... long that we know each other very
well.
8. Don’t fool me. There is no .................... way of earning money doing nothing.
9. People are .................... worried these days, aren’t they?
10. We wanted to have a good time. That’s why we took .................. long
holidays.
45
Unit 38 Przysłówek miejsca - somewhere  180, 195
I. Wstaw some / any / no / every + where:
1. A: Can you buy a newspaper .............................. here?
B: Yes, there is a newsagent’s round the corner.
2. A: Did you travel much during your holiday?
B: Not at all. I went .............................. as I had no leave.
3. A: Where does Mr Hurston live?
B: He lives .............................. near Dover but I don’t know his address.
4. A: Have you found your note-book yet?
B: No. I have looked for it almost .............................. but it’s lost for good.
5. A: Would you like to camp here?
B: No. Let’s go .............................. else.
6. A: Have you showed Peter the neighbourhood yet?
B: Not really. I haven’t taken him .............................. yet.
7. A: Where shall we spend the evening?
B: You can take me .............................. except the boring Panama Club.
8. A: I’ve heard Adam is working as a bank clerk.
B: That’s false. He isn’t working .............................. . He’s unemployed.
II. Przepisz zdania korzystając z podanych słów:

1. I have travelled nowhere.
....................................................................................................... anywhere.
2. You will need your credit card everywhere you go.
Anywhere .......................................................................................................
3. We didn’t stay long anywhere.
Nowhere .........................................................................................................
4. I couldn’t find you anywhere yesterday evening.
You were ........................................................................................................
5. Nowhere else will you see more beautiful landscapes.
............................................................................................... anywhere else.
III. Wstaw anywhere, everywhere, somewhere lub nowhere:

Everybody likes spending weekends ......................... far from the noise of a big city. Well,
it’s a pity but I haven’t been to ......................... like that for ages. In fact, since I started my
work in the firm I have travelled to ......................... but London - on business, of course.
Although I’m sure places of blissful peace do exist ......................... in the world, there’s
always that horrible noise and plenty of people ......................... I go.
46
Unit 39 Przysłówki czasu  195, 201
I. Wstaw poprawny przysłówek:
just still today tomorrow yesterday
1. Wait for me please. I’m .............................. having my breakfast.
2. The Boultons had a car crash .............................. .
3. I’m not working .............................. . That’s why I’m at home.
4. We have .............................. finished trimming the hedges.
5. If it doesn’t start raining, we will go fishing .............................. .
II. Wstaw poprawny przysłówek:

already at present since soon yet
1. Let’s visit the Royal Palace. I haven’t seen it .............................. .
2. Don’t disturb us! We’re having a conference ............................... .
3. I hope I’ll be able to meet my girlfriend .............................. .
4. Tom’s only seventeen but he has .............................. won the Olympic
Championship.
5. Uncle Richard has been unemployed .............................. last year.
III. Ułóż odpowiedzi do zadanych pytań korzystając z podanych przysłówków:

1. A: What is Jenny doing there so long in the bathroom? (STILL)
B: She / have a bath / ..................................................................................
2. A: How many letters have you written? (ALREADY)
B: I / write / six letters ..................................................................................
3. A: Have they built any houses at all? (RECENTLY)
B: They / build / three houses ......................................................................
4. A: How long have you known Muriel? (SINCE)
B: I / know / Muriel / 1986 ............................................................................
5. A: Has Deborah watched the film? (YET)
B: Deborah / not watch / the film .................................................................
6. A: When did Eric lose his school bag? (LAST MONTH)
B: Eric / lose / his school bag .......................................................................
7. A: Have you ever been abroad? (LATELY)
B: I / be / abroad .........................................................................................
8. A: How long must I wait? (TILL)
B: You / wait / six o’clock ............................................................................
9. A: Will you fix that frame for me, please? (JUST)
B: I / fix / it ..................................................................................................
10. A: How long has Mick been studying law? (FOR)
B: He / study / law / four years ....................................................................
47
Unit 40 Przysłówki częstotliwości  195
I. Ułóż zdania twierdzące korzystając z podanych słów:
1. always, is, dirty, bicycle, your ...........................................................
2. get up, I, Sunday, late, often, on ...........................................................
3. duties, forgets, he, never, about, his ...........................................................
4. at, usually, works, home, she ...........................................................
5. together, we, shopping, seldom, go, ...........................................................
6. busy, Julia, sometimes, is ...........................................................
7. answer, always, he, questions, my, can ...........................................................
8. rarely, takes, for, he, me, walk, a ...........................................................
9. hard, he, worked, never ...........................................................
10. disturbing, they, always, us, are ...........................................................
II. Napisz o podanych osobach korzystając z informacji w tabeli:
Robert Maggie Andrew

get up late sometimes never often
have dinner in a restaurant always seldom usually
be tired after work usually sometimes never
watch TV at night never always sometimes
Robert ...................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................
Maggie ...................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................
Andrew ..................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................
III. Wstaw podane w nawiasach przysłówki w poprawne miejsce w zdaniu:

1. Sam takes a rest after school. (frequently)
2. She may become angry. (sometimes)
3. You take sleeping pills. (never)
4. Sue walks alone at night. (rarely)
5. I play computer games. (hardly ever)
6. They lend a helping hand. (occasionally)
7. You can give the correct answer. (seldom)
8. We go to school by train. (scarcely ever)
9. You should ask for a permission. (always)
10. Tim is in a hurry. (often)
11. There are a lot of people in front of the bank. (usually)
12. The Browns are kind to us. (hardly ever)
48
Unit 41 Przysłówki sposobu  195
I. Uzupełnij zdania zamieniając przymiotnik na przysłówek sposobu:
1. His reaction was rapid. He reacted ..................................................
2. You gave the wrong answer. You answered .............................................
3. Our life is comfortable. We live .......................................................
4. Her performance was splendid. She performed ............................................
5. I made a sharp comment. I commented ...............................................
6. Their work is ineffective. They work ...................................................
7. He was a selfish player. He played ...................................................
8. Your actions were irresponsible. You acted ...................................................
9. It was an unjust punishment. I was punished ............................................
10. She is sound asleep now. She is sleeping ..........................................
II. Wstaw poprawne przysłówki w zdania:

courageously favourably frankly generously radically
reasonably reluctantly shamelessly silently skilfully
1. I didn’t really want to go to the barbecue. I went there .............................. .
2. We were paid a lot of money. We were paid .............................. .
3. He had no fear. He acted very .............................. .
4. Great changes have been made. Everything has been changed
.............................. .
5. Our suggestions were accepted. They were treated .............................. .
6. It was a very wise answer. You answered very .............................. .
7. They didn’t make any noise. They left .............................. .
8. Her behaviour is indecent. She behaves .............................. .
9. You are very talented. You can do everything .............................. .
10. She’s got no secrets. She always speaks .............................. .
III. Wstaw bad lub badly:

1. I’m sorry but everything was .................... in your project.
2. This is the first time I have been treated so .................... .
3. Their children often behave .................... .
4. It was a .................... choice that you made.
5. She’s going to play a role of a .................... witch.
6. I sleep rather .................... these days.
7. Alice is in .................... humour today, indeed.
8. Several people were .................... injured in the crash.
9. The weather is .................... today.
10. Come here! I need your help .................... .
49
Unit 42 Kolejność przysłówków  195
I. Ułóż poprawne zdania twierdzące:
1. often / in his room / noisily / plays / John
...........................................................................................................................
2. loudly / on the trees / the birds / sing / in the park
..........................................................................................................................
3. at night / hard / you / sometimes / learn
..........................................................................................................................
4. by bus / seldom / travels / to school / she
..........................................................................................................................
5. waiting / still / am / patiently / in the hall / I
..........................................................................................................................
6. has / heavily / it / raining / been / all day
...........................................................................................................................
II. Rozpoznaj czy kolejność przysłówków w zdaniach jest poprawna (P) czy nie (N):
1. My sister usually is busy in the afternoon. ..............

2. You have been sitting all day in front of the TV set. ..............
3. He ran to the studio quickly two hours ago. ..............
4. You usually take a walk in the park in the evening. ..............
5. Yesterday, Susan lay on the beach lazily. ..............
6. We went to the concert by car last Friday. ..............
7. She will have to stay in the office longer often. ..............
8. Somebody hit me strongly on the head yesterday. ..............
9. I have just welcomed warmly my guests. ..............
10. You hardly ever quickly eat breakfast in the morning. ..............
III. Ułóż poprawne odpowiedzi do pytań:

1. A: Where did you stand Mr Coxton?
B: patiently / all the time / stood / at the door / I
2. A: How did you wake him up?
B: for ten minutes / knocked / loudly / I / on the window
3. A: Why did you punish the boy?
B: as usual / was playing / in my backyard / he / roughly
4. A: What happened?
B: the office / entered / secretly / someone / in the morning
5. A: Why don’t you like Terry?
B: questions / never / he / politely / answers
50
Unit 43 Przymiotnik czy przysłówek?  192, 195
I. Wybierz poprawną formę:
1. The river is very deep / deeply in this place.
2. Jake is deep / deeply in love with Sophia.
3. It’s high / highly unlikely that they will lend us some money.
4. The threshold is a bit too high / highly, I believe.
5. What you say sounds pretty / prettily awkward.
6. Your baby is always so pretty / prettily dressed.
7. Everything went wrong / wrongly because the plan was full of mistakes.
8. We were wrong / wrongly accused of stealing the bags.
9. I know it’s usually hard / hardly to understand such theories.
10. It’s hard / hardly possible that our team will win the game.
11. Sit down and wait a second. Peter is coming short / shortly .
12. The dress that she has bought is too short / shortly for her.
13. Isn’t it too late / lately for hammering nails, Mr Stub?
14. There have been quite a few demonstrations here late / lately .
15. Most / Mostly of us remember professor Goodman very well.
16. He goes fishing quite often, most / mostly on weekends.
17. The boy was right / rightly punished for his misbehaviour.
18. You are right / rightly about Daniel’s dog. It’s a setter not a dachshund.
II. Rozpoznaj czy wytłuszczone słowo jest przysłówkiem czy przymiotnikiem:

1. I’ll do my best to finish the work as fast as possible ...................................
2. Take the back seat. It’s free. ...................................
3. Isn’t the ceiling too low in this apartment? ...................................
4. Hurry up! We’ve got little time left. ...................................
5. This time, the verdict of the jury was just. ...................................
6. Look! There’s a mouse in the far corner of the room. ...................................
7. If you go straight this way, you’ll get to the station. ...................................
8. There’s no wind. The water in the pond is still. ...................................
III. Wstaw poprawną formę w odpowiednie zdania:

direct(ly) fair(ly) hard(ly) kind(ly) most(ly)
1. Would you .................... stop whistling? I cannot sleep.
2. He never puts his ideas .................... . He is really hard to speak with.
3. You’ll have to work very .................... if you hope to become a good manager.
4. It’s a .................... good idea, but how are you going to make it work?
5. I find reading books very pleasant, but I like watching films in the cinema
.................... of all.
51
Unit 44 Enough - too  200
I. Połącz zdania stosując przysłówek too oraz konstrukcję bezokolicznikową:
1. This soup is cold. I can’t eat it. This soup is too cold to eat.
2. She is young. She can’t walk. ...............................................
3. Your bag is heavy. I can’t carry it. ...............................................
4. We have little money. We can’t buy anything. ...............................................
5. The exercise is difficult. I can’t do it. ...............................................
6. Jack is inexperienced. He can’t do the task . ...............................................
7. The water is cold. We can’t bathe. ...............................................
8. There’s little firewood. We can’t make a bonfire. ...............................................
9. I am busy. I can’t help you. ...............................................
10. He is stupid. He can’t answer your questions. ...............................................
II. Połącz zdania stosując przysłówek enough oraz konstrukcję bezokolicznikową:

1. She can’t join us. She is not brave. She isn’t brave enough to join us.
2. You aren’t clever. You can’t do the puzzle. ......................................................
3. I am not strong. I can’t carry the box. ......................................................
4. He isn’t skilful. He can’t repair the sledge. ......................................................
5. You can’t play outside. You aren’t healthy. ......................................................
6. The article can’t be printed. It’s not good. ......................................................
7. He doesn’t sing well. He can’t be a soloist. ......................................................
8. The idea can’t be accepted. It’s not logical. ......................................................
9. The place isn’t safe. We can’t camp in it. ......................................................
10. You can’t eat the fruit. They aren’t ripe. ......................................................
III. Wstaw enough lub too:

1. Have you got .................... sandwiches to give me one?
2. I felt like going to the party but I couldn’t spend .................... much money.
3. ‘Will she lend a helping hand?’ ‘I don’t think so. She’s .................... lazy.’
4. Waiter! Could you bring more of the sauce? There isn’t .................... of it to
go round.
5. You can rely on Alfred. He is friendly .................... to be asked for help.
6. Don’t put your hand in the box. The spider is .................... dangerous to be
touched.
7. He looks overweight. He eats .................... many meals a day.
8. I won’t drink the syrup. It isn’t sweet .................... for me.
9. She doesn’t want the contributors’ list to be .................... long this time.
10. Put your clothes somewhere else. There isn’t .................... free space in this
wardrobe.
52
Unit 45 Already - still - yet  201
I. Wstaw still lub yet:
1. ‘Can I borrow this book?’ ‘Oh no. I am .................... reading it.’
2. ‘Have you visited Stonehenge?’ ‘No, I haven’t been there .................... .’
3. ‘Is George ready now?’ ‘No. He is .................... having a bath.’
4. ‘Do you like the music?’ ‘I don’t know. I haven’t listened to it .................... .’
5. ‘Are you free now?’ ‘I’m afraid not. I .................... have a few things to do.’
6. ‘Have you talked to Alice?’ ‘No. She hasn’t phoned .................... .’
7. ‘Can I put on this shirt?’ ‘No, it hasn’t been ironed .................... .’
8. ‘Has Frank changed his job?’ ‘No, he’s .................... working for the same
company.’
9. ‘Have you finished making copies from the book ....................?’ ‘Yes, I have
but I .................... need it for my classes.’
10. ‘Why is nobody answering the phone?’ ‘Perhaps, they haven’t returned home
.................... .’
II. Ułóż twierdzenia lub przeczenia stosując already lub yet oraz ‘Present Perfect’:
1. The room is dirty. He / not clean / it ...............................................
2. I can go to school now. I / eat / my breakfast. ...............................................
3. I still have my money. I / not spend / it ...............................................
4. You can drive your car. We / repair / it ...............................................
5. She doesn’t know him. She / not meet / him ...............................................
6. I must find a good job. I / finish / studying ...............................................
7. The picture isn’t ready. He / not paint / it ...............................................
8. I’m feeling better now. I / be operated on ...............................................
III. Wstaw przysłówki w poprawne miejsce w zdaniu:

1. ‘Can he start working today?’ ‘No. He is feeling unwell.’ (STILL)
2. You needn’t write the report. I have done it for you. (ALREADY)
3. Have you made many friends here? (YET)
4. Does Harry smoke so many cigarettes daily? (STILL)
5. There hasn’t been much interest in our programme. (YET)
IV. Uzupełnij zdania stosując przysłówek still oraz podane czasowniki:

collect eat look for read use
1. We haven’t finished our dinner yet. We .................................................. it.
2. Josh hasn’t fallen asleep yet. He .................................................. a book.
3. I haven’t written the letter yet. I .................................................. your pen.
4. We haven’t bought a house yet. We .................................................. money.
5. She hasn’t found her purse yet. She .................................................. it.
53
Unit 46 Przyimki miejsca at - in - on  202, 203
I. Wstaw at, in lub on:
............ a shop ............ home ............ the beach
............ the third floor ............ the park ............ work
............ the city ............ school ............ a plane
............ the house ............ a train ............ a car
............ a bus-stop ............ hospital ............ a restaurant
II. Uzupełnij zdania poprawnymi wyrażeniami wraz z przyimkami at, in lub on:
the airport bed the floor the garage the garden prison
the reception desk the roof the seaside university
1. I can see your mother watering flowers .............................. .
2. ‘What are you doing up there ..............................?’ ‘I’m repairing the
chimney.’
3. Chris is going to start studying .............................. next year.
4. Don’t worry. We’ll be waiting for you .............................. when your plane
arrives.
5. This man is a criminal. He has spent many years .............................. .
6. Charles hasn’t got up yet. He is still .............................. in his room.
7. Someone has broken a bottle. There’s plenty of glass .............................. in
the kitchen.
8. We’ve just returned from holiday. We’ve had a wonderful weekend
.............................. .
9. ‘What’s uncle Nick doing now?’ ‘He is repairing his van .............................. .’
10. ‘Where can I get the list of the hotel guests?’ ‘Ask for it .............................. .’
III. Wstaw at, in lub on:

1. It’s a great pleasure to bathe .......... the sea in summer time.
2. Let’s start the party. Let’s be the first couple .......... the dance-floor.
3. Can you hear birds chirping .......... the trees?
4. Look! Your sister is standing .......... the long queue.
5. What was he wearing .......... his head when you saw him last time?
6. Stop .......... the traffic lights and wait till they’re green.
7. In my father’s living-room there are lots of precious paintings .......... the walls.
8. Who’s the young girl standing .......... the garden gate?
9. Captain Lawrence is said to have spent seven years .......... a desert island.
10. There’s a dressing-table .......... the corner of Patricia’s bedroom.
11. Mr McCarthy breeds horses .......... his great farm in Kentucky.
12. They’re strangers. They don’t live .......... our village.
54
Unit 47 Przyimki miejsca at - in - on  202, 203
A: Sony, you weren’t .......... a party last Sunday, were you?
B: No, I spent the evening .......... my room .......... the boarding house.
A: I thought you were .......... home .......... Gloucester.
B: Unfortunately, there was a big commotion .......... the bus station and no
buses departed, so I had to go back.
A: What was the commotion about?
B: I saw two policemen right .......... the entrance door and even more of them
.......... the main hall.
A: Were there any civilian people inside?
B: Yes, a few of them were lying ......... the floor ......... the waiting room.
I must say they looked strange. They were wearing masks ......... their
faces and black gloves .......... their hands.
A: Were they terrorists?
B: I suppose so, but there were too many people .......... the place to see
everything clearly.
II. Uzupełnij zdania poprawnymi wyrażeniami wraz z przyimkami at, in lub on:
the blackboard the casino the cinema the hairdresser’s the map
the mountains the office the post-office stage the taxi
1. This is the first time the young actress will be performing live
.............................. .
2. Mary is .............................. . She’s having her hair cut.
3. Let’s spend the evening .............................. . There’s a good film on this week.
4. ‘Where’s my wallet? I can’t find it anywhere.’ ‘You must have left it
.............................. after paying the driver for the ride.’
5. The place that we’re heading for is so small that I cannot find it
.............................. .
6. I hope to win a few pounds at a roulette .............................. this night.
7. ‘Where can I get stamps for my letters?’ ‘For sure, you’ll get some
.............................. .’
8. John is a passionate climber. He spends his every weekend
.............................. .
9. There was no chalk in the classroom, so the teacher couldn’t write anything
.............................. .
10. ‘Has the director gone home yet?’ ‘No, he’s still .............................. .’
55
Unit 48 Przyimki czasu at - in - on  202, 205
............ Monday ............ night ............ Friday evening
............ the morning ............ winter ............ the 17th century
............ four o’clock ............ Sunday ............ spring
............ August ............ the afternoon ............ 28 September
............ 1492 ............ the weekend ............ midnight
II. Uzupełnij tekst przyimkami at, in lub on:

.......... Saturdays our family always works hard. .......... the morning, we get up ..........
eight o’clock and have breakfast .......... half past eight. .......... summer, we all go to the
garden and pick fruit, but .......... autumn we clean the backyard and burn the fallen leaves.
.......... noon, our mother brings lunch. .......... winter, we take meals in the house, of course.
Then, .......... about one p.m. we start cleaning our rooms and our father washes the car.
Late .......... the afternoon, we either stay at home or visit our friends. .......... summer
evenings, we have barbecues and go to sleep .......... midnight, but .......... colder days we
stay inside and play cards or scrabble. .......... the evening, we sometimes go to the cinema
and come back .......... about ten p.m. Our father always goes to bed .......... eleven sharp,
so we must keep silent .......... night not to wake him up.

1. Thomas Wolfe was born .......... 1900.
2. Christmas Eve is .......... 24 December.
3. Our father often reads a newspaper .......... breakfast time.
4. I’ll be waiting for you in front of the school .......... half past four.
5. The Industrial Revolution began .......... the 19th century.
6. .......... Easter, we always visit our family in Leeds.
7. The school starts .......... 1 September.
8. What do you usually do .......... Sundays?
9. .......... November, we are moving out to Greece.
10. There’s little to do .......... a rainy day like this.
11. I must say I was rather busy .......... the last weekend.
12. The bus leaves .......... a quarter to ten.
13. Early .......... the morning, the telephone rang again.
14. .......... midday, we went to the beach.
15. Where will you be .......... your birthday?
56
Unit 49 Przyimki czasu at - in - on  202, 205
I. Ułóż odpowiedzi korzystając ze słów w nawiasach oraz przyimków at, in, on:
1. When do you usually meet Sally? (lunchtime) .......................................
2. When will you return from Italy? (two weeks) .......................................
3. When is Tom’s birthday? (22 June) .......................................
4. When did Winston Churchill die? (1965) .......................................
5. When does Sue have free time? (weekends) .......................................
6. When do the workers get up? (dawn) .......................................
7. When will Alex go to school? (Thursday) .......................................
8. When are you leaving? (the morning) .......................................
9. When did Julie lose her bag? (summer) .......................................
10. When will the ceremony begin? (Friday night) .......................................
II. Wstaw in lub on:

1. We’ve come .......... time. The show hasn’t begun yet.
2. .......... a few hours, we’ll be far away from this place.
3. The 2.30 passenger train is late again. It has never arrived .......... time.
4. Just wait in my office. I’ll come back .......... twenty minutes.
5. We didn’t wait long at the airport. The plane arrived .......... time.
6. The coach says that your son will make a good player .......... a few years.
7. Last evening, the film didn’t begin .......... time because there was a president’s
address right after the news.
8. Please, don’t be late. The performance must start .......... time.

1. A: What do you think of Jacqueline?
B: Well, .......... first, I didn’t like her at all, but she appeared to be a very nice
girl .......... the end.
2. A: When did you have the most troubles?
B: We had quite a few of them .......... the beginning of our trip, but we were
truly depressed .......... the end of it.
3. A: Who helped you?
B: .......... the beginning, it was Adam who offered his helping hand, but
.......... the last day we also asked his brother for assistance.
4. A: How did you feel?
B: Awfully. But, I managed to get over the sickness .......... last.
5. A: Where did you stay?
B: .......... first, we stopped in a youth hostel and .......... the end of our trip we
slept in tents.
57
Unit 50 Przyimki ruchu at, from, in, into, to  202, 206
I. Wstaw poprawne przyimki jeżeli są wymagane:
Last Friday, I returned .......... home really late. After work, I met my pal Timothy and he
suggested that we go .......... a restaurant for dinner. Later, we decided to drive .......... our
local sports centre and see an athletic event. However, on our way .......... the place Tim
stopped .......... Chestnut Street to pick up his cousin William, who had just returned ..........
abroad. Willie said he’d rather go .......... a bowling club, and so we went .......... there
without even stopping .......... the athletic field. It was already eight p.m. when we arrived
.......... the club. After a short game we all resolved to move .......... a less boring place and
that’s how we arrived .......... the discotheque at about ten o’clock. Unfortunately, we
couldn’t get .......... the extravagant night club as none of us was wearing a suit. Then,
Timmy remembered he had a few free tickets for a charity ball in Humpton where we drove
.......... at eleven p.m. The ball turned out to be such a fun that we didn’t leave .......... the
dancing hall until it came to a definite end. It was, I guess, three o’clock a.m. when I came
back .......... my home dog-tired and with my pockets completely empty.
II. Wstaw poprawny przyimek jeżeli jest wymagany:

at from in off on out of to
1. I was stopped by policemen and told to get .......... my car.
2. Everything was different when we arrived .......... the city twenty years ago.
3. On our way back .......... the lakeside we will stop .......... our uncle’s place.
4. Get .......... the bus number seven. It will take you to Salisbury.
5. The Lintons moved .......... here last year. Now, they live in another district.
6. Which way should I take to get .......... the city centre?
7. Next summer, we’ll fly .......... Canada.
8. It will take us a few hours to reach .......... the village on foot.
9. Sally twisted her ankle as she was getting .......... a horse.
10. Where’s the captain of this ship? Has he gone .......... board yet?
III. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami dodając właściwe przyimki:

arrive / come / return / travel / walk + along / around / at / from / into
1. Mr Burke is a captain of a big liner. He has already ......................... the world.
2. Our daughter hasn’t ......................... abroad yet. She’s still on holiday.
3. Tell the people to ......................... the hall instead of standing outside.
4. When we ......................... the airport our plane was just being announced.
5. I was ......................... the Lane Street when I saw Sally in front of a display.
58
Unit 51 Przyimki during, for, from, since, till, to  202, 206
I. Ułóż poprawną odpowiedź stosując przyimki for lub since:
1. How long have you known Adam? (six years) .....................................
2. How long has Joan been ill? (last Friday) .....................................
3. How long has he been unemployed? (September) .....................................
4. How long has Tom had this dog? (two months) .....................................
5. How long have they been married? (1963) .....................................
6. How long have you been in London? (Christmas) .....................................
7. How long has he played cricket? (one year) .....................................
8. How long has Alice worked here? (five weeks) .....................................
9. How long have you been a student? (1995) .....................................
10. How long have they been living here? (January) .....................................
II. Ułóż poprawną odpowiedź za pomocą przyimków from ... till ... :
1. How long do you usually work in your office? (8 a.m. - 5 p.m.)
............................................................................................................................
2. How long did your mother stay abroad? (February - October)
............................................................................................................................
3. How long did Michael watch TV? (morning - afternoon)
............................................................................................................................
4. How long does Ann have to practice the piano? (10 a.m. - 1 p.m.)
............................................................................................................................
5. How long did he repair your car? (Tuesday - Saturday)
............................................................................................................................
III. Wstaw during, from, for, since, till lub to:

1. Where have you been? I haven’t seen you .......... two weeks?
2. This terrible earthquake happened .......... our stay on the island.
3. .......... I met her, I’ve been in love with her.
4. Wait .......... midnight and you’ll certainly see something interesting.
5. My duty hours are .......... 10 a.m. .......... midday.
6. Sit down in the hall and wait .......... I am ready.
7. The river flooded .......... the storm.
8. Jack has already worked as a postman .......... ten years.
9. The man was kept under arrest .......... March .......... June.
10. It rained heavily .......... the whole day.
11. He told me to wait .......... a few minutes, but he didn’t come at all.
12. Soft drinks were being served .......... the reception in the palace.
59
Unit 52 Przyimki before, by, until, while  202, 208
I. Uzupełnij zdania za pomocą przyimka while oraz podanych zwrotów:
bathe in the sea be on holiday drive read a book walk in the woods
1. I made a lot of new friends .............................. in Spain this summer.
2. Our car broke down .............................. on the bumpy road.
3. Someone stole my sunglasses from the beach .............................. .
4. Father fell asleep .............................. late at night.
5. The man says he was attacked by a bear .............................. .
II. Ułóż zdania w czasie przyszłym dokonanym - Future Perfect:
1. I / finish / painting the picture ............................................ by next Monday.

2. We / leave / school ............................................ by 29 June.
3. The church / be renovated ............................................ by 2010.
4. She / memorise the poem ............................................ by tomorrow.
5. You / not record a new CD ............................................ by next month.
III. Połącz zdania za pomocą przyimków by, until lub while:
1. There will not be peace ............ many countries stop fighting.

2. David will have recovered ............ October.
3. Sue will not talk to you ............ you apologise to her.
4. Don’t speak aloud ............ I am asleep.
5. I will have cleaned the house ............ the time my parents come home.
6. I met Ronald in a supermarket ............ I was doing my shopping.
7. Don’t do anything ............ you are told what to do.
8. Many animals will have died out ............ the year of 2050.
9. I won’t tell you my secret ............ you promise to keep it for yourself.
10. We’ll have fixed the decorations ............ the time the ceremony begins.
IV. Wstaw before, by, until lub while:
1. How about the financial report? Will you have written it .......... tomorrow?
2. Remember to lock the door .......... going out of the house.
3. What was Sarah doing .......... you were typing the letters?
4. The demonstration will probably last .......... next week.
5. .......... the time the ministers arrive, the security forces will have inspected the
place around.
6. I’d like to say good-bye to everybody .......... leaving.
7. Someone broke into the villa .......... the garden party was going on.
8. You will see, everything will have changed here .......... your next birthday.
60
Unit 53 Przyimek ‘to’  202, 209
I. Rozpoznaj czy przyimek to jest wymagany w zdaniu (T) czy nie (N):
1. I will tell to Michael about your problems. .......

2. She gave this book to me last Christmas. .......
3. He promised to us that he would help us. .......
4. Somebody has lent to Lisa this dictionary. .......
5. Could you show it to me? .......
6. Every evening, I read bedtime stories to my children. .......
7. Paul asked to me if he could borrow my pen. .......
8. I have offered to Mr Howard to pick him up. .......
9. Did the guests complain to you about anything? .......
10. I would like you to send a postcard to us. .......
II. Przepisz zdania stosując przyimek to:
1. We have brought him a gift. We have brought a gift to him.

2. Ann didn’t show us her new dress. ...............................................................
3. They will pay me a hundred pounds. ...............................................................
4. I am telling you the truth. ...............................................................
5. Could you sell us this picture? ...............................................................
6. We must give Ronald the money. ...............................................................
7. Let’s send Mr Lindsay a parcel. ...............................................................
8. They didn’t leave me any food. ...............................................................
9. She has promised us the tickets. ...............................................................
10. How about lending them our radio? ...............................................................
III. Wstaw przyimek to jeżeli jest wymagany:

1. I’ve just invited .......... your sister to the New Year’s ball.
2. The wallet that we found was given .......... Bill.
3. Mr Pierce advised .......... me that a torch would be necessary.
4. It was recommended .......... us that the printer shouldn’t be used too often.
5. Does anyone mind if I show .......... Mr Crunch these files?
6. If he ever offered .......... you his helping hand, don’t reject it.
7. We’d rather you explained your theory .......... us.
8. This car has been sold .......... an unknown man.
9. They should have warned .......... me about the danger in advance.
10. Have you asked .......... your students about their future plans?
11. Next time, send your complaints .......... the council.
12. He didn’t offer any money because nobody suggested it .......... him.
61
Unit 54 Inne użycie przyimków at, by, in, on  202, 210
I. Uzupełnij zdania właściwymi słowami wraz z przyimkami at, by, in lub on:
accident cash a diet duty foot holiday a hurry risk sea train
1. As we ran out of petrol we were forced to travel ....................... until we reached

the nearest village.
2. Since I’ve been .................... I must be careful about the food I eat.
3. We’ll wait for aunt Laura at the railway station. She’ll be coming .................... .
4. Sorry, I cannot stop to talk with you now. I am .................... .
5. This summer, we’re going .................... to Greece.
6. The ferry had been .................... for three days when it collided with an
iceberg.
7. They don’t accept credit cards. You must pay .................... , I’m afraid.
8. The guardians mustn’t speak to anyone while they’re .................... .
9. I had no intention of stealing your jacket, sir. I took it home ................... .
10. By smoking so much you put your health .................... .
II. Napisz poprawne odpowiedzi korzystając z podanej informacji oraz przyimków:

1. How old was he when he made the discovery? (the age of 35)
...........................................................................................................................
2. Where can we hide from the scorching sun? (the shade of the trees)
...........................................................................................................................
3. Was your train late? (schedule)
No, .....................................................................................................................
4. How can one meet with the managing director? (appointment)
...........................................................................................................................
5. Did he hit you on the head intentionally? (purpose)
Yes, ...................................................................................................................
III. Wstaw at, by, in lub on:

1. The rhinoceros is now .......... danger of a complete extinction.
2. I don’t know exactly, but .......... a guess he earns one thousand per month.
3. I’m not going down the cave. You can only do it .......... your own risk.
4. Let’s take a few raincoats .......... case it rains.
5. I know her name is Susie. I called her Celine .......... mistake.
6. I’d like to say a few words .......... behalf of Mr Burns who was unable to come.
7. He says he can sign the deal .......... condition that he’s paid .......... advance.
8. Nobody has bought this bungalow yet. It’s still .......... sale.
9. I thought he was a plumber but he is a policeman .......... profession.
10. The Grapes of Wrath is a novel .......... John Steinbeck.
62
Unit 55 Czasownik + przyimek (1)  211
I. Odpowiedz na pytania stosując poprawne przyimki:
1. What is Mrs Benson doing? talk / her husband .............................................
2. What is Harry doing? think / his girlfriend .............................................
3. What is the baby doing? look / the sky .............................................
4. What is Alice doing? smile / Peter .............................................
5. What is Eddie doing? wait / his parents .............................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami z poprawnymi przyimkami:

believe depend invite listen look
1. I’ve been .................... my umbrella the whole day but I haven’t found it yet.
2. I don’t work yet, so I .................... my parents whenever I need money.
3. The Whartons will be our honourable guests. I’ve just .................... them
.................... our reception.
4. It’s not true what you’re saying. I don’t .................... any of your stories.
5. What was the music that you were .................... when I entered your room?
III. Uzupełnij zdania poprawnymi przyimkami:

1. I wonder how George is doing in Glasgow. I’m thinking about writing a letter
.......... him.
2. It’s not nice to laugh .......... other people so rudely.
3. Although my chances aren’t too big, I do hope .......... the best.
4. The boy says he is being wrongly accused .......... stealing the money.
5. Listen! Someone is knocking .......... the front door.
6. Does the coat belong .......... you or somebody else?
7. We must thank Mr Palmer .......... his assistance during the removal.
8. Don’t ever shout .......... me again. I’m not a child any more.
9. We often quarrel .......... each other but never get truly offended.
10. This time, I’m going to concentrate .......... winning the first prize in the game.
11. You’d better apologise .......... Ms Humpton or she’ll never forgive you.
12. If you refer .......... the dictionary, it will provide you ......... an exact definition.
13. I was for paying the whole price, but Sue insisted .......... paying by instalment.
14. Only professor Tandy knows how to deal .......... such complex matters.
15. We’ve got no food and no money. We’d better prepare .......... the worst.
16. You can’t speak .......... Janet. She left .......... Paris yesterday.
17. Honestly, I prefer the cinema .......... the opera.
18. As a child, I never got punished .......... anything.
19. Keep quiet! I don’t approve .......... noisy children.
20. From time to time, Joseph suffers .......... heavy headaches.
63
Unit 56 Czasownik + przyimek (2)  211
I. Odpowiedz na pytania dodając właściwy przyimek do czasownika:
1. ‘What happened, Mr Thompson?’
A policeman / fine / me / drive too fast ‘...........................................................’
2. ‘What was Danny doing last evening?’
He / participate / a sports competition ‘............................................................’
3. ‘Why don’t you like these neighbours?’
They / always / interfere / our privacy ‘............................................................’
4. ‘What have you done with your old washing machine?’
I / dispose / it / last week ‘................................................………………..........’
5. ‘Did the monkeys give you any trouble?’
‘They / adapt / new conditions / quickly ‘No, ..................................................’
II. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami dodając właściwe przyimki:

abstain compensate compliment comply
contribute despair specialise stare
1. That boy in the red sweatshirt can’t take his eyes off you. He’s been
.............................. you for ten minutes.
2. It was his stressful lifestyle that .............................. his death at this early age.
3. Her boyfriend has gone abroad. She’s been .............................. ever seeing
him again.
4. You mustn’t break the regulations. You must .............................. them fully.
5. Mr Palmer isn’t the person we need. He .............................. food processing
not international marketing.
6. Despite winning the first place, the Swedish jumper wasn’t ..............................
his style at all.
7. He had damaged the bumper in my car but he never .............................. it.
8. Passengers will kindly ............................... smoking until the plane takes off.
III. Uzupełnij zdania właściwymi przyimkami:

1. They are losers. They have nothing to pride themselves ............... .
2. First, he said he hated the Lloyds. Later, he sympathised ............... them.
3. As we had no raincoats we had to put up ............... one ragged umbrella.
4. It was the label that mislead me ............... thinking that the coat was original.
5. Please, forgive ............... my being so nosy at times.
6. She said she would cope ............... the job but it seems she was wrong.
7. It’s no use entrusting the task ............... Peter. He will never complete it.
8. I know the prospect pleases you but how do you expect to benefit .............. it?
9. Only Mr Harper objected ............... punishing Tom with detention.
10. She may not like maths but she certainly excels ............... foreign languages.
64
Unit 57 Przymiotnik + przyimek (1)  212
I. Napisz zdania o poszczególnych osobach wykorzystując podane przymiotniki:
good bad proud interested
Simon physics French his dog classical music
Debbie cooking sewing her children animals
Vincent writing poetry mathematics his poems literature
You
Simon is good at physics.

............……........................................................................……………………………….
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................
II. Przepisz zdania korzystając z przymiotników dodając właściwe przyimki:
amazed annoyed anxious aware fit keen pleased scared
1. Joan likes reading very much. Joan is ............................ reading.

2. I am good enough to do this job. I am ............................ this job.
3. This noise makes me angry. I am ............................ this noise.
4. He worries about his children. He is ............................ his children.
5. Andy’s victory was a surprise. We were ............................ Andy’s victory.
6. We know about your problems. We are ............................ your problems.
7. Spiders frighten Gloria. Gloria is ............................ spiders.
8. Her gift gave me a lot of pleasure. I was ............................ her gift.

1. Don’t call your friends names. It’s not nice .......... you to do it.
2. She’s lost her favourite pet. I’m so sorry .......... her.
3. Stop being jealous .......... everything that other people have.
4. They are brothers but they are very different .......... each other.
5. Mr Cook is famous .......... his extravagant teaching methods.
6. He should be ashamed .......... himself. It is really nasty what he has done.
7. The suspect claims he wasn’t involved .......... the bribery at all.
8. This time, you are responsible .......... keeping the house in order.
9. Let’s switch to another channel. I’m tired .......... this silly comedy.
10. Everybody was angry .......... Jack because he forgot the tickets.
11. ‘Your son loves football, doesn’t he?’ ‘That’s right, he’s very fond .......... it.’
12. She won’t tell you anything. It’s typical .......... her to keep everything secret.
65
Unit 58 Przymiotnik + przyimek (2)  212
I. Uzupełnij zdania przymiotnikami dodając właściwe przyimki:
absorbed accustomed bored capable

satisfied similar suspicious terrified
1. ‘Don’t you think they both look alike?’ ‘Indeed. They’re very ............................
each other.’
2. He says he’s too busy to play now. He is ............................ repairing his van.
3. ‘Can Adrian translate this letter into German? ‘Of course, he can. He is
............................ writing and reading in German.’
4. Betty hates frogs. She is ............................ them.
5. ‘Did you like the way your actors performed last night?’ ‘Sure. They were
brilliant. I was really ............................ them.’
6. Don’t tell me any of your stories again. I am truly ............................ them.
7. Don’t ever trust this man. Be ............................ everything he does.
8. Their obstinacy is nothing new to me. I am quite ............................ it.
II. Napisz odpowiedzi za pomocą przymiotników dodając właściwe przyimki:
1. Did Mr Sean like your project? No, .......................................... (critical)

2. Do you think your job is boring? Yes, ......................................... (fed up)
3. Did you know he was an agent? Yes, ......................................... (confident)
4. Has Peter passed his exam? Yes, ......................................... (successful)
5. Does she want to get this dog? Yes, ......................................... (desperate)

1. I must admit I’m rather disappointed .......... the quality of the receiver.
2. You needn’t warn me again. I’m quite conscious .......... the risk I am taking.
3. Don’t spray this onto me! I’m allergic .......... fragrant substances.
4. No other animal can be as faithful .......... its master as the dog.
5. We are dependent .......... the director whenever giving orders is the case.
6. Let me read the list at least twice. I’m not familiar .......... all the names yet.
7. These files must be kept in a safe place. They are very important .......... us.
8. Jack is a hard-working man. He’s very committed .......... his duties.
9. You should tell them you are grateful .......... all the help they’ve given to you.
10. What’s wrong with you? You are being indifferent .......... all my remarks.
11. Don’t disturb me! Can’t you see I’m occupied .......... my paper work.
12. No one believed Mr Harris could be guilty .......... the horrible crime.
13. It was so hard to leave for ever. I was really attached .......... the place.
14. Only Mick was intent .......... going to the techno-party.
15. Sharks are Terry’s hobby. He’s almost obsessed .......... them.
66
Unit 59 Rzeczownik + przyimek  213
I. Przepisz zdania dodając do podanych rzeczowników właściwe przyimki:
1. These two pictures are very different from each other.

.............................................. a big difference ...............................................
2. Jerry knows a lot about constructing boats.
.............................................. good experience .............................................
3. What caused your resignation?
..................................................... reason .......................................................
4. There were a lot of people who didn’t like my suggestions.
......................................... a general disapproval ..........................................
5. Did he account for his bad behaviour?
.................................................. any excuse ..................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania rzeczownikami dodając właściwe przyimki
demand independence intention response skill
1. I’m no longer under my parents’ control. I have a complete ...........................

them.
2. We have sold a huge number of these dictionaries. There’s a very big
......................... them.
3. Nobody else can amuse people as well as Bob can. His ......................... telling
jokes is simply incomparable.
4. They weren’t willing to help. Their ......................... our request was unfriendly.
5. Believe me, I had no ......................... taking your briefcase. I did it by mistake.
III. Uzupełnij zdania właściwymi przyimkami:

1. The two boys will surely receive a harsh punishment .......... their misdeeds.
2. We all have a strong belief .......... our team’s chance to win the competition.
3. What’s your comment .......... the current matters, Mr Talbot?
4. I’m still waiting for a reply .......... my letter of complaint.
5. The increase .......... the number of candidates doesn’t surprise us at all.
6. My older brother has always had a big influence .......... me.
7. Her attitude .......... every problem is always consistent.
8. It was only Frank who paid attention .......... what the lecturer was saying.
9. Our group has a good reputation .......... their readiness to help at any time.
10. Mrs Flurry takes great pride .......... her children’s achievements.
11. After the scandal people lost their trust .......... the insurance company.
12. There’s a new method of fighting with an addiction .......... smoking.
13. Our firm is planning to make an investment .......... a new branch in Oslo.
14. Regular physical exercise can be a good solution .......... a stressful lifestyle.
15. You certainly have an advantage .......... living with your caring parents.
67
Unit 60 Miejsce przyimka w zdaniu  202
I. Wstaw F jeżeli konstrukcja zdania jest formalna lub P jeżeli jest potoczna:
1. With whom is she walking? ............

2. What did he speak about? ............
3. Which place do they live in? ............
4. At whom were you laughing? ............
5. Who does he write to? ............
6. On whom are you dependent? ............
7. At what time did they arrive? ............
8. Who does she confide in? ............
9. In which cupboard do you keep it? ............
10. What are they looking at? ............
II. Utwórz konstrukcje nieformalne:

1. I don’t know the people to whom you were talking.
......................................................................................................................
2. The enemy to which they surrendered was rather weak.
......................................................................................................................
3. The articles for which you have asked are out of stock.
......................................................................................................................
4. Who is the man to whom you are so grateful?
......................................................................................................................
5. The theory on which we base our assumptions can be mistaken.
......................................................................................................................
6. The new watch, for which I have exchanged my old one, is faulty.
......................................................................................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania zaimkami that, which, who lub whom:

1. The definition .................... I referred to can be found in every encyclopaedia.
2. .................... did she offer her heart to?
3. In .................... book have you found the banknote?
4. The danger to .................... we were exposed couldn’t be avoided easily.
5. They refused to say .................... animals they had experimented on.
6. About .................... of the two questions are you going to consult Dr Crump?
7. Albert is the only man to .................... I can turn for help.
8. .................... are you going to apologise for?
9. .................... of the people do you depend on?
10. The firm .................... I was employed in went bankrupt last year.
11. Peter, .................... I owe very much to, has never let me down.
12. I’m sure I’ve heard about the occurrence .................... you are talking about.
68
Unit 61 ‘Be’ - czas teraźniejszy  214
I. Wstaw poprawną odmianę czasownika be w czasie teraźniejszym:
1. I .................... a teacher. 6. We .................... singers.
2. You .................... a student. 7. You .................... dancers.
3. She .................... a doctor. 8. They .................... musicians.
4. He .................... a patient.
5. It .................... a hospital.
II. Ułóż pytania z czasownikiem be oraz udziel krótkiej odpowiedzi:

1. Alex / eight years old ............................................? Yes, .......................
2. You / an only child ............................................? Yes, .......................
3. Lisa / short haired ............................................? Yes, .......................
4. Bob and Eric / friends ............................................? Yes, .......................
5. We / in danger ............................................? Yes, .......................
6. Angie / Harry’s sister ............................................? No, ........................

7. Nigel / a manager ....…....................................? No, ........................
8. The clothes / cheap .….......................................? No, ........................
9. I / lonely ..…......................................? No, ........................
10. Her dog / bad .….......................................? No, ........................
III. Napisz pełnymi zdaniami o poszczególnych osobach:

age occupation appearance
Eddie eight pupil small / red-haired
Mrs Baxter thirty two secretary short / pretty
Alice and Pam nineteen student of average height
You
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................
IV. Wstaw poprawną odmianę czasownika be w czasie teraźniejszym:

Hi there! My name .......... Donald and this .......... my best friend - Hucky. Hucky .......... a
Labrador. It .......... two years old and it .......... very nice. Angela and Sonia .......... my
younger sisters. They .......... a bit disobedient, I .......... afraid. My older brother’s name
.......... Richard. He .......... a broker and his wife .......... a dentist.
69
Unit 62 ‘Be’ - czas przeszły  214
I. Utwórz zdania w czasie przeszłym za pomocą czasownika be:
1. I / busy / yesterday ...............................................................
2. You / at home / on Friday ...............................................................
3. She / angry / two days ago ...............................................................
4. He / in Rome / in 1995 ...............................................................
5. It / an accident ...............................................................
6. We / in London / a long time ago ...............................................................
7. You / rich / in the past ...............................................................
8. They / at our place / last month ...............................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikiem be w czasie przeszłym:

1. David .................... ill last week.
2. ‘.................... you on holiday in June?’ ‘No, I .................... .’
3. The Nortons .................... in their garden yesterday.
4. I .................... not a good gambler.
5. .................... there many people at the stadium?
6. We .................... in Spain two weeks ago.
7. .................... Greg and Noam at home last evening?
8. She says she .................... not tired yesterday.
9. You .................... Peter’s best friend when you .................... children.
10. .................... they free last Saturday?
III. Opowiedz o poszczególnych osobach stosując czasownik be:

last summer last winter last Saturday
Timothy on the Caribbean at home at his friend’s
Ann and her sister in America in the Alps at a party
The Burtons in Scotland at their parents’ at a barbecue
You
IV. Uzupełnij tekst poprawną odmianą czasownika be w czasie przeszłym:

Arnold Thuram .................... the best footballer in our college league when he ....................
a young boy. Our team .................... called The Tigers and our coach .................... Mr
Croops. Arnold’s favourite position .................... of the centre forward and honestly, he
.................... the most lucky goal scorer. Arnold’s younger brother, Frank, .................... our
goalkeeper. They both .................... favoured by the fans and nobody else .................... as
popular at college as they .................... .
70
Unit 63 ‘Have’ - czas teraźniejszy  214
I. Napisz co poszczególne osoby posiadają oraz czego nie posiadają:
a mobile phone a snowboard a private plane a computer
Lenny yes yes no no
Betty no yes no yes
The Hues no no yes yes
You
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................
II. Wstaw poprawną odmianę czasownika have w czasie teraźniejszym:
1. My brother .............................. two tickets for a concert.

2. .............................. (you) a spare wheel in your car?
3. We can’t buy anything because we .............................. any money.
4. I .............................. a lot of friends in Germany.
5. .............................. (Mrs McCall) any flowers in her garden?
6. She can’t open the door. She .............................. the key.
7. He lives alone. He .............................. a wife or children.
8. .............................. (your neighbours) a blue van?
9. I .............................. my raincoat with me. I’m not afraid of rain.
10. You can’t go climbing with us. You ............................ any climbing equipment.
III. Ułóż pytania za pomocą czasownika have oraz udziel krótkiej odpowiedzi:
1. Samantha / two dogs ..............................................? No, ..................

2. Mr Parker’s son / a flat ..............................................? Yes, ................
3. David’s parents / a car-wash ..............................................? Yes, ................
4. You / a new pair of trousers ..............................................? No, ..................
5. The Graths / one daughter ..............................................? Yes, ................
6. She / a computer ..............................................? Yes, ................
7. The camera / a battery ..............................................? No, ..................
8. We / much time to spare ..............................................? Yes, ................
9. They / a shoe-factory ..............................................? No, ..................
10. You / a map of London ..............................................? Yes, ................
71
Unit 64 ‘Have’ - czas przeszły  214
I. Uzupełnij pytania i odpowiedzi według danych w tabeli:
yesterday last Monday in 1996

Bob guests a headache an accident
Fred an exam an operation a promotion
Jim a job interview a birthday a divorce
1. ‘....................................................... (Bob) in 1996?’ ‘Yes, he did.’

2. ‘....................................................... an operation last Monday?’ ‘Yes, he did.’
3. ‘....................................................... an exam yesterday?’ ‘Yes, he did.’
4. ‘Did Jim have a headache last Monday?’ ‘.............................. .’
5. ‘....................................................... (Bob) yesterday?’ ‘Yes, he did.’
6. ‘....................................................... a promotion in 1996?’ ‘Yes, he did.’
7. ‘Did Jim have a job interview yesterday?’ ‘.............................. .’
8. ‘Who had a divorce in 1996?’ ‘.............................. .’
9. ‘....................................................... a headache last Monday?’ ‘Yes, he did.’
10. ‘Did Bob have a birthday yesterday?’ ‘.............................. .’
II. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną odmianą czasownika have w czasie przeszłym:

1. ‘ ............................ (your father) an unexpected visit yesterday?’ ‘Yes, he did.’
2. We didn’t talk to anyone because we .............................. enough time to do it.
3. I’m not going to take a bath now. I .............................. a shower one hour ago.
4. She couldn’t sleep well. She .............................. nightmares the whole night.
5. .............................. (Mr Trump) any problems with his car yesterday?
6. I was hungry. I .............................. anything to eat.
7. We liked our neighbours because we ........................... any troubles with them.
8. He couldn’t read the letter as he .............................. his spectacles.
9. Jim could afford to buy expensive clothes. He ........................... lots of money.
10. What .............................. (you) for dinner yesterday?
III. Uzupełnij zdania frazami wraz z czasownikiem have w czasie przeszłym:
(a go) a good time good luck a puncture a rest a toothache
0. Each of us had a go at repairing the broken camera but it was all in vain.
1. He .............................. but he was afraid of going to the dentist.
2. Yesterday, I .............................. at the party. I enjoyed it a lot.
3. I didn’t need to .............................. . I wasn’t tired at all.
4. We couldn’t drive any further. The car .............................. , unfortunately.
5. Only Jenny .............................. in the casino last night. She won five hundred
pounds.
72
Unit 65 ‘Have’ - forma ‘kauzatywna’  214
I. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję ‘kauzatywną’:
1. I will ask someone to replace the broken water-pipe.
......................................................................................................................
2. I went to the dentist to pull the sore tooth out.
......................................................................................................................
3. We have asked some people to clean the paths.
......................................................................................................................
4. My mother paid the man to repair the iron.
......................................................................................................................
5. Our house is being renovated.
We ................................................................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania za pomocą konstrukcji ‘kauzatywnej’:

1. Look! Your coat’s dirty. You must .............................. (clean / it) at once.
2. You’d better ............................. (replace / the broken part) at a service station.
3. I’m thinking of .............................. (redecorate / my flat) next summer.
4. Two years ago, we .............................. (install / new wiring) in our house.
5. Why don’t you .............................. (see to / your computer) by a specialist?
6. This skirt is too long for me. I must .............................. (shorten / it).
7. I can’t move from the office, so I will .............................. (deliver / the post) by
my deputy.
8. Why did you ........................... (print / the data)? We didn’t need them, in fact.
9. Something’s wrong with my cabrio. I’d better .............................. (overhaul / it)
as soon as possible.
10. Don’t throw this cartridge away! I can .............................. (refill / it) for you.
III. Uzupełnij zdania podanymi czasownikami wraz z konstrukcją ‘kauzatywną’:

cook cut examine exchange proof-read recharge tailor take
1. His hair was too long. He .............................. yesterday.
2. The battery is low. You must .............................. .
3. Joan’s eye is aching. She will have to .............................. by an oculist.
4. Because the pane is broken I am .............................. for a new one now.
5. We don’t prepare meals by ourselves. We .............................. by our chef.
6. The minister’s suits fit him perfectly. He always .............................. .
7. How about a photograph? Let’s .............................. by someone.
8. There are mistakes in the handwriting. You should .............................. .
73
Unit 66 Be / have  214
I. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną odmianą czasowników be oraz have:
1. ‘How old .................... your sister?’ ‘She .................... twelve now.’

2. ‘What .................... you doing now?’ ‘I .................... washing my clothes.’
3. I keep my car outside because I .................... a garage.
4. ‘How .................... your father today?’ ‘Thanks, he .................... all right.’
5. I will not speak. I .................... nothing to say.
6. .................... there any free seats in this compartment?
7. We took our baby to a doctor. She .................... a cold.
8. What .................... your point of view about this matter, Phil?
9. .................... it true that your father .................... a captain in the army twenty
years ago?
10. Let’s give up. I don’t think we .................... any chance of winning the bet.
11. ‘What .................... Mr Braddock’s present job?’ ‘He .................... an
electrician.’
12. Our team .................... a new sponsor since January.
13. Peter ................... sleeping soundly when his parents came home late at night.
14. ‘Don’t you think the carpet needs cleaning?’ ‘Certainly. I will .................... it
cleaned soon.’
15. ‘What .................... I supposed to do in this situation?’ ‘Just wait.’
II. Ułóż pytania z be lub have oraz udziel krótkiej odpowiedzi:

1. Eddie’s brother / a painter ..............................? No, ....................
2. Angela / at school / yesterday ..............................? No, ....................
3. She / an accident / in 1987 ..............................? Yes, ....................
4. Your friend / a good pianist ..............................? Yes, ....................
5. The Parkers / busy / last morning ..............................? No, ....................
6. Bob / a new computer / now ..............................? Yes, ....................
7. His wife / a headache / last night ..............................? Yes, ....................
8. There / bookcases / in the room ..............................? No, ....................
III. Wstaw poprawną odmianę be lub have:

Last month, I ............... problems with my car and now I ............... them again. A few
weeks ago, I ............... the brakes checked and the pistons replaced with new ones and
there ............... still this peculiar noise that the engine ............... making. Admittedly, my
cabrio ............... rather old, but it still ............... the glamour of a very popular make.
Certainly, I ............... not going to exchange it for a new vehicle now that I ............... it for
so long. Honestly, it ............... with me since 1977 and the pleasure of ............... it can’t be
compared to any other one.
74
Unit 67 ‘Do’ - różne zastosowania  214
I. Uzupełnij zdania właściwą formą czasownika do :
1. What .................... this word mean in English?

2. I .................... not like drinking milk in the morning.
3. How .................... you spell priority?
4. ‘Joan sings very well, .................... she?’ ‘Certainly, she .................... .’
5. We live as comfortably as our neighbours .................... .
6. ‘.................... you feel well yesterday?’ ‘No, I .................... .’
7. She waited longer than we .................... .
8. Look what you have .................... . You have spilt water all over the floor.
9. ‘Where .................... your father keep his keys?’ ‘He keeps them in the drawer.’
10. .................... hurry up or we’ll be late again.
11. ‘.................... you drink beer?’ ‘No. I .................... .’
12. I asked what she was .................... and she said she was practising yoga.
II. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję emfatyczną:
1. John really loves Linda. ...............................................................

2. We want you to come very much. ...............................................................
3. Please, help us this time. ...............................................................
4. Sonia really wanted to keep that dog. ...............................................................
5. He certainly saw a UFO last night. ...............................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną formą czasownika do lub make:

1. Will you .................... me a favour, please?
2. I suspect they don’t .................... money by any fair means.
3. He was a famous sailor. He .................... a lot of discoveries.
4. Couldn’t we .................... this difficult exercise together?
5. I’m sorry, I have .................... a mistake.
6. Who’s going to .................... this work for you?
7. You’ll have to .................... a decision on your own, I’m afraid.
8. It is said that the man .................... business with the mafia.
9. I was reprimanded by the teacher as I didn’t .................... my homework.
10. We have failed now, but next time we’ll .................... our best to succeed.
11. It was Arnold who kept .................... such silly suggestions.
12. Don’t ever .................... fun of your schoolfriends.
13. This dog won’t .................... you any harm. It’s very mild.
14. .................... a choice now. I cannot wait so long.
15. He always .................... his duties properly when he worked with us.
75
Unit 68 Can - may  217
I. Napisz o poszczególnych osobach stosując czasownik can:
dance speak German play the piano drive a car

Judy yes no no yes
Sammy no no yes yes
Robert yes yes no no
You
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................…………………...
II. Napisz o poszczególnych osobach stosując czasownik may:
smoke stay up late drink beer eat sweets

Brian no no yes Yes
Cindy no yes yes No
Gregory yes no no Yes
You
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................
III. Ułóż pytania stosując can oraz udziel krótkich odpowiedzi:
1. Celine / swim well ........................................? Yes, ...................

2. You / sleep long / on Sunday ........................................? No, ....................
3. Ms Dean / read in Swedish ........................................? Yes, ...................
4. Your dog / jump high ........................................? Yes, ...................
5. The secretary / write a memo ........................................? No, .....................
IV. Ułóż pytania stosując may oraz udziel krótkich odpowiedzi:

1. Joan / smoke cigarettes ........................................? No, .....................
2. This man / enter the office ........................................? Yes, ...................
3. We / read the secret files ........................................? No, .....................
4. Arnold / drink alcohol ........................................? No, .....................
5. You / come home late ........................................? Yes, ...................
76
Unit 69 Can - could - be able to  219
I. Uzupełnij zdania za pomocą can (not) lub could (not):
1. A: Why didn’t you come to the meeting yesterday?

B: I’m sorry, I ......................... come because I was having guests at home.
A: ......................... you come tomorrow?
B: Certainly, I ......................... also bring my best friend with me.
2. A: How about tennis?
B: Well, I ......................... play it well a few years ago, but I’m afraid
I ......................... now.
A: What other games ......................... we play together?
B: I think we ......................... play chess.
3. A: ......................... you look after my baby this evening?
B: I’m sorry, I ......................... .
A: ......................... you come tomorrow then?
B: No. I ......................... . I am having an appointment with my dentist.
II. Wstaw can, could lub właściwą formę be able to:
1. We ......................... (not) escape through the fire exit as the door was locked.
2. I ......................... (not) see to your radio at the moment. I ......................... do
it tomorrow.
3. Tony is a good cook. He ......................... prepare delicious meals.
4. He ......................... (not) walk since he broke his leg at the skiing camp.
5. I’m sorry, I ....................... (not) arrive earlier. I had to stay longer in the office.
6. ......................... (you) run fast when you were a schoolboy?
7. Don’t bother to mend the socks. I ......................... do it for you.
8. Although I had little time, I ........................ leave a message for my roommate.
9. If you keep talking, you ......................... (not) take notes during the lecture.
10. We ........................ operate the panel since the training that we went through.
III. Zastosuj poprawną formę be able to wraz z podanymi czasownikami:
defeat learn pay recognise set write
1. When I was younger I .............................. foreign languages faster than now.

2. I haven’t seen Debbie for so many years that I’m afraid I ..............................
her at the station tomorrow.
3. Rob used to .............................. computer programs when I knew him.
4. You .............................. your debts back unless you start working hard.
5. The king .............................. his enemy because his army was much stronger.
6. If you hope to make a good policeman you must .............................. a good
example.
77
Unit 70 May - might  220
I. Napisz zdania przypuszczające stosując czasownik may:
1. A: I wonder who the tall man is.
B: He / be / our new copywriter ............................................................
2. A: Do you know where Mr Webber lives?
B: He / live / in the next village ............................................................
3. A: Have you decided about your holidays yet?
B: I / go to the mountains ............................................................
4. A: What is she doing in front of the gate?
B: She / wait for someone ............................................................
5. A: It’s interesting when the new opera building will be ready.
B: It / be ready / next month ............................................................
II. Przepisz zdania stosując czasownik might:

1. Perhaps, they will not arrive on time. They .................................................
2. I’m not sure if he is for our suggestions. He .....................................................
3. It’s possible that he is a spy. He .....................................................
4. It’s not sure if the place is safe or not. The place .........................................
5. Perhaps, it’s some trick. It .......................................................
6. It’s possible that they are in danger. They .................................................
7. We aren’t sure if we will win. We ....................................................
8. Perhaps, this plant is poisonous. This plant .........................................
9. I don’t know if it belongs to me. It .......................................................
10. They are likely to mistake my name. They .................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania przy pomocy may lub might:

1. A: Do you know when Jerry is going to phone?
B: He said he .............................. phone the following week.
2. A: What do you call someone who can speak without moving their lips?
B: I’m not sure but it .............................. be a ventriloquist.
3. A: Shall I take the oil lamps?
B: Sure. They .............................. come in handy when the night falls.
4. A: How long will the festival last?
B: They say that it .............................. last for a few days.
5. A: Did she tell you anything interesting?
B: She wasn’t sure but she said I .............................. get a promotion soon.
6. A: What did they write in the note?
B: They wrote that the workers .............................. be preparing a strike.
78
Unit 71 May - be allowed to  220
I. Przepisz zdania stosując may lub be allowed to:
1. My parents don’t usually let me play computer games after school.
I .....................................................................................................................
2. Your sister didn’t let you take the cap off in the sun.
You ...............................................................................................................
3. We didn’t let the people pick fruit from our trees.
The people ...................................................................................................
4. The teachers don’t let us speak during the lessons.
We .................................................................................................................
5. My mother will let me eat as much ice-cream as I want to.
I .....................................................................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania przy pomocy zwrotu be allowed to oraz czasowników:

eat make meet ski smoke
1. School children .............................. (not) cigarettes at all.
2. I .............................. (not) sweets since I was hospitalised.
3. We ............................ from the highest hills during the sports camp last winter.
4. As soon as your behaviour improves, you .............................. your friends
as often as you want to.
5. The gamekeeper let us make a picnic in the woods, but he said we
.............................. (not) a bonfire.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując may, might lub be allowed to:

1. Nobody .............................. go down the cave since the tragic accident that
happened last autumn.
2. We were fined because we didn’t remember that we .............................. (not)
feed the animals.
3. Tom .............................. (not) take my bike since he returned it so dirty.
4. You .............................. use the emergency option on special occasions only.
5. The holidaymakers .............................. (not) swim in the lake although the
water was very clean.
6. I said you .............................. use my computer whenever you needed it.
7. Don’t ever read my letters! You .............................. do it.
8. One .............................. (not) smoke in public places since the new bill was
introduced.
9. If you promise to drive carefully, you .............................. take your father’s
car.
10. The regulations say that you ..............................(not) take photos in the
museum.
79
Unit 72 Must - have to  221
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując must lub have to oraz czasowniki:
ask for divide fulfil give up hurry up look after take wait
1. It’s a quarter to seven. We .............................. if we don’t want to be late.

2. There were so many candidates waiting for the qualifications that we
.............................. them into five groups.
3. Don’t forget about your medicine. You .............................. it twice a day.
4. If I don’t get any bonus, we .............................. going on an expensive holiday.
5. The injured .............................. for about two hours before the rescue arrived.
6. Since professor Taylor fell ill, I .............................. his duties.
7. It’s me who .............................. everything at home. I do shopping, washing,
cleaning and a dozen of other jobs.
8. Each time that we wanted to leave the boarding house we ..............................
Mrs McCoy’s permission.
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując właściwą formę czasownika have to:

1. Every morning, I .............................. take the dog for a walk.
2. As soon as we finish writing the register, we .............................. ask for the
director’s signature.
3. Caroline .............................. take care of her younger brother since her
parents divorced.
4. You .............................. be watchful each time that you enter this area.
5. Mr Baxter is responsible for .............................. control the quality tests.
6. Remember that you .............................. wash your hands before every meal.
7. We .............................. find another au pair girl, if Janet decides to leave.
8. Several years ago, our students .............................. wear uniforms.
9. We won’t be able to help Tom with the removal if he .............................. do it
next week.
10. Mr Plump .............................. do a lot of physical exercise since his doctor told
him to lose weight.
III. Przepisz zdania stosując have to:

1. It was my duty to clean the deck each morning.
I .....................................................................................................................
2. You will be obliged to work as long as your boss tells you to.
You ...............................................................................................................
3. Jerry has been under an obligation to type every letter for Mr Black.
Jerry .............................................................................................................
80
Unit 73 Mustn’t - needn’t - don’t have to  222
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując mustn’t lub needn’t:
1. A: Shall I collect the bank accounts for you, sir?
B: Not necessarily. You ..................... do it everyday.
2. A: Can we light a fire somewhere here?
B: Absolutely not. You .................... do it in the proximity of the forest.
3. A: I’ll give you a ride to the city centre.
B: Oh, you .................... do it. I can take a bus.
4. A: What are my duties, Mr Rooney?
B: Well, I want you to organise conferences and meetings, but you
.................... do it daily, of course.
5. A: Do you think they mind if I light a cigarette?
B: Sure, they do. You .................... smoke on a tram.
II. Przepisz zakazy stosując mustn’t:

1. ZOO NOTICE: Don’t feed the animals. One .....................................
2. PARK NOTICE: Don’t drink pond water. One .....................................
3. OFFICE NOTICE: Don’ t smoke inside. One .....................................
4. MUSEUM NOTICE: Don’t touch the exhibits. One .....................................
5. HOSPITAL NOTICE: Don’t make noise. One .....................................
6. BUS-STOP NOTICE: Don’t drop litter. One .....................................
7. GARDEN NOTICE: Don’t tread on the plants. One .....................................
8. HOUSE NOTICE: Don’t tease the dogs. One .....................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując don’t / doesn’t / didn’t have to oraz czasowniki:
convince pay put on translate walk
1. We don’t use much gas, so we .............................. high bills for it.

2. Stewart .............................. to the station as I gave him a ride in my car.
3. It wasn’t raining hard. We .............................. our raincoats.
4. You .............................. everything he says. I can understand him quite well.
5. I respect her opinion very much. She .............................. me about her right.
IV. Uzupełnij zdania stosując needn’t oraz podane czasowniki:
call get up mend swallow water
1. My grandmother .............................. my socks. I can easily buy new ones.

2. He’s feeling all right now. He .............................. more of the pills.
3. I can put the fire down on my own. You .............................. the fire brigade.
4. Look! It’s raining. I .............................. the flowers, then.
5. Brian .............................. early. He’s on holiday.
81
Unit 74 Should - ought to  223
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując should oraz podane czasowniki:
go to leave put on set study
1. The morning is rather frosty. We .............................. some warm clothes.

2. Michael is feeling unwell. He .............................. a doctor.
3. She wants to get up early next morning. She .............................. her alarm-
clock.
4. The snake can be dangerous. You .............................. it alone.
5. Jake keeps getting poor marks. He .............................. more.
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując ought not to oraz podane czasowniki:
drink drive eat leave read
1. He looks too fat. He .............................. so much food.

2. Someone could steal your things. You .............................. the door unlocked.
3. Shirley’s got problems with her eyes. She .............................. books at night.
4. Your blood pressure is too high. You .............................. too much coffee.
5. There’s a speed limit. We .............................. so fast.
III. Napisz pytania do podanych zdań rozpoczynające się od zasugerowanych słów:

1. We ought to go to the library. Where ................................................?
2. He shouldn’t obtain the salary. Why ...................................................?
3. You should answer quickly. How ...................................................?
4. They ought to return on Monday. When .................................................?
5. I should take the pill twice a day. How often .........................................?
6. She shouldn’t tell the truth. What ..................................................?
7. We ought to go to the police. Where ...........................................….?
8. He should leave a message. What ..................................................?
9. They oughtn’t to cross the road. Why ...................................................?
10. I should be back home at one o’clock. What time .......…...............................?
IV. Uzupełnij zdania stosując should lub ought:

1. .................... we to let them know about the conference?
2. Who .................... be responsible for running the accounts?
3. There .................... not be too many people in the reading-room at this time.
4. Nobody .................... to leave their windows open wide.
5. It’s detective Aldridge who .................... investigate the matter.
6. Our postulates .................... be considered as quickly as possible.
7. .................... you not have the TV set repaired by a specialist?
8. If you have debts, you .................... to pay them back before going away.
82
Unit 75 Used to  223
I. Napisz zdania o poszczególnych osobach stosując used to oraz dane z tabeli:
ten years ago five years ago three years ago

Mr Gordon smoked a lot worked in a mine went fishing often
Benny got up late learned French ate a lot of sweets
Laura travelled much had friends in Oslo studied economics
You
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując used to oraz podane czasowniki:
be behave bring like listen to play quarrel wear
1. In the past, we .............................. with each other, but now we live in perfect
partnership.
2. Stanley .............................. a polite child, but he’s changed for worse.
3. I don’t have time for sports now, but I .............................. volleyball very often
when I was a young boy.
4. Sarah’s become a bit shy. She .............................. more bravely when I first
met her.
5. Before she married the millionaire she .............................. cheap clothes.
Now, she looks like a film star.
6. Mark .............................. disco music before. Now, he prefers rock.
7. Uncle Bob was a very generous man. He .............................. us a lot of gifts
whenever he visited us in Bradford.
8. Five years ago, Jim and Fred .............................. each other very much. Now,
they are enemies.
III. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną odmianą czasownika used to:

1. ‘Where .............................. (Peter) work in 1990?’ ‘In a shipyard.’
2. ‘Who .............................. type all the letters?’ ‘Mary did.’
3. ‘What .............................. (Paul) tell?’ ‘He ............................. a lot of jokes.’
4. ‘How often .............................. (Ann) go to London?’ ‘Twice a week.’
5. ‘ .............................. (you) learn Chinese?’ ‘No, I didn’t.’
6. ‘How .............................. (Simon) travel to work?’ ‘By tube.’
7. ‘Who .............................. prepare meals at your home?’ ‘My mother did.’
8. ‘ .............................. (Sandra) get up very early?’ ‘Yes, she did.’
83
Unit 76 May-might-could + have done  224
I. Dokończ zdania stosując konstrukcję may + have done:
1. John didn’t come to our meeting. He ........................................ (be) busy.
2. She was fined by a policeman. She ........................................ (exceed) the
speed limit.
3. George went to sleep early. He ........................................ (feel) bad.
4. They arrived late. Their bus ........................................ (not come) on time.
5. Philip looks depressed. His girlfriend ........................................ (drop) him.
6. Sue quit the job in the shop. She ........................................ (not like) it.
7. ‘Why did the baby cry?’ ‘Someone ........................................ (hurt) her.’
8. He was arrested by the police. He ........................................ (commit) a crime.
9. They didn’t install the plug. They ...................................... (not be able) to do it.
10. She gave up sweets. She ........................................ (want) to get slim.
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując could (not) + have done oraz podane czasowniki:
be carry out discover eat forget suffer from tell win
1. ‘Why didn’t Ted leave any message for us?’ ‘No idea. He ..............................
to do it.’
2. It .............................. Ronald that you saw in the theatre. He never goes to the
theatre.
3. You .............................. any meat there. It was a vegetarian restaurant.
4. Doctor Hennesey was busy when I came. He .............................. an operation.
5. The plane didn’t take off. The security .............................. a bomb on board.
6. He refused to speak at all. He .............................. a sore throat.
7. ‘Why was Jenny so happy?’ ‘She .............................. the main prize.’
8. Ronald .............................. such a lie. He’s too decent a man.
III. Przepisz zdania stosując might / could (not) + have done:

1. It is possible that Mr Williams became angry.
Mr Williams .....................................................................................................
2. Possibly, Miriam misunderstood my remarks.
Miriam .............................................................................................................
3. It’s not possible that the telephone was out of order.
The telephone ................................................................................................
4. Is it possible that Richard got offended with us?
......................................................................................................................?
5. Possibly, there were too many candidates for the job.
There ..............................................................................................................
84
Unit 77 Could - could have done - be able to  225
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując could, could have done lub be able to:
1. You .............................. (tell) me about Sam’s birthday. I’d certainly have
come to wish him all the best.
2. Although I had no map, I .............................. (reach) my destination.
3. He was so exhausted that he .............................. hardly speak to us.
4. ‘The door in the Parkers’ garage was open wide.’ ‘Do you think a burglar
.............................. (break in) while they were away?’
5. The first time when he was being heard, he said nothing. But, then, we
.............................. (convince) him to tell the whole truth.
6. It .............................. (not be) Angela that you met in the car-wash. She
doesn’t work there.
7. It’s not true what you’re saying. You .............................. (not read) at all when
you were three years old.
8. ‘Why is Judy crying?’ ‘I’m not sure but something wrong ..............................
(happen) to her.’
9. I .............................. (not find) any better place for parking the car, so I left it
here.
10. Neil said that he .............................. (not come) yesterday, because he had to
help his parents at home.
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując could lub could have done oraz czasowniki:
break go to have help invite make show translate
1. You .............................. Sarah to your wedding ceremony. She likes you and
I’m certain she’d like to come.
2. I wish Brian were with us now. He .............................. us repair the faulty
carburettor.
3. ‘Why is Donna wearing a plaster?’ ‘I don’t know. She .............................. her
leg while she was skiing.’
4. Tom .............................. the cinema with you yesterday, but he preferred to
stay at home.
5. I’m not sure but Mr Simmons .............................. his car repainted. It
seems to look more elegant now.
6. If you asked Paula, she .............................. this letter into Polish for you.
7. ‘How did he find out about the secret files?’ ‘Someone ..............................
them to him.’
8. Frank was doubtful at first, but I .............................. him believe in my theory
with ease.
85
Unit 78 Could not have done  225
I. Napisz zdania jak w przykładzie stosując could not have done:
 Sarah: David, you used my computer, didn’t you?
David: No, I didn’t. I didn’t even enter your office yesterday.
David couldn’t have used Sarah’s computer because he didn’t even enter
her office yesterday.
1. Sarah: You’ve damaged my rollers.

David: Not me. I didn’t even touch them.
David ................................................................................................................
2. Sarah: I saw you in a coffee-bar this morning.
David: That’s impossible. I was working all the morning.
Sarah ................................................................................................................
3. Sarah: Is that you who ate my ice-cream?
David: Certainly not. I hate ice-cream.
David ................................................................................................................
4. Sarah: Someone told me you had dated another girl.
David: Don’t believe it. You’re the only one that I love.
David ................................................................................................................
5. Sarah: I met your mother yesterday.
David: That’s not possible. My mother is still in France.
Sarah ................................................................................................................
6. Sarah: I have lost weight recently.
David: Don’t fool me. You keep eating sweets all the time.
Sarah ................................................................................................................
7. Sarah: You’ve devastated my wonderful flowers in the garden.
David: You’re wrong. I haven’t gone out there for a few days.
David ................................................................................................................
8. Sarah: Mr Benson has borrowed your lawn-mower.
David: How come? I don’t have one.
Mr Benson .......................................................................................................
86
Unit 79 Must have done - had to do  226
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując must have done:
1. A: I saw a big hairy creature in the mountains.
B: It .............................. (be) the Yeti.
2. A: Joshua went out without even saying good-bye.
B: He .............................. (take) offence with us.
3. A: I had problems with my stomach the whole day.
B: You .............................. (eat) some stale food.
4. A: Somebody has spilt water on the floor.
B: Ronald .............................. (do) it. He was here before us.
5. A: I’m sure he said two thousand pounds.
B: I thought he said one thousand. I .............................. (misunderstand) him.
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując must have done lub had to do:
1. We .............................. (get up) very early when we worked on the farm.
2. Arnie didn’t arrive. He .............................. (forget) about our meeting.
3. Mrs Hilton was taken to hospital. She .............................. (feel) really bad.
4. It was unfair. I .............................. (keep) guard while the rest were having
a good time.
5. The article was so difficult that most of us .............................. (read) it more
than once to understand it.
6. There are puddles of water everywhere and the crops are badly damaged.
There .............................. (be) a terrible storm here.
7. My parents left for two weeks. It was me who .............................. (take) care
of everything in the house.
8. As far as I remember, a big oak tree grew here before. I guess they
.............................. (cut) it down some time ago.
III. Przepisz zdania stosując must have done lub had to:
1. It was Robert’s duty to park the hotel guests’ cars.
Robert ..........................................................................................................
2. It’s very probable that someone discovered the secret passage.
Someone .....................................................................................................
3. Were you obliged to report on your every action?
...................................................................................................................?
4. There’s a high probability that they got stuck in a traffic jam.
They ............................................................................................................
5. I’m almost sure that Jeff used this database.
Jeff ..............................................................................................................
87
Unit 80 Should / ought to + have done  226
I. Dokończ zdania stosując should have done:
1. ‘I saw a burglar around.’ ‘You ........................................ (call the police)’’.
2. Janet had a toothache. She ........................................ (go to the dentist).
3. ‘I was very cold.’ ‘You ........................................ (put on a warm coat)’.
4. Sam was worried. He ........................................ (talk to someone).
5. We couldn’t do the repairs. We ........................................ (ask Jim for help).
6. He got a poor mark. He ........................................ (learn more).
7. ‘I lost my documents.’ ‘You .......................................... (be more careful).’
8. She felt even worse. She ........................................ (be taken to hospital).
9. ‘I couldn’t sleep well.’ ‘You ........................................ (take a sleeping pill).’
10. He didn’t perform well. He ........................................ (practice more).
II. Dokończ zdania stosując ought not to have done:

1. I broke the vase. I ........................................ (touch it).
2. He got offended. You ......................................... (call him a fool).
3. They spoiled the fun. They ........................................ (get so drunk).
4. ‘The dog bit me.’ ‘You ........................................ (tease it).’
5. He was fined. He ........................................ (drive so fast).
6. I lost her book. I ........................................ (borrow it).
7. The child cried. She ........................................ (shout at him).
8. Mrs Tusk was very angry. We ........................................ (pick her flowers).
9. A fire broke out. They ........................................ (play with matches).
10. She got sunburnt. She ........................................ (sunbathe so long).
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując should (not) have done:

1. Why didn’t you ask me for help? You .............................. (do) it as soon as
you had found out about the bad situation.
2. He did a silly thing. He .............................. (touch) anything in the room before
the investigators’ arrival.
3. The party was such a fun. You .............................. (come) to enjoy it with us.
4. His stomach is aching. He .............................. (eat) so many unripe apples.
5. Why haven’t they come yet? They .............................. (be) here a long time
ago.
6. We have got huge debts. We .............................. (borrow) so much money
from our friends.
7. Little Harry cried all night. He .............................. (watch) the horror film on
TV.
8. I wish we had a better solution. We .............................. (think) about one much
earlier.
88
Unit 81 Didn’t have to do - needn’t  227
have done
I. Przepisz zdania stosując didn’t have to do lub needn’t have done:
1. George wasn’t obliged to deliver the mail.
George ..........................................................................................................
2. They replaced the water pipe with a new one, which wasn’t necessary.
They ..............................................................................................................
3. You sent a telegram to Mr Talbot. It was unnecessary.
You ...............................................................................................................
4. I wasn’t under an obligation to help them with the preparations.
I .....................................................................................................................
5. Sheila made a copy for each of us, which wasn’t necessary.
Sheila ............................................................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując didn’t have to do lub needn’t have done:
1. A: Did you make a phone call to the embassy?
B: I .............................. (do) it because my secretary had done it for me.
2. A: I’ve checked the brakes in your car, too.
B: Oh, you .............................. (check) them. They work perfectly.
3. A: We have invited Julia to our friendly meeting on Wednesday.
B: You .............................. (do) it. She never comes to any meetings.
4. A: Laura didn’t beat the carpet, did she?
B: She .............................. (beat) it. It’s not her duty to do it.
5. A: I thought you’d need an umbrella.
B: You .............................. (bring) it. I’ve got one of my own.
6. A: Did Jack take his dog to a vet?
B: He .............................. (do) it. His dog was all right.
7. A: Mr Campbell has called the fire brigade.
B: He ........................... (call) them. We’ve put the fire out by ourselves.
8. A: I’ve brought sweets for Tim.
B: You .............................. (bring) them. He mustn’t eat any sweets.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując needn’t do lub needn’t have done:

1. You .............................. (tell) them everything. You could have kept some
facts secret.
2. I .............................. (throw) the notes away. I wish I had them now.
3. Tell her that she .............................. (clean) the floor everyday. Twice a week
is enough.
4. We .............................. (go) to bed early tonight. We can sleep longer
tomorrow.
5. You .............................. (give) him so much money. He wasted it.
89
Unit 82 Czasowniki modalne - dokonane (1)  224-227
I. Uzupełnij zdania przy pomocy właściwych czasowników oraz dokonanej formy

czasownika modalnego.
be damage drop forget hurt suffer wash win
1. I cannot find my key ring . I must .............................. it on my way back home.

2. Jenny shouldn’t .............................. about her homework. The teacher
reprimanded her strongly.
3. The child was crying. Someone might .............................. him.
4. You cannot .............................. a million pounds at the lottery. The prize
wasn’t that high.
5. She needn’t .............................. our shirts. They weren’t dirty at all.
6. Look, the printer isn’t working. Someone could .............................. it while
we were out.
7.You wouldn’t .............................. from indigestion if you had taken regular
meals.
8. They have eaten all their sandwiches. They must .............................. very
hungry.
II. Uzupełnij zdania przy pomocy dokonanych form czasowników modalnych

couldn’t / needn’t / shouldn’t wraz z czasownikami w nawiasach.
1. He .............................. (go) to Dortmouth to buy salmons, they’re easily
available in our town.
2. Ronald never comes to the disco, so you .............................. (meet) him there
the previous night.
3. This coat .............................. (be) dry washed. It has shrunk, unfortunately.
4. I .............................. (call) the police. Nothing serious had happened, in fact.
5. You .............................. (bring) the printed matters. I don’t need any more of
them.
6. His condition .............................. (be) very serious. The doctor gave him only
calcium to drink.
7. Jack .............................. (break) the mirror. He wasn’t at home at that time.
8. The guests weren’t able to drive in. You .............................. (lock) the gate.
III. Uzupełnij zdania zgodnie z podaną informacją.
Mike is a policeman. Jeff is a vet. Linda is a nurse.
1. A: ‘Jeff gave me a fine.’ B: ‘He couldn’t .......... because he .......... ’

2. A: ‘Who dressed Mike’s wounds?’ B: ‘Linda must .......... because she ..........’
3. A: ‘Did Jeff cure her hamster?’ B: ‘Yes, he may ......... because he .......... ’
4. A: ‘Linda wore a uniform.’ B: ‘No, she cannot .......... because she .......... ‘
5. A: ‘Did Mike controll the traffic?’ B: ‘Well, he might .......... because he ......... ‘
90
Unit 83 Czasowniki modalne - dokonane (2)  224-227
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując formy dokonane właściwych czasowników modalnych:
1. A: Someone left a handbag in the compartment.

B: What did you do with it?
A: I just left it there.
B: How silly! You .............................. (take) it to the Lost Property Office.
2. A: I saw a lynx in the park.
B: You’re lying. You .............................. (not see) a lynx around. They don’t
live here. It .......................... (be) some another cat-like animal.
3. A: We walked all the way to the station.
B: You .............................. (walk). You .............................. (take) a taxi,
instead.
4. A: Why didn’t Neil bring his girlfriend to the party?
B: I’ve got no idea. They .............................. (have) a quarrel or she
.............................. (drop) him.
5. A: Where’s Paula?
B: She’s gone shopping.
A: Shopping??? She .............................. (go) shopping. I’ve already bought
everything that we need.
6. A: What did you do last Saturday?
B: We went on an excursion to Hastings.
A: Hastings?! You .............................. (tell) me you were going there. I’ve
always dreamt of visiting the place.
7. A: Richie is not answering the phone. I don’t know where he is.
B: It’s Saturday, so he .............................. (go) fishing as usual.
8. A: What happened at Chestnut Street?
B: There .............................. (be) an accident there. I saw the police and an
ambulance at the crossroads.
9. A: How about the report, Stanley?
B: Oh, I’m so sorry I didn’t remember to write it.
A: It’s a shame. You .............................. (not forget) about such an important
matter.
10. A: What do you think of this marble statue, Fred?
B: It’s really impressive. Only a very talented sculptor .............................. (do)
something like that, I believe.
91
Unit 84 Present Simple (1)  227
I. Uzupełnij zdania właściwymi czasownikami w czasie Present Simple:
bark complain eat like look make read watch
1. I usually .............................. books in my free time.

2. You sometimes .............................. television late at night.
3. She never .............................. about her job.
4. He .............................. climbing the mountains in summer.
5. This dog is very dangerous. It .............................. at every passer-by.
6. We always .............................. porridge for breakfast.
7. You .............................. like twins.
8. They often .............................. jokes of my thin hair.
II. Napisz zdania jak w przykładzie:
0. Brian / live / Dover / Leeds Brian doesn’t live in Dover. He lives in Leeds.
1. I / write / poems / novels ..........................................................................
2. She / eat / meat / vegetables ..........................................................................
3. They / play / rock / reggae ..........................................................................
4. You / own / a factory / a shop ..........................................................................
5. Chris / like / golf / cricket ..........................................................................
6. It / taste / sweet / sour ..........................................................................
III. Napisz pytania oraz udziel krótkiej odpowiedzi jak w przykładzie:
0. Ron / sleep well Does Ron sleep well? Yes, he does.

1. You / feel all right .....................................? No, ..........................
2. Susan / read magazines .....................................? Yes, ........................
3. The Browns / run a business .....................................? Yes, ........................
4. We / waste time .....................................? No, ..........................
5. It / look like rain .....................................? Yes, ........................
6. She / drive a car .....................................? No, ..........................
IV. Opowiedz o poszczególnych osobach stosując Present Simple:
always usually sometimes never

do homework rest after lunch go for a walk Lucy & Mary drink alcohol
help parents drink coffee feel tired Danny lie
come late get up early smoke Eva listen to rock
You
92
Unit 85 Present Simple (2)  227
I. Uzupełnij tekst właściwymi czasownikami w czasie Present Simple:
clean come from drive get up live own work
Mr and Mrs Downey .................... America. They .................... in the countryside in

Oregon. They .................... a cattle ranch where they .................... hard together with their
three children. Each morning, the Downeys .................... very early. Mr Downey
.................... the children to school in his car while his wife .................... the house.
attend give like make say study want
Lenny Downey is the youngest in the family. He .................... playing with his toys but he
usually .................... a lot of noise. Jerry is five years older than Lenny. He .................... a
technical college. He hopes to become a car mechanic. Lenny .................... that repairing
vehicles .................... him a lot of satisfaction. Maggie is the oldest child in the family. She
.................... at university and .................... to be a veterinary surgeon in the future.
eat find help look meet milk return sit talk take
Everyday, Mr and Mrs Downey .................... after their cattle. Mrs Downey ....................
the cows and her husband .................... them to the grazing land. In the afternoon, when
the children .................... from school, they all .................... down at the table and
.................... dinner. After the meal, they .................... about their problems and try to
.................... good solutions. Later, Maggie .................... Lenny with his homework and
Jerry .................... with other boys in the local youth club.
II. Napisz pytania dotyczące wyróżnionej części zdania:
1. Alex goes to sleep at ten p.m. ...................................................................?

2. Mary keeps her jewels in a box. ...................................................................?
3. Albert likes roller-skating. ...................................................................?
4. We live nearby. ...................................................................?
5. The Greens quarrel quite often. ...................................................................?
6. He usually comes on Monday. ...................................................................?
7. You travel to work by train. ...................................................................?
8. I write reports three times a week. ...................................................................?
9. She looks pale. ...................................................................?
10. They often meet in a yacht club. ...................................................................?
93
Unit 86 Present Continuous  228
I. Ułóż pytania i odpowiedzi jak w przykładzie:
 Paul / play games / read a book Is Paul playing games?
No, he isn’t. He is reading a book.
1. Mark / sleep / listen to the news ........................................................................

2. You / dance / talk to your friends ........................................................................
3. Angela / have a bath / study ........................................................................
4. Mr Barth / work / rest ........................................................................
5. They / eat lunch / play tennis ........................................................................
6. She / sew / wash her clothes ........................................................................
7. We / go to school / sit in a cafe ........................................................................
8. I / watch TV / clean the house ........................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Present Continuous oraz podane czasowniki:
do drive fall move occupy rain ride shave study use
1. .............................. (you) the lawn-mower or can I borrow it from you?

2. ‘What is Michael doing?’ ‘He .............................. a bike.’
3. Wait a minute. George .............................. (still) himself in the bathroom.
4. We .............................. hard for the next term exams.
5. ‘Where is your mother Tom?’ ‘She .............................. shopping at present.’
6. This noise .............................. me crazy. Cannot they play more quietly?
7. ‘Look there’s a lorry in front of the Blacks’ gate.’ ‘Yes, they ..............................
out to Las Vegas.’
8. Take an umbrella. It .............................. heavily.
9. It’s autumn now. It’s colder and the leaves .............................. from trees.
10. ‘Is room number eight free?’ ‘No, someone .............................. it now.’
III. Uzupełnij dialogi stosując Present Continuous:

1. A: What’s the noise up there?
B: I think something wrong .............................. (go on).
A: Some people .............................. (scream) , aren’t they?
B: And a child .............................. (cry).
2. A: Don’t enter the manager’s office. He .............................. (have) a
conference at the moment.
B: .............................. (he / talk) to any important people?
A: I guess so. They ............................ (discuss) new investment plans.
3. A: Why .............................. (Joan / pack) her things?
B: Well, we .............................. (send) her to our family in Birmingham.
94
Unit 87 Present Simple - Present Continuous  227-229
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Present Simple lub Present Continuous:
1. ‘How .............................. (you / usually / travel) to work?’ ‘By bus.’

2. ‘Where .............................. (your uncle / keep) his money?’ ‘In a bank.’
3. The woman is a famous painter. She .............................. (paint) landscapes.
4. ‘What time .............................. (you / usually / return) home?’ ‘Five p.m.’
5. Maurice sometimes .............................. (play) computer games after school,
but he .............................. (not do) it now.
6. ‘How .............................. (your mother / feel) now?’ ‘She’s fine, thanks.’
7. He often .............................. (borrow) money from us and never
.............................. (forget) to give it back.
8. Listen now! I .............................. (ask) you a question.
9. You must be careful. David always .............................. (cheat) at cards.
10. The Simpsons aren’t at home. They .............................. (have) a garden
party.
11. How often .............................. (Cindy / visit) her parents in Dover?
12. This machine is useless. It .............................. (break down) quite often.
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując czasowniki we właściwym czasie teraźniejszym:
break do explain have rise win
1. ‘What .............................. (Steve)?’ ‘He’s a carpenter.’

2. Each summer the temperature .............................. up to thirty degrees in this
region.
3. Don’t shout! Mary .............................. telephone conversation at the moment.
4. He is a lucky guy. He always .............................. bets at the races.
5. Call the police! Someone .............................. into our flat.
6. Bob seldom .............................. his ideas to us. He’s really hard to understand
at times.
III. Wybierz poprawną formę:

1. We don’t know him well. He never talks / is talking to us.
2. Normally, I am taking / take a few sandwiches to school.
3. It’s such a fun to be with you. We always are enjoying / enjoy your company.
4. Water freezes / is freezing below zero.
5. Tom usually meets / is meeting his girlfriend after work, but he isn’t meeting
/ doesn’t meet her today.
6. Every now and then, our brother is going / goes on a business trip to Asia.
7. I’d better put on something warm. It gets / is getting cold.
8. The sun sets / is setting in the west.
95
Unit 88 Present Simple - Present Continuous  227-229
I. Rozpoznaj czy zastosowana w zdaniu forma czasowa jest poprawna (yes - no):
1. Let’s abandon the place. It’s smelling awful here. .............

2. I still have money, which means that we can have another cup of tea. .............
3. He’s bought the car recently. Now, it’s belonging to him. .............
4. Please, excuse the noise, but we’re having guests at home. .............
5. We can sleep in their tents. They don’t mind it. .............
6. ‘How is your sister feeling?’ ‘Thanks, she’s all right now.’ .............
7. ‘What are you thinking of Jim’s new girlfriend?’ ‘Oh, she’s cute.’ .............
8. Let’s buy oranges for Sally. She likes them. .............
9. I can’t spend much. I am owing money to my parents. .............
10. I’m afraid she’s supposing that we’re thieves. .............
II. Uzupełnij zdania właściwą formą czasownika:

1. He’s a rich man. He .............................. (own) film studios in Hollywood.
2. Try this omelette. It really .............................. (taste) delicious.
3. I am looking at them, but I .............................. (not see) any similarities
between them.
4. This food must be rotten. It .............................. (smell) unpleasant.
5. Don’t ask him to go with you. He .............................. (hate) travelling.
6. It .............................. (feel) so hot in here. I’d better open the windows.
7. ‘What are you doing with the water?’ ‘I .............................. (taste) it to make
sure it’s fit for drinking.’
8. ‘How .............................. (the hotel / look)?’ ‘Oh, it’s big and very modern.’
9. I’m scared. I .............................. (hear) strange noises.
10. The picture that I .............................. (look) at now was painted by Picasso.
III. Uzupełnij zdania podanymi czasownikami we właściwym czasie:
agree believe count love possess sound understand want to
1. ‘Why is the baby crying?’ ‘Probably, she’s hungry and ......................... eat.’
2. ‘Who ......................... such extravagant clothes?’ ‘They’re Muriel’s.’
3. This time, he’s telling the truth. I really ......................... him.
4. ‘......................... (you) what the man is saying?’ ‘No, I don’t know Chinese.’
5. I don’t need your promises. Your honest actions ......................... the most.
6. Linda and Phil are planning to get married. They ......................... each other.
7. We’ll have to find another place for our experiments. Mr Tanner
......................... (not) to carry them out in his private laboratory.
8. It ......................... interesting what he says, but can he prove his right?
96
Unit 89 Past Simple - czasowniki regularne  231
I. Ułóż zdania jak w przykładzie stosując Past Simple:
 Tom / watch TV / listen to the radio Did Tom watch TV?
No, he didn’t. He listened to the radio.
1. You / go home / stay till midnight .....................................................................

2. Ann / bathe / wash her hair .....................................................................
3. Mrs Dean / cry / laugh .....................................................................
4. He / live in Harlem / move out .....................................................................
5. The plane / crash / land safely .....................................................................
6. They / steal jewellery / rob a bank .....................................................................
7. You / spoil the toys / repair them .....................................................................
8. The Greys / swim / sunbathe .....................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Past Simple:

1. ‘.............................. (Harry / work) last Saturday?’ ‘No, he was on leave.’
2. Stella .............................. (want) to buy some sweets for herself, but the
confectioner’s was closed.
3. The bottle that he had ............................ (contain) some poisonous substance.
4. He was very kind. He ............................ (behave) very politely all the time.
5. ‘............................. (the police / arrest) the burglars yesterday?’ ‘No, they
didn’t.’
6. I .............................. (try) to repair the battery, but I .............................. (fail).
7. Last year, Sheila’s firm .............................. (organise) a charity ball.
8. We .............................. (not return) late. We were back at eight.
9. The government ............................. (not grant) any aid to the people in need.
10. ‘What .............................. (happen)?’ ‘He .............................. (jump) out of
the window and .............................. (twist) his ankle.’
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując podane czasowniki:
apologise last open pass save serve travel turn off
1. What a rush it was. We .............................. at high speed to get in time.

2. Last morning, Mr Larkin .............................. his shop later than usually.
3. I was grateful to the doctors who .............................. my life after the accident.
4. The dull show .............................. for four hours and we were truly bored.
5. Someone .............................. the electricity, and so it was dark in the house.
6. They .............................. caviar and champagne during the reception.
7. Jack can feel free now. He .............................. all his exams last month.
8. His behaviour was impolite, but he .............................. for it to everyone.
97
Unit 90 Past Simple - czasowniki nieregularne  231
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Past Simple oraz podane czasowniki:
bring find forget know make take teach understand
1. The teacher didn’t need to repeat his explanations. We ..............................

them very well.
2. A group of foreign actors ............................. part in the performance last night.
3. My mark was rather poor. I .............................. too many mistakes in my test.
4. Diane was a bit disappointed. Nobody .............................. her any birthday gift
yesterday.
5. When I was younger, I .............................. how to play this game.
6. We didn’t have a map, but we .............................. the way to the castle easily.
7. My boss was furious because I .............................. to post his letters.
8. Professor Huckley, .............................. us psychology last term.
II. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną formą czasownika w czasie Past Simple:

1. My brother .............................. (fall) down a flight of stairs and
.............................. (break) his leg last Thursday.
2. Five months ago, our uncle .............................. (fly) to Canada on business.
3. I .............................. (get) angry when Terry .............................. (tell)
me that the computer was out of order.
4. Some of us .............................. (drive) to the meeting place and the rest
.............................. (go) there on foot.
5. It was three o’clock a.m. when the telephone .............................. (ring).
6. This fur isn’t new. I .............................. (wear) it last winter.
7. The villa doesn’t belong to the Lowells any more. They ............................. (sell)
it two weeks ago.
8. We .............................. (have to) put on our raincoats because it
.............................. (begin) to rain heavily.
9. Who .............................. (pay) the bill in the restaurant last night?
10. ‘Where’s my old hat?’ ‘Sorry, Bill. I .............................. (throw) it away last
week.’
11. It was Dennis who .............................. (give) Joan a gold ring for her birthday.
12. ‘Do you know this novel?’ ‘Yes, I .............................. (read) it a month ago.’
13. Mr Lee’s solution was quite good, but we .............................. (choose) the first
option, anyway.
14. ‘What about writing a letter to Andrew?’ ‘I .............................. (send) him one
a week ago.’
15. Liverpool .............................. (win) the Cup last season. I wonder which team
is going to get it this year.
98
Unit 91 Present Simple - Past Simple  227, 231
I. Uzupełnij zdania właściwą formą czasownika:
1. Albert never .............................. (tell) lies to his parents.

2. A week ago, our neighbour .............................. (get) rid of his old pick-up.
3. The first colonists .............................. (settle) in the area in the 16th century.
4. The sun .............................. (shine) brightly last summer holidays.
5. .............................. (Mary / often / borrow) things from you?
6. We .............................. (usually / not drink) alcohol at our parties.
7. It was last October that John .............................. (leave) for Alaska.
8. .............................. (you / feed) your hamster daily?
9. These plants typically .............................. (grow) very slowly.
10. How many thieves .............................. (the police / catch) the previous year?
11. Where .............................. (Simon / live) in 1989?
12. This boy never .............................. (cause) any problems to us.
13. The waiter was upset because I .............................. (not give) him a tip.
14. .............................. (somebody / set) the alarm-clock last evening?
15. Susie .............................. (usually / make) us go to sleep early.
16. A dog .............................. (bite) little Brian on the hand yesterday.
17. The historic building .............................. (burn) down in a fire two years ago.
18. Every now and then, students ............................. (not manage) to pass exams.
19. This farmer always .............................. (grow) maize in his field.
20. This shirt .............................. (shrink) after the last washing.
II. Uzupełnij tekst poprawną formą czasowników:
Everybody knows Ronald Weird in our town. He .............................. (be) famous for his
most unusual behaviour which always .............................. (make) everyone laugh at him.
He often .............................. (say) Good night in the morning or Good morning in the
evening. He never .............................. (put) his clothes on properly. He usually
............................. (wear) his pullover inside out and his socks always ..............................
(differ) in colour.
All the people in the town .............................. (remember) what Ronald Weird
.............................. (do) last year at Christmas time.
He .............................. (dress) in red clothes and .............................. (pretend) to be
Father Christmas. But, instead of giving Christmas presents to people, he
.............................. (wander) from house to house and .............................. (ask) for gifts for
himself.
It ............................ (be) always fun to be with Mr Weird. I can tell you. He usually
.............................. (have) plenty of amusing stories to tell and you never
.............................. (know) what funny thing he is going to do next.
99
Unit 92 Past Continuous  232
I. Napisz / Opowiedz co poszczególne osoby robiły wczoraj w danym czasie:
9 a.m. 1 p.m. 6 p.m. 9 p.m.

George sleep have lunch work read a paper
Peter eat breakfast go to school do homework play computer
Ann and Lisa help their boss type letters talk in a cafe rest
You
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................
II. Uzupełnij i połącz właściwe zdania za pomocą while:
1. I ............... (listen) to the radio a. the police .............. (follow) him.

2. The children ............... (make) noise b. their dogs .............. (chase) a hare.
3. The hunters ............... (talk) c. I .............. (drive) to work.
4. The thief ............... (escape) d. I .............. (look for) the plug.
5. Water ............... (run) into the bath e. they .............. (play) outdoors.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując podane czasowniki w Past Continuous:
do emit have rain revise
1. Last Saturday at three o’clock, our family ......................... a good time on the
beach.
2. Jim ......................... for an exam in biology all the morning yesterday.
3. The engine ......................... a strange sound while we were driving up the hill.
4. I was busy at ten p.m. last Monday. I ......................... business with a new
partner.
5. The weather was awful on Sunday. It ......................... all day round.
IV. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Present Continuous lub Past Continuous:

1. While I was reading, my sister ......................... (write) her homework.
2. It’s eight o’clock now. I’m sure the match ......................... (go on).
3. My friends ......................... (look for) me all the evening, but couldn’t find me.
4. I wasn’t at home the whole day yesterday. I ......................... (spend) it with my
girlfriend.
5. What ......................... (Jack / do) between two and four p.m. last Sunday?
6. It’s midnight and she ......................... (still / study) hard.
100
Unit 93 Past Simple - Past Continuous  231-233
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Past Simple lub Past Continuous:
1. When we ......................... (arrive) at night, everybody ......................... (sleep)

in their rooms.
2. There were lots of critical voices while the secretary ......................... (read)
the decision of the Board.
3. What ......................... (the children / do) when you ......................... (see)
them in the park?
4. Betty ......................... (feel) badly all day yesterday.
5. I wasn’t free last Friday. I ......................... (have) a lot of things to do.
6. While we ......................... (go) home from the cinema, we .........................
(meet) our history teacher.
7. ......................... (Eric / talk) to anyone when you ......................... (see) him
at school?
8. In the evening, we ......................... (want) to see a concert, but we
........................ (not have) tickets.
9. How ......................... (they / react) when they ......................... (see) you
wearing this funny hat?
10. She didn’t phone at six. She ......................... (know) I ......................... (still /
sleep) at that time.
11. She ......................... (put on) weight last year because she .........................
(eat) too many sweets.
12. Which of them ......................... (scream) when you ......................... (enter)
the classroom?
II. Uzupełnij dialogi stosując Past Simple lub Past Continuous:
1. A: What ......................... (happen) while you ......................... (drive) to

Newcastle?
B: First, water ......................... (boil) in the radiator and then the car
......................... (stop) dead.
2. A: Was Sue ready when you ......................... (come) to pick her up?
B: Oh no. She ......................... (do) her hair when I ......................... (arrive)
and then while I ......................... (wait) she ......................... (iron) her
dress.
3. A: ......................... (you / think) about any danger while you .........................
(walk) through the forest?
B: Honestly, I ......................... (not have) an idea there .........................
(be) poisonous snakes in the area.
101
Unit 94 Present Perfect (1)  234
I. Napisz zdania stosując Present Perfect:
1. I / see / a polar bear / twice ..............................................................
2. Dr Brown / just / start / his experiment ..............................................................
3. She / always / be in love with Tom ..............................................................
4. He / have an accident / recently ..............................................................
5. There / be / no walk-outs / this year ..............................................................
6. We / already / plan / our tour ..............................................................
7. You / never / visit / Scotland ..............................................................
8. They / tell / many lies ..............................................................
9. Rob / never / meet / Angelica ..............................................................
10. Our uncle / just / buy / a new villa ..............................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania według informacji w tabeli:
work in a garden ride a horse be in hospital

Ann many times once once
Lisa never three times recently
Betty several times two times never
1. ‘.................................................. (Lisa / three times)?’ ‘Yes, she has.’

2. ‘.................................................. (Ann / once)?’ ‘Yes, she has.’
3. ‘Has Betty ever been in hospital?’ ‘..............................’
4. ‘.................................................. (Ann / many times)?’ ‘Yes, she has.’
5. ‘Has Ann ever been in hospital?’ ‘.................................................... .’
6. ‘.................................................. (Betty / several times)?’ ‘Yes, she has.’
7. ‘Has Lisa ever worked in a garden?’ ‘..............................’
8. ‘How many times ..................................................?’ ‘Two times.’
9. ‘.................................................. (Lisa / recently)?’ ‘Yes, she has.’
10. ‘Have you ever ridden a horse?’ ‘.................................................. .’
III. Uzupełnij zdania właściwymi czasownikami w czasie Present Perfect:

choose eat go lose quit
1. ‘Would you like another cake?!’ ‘No, thanks. I .............................. enough.’
2. My son .............................. his job recently. He didn’t like working for the
insurance company at all.
3. I can’t tell you the time. I .............................. my watch.
4. Ray is going to represent our school. The coach .............................. him for a
hundred-metre race.
5. The printer .............................. wrong. It isn’t working properly.
102
Unit 95 Present Perfect (2)  234
I. Napisz pytania w Present Perfect oraz udziel odpowiedzi stosując for lub since:
1. How long ..................................................................... (you / know Muriel)?

..................................................................................... 1989.
2. How long ..................................................................... (they / be married)?
..................................................................................... ten years.
3. How long ..................................................................... (Peter / have a dog)?
..................................................................................... one week.
4. How long ..................................................................... (they / work together)?
..................................................................................... many years.
5. How long ..................................................................... (Eddie / be on a diet)?
...................................................................................... a long time.
6. How long ..................................................................... (Dan / live here)?
...................................................................................... January.
II. Napisz odpowiedzi stosując already lub yet:
1. Has Michael prepared his lecture? Yes, ...........................................................

2. Have you phoned Adam? No, ..........................................................
3. Has Diane seen the film? Yes, ...........................................................
4. Have they apologised to you? No, ..........................................................
5. Has Tom paid his debts? Yes, ...........................................................
6. Have there been any responses? No, ..........................................................
7. Have we reached the place? Yes, ...........................................................
8. Has the party begun? No, ..........................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Present Perfect:

1. ‘.............................. (Nigel / tell) you everything?’ ‘No, he ..............................
(not talk) to me yet.’
2. My rich aunt .............................. (support) me financially since I was eight.
3. ‘.............................. (you / already / see) the Eiffel Tower?’ ‘No, I
.............................. (not visit) France yet.’
4. The engine is working perfectly. I .............................. (just / repair) it.
5. They .............................. (treat) me badly since I arrived here.
6. I like Jenny very much. I .............................. (never / meet) anyone like her
before.
7. ‘.............................. (Mr Dalton / ever / invest) any money in the business?’
‘Yes. He .............................. (do) it several times.’
8. There .............................. (not be) peace in the region ever since the conflict
broke out last year.
103
Unit 96 Present Perfect Continuous  236
I. Ułóż zdania w Present Perfect Continuous stosując for lub since:
1. We / sit / in the cafe / two p.m. ...............................................................
2. Arnold / sleep / six hours ...............................................................
3. I / learn / English / four years ...............................................................
4. Fiona / read a book / morning ...............................................................
5. They / play cards / midday ...............................................................
6. Terry / study physics / three months ...............................................................
7. You / stay in hospital / last Saturday ...............................................................
8. She / swim in the sea / half an hour ...............................................................
9. I / paint the picture / two years ...............................................................
10. It / snow / yesterday ...............................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Present Perfect Continuous oraz for lub since:
1. I am still waiting. I .................................................. twenty minutes.
2. It’s still ringing. It .................................................. two o’clock.
3. We are still dancing. We ................................................. more than two hours.
4. You are still running. You .................................................. one hour.
5. Mr Rask is still resting. He .................................................. lunch.
6. Alice is still singing. She .................................................. she woke up.
7. They are still fighting. They .................................................. a quarter.
8. I’m still trying. I ................................................... eight o’clock.
9. He is still composing. He .................................................. early morning.
10. We are still talking. We ................................................ the end of the meeting.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Present Perfect lub Present Perfect Continuous:
1. ‘.............................. (you / open) the box yet?’ ‘Yes, I ..............................
(already / do) it.’
2. I can’t stand this noise any longer. They .............................. (cut) the hedges
for three hours now!
3. Mike .............................. (write) postcards all evening. He ..............................
(write) ten so far.
4. We .............................. (not finish) papering the walls yet.
We .............................. (do) the job for five hours now.
5. The operation is still in progress. It .............................. (go on) since ten a.m.
6. I ............................... (not find) my briefcase yet although I .............................
(look for) it since morning.
7. ‘How long .............................. (they / discuss) the financial matters now?’
‘The conference started at two and it .............................. (not end) yet.’
8. What .............................. (you / do) out there? Your clothes are dirty all over.
104
Unit 97 Present Simple - Present Perfect (Continuous)
 238
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Present Simple lub Present Perfect (Continuous):
1. How long .............................. (Michael / study) philosophy?

2. We .............................. (prefer) to spend our free time at home.
3. My neighbour .............................. (just / move out) to Manchester.
4. Jack’s talking to his boss. They .............................. (speak) for one hour now.
5. I .............................. (never / operate) a machine like this in my life.
6. .............................. (Brain / know) anything about tomorrow’s demonstration?
7. There .............................. (not be) any messages from the headquarters since
last Thursday.
8. Your bike is all in mud. Where .............................. (you / ride) , Tom?
9. I .............................. (not want) anything to eat. I .............................. (just /
take) a big hamburger.
10. They .............................. (not record) any song yet. They ..............................
(look for) a manager for ten months now.
11. .............................. (Sharon / work) in the garden in her free time?
12. .............................. (you / ever / try) to learn to speak Japanese?
13. They .............................. (know) each other very well. They ............................
(live) together for a long time.
14. Stop drilling for a while! You .............................. (make) this horrible noise
since I came.
15. ‘You’ll have a chance to meet Paula at the party tomorrow.’ ‘That’s great. I
.............................. (always / dream) of meeting her.’
II. Uzupełnij dialogi:
1. A: How much time .............................. (it / usually / take) you to iron a shirt?
B: I don’t know. I .............................. (never / iron) a shirt in my life.
2. A: I .............................. (not see) you for ages. What ..............................
(you / do) , Bob?
B: I .............................. (travel) around Europe recently.
3. A: .............................. (you / start) painting the walls yet?
B: No. I .............................. (try) to find my brush since morning.
4. A: Why is the computer on?
B: Someone .............................. (use) it, I suppose.
5. A: How many credits .............................. (your bank / grant) so far?
B: None. We .............................. (not grant) credits at all.
6. A: .............................. (she / always / complain) so much?
B: Yes. She .............................. (be) like that ever since I met her.
105
Unit 98 Present Perfect - Past Simple  238
I. Ułóż zdania w czasie Present Perfect lub Past Simple:
1. My wife / fall ill / yesterday .....................................................................

2. Chris / just / start / work .....................................................................
3. She / go to sleep / an hour ago .....................................................................
4. We / not visit / London / this year .....................................................................
5. He / win two medals / so far .....................................................................
6. I / not live here / in 1977 .....................................................................
7. They / not buy a car / yet .....................................................................
8. Ann / leave Leeds / last week .....................................................................
9. You / already / get your ticket .....................................................................
10. It / be / hot / recently .....................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Present Perfect lub Past Simple:
1. Brian .............................. (not travel) abroad yet.

2. There .............................. (be) a big crowd in the embassy last week.
3. .............................. (you / talk) to anyone when you ...............................
(come) here yesterday?
4. The Greens .............................. (settle) in our village in 1982.
5. He .............................. (plant) a few exotic trees in his garden. He expects
them to bear fruit next year.
6. I .............................. (spend) my holidays in the mountains ages ago.
7. .............................. (you / already / be) introduced to our boss?
8. We .............................. (not have) time to read the post yet.
9. It .............................. (be) many weeks since she last ..............................
(phone) me.
10. .............................. (anyone / help) Andrew to install the pipes yesterday?
11. Ever since my wife .............................. (leave) me, I .............................. (be)
in despair.
12. Why .............................. (she / decide) to quit her job for the firm last month?
13. I’m terribly hungry. I .............................. (not eat) anything since I
............................. (set out) on the trip.
14. Danny .............................. (lose) his documents a week ago and someone
.............................. (find) them yesterday.
15. We’d like to buy shares. We .............................. (never / invest) our money in
this way, actually.
106
Unit 99 Present, Past, Perfect - Simple  238
I. Uzupełnij tekst czasownikami w poprawnej formie:
Mr David Webster is a famous archaeologist and an adventure seeker. Every

year, he ................... (go) on exciting exploration trips to the most fascinating
places in the world. Last year, Mr Webster .................... (spend) three months in
the Amazon jungle and .................... (discover) some secret temples of an Aztec
tribe. Although in his lifetime he .................... (make) a lot of exciting discoveries,
he .................... (cherish) this one very much.
This year, Mr Webster .................... (already / explore) pyramids in the south
of Egypt and .................... (find) innumerable objects of artistic and historic
value. Mr Webster says that he .................... (not wish) to find riches for himself.
Ever since he .................... (start) the exciting work of an explorer, he
.................... (spend) the most of his own money on preparing his expeditions.
What he .................... (like) about the job is the sense of adventure which
invariably .................... (accompany) every exploration trip that he ...................
(organise) together with his companions.
At the very beginning, two decades ago, Mr Webster .................... (not use)
any complicated equipment. He .................... (have to) rely on maps and his
own good reason. Nowadays, his crew .................... (take) advantage of radars,
sonars, UV radiation and plenty of other devices. Mr Webster .................... (be)
the first man who .................... (decide) to explore sunken galleys deep under
water near the Bermuda Triangle in 1976. Since that time, he ....................
(retrieve) many tons of priceless artefacts and valuable treasures.
Privately, Mr Webster is a very decent and nice man. He always ....................
(smile) and ................... (tell) jokes and stories about his countless adventures.
He remembers most warmly the one with an Indian guru with whom he
.................... (smoke) the pipe of peace during his expedition two years ago.
II. Uzupełnij dialog czasownikami w poprawnej formie:
A: So, you are the new detective that I .................... (hear) about recently.
When .................... (you / start) working for the department?
B: It .................... (be) a month ago that I .................... (come) to New York.
A: Where .................... (you / work) before?
B: New Jersey. I .................... (work) there for three years.
A: What .................... (make) you change your place of work?
B: Many things. I .................... (always / want) to work with real specialists.
A: .................... (you / ever / investigate) a crime?
B: Sure. I .................... (solve) a few serious cases so far.
107
Unit 100 Future Simple  239
I. Utwórz zdania twierdzące w czasie Future Simple:
1. Robert / stay at home / tonight ..............................................................
2. I / return from Chelsea / next week ..............................................................
3. Our mother / go to work / in a few days ..............................................................
4. They / be / very surprised ..............................................................
5. Muriel / answer your questions / soon ..............................................................
II. Ułóż zdania jak w przykładzie:

 We / eat / fish / soup Will we eat fish? No, we won’t. We will eat soup.
1. I / buy / pencil / ballpen ..............................................................
2. Mark / work / in a factory / in a bank ..............................................................
3. We / keep / sheep / horses ..............................................................
4. Mr Cox / drink / tea / coffee ..............................................................
5. You / play / basketball / handball ..............................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną formą czasu Future Simple:

1. When .............................. (you / know) the results of the exam?
2. I .............................. (not do) any shopping tomorrow.
3. There .............................. (be) a lot of work to do next week.
4. .............................. (Joan / bring) her photos from the seaside?
5. We .............................. (change) the ship crew next year.
6. Who .............................. (sleep) in the room upstairs?
7. It .............................. (not take) long to check the names in the computer.
8. How long .............................. (they / stay) in Birmingham?
9. She .............................. (never / give up) smoking, I think.
10. The building .............................. (be) pulled down in a few weeks.
IV. Uzupełnij zdania właściwymi czasownikami w czasie Future Simple:
bring control develop go make manage
1. We .................... (not) fishing tomorrow. The weather forecast is too bad.

2. ‘I need the photos badly.’ ‘All right. I .................... them as soon as possible.’
3. The secretary hasn’t typed the letters yet. I .................... her do it tomorrow.
4. Probably, the army generals .................... the security measures in the war
territories next week.
5. Arnold promises that he .................... us some gifts from his journey abroad.
6. Don’t give this task to Adam. He’s a newcomer and he .................... (not) to
complete it.
108
Unit 101 Present Continuous - Future Simple  239-240
I. Uzupełnij dialogi stosując Present Continuous:
1. A: Where / you / spend / this weekend ..................................................?
B: I / stay / at home .................................................. , but my family / go to
.................................................. our friends in Brighton.
2. A: When / you / come back .................................................. from the trip?
B: Not too soon. I / stay in Hawaii .................................................. till next
month.
3. A: Can we meet next Tuesday?
B: I’m afraid not. I / leave for Warsaw .................................................. , then.
4. A: What’s the exciting news about Alex?
B: He / get married .................................................. in a few weeks.
5. A: What / you / do .................................................. this afternoon?
B: I / take care of .................................................. my younger brother.
II. Dokończ zdania stosując Present Continuous:

1. Tom has been given a new job. He / start / it / tomorrow ..............................
2. I have decided about my future. I / become / a soldier ..............................
3. Judy has planned a new trip. She / leave / next week ..............................
4. I have decided to launch a party. I / have / it / on Sunday ..............................
5. He has received a heavy sentence. He / go to / prison ..............................
III. Napisz o własnych planach na określone dni stosując Present Continuous:

1. Tomorrow, I ....................................................................................................
2. Next Saturday evening, I ................................................................................
3. Next summer, I ...............................................................................................
4. Tomorrow afternoon, I ....................................................................................
5. Next year, I ..................................................................................................…
IV. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Future Simple lub Present Continuous:

1. Write the name on the paper or I .............................. (forget) it soon.
2. You cannot borrow Peter’s car tomorrow. He .............................. (drive) us to
our grandparents’ in Salisbury.
3. ‘These bags are too heavy for me to carry.’ ‘Don’t worry. I ..............................
(help) you.’
4. We’ve decided to give Tom a motorbike for his birthday. He .............................
(be) very happy.
5. ‘Is it Bob’s duty to show the guests around?’ ‘Not really. But, I’m sure he
.............................. (do) it with pleasure.’
109
Unit 102 Be going to - Future Simple  239-240
I. Napisz o zamiarach poszczególnych osób stosując be going to:
tomorrow next week soon

Christine visit her dentist start a new job get married
Martin stay at home book tickets buy a flat
The Smiths do shopping sell their car move out
You
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................
II. Ułóż pytania stosując be going to:

1. Ann has bought a picture. Where ........................................? (hang)
2. The printer has broken down. Who ........................................? (repair)
3. I have bought a new CD. When ........................................? (listen to)
4. They have forgotten their money. How ........................................? (pay)
5. Charles has lost his job? What ........................................? (do)
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując be going to lub Future Simple:

1. A: Why have you brought this screw-driver here?
B: I .............................. (see to) the radio receiver.
2. A: This bottle is already empty.
B: Don’t worry. I .............................. (get) you another one.
3. A: .............................. (you / do) me a favour, please?
B: With pleasure.
4. A: I’ve hired a private teacher for my daughter.
B: What .............................. (she / study)?
5. A: Look! Jack’s carrying flowers for Mary.
B: Do you think he .............................. (make) a proposal?
6. A: Can you rely on Mr Henson?
B: Certainly. I’m sure he .............................. (come) punctually.
7. A: The sky is becoming more overcast now.
B: I think the weather .............................. (change) for worse.
8. A: .............................. (you / have) any free time next weekend?
B: I don’t know. I haven’t made any plans yet.
110
Unit 103 Be going to - Present Continuous  240
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując be going to lub Present Continuous:
1. ‘What are your plans for this evening, Simon?’ ‘I ............................. (go)
to a concert with my wife.’
2. I’ve hired a few workers. I .............................. (have) my house done up.
3. You’d better take some warm clothes. It .............................. (be) cold.
4. Why are you bringing all the files? .............................. (you / read) them?
5. It ............................. (get) dark. Let’s go home.
6. It’s been awfully dry here. I’m afraid the plants ........................... (wither) soon.
7. We .............................. (spend) this evening in the theatre. Jack’s already
booked tickets for us.
8. He’s not satisfied with his job. He .............................. (resign), I suppose.
9. ‘Could we meet next Saturday?’ ‘I’m afraid not. I .............................. (have)
guests from London, then.’
10. ‘Let me try it on, please.’ ‘I hope you .............................. (not buy) this
expensive dress, darling.’
11. It’s hot. I .............................. (take) a cold shower.
12. Paul has arranged an appointment with the interior designers.
He .............................. (meet) them on Thursday.
13. I’ve called for a taxi. I .............................. (leave) for Bristol.
14. Come to the party. It .............................. (be) a great fun.
15. There’s no ladder around. How ............................. (you / climb) onto the roof?
II. Uzupełnij dialogi stosując be going to lub Present Continuous:

1. A: Brian .............................. (go) fishing tomorrow.
B: .............................. (you / go) with him?
A: Yes, I am. But, I .............................. (not fish).
2. A: Their firm .............................. (merge) with a big corporation soon.
B: I .............................. (ask) Frank about the cost of the transaction.
A: Don’t do it. He might become suspicious.
3. A: Can I borrow this dictionary from you?
B: No, you can’t. I .............................. (take) it for my exam tomorrow.
4. A: Why are you building a dog-house?
B: I .............................. (buy) a puppy for my children.
5. A: The Clarks .............................. (go) to the Alps on holiday.
B: .............................. (they / climb) the mountains?
A: I don’t know. But I’m certain they .............................. (have) a good time.
6. A: I .............................. (think) of quitting my job in the company.
B: What’s wrong with it?
A: Financial problems. The firm .............................. (collapse) soon.
111
Unit 104 Future Continuous  241
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Future Continuous oraz właściwe czasowniki:
broadcast celebrate give practise watch work
1. Jack will be busy in the morning. He .............................. a lecture between 9

and 10 o’clock.
2. This time next Sunday, our radio station .............................. an interview with
the Prime Minister.
3. Remember not to disturb me in the afternoon. I ..............................
a football match on TV, then.
4. My parents .............................. their silver wedding this time next week.
5. Jim won’t be at home at 4 p.m. He .............................. in his office at this
time.
6. When you come in the evening, Julia .............................. the piano.
II. Uzupełnij zdania brakującą informacją korzystając z informacji w tabeli:
next Saturday next Friday between

tomorrow at 5 p.m. at 10 a.m. 2 and 4 p.m.
Josh take a nap do shopping prepare a speech
Robert learn German talk to his boss drive to Devon
Sue and Helen act in a play clean the house do exercise
1. ‘What .............................. (Robert) tomorrow at 5 p.m.?’ ‘..............................’

2. ‘.............................. (Josh) next Saturday at 10 a.m.?’ ‘Yes, he will.’
3. ‘Will Sue and Helen be taking a nap next Saturday at 10 a.m.?’ ‘......................’
4. ‘What .............................. (Robert) next Friday between 2 and 4 p.m.?’
‘..............................................................................................................’
5. ‘.............................. (Sue and Helen) tomorrow at 5 p.m.?’ ‘Yes, they will.’
6. ‘.............................. (talk to his boss) next Saturday at 10 a.m.?’ ‘Yes, he will.’
7. ‘What .............................. (Josh) next Friday between 2 and 4 p.m.?’
‘..............................................................................................................’
8. ‘Will Josh be doing shopping tomorrow at 5 p.m.?’ ‘..............................’
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Future Continuous lub Future Simple:

1. I’m sure Jack ............................. (listen) to his favourite group when we arrive.
2. ‘I can hardly understand the exercise.’ ‘I ............................ (explain) it to you.’
3. You needn’t go out to the post-office. I .............................. (send) the letters
for you as I .............................. (go) there in a moment.
4. Come at three. I .............................. (not do) anything at the time.
5. ‘Waiter! This fork is dirty!’ ‘I’m sorry, sir. I ............................... (bring) you another.’
112
Unit 105 Future Simple - Future  239, 241
Continuous
I. Uzupełnij dialogi stosując Future Simple lub Future Continuous:
1. A: Can you lend me your hand-drill?
B: I’m afraid I can’t. I .............................. (use) it tomorrow.
2. A: How about meeting in the town hall at twelve o’clock?
B: I’m sorry I can’t. I .............................. (give) a lecture at the time.
3. A: .............................. (they / be) free at seven o’clock?
B: No, they .............................. (have) their private lessons at the time.
4. A: Could you bring me some water from the stream, please?
B: I .............................. (not do) it as I am busy at the moment.
5. A: Have you made all the necessary arrangements yet?
B: Sure, we have. The President .............................. (arrive) at midday.
6. A: I can’t go on cleaning the pipes any longer.
B: I .............................. (do) it for you if you wish.
7. A: What time .............................. (she / deliver) her speech tomorrow?
B: One p.m. I guess.
8. A: Ask Fred to fix the curtains.
B: He .............................. (not do) that. He hates doing any housework.
9. A: We must hurry up. Our bus .............................. (leave) in a few minutes.
B: Just a while. I must find my suitcase.
10. A: I .............................. (meet) you when I finish my classes.
B: Good. I .............................. (wait) for you in my house, then.
II. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami w Future Simple lub Future Continuous:

1. Don’t make noise when you come. The baby .............................. (sleep).
2. Someone has damaged the handle. You .............................. (have to) repair it.
3. If they come at noon, we .............................. (have) dinner at the time.
4. Next week at this time, my brother .............................. (write) an exam.
5. Take good notes or else you .............................. (forget) everything.
6. If you tell the truth, you .............................. (not have to) stay in detention.
7. Look up! The plane .............................. (touch) down in a moment.
8. What .............................. (Tom / do) tomorrow between six and seven p.m.?
9. There .............................. (be) no crowd here if you come at nine.
10. It’s bad news, but Jill .............................. (not sing) tomorrow because of her
sick throat.
11. This task is quite difficult, so I .............................. (give) you a few tips.
12. I’m on leave next week. Mr Rask .............................. (stand) in for me.
113
Unit 106 Will / Shall  242
I. Napisz pytania stosując ‘Shall I ...?’:
1. ‘I’ve no more bread at home.’ ‘..................................................?’ (buy)
2. ‘The lights are off.’ ‘..................................................?’ (switch on)
3. ‘My button is undone.’ ‘..................................................?’ (fix)
4. ‘The floor is dirty.’ ‘..................................................?’ (clean)
5. ‘We want to go to London.’ ‘..................................................?’ (give a ride)
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując will lub won’t oraz właściwe czasowniki:
1. Freddie isn’t feeling well. He ................................... in tomorrow’s match.
2. I ................................... a chicken stew. I don’t know how to do it.
3. Don’t touch the dog. It ................................... you. It’s dangerous.
4. She ................................... you borrow the tape recorder. It isn’t hers.
5. I ................................... everything for you if you promise to marry me.
6. The bank ................................... a loan to us. We have no savings in it.
7. If the student fails his exam again, we ................................... him repeat
the course this time.
8. They refuse to co-operate. They say they ..................................... a deal
with us.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując will lub shall:

1. .................... you be so kind as to pick us up on your way to the city centre?
2. ‘My watch is broken. What .................... I do?’ ‘Take it to a watchmaker’s.’
3. The ashtray is full. .................... I empty it for you?
4. He’s very boring. He .................... talk about his fishing experiences for hours.
5. ‘I can’t leave now.’ ‘Don’t worry. I .................... settle your matters for you.’
6. ‘Where .................... we go on holiday this summer?’ ‘Greece, I think.’
7. I’m really shocked with their behaviour. They .................... not enter this place
any more. I promise.
8. ‘We’ve delivered your books, madam. Where .................... we put them?’
‘On the floor, please.’
9. I expect Michael .................... receive my message soon.
10. He says he’s sorry for calling you names and he promises that he ....................
never do it again.
11. ‘What time .................... I come for you?’ ‘I .................... be ready at seven.’
12. My daughter wants that doll very much. She .................... get it as a Christmas
present from me.
13. Railway regulation: ‘Passengers .................... keep silent after ten p.m.’
14. I’ll help you if you .................... kindly tell me what service you are looking for.
15. Formal letter: ‘..................... you please send us your current price list?’
114
Unit 107 Future Perfect  243
I. Napisz o poszczególnych osobach stosując Future Perfect oraz dane z tabeli:
by next week by July by next year

Gregory have his hair cut find a new job learn French
Debbie pass her exams go on holiday finish studying
The Smiths get their salaries buy new furniture pay their debts
You
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując czas Future Perfect:

1. I / do the repairs ............................................................ by Friday.
2. You / not read the book ............................................................ by next month.
3. Stella / prepare lunch ............................................................ by three o’clock.
4. John / not finish his novel ............................................................ by next year.
5. They / leave ............................................................ by the end of next month.
6. The film / end ............................................................ by ten o’clock.
7. We / gather the crops ............................................................ by September.
8. She / not get married ............................................................ by next year.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując czas Future Perfect:

1. By the end of this month, Sue and Jack .............................. (be) engaged for
three months.
2. .............................. (the Browns / sell) their house by next winter?
3. She’s doing a course in shorthand. She .............................. (finish) it in two
weeks’ time.
4. By September, the rock group .............................. (record) their new CD.
5. Sit down and have some tea. I .............................. (prepare) everything by the
time you finish drinking.
6. Don’t phone after five. We .............................. (go) out of the house by the
time.
7. Before my parents return, I .............................. (clean) the house.
8. .............................. (you / deliver) the mail by noon?
9. By the time winter comes, all leaves .............................. (fall) from the trees.
10. My secretary .............................. (type) the letters for you by tomorrow.
115
Unit 108 Future Perfect Continuous  243
I. Ułóż zdania stosując czas Future Perfect Continuous:
1. Our relatives / live in South America / ten years
.................................................................................................. by 1 January.
2. Tom’s sister / work as a deputy / six months
By next Monday ...............................................................................................
3. The ministers / discuss some important matters / two hours
.................................................................................................. by ten o’clock.
4. Gregory / study social sciences / four years
By the end of next month .................................................................................
5. We / travel around Europe / seven days
By Saturday .....................................................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując czas Future Perfect Continuous:

1. By the end of the month, I .............................. (stay) in London for two years.
2. How long .............................. (they / repair) your car by five p.m.?
3. My father .............................. (live) abroad for one year by 29 July.
4. You ........................... (watch) television for three hours in a few minutes’ time.
5. How long .............................. (she / learn) Spanish by the end of the year?
6. By seven o’clock, I .............................. (do) exercise for two hours.
7. Susie .............................. (keep) my books for two months by next week.
8. I .............................. (not work) for three weeks by the end of this month.
9. How long .............................. (you / date) Muriel by Easter?
10. The Greens .............................. (renovate) their mansion for a year by June.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Future Perfect lub Future Perfect Continuous:
1. By next Christmas, I .............................. (not see) my parents for ten months.
2. In two weeks’ time, our grandfather .............................. (stay) in hospital for a
year.
3. We .............................. (know) each other for about six years by October.
4. By the year of 2010, our company .............................. (finish) building the
modern housing estate.
5. Change the tape, please. By one o’clock, you .............................. (listen) to
the same music for three hours.
6. I .............................. (not paint) all the walls by tomorrow.
7. How long .............................. (Mark / stay) in Italy by the end of the month?
8. By this time next month, we .............................. (have) the car for two years.
9. Before they come, the ceremony .............................. (begin).
10. What’s wrong with the baby? In a few minutes’ time, she ..............................
(cry) for a half an hour.
116
Unit 109 Past Perfect  245
I. Uzupełnij zdania właściwymi czasownikami w czasie Past Perfect:
begin drive eat kidnap lose meet quarrel quit
1. I couldn’t open the door because I .............................. my keys.

2. The performance .............................. (already) by the time we arrived.
3. She was upset the whole afternoon. She .............................. with her boss.
4. After I .............................. my job, they hired a new attorney.
5. Joan recognised me in the supermarket. We .............................. each other at
a summer camp.
6. There was nothing left in the fridge. They .............................. everything.
7. The man who .............................. a child was sent to prison for seven years.
8. I knew how to start the engine. I ............................. a lorry like this one before.
II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując czas Past Perfect:

1. Jane wasn’t at home when I came. She .............................. (go) shopping.
2. By the time we arrived, other tourists .............................. (book) all the rooms
in the hotel.
3. Sean was late. His car .............................. (break) down on the road.
4. I couldn’t use the typewriter. Someone .............................. (damage) it.
5. They started working hard after I ............................ (reprimand) them strongly.
6. There ............................. (not be) many disturbances before the police arrived.
7. She knew the book very well. She .............................. (read) it twice.
8. We .............................. (exchange) the whole crew by the time the new
captain took over.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując czas Past Simple lub Past Perfect:
1. Before we .................... (set) out, we .................... (spend) a few hours
checking the boat.
2. She .................... (write) a lot of poems by the time she .................... (die).
3. After I .................... (lose) my wallet, I .................... (go) to the bank for
a loan.
4. When the conjurer .................... (finish) his performance, the choir soloist
.................... (appear) on the stage.
5. The driver who .................... (cause) the accident .................... (have to) be
taken to hospital.
6. Many months .................... (pass) before they finally .................... (decide) to
get married.
7. By the time Mr Palmer .................... (call) the police, the burglar ....................
(escape) with his loots.
8. Who .................... (the flat / belong to) before you .................... (move) in?
117
Unit 110 Past Perfect Continuous  246
I. Ułóż zdania w czasie Past Perfect Continuous:
1. Debbie looked bad. She / feel / unwell ........................................ all night.
2. The plates were dirty. Someone / use / them ........................................ .
3. Ron had sweat all over his face. He / work hard ........................................ .
4. I was unable to drive. I / drink / beer ....................................... .
5. Mary had bags under her eyes. She / cry ........................................ .
6. Everything was white around. It / snow hard ........................................ all day.
7. Nick had his glasses on. He / read / a newspaper ........................................ .
8. The baby’s bib was dirty. She / eat ........................................ .
9. There were pools of water all around. It / rain hard ........................................ .
10. It was awfully smoky in the room. Somebody / smoke ...................................... .
II. Uzupełnij zdania właściwymi czasownikami w Past Perfect Continuous:
blow cook drift fight grate walk
1. Our raft ............................ for several days before we finally reached dry land.
2. A great many trees collapsed because of the strong wind that ...........................
for two days.
3. You could tell Sam .............................. again by his bruised face.
4. The children’s clothes were wet through. They ............................ in heavy rain.
5. The fire was still burning. Someone .............................. a meal before we
arrived.
6. I .............................. beetroots, that’s why my hands were red.
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując Past Perfect lub Past Perfect Continuous:
1. We .................... (not meet) until he came up and introduced himself.
2. The engine was hot. The machine .................... (work) for several hours.
3. I .................... (read) for too long. My eyes were burning.
4. I .................... (read) fifty pages before I feel asleep.
5. We couldn’t use the switchboard. Someone .................... (damage) it.
6. There was still a lot of steam in the bathroom. My roommate ....................
(take) a bath.
7. We ................... (launch) dozens of probes before the first manned spaceflight
was made possible.
8. We .................... (test) several printers before we decided to place an order.
9. Mike turned red after I .................... (mention) Gloria’s name.
10. Who .................... (occupy) the flat before you bought it?
118
Unit 111 Past Perfect (Continuous) - Past Simple  231, 245-6
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując czas Past Perfect Continuous:
1. Jim was awfully tired. He .............................. (work) all night.
2. There was snow all around. It .............................. (snow) for three days.
3. She looked bored. She .............................. (wait) for a long time.
4. The computer was on. Someone .............................. (use) it.
5. They left their tools here. They .............................. (build) a garden shed.
6. Her eyes were aching. She ............................ (read) books the whole evening.
7. I was totally powerless. I .............................. (do) exercise for three hours.
8. Their clothes were dirty. They .............................. (play) in mud.
II. Zastosuj Past Perfect, Past Perfect Continuous lub Past Simple:
1. When I .................... (see) Brian rolling in pain I .................... (call) an
ambulance.
2. After the storm .................... (subside), the people .................... (start)
rebuilding their houses.
3. Frank .................... (sleep) for seven hours before someone’s voice
.................... (wake) him up.
4. Sue .................... (already/practice) judo for four years when she ...................
(win) the world championship.
5. By the time the boss .................... (return) from a symposium, his office
.................... (be) moved to the tenth floor.
6. I .................... (try) to put the fire down on my own for twenty minutes when
the fire brigade .................... (arrive).
7. When the parents .................... (come) back at midnight, the children
.................... (already/fall) asleep.
8. Before we .................... (tell) her to turn the radio down she ....................
(listen) to it at full volume for half an hour.
III. Zastosuj Past Perfect, Past Perfect Continuous lub Past Simple:
1. A: ......................... (you/go) to visit the Royal Palace yesterday?
B: I ......................... (not want) to. I ......................... (see) it earlier.
2. A: Why ......................... (the soldier/look) so tired in the morning?
B: Probably because he ......................... (keep) guard the whole night.
3. A: What ......................... (happen) last Friday, Mrs Diamond?
B: Well, when I ......................... (return) home I ......................... (think)
that someone ......................... (break) into it and ......................... (steal)
my jewellery. But, later I ......................... (remember) I .........................
(forget) to lock the door myself.
119
Unit 112 Użycie różnych czasów (1)  227-246
I. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami w poprawnej formie czasowej:
1. John .............................. (not go) fishing for two years.
2. My son always .............................. (go) to bed at ten.
3. We .............................. (not meet) anyone in the park yesterday.
4. I .............................. (have) an appointment with doctor Williams tomorrow.
5. Where .............................. (you/be) so long? We .............................. (wait)
for you since two o’clock.
6. It ............................ (rain) heavily while we ............................. (drive) home
last night.
7. Susan .............................. (not send) us any holiday postcard yet.
8. Harry ............................ (usually/not have) time to play in the afternoon.
9. By next Sunday, our father .............................. (turn) fifty.
10. The mouse was lucky. It .............................. (run) away before the cat
.............................. (see) it.
11. .............................. (Alex/stand) in a queue yesterday at five p.m.?
12. Look! George and Maggie .............................. (kiss) each other.
13. .............................. (you/see) my cap? I can’t find it anywhere.
14. Mr Dowson .............................. (use) the machine when it broke down.
15. Eleven o’clock tomorrow doesn’t suit me at all. I .............................. (pack) my
luggage at the time.
II. Uzupełnij dialogi czasownikami w poprawnej formie czasowej:

1. A: What .............................. (Rich and Carol/do) at the moment?
B: They .............................. (talk) to their boss. They ............................. (sit)
in his office since eight a.m.
2. A: Where .............................. (you/live) before you ..............................
(decide) to settle in Cambridge in 1992?
B: I .............................. (not remember) exactly now. I ..............................
(change) my places of stay at least twenty times so far.
3. A: Can you tell us what .............................. (happen) last Monday?
B: It ............................ (be) about two a.m. I ............................ (walk) home
from a party and then the two guys .............................. (approach) me
and .............................. (ask) for a cigarette.
4. A: .............................. (Adam/ask) you to help him yesterday?
B: No, he .............................. (arrange) for someone else before.
5. A: .............................. (Maurice / ever / see) Tokyo?
B: Yes. He .............................. (fly) there with me last summer. But I’m sure
he .............................. (be) delighted when you tell him you
.............................. (take) him to Japan again this summer.
120
I. Wybierz poprawną odpowiedź:
1. We have seen / saw / had seen the Louvre when we were in Paris.
2. Simon has been / was / had been studying law for ten months when he
finally decided to drop out.
3. I’ve just confirmed our arrival in Boston next week. We leave / are leaving /
will leave on Wednesday.
4. Tom has owned / has been owning / owns this bike for three years now.
5. As soon as you are moving / will move / move out, I’ll rent the flat to Nick.
6. There are being / were / have been ten demonstrations in our city this week.
7. On entering the office I saw two masked men who had stolen / were stealing /
stole some documents from my drawer.
8. Soon after our father’s promotion we started / have started / were starting to
live more comfortably.
9. By next December our department undergoes / has undergone / will have
undergone a thorough reorganisation.
10. He’s been so proud ever since he became / had become / was becoming
the Chairman.
II. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami w poprawnej formie:

1. There .............................. (be) lots of complaints about his behaviour since he
.............................. (begin) attending the classes last month.
2. Nobody .............................. (pay) any attention to the damaged wiring until
one member of the staff .............................. (be) electrocuted last Friday.
3. Brian .............................. (work) really hard. He used to come back home after
midnight.
4. I cannot tell you much about this author. I .............................. (never / read)
any of his books.
5. Why don’t you switch the alarm-clock off? It .............................. (ring) for
twenty minutes now.
6. I realised something wrong .............................. (go on) as soon as I
.............................. (hear) these wild screams.
7. Isn’t it high time you .............................. (return) the pliers?
You .............................. (keep) them for too long.
8. ‘How often ............................ (Bill / have to) feed his goldfish?’ ‘Twice a day.’
9. We .............................. (arrange) everything for you by the time you
.............................. (arrive) home next Sunday.
10. Don’t be afraid. Nothing wrong .............................. (happen) as long as you
.............................. (obey) all the regulations.
121
I. Uzupełnij tekst czasownikami w poprawnej formie.
When I first ......................... (meet) Noah in 1984 he ......................... (be) a

small boy. I must say he ............................ (grow) a lot since that time.
He......................... (become) a very serious young man. It ...................... (be)
a great pleasure to speak with such an eloquent man now. He .........................
(just/graduate) from secondary school and next week he .........................
(write) qualification tests for university. He ......................... (want) to study
social sciences and he ......................... (hope) to make an important official or
even a politician in the future.
However, things have been a bit different with Noah’s older brother - Simon
whom I ......................... (know) since childhood. Before he .........................
(join) the army in 1988, he ...................... (spend) a few years abroad away
from home. He ......................... (travel) a lot in Europe and Asia and
.......................... (settle) in the Indian capital - New Delhi - for two years.
I guess that Simon .......................... (not feel) too happy so far away from his
hometown, and so he ......................... (make) up his mind to return in 1987.
After the military service he ................... (take) up different jobs, but ever since
the crisis ......................... (begin) in 1999 he ......................... (be)
unemployed.
I ......................... (not hear) much from Stella - Noah and Simon’s sister who
.......................... (emigrate) to Canada in 1986. Before the emigration, she
.......................... (work) as a waitress in the local restaurant, but supposedly,
this job ......................... (not give) much satisfaction to a clever girl like Stella,
so she ......................... (leave) her native town for good. As far as I know, she
.......................... (get) married to some Scotsman not a long time ago and they
......................... (have) a baby in a few months’ time.
II. Uzupełnij dialog czasownikami w poprawnej formie:

A: How long ......................... (you/wait) for me, Mr Turner?
B: I ......................... (come) here at eight thirty.
A: Eight thirty?! What ......................... (you/do) all this time?
B: I ...................... (read) magazines and ...................... (talk) to your secretary.
A: All right then. You said you ......................... (look) for a job in a firm like ours.
B: Right. I ......................... (dream) about being a private detective all my life.
A: What other jobs ......................... (you/do) so far?
B: Well, I ....................... (work) as a tax collector, photographer and
a bodyguard.
A: You .............................. (seem) to be a man with experience. So, I think I
......................... (give) you a chance, but first you ......................... (have) to
go through a series of examinations.
B: That’s good. When ......................... (I/start)?
A: Tomorrow, at eight sharp.
122
I. Uzupełnij zdania właściwą formą czasowników:
1. David Holmes is a teacher but he .............................. (always / dream) of

working as a radio announcer. Since he .............................. (leave) school in
1998 he .............................. (take up) a few jobs and ..............................
(apply) for his favourite one several times. So far, he ..............................
(not be) successful in convincing the radio managers about his skills.
2. Right after the end of the war my grandparents .............................. (decide) to

return to their homeland. They .............................. (travel) in sun, rain and
cold for almost one month until they finally .............................. (reach) their
village. What they .............................. (see) was a rubble of bricks and dust
instead of a fine cottage which their ancestors .............................. (build)
before they .............................. (be) even born. Not much later, they
.............................. (make) a decision to move to Warsaw.
3. Tomorrow is an important day for Jack. He .............................. (take) the final

examination at school. That’s why he .............................. (study) hard, even at
night, for the last two weeks. He says he ............................. (already / master)
most of the material, so we hope he .............................. (do) well. But, even if
he .............................. (not make) the grade at the first time, he
.............................. (be) given another chance in three months’ time.
4. Torrential rains that .............................. (fall) in Indonesia for the last twelve
days .............................. (already / flood) a great many villages and small
cities. The number of victims .............................. (still / remain) unknown and
it .............................. (not be) clear until the rains .............................. (ease
off). However, according to the latest weather forecast the situation
.............................. (not change) till the end of the wet season.
5. There .............................. (not be) much publicity about the reforms before
one of the deputy-ministers .............................. (reveal) some relevant facts
last Monday. He said he .............................. (believe) that the whole system of
education .............................. (have to) be reorganised in the near future.
Some other officials admitted they .............................. (work) over new bills on
foreign trading since January. It soon became obvious that a lot of things
.............................. (change) since the new government ..............................
(take over) in autumn.
123
Unit 116 Tryb warunkowy I  247
I. Połącz zdania w logiczne pary:
1. If Sylvia goes on a diet a I will buy souvenirs for everybody.

2. If Monica forgets the tickets b our team will lose a good player.
3. If the water is hot c we won’t see the performance.
4. If Patrick resigns d she will lose weight.
5. If he lends me some money e you will be allowed to bathe in the sea.
II. Napisz zdania warunkowe korzystając z podanych zdań:

1. I must find my keys. I want to open the door.
If I ....................................................................................................................
2. They would like to get a loan. They want to set up a private enterprise.
If they ..............................................................................................................
3. You must come early. You hope to buy tickets for the performance.
If you ...............................................................................................................
4. Alice must pass her exams. She wants to study chemistry.
If Alice .............................................................................................................
5. Jim is trying to catch a thief. He wants to get a prize.
If Jim ...............................................................................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami w poprawnej formie:

1. You ......................... (not make) progress if you don’t learn more.
2. If there ......................... (be) enough snow, we will make a snowman.
3. He ......................... (start) redecorating the kitchen if he has time tomorrow.
4. They won’t bring the tape if you ......................... (not ask) them to.
5. If you don’t put on some warm clothes, you ......................... (catch) a cold.
IV. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami w poprawnej formie:

1. You ........................ (feel) tired if you ........................ (not get) enough sleep.
2. The teacher ......................... (reprimand) us if we .......................... (not write)
our homework.
3. He says he ......................... (quit) if he ......................... (not get) a rise.
4. If she ......................... (have) enough time, she ......................... (talk) to you.
5. There ......................... (not be) peace if they ......................... (not stop)
fighting.
6. If he ....................... (find) out you have a gun, he ...................... (arrest) you.
7. The flowers ......................... (fade) away if it ......................... (not rain) soon.
8. Your condition ......................... (not improve) if you ......................... (not go)
to hospital.
124
Unit 117 Tryb warunkowy II  248
1. If Debbie worked harder a I wouldn’t waste my time watching it.

2. If he sang again b the audience would be very happy.
3. If Jim had a driving licence c her boss would pay her more money.
4. If the coach let me play d he would be able to drive us to school.
5. If the film were boring e I would score a goal.

1. We want to listen to some music but we don’t have a radio.
If we ................................................................................................................
2. David doesn’t know Italian and he will not translate these documents.
If David ...........................................................................................................
3. I don’t earn much and I cannot afford to buy expensive clothes.
If I ....................................................................................................................
4. You wake up too late because you don’t set your alarm-clock.
If you ...............................................................................................................
5. Andrew isn’t experienced yet and doesn’t know how to use the tools.
If Andrew ........................................................................................................

1. We ......................... (smile) more often if we were happier.
2. If Brian ......................... (close) his shop, he would go bankrupt.
3. If there ......................... (be) more sunlight, we would go sunbathing.
4. I ......................... (take) a few photos if I had my camera.
5. I ......................... (be) grateful if you looked after my baby this evening.

1. If the excursion ......................... (not be) so exhausting, we .........................
(enjoy) it more.
2. We ........................ (not feel) so comfortable here if the hosts ........................
(not be) so kind and generous to us.
3. If you ......................... (give) me a clue, I ......................... (find) out what you
were talking about.
4. He ......................... (answer) your question if he ......................... (know) the
correct answer.
5. If you ......................... (not be) so forgetful, people ......................... (not get)
angry with you so often.
6. The construction work .......................... (go) faster if the sponsors
......................... (offer) more financial support.
125
Unit 118 Tryb warunkowy III  248
1. If Nick hadn’t touched the live wire a the ferry wouldn’t have capsized.
2. If you hadn’t called Bob names b it wouldn’t have bitten her.
3. If there had been fewer people on board c you wouldn’t have paid a fine.
4. If you had bought a ticket d he wouldn’t have felt offended.
5. If she hadn’t teased the dog e he wouldn’t have been electrocuted.

1. John didn’t take an umbrella. He got wet through.
If John ............................................................................................................
2. We played miserably. We lost the game.
If we ................................................................................................................
3. Linda wasn’t very careful. She made too many mistakes.
If Linda ...........................................................................................................
4. You broke the vase. You didn’t handle it gently.
If you ..............................................................................................................
5. The police closed the road. There was a car crash.
If there ............................................................................................................

1. Ronald ......................... (visit) us in Boston if he had had more time.
2. The passengers wouldn’t have drowned if rescue ....................... (arrive) early.
3. We ......................... (not give up) climbing the mountain if the weather hadn’t
deteriorated to so much.
4. If you ......................... (come) to my party last evening, you would have met
my friends.
5. The fire ......................... (not spread) out if there hadn’t been this terrible wind.

1. Dan ......................... (become) a monk if he ......................... (not meet) that
wonderful girl.
2. If Mary ......................... (not have) her sore tooth pulled out, she
............................. (suffer) the whole night.
3. His life .......................... (not be) so stressful if he ......................... (not work)
as a stuntman.
4. If the alarm ......................... (not go) off the thieves ......................... (steal)
everything from the store.
5. The peace talks ......................... (be) successful if the terrorists
......................... (not attack) again.
126
Unit 119 Tryby warunkowe I - II  247-248
I. Połącz zdania we właściwe pary:
1. If Jim weren’t so mean a he will wake everyone up.

2. If you drop the vase b my wife will be angry.
3. If you won the competition c it will break to pieces.
4. If Roy keeps slamming the door d I would congratulate you.
5. If prices went down e he would lend us some money.
6. If I come late for dinner f we could afford a new apartment.

1. The book is awfully boring. If it .......................... (be) more interesting I would
read it faster.
2. Joan likes Peter. If he ......................... (ask) her for a date, she will agree.
3. Your room is in disorder. If you cared more, it ......................... (look)
cleaner.
4. This shirt may be too long. If it ......................... (not fit) well, I will exchange it.
5. I ......................... (show) you my photos if I find them.
6. The manager is dissatisfied. He ......................... (be) happier if his employees
worked harder.
7. Simone looks miserable. If she ......................... (take) up some sport she
would feel healthier.
8. Be careful. The wire is live. It ......................... (kill) you if you touched it.
9. Let’s go out of here. The caretaker will be furious if he ......................... (see)
us here.
10. Your tea is hot. You ......................... (burn) your mouth if you tried to drink it.
III. Uzupełnij dialogi czasownikami w poprawnej formie:

1. A: What ......................... (happen) if I told them the truth?
B: They would be astonished if they ......................... (find) out that you were
a secret agent.
2. A: I’m going to sell my car next year.
B: Well, if you ......................... (do) it this year, you will get a better price.
3. A: What would Brenda tell if we ...................... (move) her office downstairs?
B: I’m certain she ......................... (not be) too happy if we did that.
4. A: Is the animal dangerous?
B: Sure it is. It ......................... (bite) your hand off if only it could.
5. A: Will George help us on Friday?
B: He will certainly do if he ......................... (take) the day off.
127
Unit 120 Tryby warunkowe II - III  248-249
I. Przepisz zdania stosując tryb warunkowy II lub III:
1. I took the newspaper because I didn’t know that you were reading it.
If I ....................................................................................................................
2. I shouldn’t have drunk so much. I felt terrible the next day.
I wouldn’t ........................................................................................................
3. He doesn’t learn much. He gets poor marks.
If he .................................................................................................................
4. She feels lonely. She should make new friends.
If she ...............................................................................................................
5. Tom paid a fine. He smoked a cigarette in a non-smoking compartment.
Tom wouldn’t .................................................................................................
6. They weren’t ready. They started too late.
If they .............................................................................................................
7. I cannot buy a new flat. I don’t earn much enough.
If I ...................................................................................................................
8. She didn’t give me a prescription. I didn’t ask for it.
She would ......................................................................................................
9. The air is polluted because the factories emit toxic fumes.
The air ............................................................................................................
10. Your food goes stale. You don’t keep it in your refrigerator.
If you ..............................................................................................................
II. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną formą czasownika:
1. If our best striker ......................... (play) in the match, we would have won it.
2. What ......................... (you/do) if someone called you a fool?
3. There ......................... (not be) any demonstrations if the workers’ wages were
increased.
4. We wouldn’t see anything if you ........................ (draw) the curtains.
5. Would you have caught the thief if you ......................... (be) able to run faster?
6. We ......................... (feel) more comfortable if the room service were nicer.
7. If he washed his teeth properly, he ......................... (not suffer) from caries.
8. The gun ......................... (not fire) if he had locked it before.
9. I ......................... (believe) that you were a university graduate if I saw your
documents.
10. If Sarah ......................... (not forget) to disconnect the iron, the fire wouldn’t
have broken out.
128
Unit 121 Tryby warunkowe I - II - III  247-249
I. Wybierz poprawną formę czasownika:
1. If it starts / will start raining, we won’t / didn’t go surfing in the sea.
2. He would have bought / had bought the trousers if I didn’t show / hadn’t shown
him the flaw.
3. We wouldn’t / didn’t insulate the house if we didn’t / wouldn’t have to.
4. The company collapses / will collapse if it won’t / doesn’t take large credits.
5. You wouldn’t have got / hadn’t got food poisoning if you didn’t eat / hadn’t
eaten some stale food.
6. If I would be / were in your place, I wouldn’t / didn’t break up with Andrew.
7. I would tip / tipped waiters more often if they would be / were more polite.
8. The risk hadn’t been / wouldn’t have been so big if we wouldn’t have been
/ hadn’t been climbing in foggy weather.
9. If someone will see / sees you here, they raise / will raise an alarm.
10. If Ted hadn’t / wouldn’t have beaten the younger boy up, he wouldn’t have
been / hadn’t been expelled from school.

1. If he calls me a liar again, I ......................... (not speak) to him.
2. The audience ......................... (be) bigger yesterday if you had given away
more free tickets.
3. She wouldn’t have died if the ambulance ......................... (arrive) earlier.
4. You will have to explain everything to the boss if he ....................... (ask) for it.
5. If Mike ......................... (move) abroad, we would miss him a lot.
6. The girl wouldn’t have screamed if she ......................... (not be) in danger.
7. Will I have to pay higher taxes if I ......................... (take) the other job?
8. He says he’ll be disappointed if he ......................... (not receive) any answer
to his love letter.
9. We ......................... (stay) at the seaside longer if we hadn’t had to return to
work.
10. If Terry had been listening to the teacher, he ......................... (know) what the
lesson was about.
III. Dokończ zdania:
1. Dinosaurs wouldn’t have died out if ..... 6. If I were the President, .....
2. I would be happier if ..... 7. If it rains tomorrow, .....
3. If I had been born in a foreign country, ..... 8. People will feel safer if .....
4. If the Titanic hadn’t struck the iceberg, ..... 9. If holidays were longer, .....
5. My parents will be angry if ..... 10. If I had more money, .....
129
Unit 122 If - unless  250
I. Przepisz zdania stosując unless:
1. I will never talk to you again if you don’t tell me the truth.
I .....................................................................................................................
2. If the storm doesn’t subside, we’ll have to give up going sailing.
Unless ...........................................................................................................
3. John will go to prison if he doesn’t start paying alimony.
John ..............................................................................................................
4. There will be disturbances if the workers don’t get higher wages.
Unless ...........................................................................................................
5. If your behaviour doesn’t change, you will be punished.
You ...............................................................................................................
6. Our plans will turn into a failure if we don’t find any sponsors.
Unless ...........................................................................................................
7. If rain doesn’t fall, all crops will go waste.
All crops .......................................................................................................
8. You won’t find out anything if you don’t ask more questions.
Unless ...........................................................................................................
9. We’ll arrive late if we don’t speed up.
We .................................................................................................................
10. If she doesn’t make progress, she will be moved to a lower group.
Unless ...........................................................................................................
II. Wstaw if lub unless:
1. .............................. you apologise to Nick, he will take offence with you.

2. Our shares will go down .............................. we don’t change our economic
policy.
3. .............................. I go abroad, I will learn to speak foreign languages.
4. Don’t switch on the alarm .............................. it’s really necessary.
5. We’ll lose the game .............................. we score two more points.
6. You’ll get wet .............................. you don’t put on your raincoat.
7. .............................. he stops smoking, his condition won’t improve.
8. .............................. I pass my last exam tomorrow, I’ll go on holiday.
9. Ann will never find true friends .............................. she goes on criticising
everybody.
10. ............................. our father catches some fish, we’ll have only biscuits to live
on.
11. The baby will cry .............................. you don’t give her toys back.
12. You will get a new Identity Card .............................. you lose this one.
130
Unit 123 Wish + Past Simple / would  250
I. Napisz życzenie stosując wish + Past Simple:
You: ‘I don’t have much time for myself. I don’t read many books and I don’t
spend much time with my family. I can’t work in my garden in the afternoon.
I work too long. My work is so exhausting.’
I wish ...............................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
Sue: ‘I would like to meet a rich boyfriend. I would like to live in a big house.
I would like to move out of the village. I would like to buy new clothes
everyday. I would like to find work in a big company.’
Sue wishes ......................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
II. Napisz zdania stosując wish + Past Simple:

1. Alan: ‘I can’t swim very well.’
Alan wishes .................................................................................................
2. We don’t get any bonuses.
We ................................................................................................................
3. Mr Hicks: ‘My students don’t respect me.’
.......................................................................................................................
4. The Hardys: ‘We would like our neighbours to stop interfering in our matters.’
.......................................................................................................................
III. Napisz życzenia stosując wish + would:

1. Alice: ‘My boyfriend never brings me flowers.’
Alice wishes ................................................................................................
2. Steven: ‘My parents don’t give me any pocket money.’
Steven ..........................................................................................................
3. We: ‘The boss doesn’t give us any interesting tasks.’
.......................................................................................................................
4. Mrs Bronco: ‘I would like my son to stop being disobedient.’
.......................................................................................................................
5. You: ‘I don’t want my brother to waste any more money in the casino.’
.......................................................................................................................
131
Unit 124 Wish + Past Perfect  250
I. Napisz życzenia stosując wish + Past Perfect:
1. I didn’t pass the driving test last Monday.
I wish ..............................................................................................................
2. Danny: ‘I shouldn’t have spoken so rudely to Muriel.’
Danny wishes .................................................................................................
3. The Browns: ‘We didn’t invite Ms Simmons to the barbecue.’
..........................................................................................................................
4. I should have proposed to Caroline.
..........................................................................................................................
5. Brian: ‘The ice was too thin to skate on.’
..........................................................................................................................
II. Uzupełnij życzenia stosując Past Perfect:

1. I wish Ted .............................. (not forget) about our anniversary yesterday.
2. There was too little space in our room. We wished it .............................. (be)
bigger.
3. The train left a few minutes ago. I wish I .............................. (hurry up).
4. My parents couldn’t buy a car. They wished they ........................... (collect)
more money
5. I didn’t expect any rainfall. I wish I .............................. (take) my umbrella.
6. Mr Thompson wishes he ........................... (not enrol) in the political party.
7. The car ran out of petrol. Jack wished he .............................. (refill) it earlier.
8. Eddie shouldn’t have become a miner. We wish he ..............................
(choose) a different occupation.
9. We couldn’t go skiing. We wished snow .............................. (not melt)
down in the sunshine.
10. I’ve failed the tests. I wish I .............................. (prepare) for them better.
III. Napisz życzenia stosując wish + Past Perfect:

1. Rob and Michael were playing too noisily and woke everyone up.
Rob and Michael: ‘We ................................................................................ ‘
2. Virginia shouted at her baby and he began to cry.
Virginia: ‘I .................................................................................................... ‘
3. Mr Burton was driving too fast and so he was fined by the policeman.
Mr Burton: ‘I ................................................................................................ ‘
4. Sony manipulated with the knobs and so the receiver broke down.
Sony: ‘I ....................................................................................................... ‘
5. You had your car repainted, but you aren’t satisfied with the new colour.
You: ‘I ......................................................................................................... ‘
132
Unit 125 Wish - if only  250-251
I. Przepisz zdania:
1. I would like my boss to be less strict.
If only ..............................................................................................................
2. We wish we hadn’t sold our boat.
If only ..............................................................................................................
3. Marsha wants her brother to stop quarrelling with her.
Marsha: ‘If only .............................................................................................’
4. I wish I had given up smoking much earlier.
If only ..............................................................................................................
5. Jake wishes he would travel more.
Jake: ‘If only .................................................................................................’
II. Napisz życzenia stosując if only:

Chris: ‘I didn’t treat Mary right. I shouted and teased at her. I shouldn’t have
cheated at her. I would like her to be with me now. She dropped me.’
Chris: If only ......................................................................................................

......................................................................................................
......................................................................................................

1. Tom: ‘I am feeling tired today. If only I .............................. (not work) so long
last night.’
2. Our company has gone bankrupt. We wish the manager ..............................
(be) more sensible with expenditures.
3. She is feeling lonely. She wishes she .............................. (have) a boyfriend.
4. If only I .............................. (not damage) the trailer, I’d be able to use it now.
5. He should have driven the car more carefully. If only he ..............................
(obey) the regulations, he wouldn’t have paid such a huge fine.
6. Susan: ‘I am working this afternoon. I wish I .............................. (can) stay
with my baby instead.’
7. We didn’t get tickets . If only there .............................. (not be) such a crowd
in the box office.
8. I cannot see anything. If only I .............................. (wear) my glasses now.
9. We didn’t go sunbathing yesterday. If only the sun .............................. (shine)
more brightly.
10. Adam wishes he .............................. (know) Pamela better. He’d like to invite
her to his party.
133
Unit 126 Mowa zależna (1) - twierdzenia  252
I. Przepisz zdania stosując mowę zależną:
Bob: ‘I like Catherine very much.’ Bob said ..............................................

Ron: ‘I think she’s an intelligent girl.’ Ron said ..............................................
Bob: ‘She’s got a sense of humour.’ Bob said ..............................................
Ron: ’She’s also very beautiful.’ Ron said ..............................................
Bob: ‘She catches the eye of many boys.’ Bob said ..............................................
Ron: ‘I am in love with her.’ Ron said ..............................................
Bob: ‘I love her, too.’ Bob said ..............................................
II. Przepisz wypowiedzi stosując mowę zależną:

1. Andrew: ‘What’s your brother doing?’ Sue: ‘He is learning now.’
Sue said ........................................................................................................
2. Jack: ‘Where does Nigel live?’ Tom: ‘Nigel lives in Glasgow.’
Tom answered ..............................................................................................
3. Ann: ‘Where do you spend your weekends?’ Liam: ‘I spend them at home.’
Liam said ......................................................................................................
4. Mike: ‘Do you know Mr Winston?’ Eva: ‘No, I don’t know him.’
Eva said ........................................................................................................
5. Jim: ‘How are you feeling?’ Nick: ‘I am feeling all right. ‘
Nick told Jim ................................................................................................
6. Louis: ‘What does Brian do?’ Jeff: ‘He works in a car factory.’
Jeff answered ..............................................................................................
7. Celia: ‘Do you earn much?’ Diane: ‘No, I only earn five hundred.’
Diane said ....................................................................................................
8. Terry: ‘When does Peter return home?’ Fiona: ‘He returns at ten p.m.’
Fiona told Terry ...........................................................................................
III. Przepisz zdania stosując mowę zależną:

1. ‘I am a writer.’ - he said He said ..................................................
2. ‘We like doctor Green.’ - they said They said ..............................................
3. ‘I don’t need help.’ - she said She said ................................................
4. ‘They cannot come.’ - he said He said ..................................................
5. ‘You may not sleep here.’ - he said He said ..................................................
6. ‘It’s raining outside.’ - I said I said .....................................................
7. ‘Jim is riding a bike.’ - Mrs Lee said Mrs Lee said .........................................
8. ‘We have too little time.’ - they said They said ..............................................
9. ‘I am resting.’ - I said I said .....................................................
10. ‘You cannot stay longer.’ - he said He said ..................................................
134
1. Brian: ‘Our family is going to the theatre tonight.’
Brian said .......................................................................................................
2. Deborah: ‘I will come back late at night tomorrow.’
Deborah told me ............................................................................................
3. Thomas: ‘We’re discussing an important problem now.’
Thomas explained .........................................................................................
4. Ellen: ‘I am leaving for Greece this month.’
Ellen said .......................................................................................................
5. Robert: ‘You will have to change the tyres next year.’
Rober told me ................................................................................................
II. Przepisz dialog stosując mowę zależną:

Mary: ‘I am going to Italy next summer.’
Julie: ‘You will certainly have a good time there.’
Mary: ‘My boyfriend is going with me.’
Julie: ‘Well, I am thinking of visiting my uncle in Chicago.’
Mary: ‘He will be delighted to see you.’
Julie: ‘I will make a decision soon.’
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................

1. Nick: ‘When will you be able to help me?’ Tom: ‘Next Friday.’
Nick: ‘Tom told me .........................................................................................’
2. David: ‘Who is coming today?’ Betty: ‘My sister is.’
David: ‘Betty said ...........................................................................................’
3. Ralph: ‘What are you planning?’ Gregory: ‘A trip around the world.’
Ralph: ‘Gregory told me .................................................................................’
4. Helen: ‘When will you phone me?’ Jack: ‘This week.’
Helen: ‘Jack promised that …........................................................................’
5. Eddie: ‘Whom is Debbie dating this evening?’ ‘Steve: ‘Raymond.’
Eddie: ‘Steve told me .....................................................................................’
135
1. ‘I lived here in 1979.’ He told me .............................................

2. ‘You must wait.’ She said ................................................
3. ‘We had many problems.’ They explained ......................................
4. ‘The building was burning.’ He said ..................................................
5. ‘Tom has moved out of the flat.’ Bob told us ............................................
6. ‘You will have to pay more.’ The clerk said ........................................
7. ‘Someone is knocking.’ She said ................................................
8. ‘We bought the dog from Mr Parker.’ I told him ...............................................
9. ‘I have been resting since midday.’ He said ..................................................
10. ‘You should be patient.’ She told me that ....................................

Elisabeth: ‘I met Roland at a pilgrimage two years ago.’
Cindy: ‘I have known him for five years.’
Elisabeth: ‘We’ve been getting on very well since we met.’
Cindy: ‘We quarrelled once a year ago.’
Elisabeth: ‘Ronald told me about it.’
Cindy: ‘We made up a week later.’
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
Jerry told the interviewer that he

Jerry: ‘I was born in 1955 in a small ..............................................................
village. I attended a private ..............................................................
school in Edinburgh. I started my ..............................................................
studies in 1973 in London where ..............................................................
I met my future wife. I got married ..............................................................
in 1977. My son was born a year ..............................................................
later. In 1980 I started working in ..............................................................
a private enterprise where I have ..............................................................
been working until today. ..............................................................
136
Unit 129 Mowa zależna (4) - pytania  252
I. Przepisz pytania stosując mowę zależną:
1. ‘Can you speak German?’ She asked if ........................................

2. ‘Where have you been?’ He wanted to know ..............................
3. ‘How did you sleep?’ Mr Dean asked ....................................
4. ‘Are you a student?’ Paul wanted to know ............................
5. ‘Will there be any foreign guests?’ I asked the porter .................................
6. ‘Must we make a statement?’ He inquired ..........................................
7. ‘Did John tell the truth?’ I wanted to know ..................................
8. ‘Who runs the company?’ They were curious ................................
9. ‘Have you found your purse?’ I asked Jane .........................................
10. ‘Where is the meeting taking place?’ She wanted to know .............................

Kate: ‘Where did you buy such a beautiful dress?’
Lena: ‘My husband brought it from Italy last month.’
Kate: ‘Is Jim going to Italy again soon?’
Lena: ‘No. His boss is sending him to Turkey this time.’
Kate: ‘Is he going to do any shopping there?’
Lena: ‘I hope he will find some time for it.’
Kate asked Lena where ........................................................................................
Lena answered that ..............................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
III. Przepisz pytania stosując mowę zależną:

1. ‘When did Michael graduate from elementary school?’ - Mrs Pitt asked.
............................................................................................................................
2. ‘What has the officer received?’ - I asked.
............................................................................................................................
3. ‘Can Jessica speak Spanish fluently?’ - the manager asked.
............................................................................................................................
4. ‘What did Marianne tell the man at the interview yesterday?’ - he asked.
............................................................................................................................
5. ‘Has Tony been swimming since early morning?’ - the lifeguard asked.
............................................................................................................................
137
Unit 130 Mowa zależna (5) - pytania  252
I. Przepisz pytania stosując mowę zależną oraz właściwe spójniki:
how what where when why
1. Alice: ‘Did Mr Bloom travel to Japan?’ Sony: ‘I don’t know.’

Sony: ‘Alice wanted to know .............................................................................’
2. Lisa: ‘Has John won a trip?’ Jack: ‘No idea.’
Jack: ‘Lisa was curious .....................................................................................’
3. Mick: ‘Are the guests feeling comfortable?’ Alan: ‘I don’t know.’
Alan: ‘Mick asked ............................................................................................’
4. Bob: ‘Is the boss returning on Monday?’ Lena: ‘I’m not sure.’
Lena: ‘Bob inquired .........................................................................................’
5. Sue: ‘Was Tim feeling depressed because of the weather?’ Rob: ‘No idea.’
Rob: ‘Sue wanted to know ...............................................................................’
II. Przepisz zdania stosując mowę zależną:

1. Lucy: ‘Is there any message for me?’ You: ‘I don’t know.’
You: ‘I didn’t know ...........................................................................................’
2. Jack: ‘Who was the picture painted by?’ You: ‘I haven’t got a clue.’
You: ‘I hadn’t got a clue ....................................................................................’
3. Mary: ‘Will they offer you a new job?’ You: ‘I’m not sure.’
You: ‘I wasn’t sure ...........................................................................................’
4. Tom: ‘What time does the fast train leave?’ You: ‘I don’t know.’
You: ‘I didn’t know ...........................................................................................’
5. Jerry: ‘What topic is being discussed now?’ You: ‘I have no idea.’
You: ‘I had no idea .........................................................................................’
III. Przepisz pytania w mowie zależnej:

1. Jim to a restaurant owner: ‘What time are you opening tomorrow?’
Jim asked ........................................................................................................
2. Fred to his wife: ‘Did you do any shopping last week?’
Fred asked .......................................................................................................
3. Pupils to their teacher: ‘Could we put off writing the test?’
Pupils asked ....................................................................................................
4. Ray to a supplier: ‘Will you be delivering any goods next week?’
Ray asked .......................................................................................................
5. A doctor to his patient: ‘Have you ever been on a diet?’
The doctor asked .............................................................................................
138
Unit 131 Mowa zależna (6) - sugestie etc.  252
1. ‘You should relax more often.’ He advised me .........................................

2. ‘I will buy you some sweets.’ She promised that ....................................
3. ‘Leave me alone!’ Julia begged the attacker .........................
4. ‘Keep off the grass.’ He warned us ...........................................
5. ‘Don’t drink the water.’ They recommended that ..........................
6. ‘I will paint the walls for you.’ Bob offered .……......................................
7. ‘You had better give up smoking.’ The doctor suggested ..............................
8. ‘You shouldn’t touch the substance.’ He explained to me ..................................
9. ‘Clean the pistons.’ I ordered him ...........................................
10. ‘Don’t tease the dog.’ She warned me ........................................
II. Przepisz zdania stosując mowę zależną:

1. ‘Take my luggage to the car.’ - she said to her husband.
She ordered ......................................................................................................
2. ‘Look her straight in the eyes.’ - he said to me.
He advised ........................................................................................................
3. ‘Don’t switch the light off, please.’ - I said to her.
I asked ..............................................................................................................
4. ‘You ought to send an extra copy of your CV.’ - the clerk said to the applicant.
The clerk advised ..............................................................................................
5. ‘Don’t approach the lion’s cage.’ - the man said to the people.
The man warned ...............................................................................................
III. Przepisz zdania stosując mowę zależną oraz czasowniki:
advise offer order promise warn
1. Mother to her son: ‘You’d better put on a warm sweater.’

...........................................................................................................................
2. Boss to a cleaner: ‘Wipe the floor clean while I am away.’
...........................................................................................................................
3. Guide to a climber: ‘Don’t go down the cave.’
...........................................................................................................................
4. Mrs Graver to her neighbours: ‘I will certainly remember to feed your cat.’
...........................................................................................................................
5. Ronald to his wife: ‘I could help you with doing the accounts.’
...........................................................................................................................
139
Unit 132 Had better  256
I. Przepisz zdania stosując had better:
1. I advise you to take some medicine.
You ..................................................................................................................
2. It would be beneficial for Muriel to take private lessons.
Muriel ..............................................................................................................
3. Why doesn’t he have a serious discussion with professor Hicks?
He ....................................................................................................................
4. I warn you not to spend too much time in the sun.
You ..................................................................................................................
5. It’s a good advice for them to take the matter to court.
They ................................................................................................................
6. Wouldn’t it be better if she stayed at home this evening?
........................................................................................................................?
II. Dokończ zdania stosując had better oraz właściwe wyrażenia:
ask someone to see to it change one’s job go to a throat specialist

have a nap put on new tiles set the alarm-clock
take a torch walk slowly
1. John cannot breathe properly. He .....................................................................

2. I am feeling awfully tired. I ...............................................................................
3. Our oven is faulty. We .....................................................................................
4. You must get up early. You ..............................................................................
5. His leg is aching. He ........................................................................................
6. The roof is leaking. I ........................................................................................
7. Ann earns very little. She .........................................…....................................
8. It’s getting dark. We .........................................................................................
III. Dokończ zdania stosując had better:

1. The dog is snarling at you. You ........................................................................
2. Dennis isn’t doing well at school. He ................................................................
3. The Blacks keep their money at home. They ...................................................
4. Mike is terribly overweight. He .........................................................................
5. Your shoes look worn out. You ........................................................................
6. This food looks stale. I .....................................................................................
7. Brian has not many friends. He ........................................................................
8. My baby isn’t feeling well. I ..............................................................................
140
Unit 133 Would rather  256
I. Odpowiedz na propozycje stosując would rather:
1. ‘How about having some coffee?’ ‘I .............................. (drink) tea.’

2. ‘Do you care for swimming now?’ ‘I .............................. (lie) on the beach.’
3. ‘Would you like to dance?’ ‘I .............................. (have) a rest now.’
4. ‘I can give you a double room.’ ‘I .............................. (take) a single one.’
5. ‘Shall we go for a walk?’ ‘I .............................. (watch) television.’
II. Napisz odpowiedzi stosując would rather + czasownik + than + czasownik:

1. ‘Do you want to go shopping with me?’
‘I ............................................ (stay at home) than ........................................’
2. ‘Shall we join the group of hikers?’
‘I ............................................ (travel alone) than .........................................‘
3. ‘Why don’t we go jogging now?’
‘I ............................................ (play squash) than .........................................’
4. ‘Would you like to drink some wine?’
‘I ............................................ (eat something) than .....................................’
5. ‘I suggest you go home now.’
‘I ............................................ (stay with you) than .......................................’
III. Przepisz zdania stosując would rather:

1. Tom and Mike are being noisy. I .................................................. quiet.
2. You tell lies. We .................................................. the truth.
3. Jenny smokes a lot. I .................................................. so much.
4. He never listens to me. I ................................................... me.
5. My car uses too much petrol. I .................................................. so much of it.
6. She tells us nothing. We .................................................. everything.
7. They are disobedient. Their mother .................................................. obedient.
8. He doesn’t pay us much. We .................................................. more money.
9. This pipe is too short. I .................................................. longer.
10. She reads to little. I .................................................. more books.
IV. Uzupełnij zdania właściwym słowem:

1. This candidate is too short. I’d rather he .............................. higher.
2. Jane says she’d rather visit her aunt .............................. go to the theatre.
3. You are being naughty. I’d rather you .............................. behave like that.
4. ‘Shall we take a taxi?’ ‘I’d rather we .............................. on foot.’
5. We don’t live together, but I’d rather Sue .............................. here with me.
6. They say they’d rather .............................. to a concert than stay at the disco.
141
Unit 134 (Would) prefer  256
I. Ułóż zdania stosując prefer ... to ... :
1. Simon / football / tennis .....................................................................

2. I / novels / crime stories .....................................................................
3. We / chocolate / ice-cream .....................................................................
4. Jim / theatre / opera .....................................................................
5. Mr Lee / his village / a big city .....................................................................
II. Ułóż zdania stosując prefer ... to ...:
1. John / swim / run .....................................................................

2. They / sing / dance .....................................................................
3. I / watch TV / do exercise .....................................................................
4. We / skate / ski .....................................................................
5. Tiffany / act / write plays .....................................................................
III. Przepisz zdania z ćwiczenia II stosując prefer ... rather than ... :
1. .........................................................................................................................
2. .........................................................................................................................
3. .........................................................................................................................
4. .........................................................................................................................
5. .........................................................................................................................
IV. Wstaw prefer lub rather:

1. Tom wants to get married soon, but I’d .................... him to wait a few months.
2. Cats are certainly nice, but I .................... dogs to cats, anyway.
3. I would like to buy a car, but my wife would .................... we bought a flat.
4. We’d .................... to talk to the director rather than to his secretary.
5. Mike says he .................... driving to being driven.
6. I’d .................... you didn’t treat your wife so badly.
7. Honestly, I .................... fixing the decorations to preparing meals.
8. Would you .................... move to a big city than live your life in the village?
V. Dokończ zdania:
1. We gave Nigel a dictionary, but I’d rather we ........................................ a CD.
2. He wrote a short note. I‘d prefer him to ....................................... a long report.
3. She smiled at Bill. I’d rather she ........................................ at me.
4. We ate pudding, but we’d prefer to ........................................ something else.
5. I had to pay in cash. I’d rather ......................................... with my credit card.
142
Unit 135 It is (high) time  258
I. Przepisz zdania stosując it’s time for ... to ...:
1. We haven’t paid the workers yet. It is time for us to ..….….......................

2. I haven’t washed the carpet for weeks ..............................................................
3. Jane hasn’t started any work as yet. ..............................................................
4. You haven’t read any book for ages. ..............................................................
5. Dan hasn’t brushed his teeth as yet. ..............................................................
6. We haven’t apologised to Betty yet. ..............................................................
7. I haven’t answered his letter yet. ..............................................................
8. He hasn’t cleaned the paths for ages. ..............................................................
9. They haven’t gone home as yet. ..............................................................
10. You haven’t seen our baby yet. ..............................................................
II. Napisz zdania stosując it’s high time:

1. I haven’t received any response to my letter of application as yet.
(they / send) .............................................................................................….
2. The Parkers still owe us five hundred pounds.
(they / pay back) ...........................................................................................
3. Your flowers are beginning to wither.
(you / water) ..........................................................................................……
4. Mark has been listening to this loud music since midday.
(he / turn off) ................................................................................................
5. Your hair is much too long.
(you / have it cut) .........................................................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując it’s high time oraz właściwe zwroty:
bring profit drop a line earn one’s own living go on a diet
go out on strike make up one’s mind score a point take a day off
1. Judy is overweight. ............................................................................................

2. I’ve been working too much lately. ....................................................................
3. Simon hasn’t written any letter for months. .......................................................
4. Lisa hasn’t decided which job to take yet. .........................................................
5. Our team is losing the game. ............................................................................
6. The Board has been ignoring our requests. ......................................................
7. You always ask your parents for money. ...........................................................
8. We keep investing our money in the business. ..................................................
143
Unit 136 Strona bierna (1) - czasy ‘Present’  258
I. Przepisz zdania stosując stronę bierną:
1. Tom is drinking coffee. ...................................................................

2. Sue collects stamps. ...................................................................
3. Mary and Celia are cooking dinner. ...................................................................
4. Mr Wells keeps sheep. ...................................................................
5. We have eaten lunch. ...................................................................
6. Some boy is painting a picture. ...................................................................
7. You teach history. ...................................................................
8. Someone has broken the window. ...................................................................
9. John makes mistakes. ...................................................................
10. I am picking blackberries. ...................................................................
II. Przepisz teksty stosując stronę bierną:

Jack has found a homeless dog. He keeps the dog at home and gives it food
everyday. Jack takes the dog for a walk three times a day. He calls the dog
Bonk. Now, he is showing it to his friends. They are admiring it.
A homeless dog .................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................…......
........................................................................................................................…....
We are renovating our cottage. Our father is painting the walls and uncle Jeff is
removing the rotten floorboards. Our mother is cleaning the windows. My sister
is washing the curtains and I am beating the carpets.
Our cottage .........................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
III. Napisz zdania w stronie biernej stosując jeden z czasów ‘Present’:
1. The houses / build / for two years ..................................................................

2. My watch / repair / at the moment ..................................................................
3. The Minister / often / ask questions ..................................................................
4. The machine / hardly ever / use ..................................................................
5. The singer / interview / now ..................................................................
6. English / speak / all over the world ..................................................................
7. He / pay a pension / since 1994 ..................................................................
8. Wheat / grow / in Poland ..................................................................
9. A speech / make / at present ..................................................................
10. Table cloths / change / everyday ..................................................................
144
Unit 137 Strona bierna (2) - czasy ‘Past’  258
I. Przepisz teksty stosując stronę bierną:
We organised a party last weekend. We invited a lot of friends. They brought
food and drinks. Mike played dance music. Some people wore extravagant
clothes. Everyone enjoyed the party very much.
A party .................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
I was watching TV at the time yesterday. My brother was reading a book. My
mother was watering flowers in the garden and my father was mending the fence.
Our neighbour was cutting grass on his lawn and his wife was listening to news.
TV ........................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................
II. Przepisz zdania stosując stronę bierną:

1. He knocked me down. ...............................................................
2. George played the trumpet. ...............................................................
3. Some people were eating ice-cream. ...............................................................
4. Sheila had set the alarm-clock. ...............................................................
5. Someone spoiled the construction. ...............................................................
6. Harry was trimming the hedges. ...............................................................
7. I drank beer. ...............................................................
8. Alfred had locked the door. ...............................................................
9. The Kellys made an appointment. ...............................................................
10. Some children were following us. ...............................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami w stronie biernej stosując jeden z czasów ‘Past’:
1. ................................... (the shelters / build) before the war begun?
2. Yesterday, ................................... (the fire brigade / call) to the place twice.
3. ................................... (the computer / use) when it broke down?
4. ................................... (our flight / cancel) two hours ago.
5. Last Monday at two p.m. ................................... (the show / prepare).
6. Before we arrived, ................................... (everything / eat) by the guests.
7. ................................... (the bicycle / steal) seven days ago.
8. ................................... (the streets / decorate) all night yesterday.
9. Last year, ................................... (the trees / cut down) illegally.
10. ................................... (everything / change) before I returned from abroad.
145
Unit 138 Strona bierna (3) - różne formy  258
I. Przepisz zdania stosując stronę bierną:

1. Somebody will open the letter. ...................................................................
2. I would fire the worker. ...................................................................
3. She will finish the exercise. ...................................................................
4. He will leave a message. ...................................................................
5. Tom would make a mistake. ...................................................................

1. George may take the role. ...................................................................
2. I can sell the receiver. ...................................................................
3. We must wear uniforms. ...................................................................
4. They should deliver reports. ...................................................................
5. Someone might steal the jewellery. ...................................................................
6. You ought to return the money. ...................................................................
7. We couldn’t solve the matter. ...................................................................
8. I shouldn’t smoke cigarettes. ...................................................................
9. Somebody may see them. ...................................................................
10. She mustn’t neglect the duties. ...................................................................
III. Przepisz zdania w stronie biernej stosując konstrukcję bezokolicznikową:

1. They told me to go. I ............................................................
2. She advised Jerry to be quiet. Jerry .....................................................
3. We often order the soldiers to march. The soldiers .........................................
4. Everyone believes that he is a Lord. He .........................................................
5. I’ve recommended Bob not to lie. Bob ......................................................
6. Everyone knows that she loves Tony. She .......................................................
7. People said that Eddie was in prison. Eddie ....................................................
8. Someone urged me to play. I ............................................................
9. Everyone claims that it looks nice. It ...........................................................
10. We consider Tom to be friendly. Tom ......................................................
IV. Przepisz zdania w stronie biernej stosując konstrukcję that ... should:
1. He advised to open an account. He advised that ...................................
2. We suggest taking photographs. ..............................................................
3. Everyone agreed to offer money. ..............................................................
4. He demanded to increase the salary. ..............................................................
5. I suggested to use a dictionary. ..............................................................
146
Unit 139 Strona bierna (4) - różne formy  258
I. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami w stronie biernej:
1. It .............................. (decide) a long time ago that Alex would be our guide.
2. Ms Downey hopes that the mail .............................. (deliver) tomorrow.
3. The streets .............................. (clean) of melting snow all day yesterday.
4. Jack’s hair .............................. (cut) at the moment.
5. The batteries .............................. (must / load) every two months.
6. The castle .............................. (restore) since last year.
7. Be careful. Tickets .............................. (control) in every tram.
8. All shops .............................. (close) before six yesterday.
9. You .............................. (dismiss) if you hadn’t agreed to work overtime.
10. The air vents .............................. (can / switch) on and off at any moment.
11. The boy who .............................. (hit) by a careless driver a few days ago
.............................. (still / keep) in hospital.
12. Our final exam .............................. (carry out) next Friday.
13. Mr Johnson .............................. (say) to be the most favoured teacher.
14. In a few weeks’ time the construction process .............................. (finish).
15. Rice .............................. (grow) in Asia for centuries.
1. Mike is looking for a pencil. ...............................................................

2. Dust covered the furniture. ...............................................................
3. You must look these words up. ...............................................................
4. I will think this matter over. ...............................................................
5. She is laughing at the pictures. ...............................................................
6. My mother looks after the house. ...............................................................
7. The child was pointing to the planes. ...............................................................
8. We should look into to the matter. ...............................................................
9. He makes up stories. ...............................................................
10. Mr Davids has sent for an electrician. ...............................................................
III. Napisz pytania stosując stronę bierną:
1. Someone found the keys in a park. Where ................................................?

2. They will open the pool next week. When .................................................?
3. He has occupied the flat since 1991. Since when .......................................?
4. She is writing a short note. What ..................................................?
5. We change the insulation every year. How often .........................................?
147
Unit 140 Konstrukcje bezokolicznikowe (1)  261
I. Odpowiedz na pytanie Why do you go to ...? stosując bezokolicznik:
ask for a prescription borrow books buy cigarettes buy flowers
buy vegetables have a good time wash dirty clothes watch a game
1. Why do you go to a party? I go to a party to ....................................

2. Why do you go to a doctor? ...............................................................
3. Why do you go to a greengrocer’s? ...............................................................
4. Why do you go to a laundry? ...............................................................
5. Why do you go to a library? ...............................................................
6. Why do you go to a tobacconist’s? ...............................................................
7. Why do you go to a stadium? ...............................................................
8. Why do you go to a florist’s? ...............................................................
II. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję bezokolicznikową:

1. The management agreed that the workers’ wages must be increased.
..........................................................................................................................
2. Eric has decided that he will stay at home this evening.
..........................................................................................................................
3. He told me that I should write a complaint.
..........................................................................................................................
4. We have decided that we will send our son abroad.
..........................................................................................................................
5. She pretends that she is the most important in the office.
..........................................................................................................................
III. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję bezokolicznikową:

1. It seems that Muriel knows Mr Thurman very well.
Muriel seems to ...............................................................................................
2. It turned out that our bills were overdue.
Our bills ..........................................................................................................
3. It happened that the man was a policeman.
The man ..........................................................................................................
4. It appears that Timothy loves Sally.
Timothy ...........................................................................................................
5. It seemed that Joan looked upset.
Joan ................................................................................................................
148
I. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję bezokolicznikową:
1. I expect that some of you will be willing to help me.
I expect some of you to ..................….............................................................
2. We believe that it is very easy to learn English.
..........................................................................................................................
3. She found that it was hard to swim against the tide.
..........................................................................................................................
4. Betty expected that Mike would send her flowers.
..........................................................................................................................
5. It believe that it is advantageous to spend some time in the open air.
..........................................................................................................................
II. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję bezokolicznikową:
1. Jerry is the last person who offers any assistance.

Jerry is the last person to ......................….......................................................
2. Mr Bead was the only worker who attended the TU meeting.
...........................................................................................................................
3. I was the first who saw the eagle.
...........................................................................................................................
4. Eric was the second student who was expelled from the course.
...........................................................................................................................
5. Alice is the only woman who supports our cause.
...........................................................................................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując:
where / what / how / when / which + bezokolicznik:
1. Jim’s got lost. I don’t know .............................. (find) him.

2. This printer is complicated. I have no idea .............................. (use) it.
3. They didn’t tell us exactly .............................. (start), so we’ll start at one p.m.
4. She was speechless. She didn’t know .............................. (say).
5. Both suits were elegant. I couldn’t decide .............................. (one / buy).
6. This problem isn’t easy. I must ask Mr Rask .............................. (solve) it.
7. We are new here. Someone must tell us .............................. (do).
8. All the places were occupied. I didn’t know .............................. (sit).
9. I’d like to find out .............................. (come), on Friday or Saturday.
10. After such a long time I’ve almost forgotten .............................. (spell) in
English.
149
I. Przepisz polecenia stosując konstrukcję bezokolicznikową:

1. Brenda to Tom: ‘You must tell me the truth.’
Brenda wants Tom .........................................................................................
2. Mick to Alice: ‘Please, marry me.’
Mick begged ...................................................................................................
3. Lisa to Simon: ‘Answer the letter quickly, please.’
Lisa asked ......................................................................................................
4. Craig to Debbie: ‘You shouldn’t give up fighting for your rights.’
Craig advised .................................................................................................
5. Nick to Danny: ‘I will certainly visit you in Las Vegas.’
Nick has promised .........................................................................................
6. Teacher to students: ‘Write the exercises at home.’
The teacher ordered .......................................................................................
7. Mr Taylor to his wife: ‘You must phone early in the morning.’
Mr Taylor instructed ......................................................................................
8. David to Richie: ‘Don’t touch my money.’
David warned .................................................................................................
II. Przepisz zdania stosując bezokolicznik podanych czasowników:
1. We haven’t done the task. ..............................................................(fail)

2. Bob was probably scared. ..........................................................(seem)
3. We found the station easily. ......................................................(manage)
4. She says she can mind the baby. ............................................................(offer)
5. I think they were from abroad. ........................................................(appear)
6. Josh acts as if he knew better. .......................................................(pretend)
7. I won’t pay extra money. .........................................................(refuse)
8. He plays truant quite often. ............................................................(tend)
9. We can spend more money. ..........................................................(afford)
10. She says she saw a ghost. ..........................................................(claim)
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując whether oraz bezokolicznik czasownika:
apply for buy call put on wait
1. Time is running out. I don’t know .............................. any longer or go now.

2. The salary is low. I don’t know .............................. the job or not.
3. He looks like a thief. I’m not sure .............................. the police or not.
4. This tape is expensive. I’m hesitating .............................. it or save my money.
5. The weather can change. I’m not certain ..........................…. any warm clothes.
150
Unit 143 Konstrukcje ‘gerundialne’  263
I. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję ‘gerundialną’:
1. Can you imagine that you are in my place?

Can you imagine ...........................................................................................?
2. She admits that she is in love with Robert.
..........................................................................................................................
3. John suggests that we should ask Mr Howard for advice.
..........................................................................................................................
4. Helen denies that she is having an affair.
..........................................................................................................................
5. I propose that we take the other road.
..........................................................................................................................
II. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję ‘gerundialną’:
1. We remembered that we had met the people before.

We remembered ..............................................................................................
2. Joshua reported that he had gathered a lot of information.
..........................................................................................................................
3. I regretted that I had called Jeff a fool.
..........................................................................................................................
4. She forgot that she had lost the diskettes.
..........................................................................................................................
5. They appreciated that they had been treated so generously.
..........................................................................................................................
III. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję ‘gerundialną’:
1. He denies that she is his lover.

He denies ........................................................................................................
2. Did you recall that he had made a phone call?
........................................................................................................................?
3. We remember that he was rather unkind.
..........................................................................................................................
4. Somebody suggested that she should ask for a day off.
..........................................................................................................................
5. I advised that they should take the camcorder.
..........................................................................................................................
151
Unit 144 Bezokolicznik / Gerund (1)  261-164
I. Napisz odpowiedzi stosując konstrukcję bezokolicznikową lub Gerund:
1. ‘Is Leo a good cook?’ ‘No, he ..................................... (hate / cook) .’
2. ‘What did he say to you?’ ‘He ..................................... (threaten / beat) me.’
3. ‘Was he honest?’ ‘No, he ..................................... (avoid / give) answers.’
4. ‘Do you still smoke?’ ‘No, I ..................................... (stop / smoke) last year.’
5. ‘Is bingo your favourite game?’ ‘Yes, I .................................. (love / play) it.’
6. ‘Did she object?’ ‘Oh no. She .................................... (agree / have) a party.’
7. ‘How about your job?’ ‘I .................................... (want / become) a lawyer.’
8. ‘Have you seen Jim lately?’ ‘No. I .............................. (hope / see) him soon.’
9. ‘Did Sean bring his photos?’ ‘No. He .................................... (forget / do) it.’
10. ‘Did they stay with you?’ ‘No. They ................................. (decide / go) home.’
II. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami we właściwej postaci:
have lose mind offend operate put forward say stage
1. We decided to postpone ............................. the play as some of our actors

had gone down with flu.
2. It was Luise who encouraged me ............................. this suggestion to the
manager.
3. We want our children ............................. ‘Hello’ to all our neighbours.
4. You did risk ............................. your life by that foolish jump from the bridge.
5. The digital switchboard is a bit complicated but you’ll learn ..............................
it soon.
6. I’m tired. I feel like ............................. a nap.
7. I said the world is full of idiots but I didn’t mean .......................... any of you.
8. Jane advised her brother .............................. his manners at all times.
III. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną formą czasownika:

1. Look! A thief is trying .............................. (break) into your car.
2. ‘Do you mind .............................. (wait) a few seconds, sir?’ ‘Of course, not.’
3. He was reluctant at first. Then, he agreed .............................. (sign) the bill.
4. Your son tends .............................. (forget) about his homework quite often.
5. We expected .............................. (see) Mr Smith before leaving for Toronto.
6. She denies .............................. (be) in trouble, but her situation is rather bad.
7. Stop .............................. (play) the computer for a while and help me
.............................. (fix) the rails.
8. Arnold has planned ............................. (invite) all his friends to the ceremony.
9. This engine needs .............................. (clean). It’s covered in dust all over.
10. It was Pam who persuaded me .............................. (go) to the cinema.
152
Unit 145 Bezokolicznik / Gerund (2)  261-164
I. Uzupełnij dialogi poprawną formą czasownika:
1. A: Fred, I would like you .............................. (type) my letters.

B: Remind me .............................. (do) it tomorrow, please.
2. A: Could you tell us how .............................. (reach) the nearest village?
B: Keep .............................. (walk) in this direction for about three miles.
3. A: Did Jack let you .............................. (listen) to his CD’s?
B: No, he told me .............................. (not touch) them.
4. A: Shall I .............................. (buy) a new cartridge?
B: Yes, it’s no use .............................. (regenerate) the old one.
5. A: Do they allow .............................. (smoke) in the conference room?
B: Of course, not. They object to .............................. (smoke) strongly.
6. A: Did Lisa manage .............................. (win) with Tom?
B: Sure, she did. She succeeded in .............................. (beat) him twice.
7. A: I propose .............................. (change) the route.
B: Come on, Vincent. There’s no point in .............................. (turn) back.
8. A: Lidia says she disapproves of .............................. (mind) children.
B: Honestly, I dread .............................. (do) it as well.
9. A: I am for .............................. (cancel) the meeting this time.
B: But, I insist on .............................. (have) it.
10. A: Please, excuse his .............................. (be) so violent.
B: Well, I have got used to his .............................. (behave) like that.
II. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną formą czasownika:
1. Let’s ......................... (have) a short break before ......................... (start) with

a new topic.
2. I cannot tolerate their ......................... (act) so rudely any longer.
3. He says he doesn’t recollect ......................... (call) the bartender names.
4. I haven’t seen Dennis for ages. I look forward to ......................... (meet) him.
5. We wish ......................... (explain) for our wrongdoing.
6. Cathy prefers ......................... (read) books to ......................... (watch) TV.
7. They boy avoided ......................... (be) punished by ........................ (tell) lies.
8. I didn’t intend .......................... (harm) you.
9. Mrs Blink is thinking of ......................... (give up) ......................... (go) to the
picnic with us.
10. The doctor told me ......................... (not take) too much aspirin.
11. The soldier was reprimanded for ......................... (not salute) to the officers.
12. It’s the bad weather that makes us ......................... (stay) at home all the time.
153
Unit 146 Imiesłów czynny  265
I. Przepisz frazy stosując imiesłów czynny:
1. a road that passes through the hills ..................................................................

2. a girl who wishes to recite a poem ..................................................................
3. the table that stands in the kitchen ..................................................................
4. the man who teaches us biology ..................................................................
5. fruit that grow on the tree ..................................................................
6. bills that introduce changes ..................................................................
II. Połącz zdania stosując imiesłów czynny:
1. She gave the boy a kiss. I noticed it.

I noticed .........................................................................................................
2. The bird is building a nest. I’m watching it.
I’m watching ..................................................................................................
3. The soup was burning. I smelt it.
I smelt ............................................................................................................
4. My hands are getting numb. I can feel it.
I can feel ........................................................................................................
5. You dropped the bag. I saw it.
I saw ...............................................................................................................
6. She was telling her husband off. I was listening to it.
I was listening to ...........................................................................................
7. They were trying to break into the van. I was watching them.
I was watching ...............................................................................................
8. She told him everything. I heard it.
I heard .............................................................................................................
III. Przepisz zdania stosując imiesłów czynny:
1. As I know how to deal with the matter, I will help you.

..........................................................................................................................
2. Because she is too timid she won’t go down the cave.
..........................................................................................................................
3. As he earns a lot of money he can afford a new house.
..........................................................................................................................
4. As we don’t have any map we don’t know which way to go.
..........................................................................................................................
5. Because he works as a salesman he meets a lot of people.
..........................................................................................................................
154
Unit 147 Imiesłów czynny i dokonany  265
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując imiesłów czynny:
1. Janet fell off a horse ............................... (break) her leg.
2. I was getting exhausted .............................. (climb) the hills.
3. He hurt his finger .............................. (try) to open a tin with a knife.
4. Freddie found a golden coin .............................. (dig) in the garden.
5. He ended the party .............................. (switch) off the music.
II. Napisz zdania stosując imiesłów dokonany:
1. Lena / eat breakfast / go to school Having eaten .........................................

2. I / watch the film / go to bed ................................................................
3. Sam / take a pill / start to feel better ................................................................
4. Mr Tanner / write a letter / post it ................................................................
5. Nicole / finish school / go to work ................................................................
III. Przepisz zdania stosując imiesłów dokonany:

1. After we had discussed the matter we had a ballot.
Having .............................................................................................................
2. I prepared my lessons. Then, I went to the disco.
...........................................................................................................................
3. Charles settled down in Greenwich after he had returned from abroad.
...........................................................................................................................
4. After he had been introduced, professor Nicey started his lecture.
...........................................................................................................................
5. We abandoned the sinking ship. Then, we were picked up by helicopters.
...........................................................................................................................
IV. Uzupełnij zdania imiesłowową formą czasownika:

1. He was angry. He went out .................... (slam) the door.
2. I hurried up .................... (hope) to catch my school bus.
3. Yesterday, I saw Tom .................... (walk) with Muriel in the park.
4. .................... (write) his homework, Jack went to sleep.
5. You waste your time .................... (try) to repair this old engine.
6. .................... (approach) the bushes, we saw him .................... (hide) there.
7. In a second, I will have the car .................... (run) smoothly.
8. .................... (have) a lot of time to spare I went to a cafe for a cup of tea.
9. Don’t disturb me! I’m busy .................... (write) a report now.
10. Susan twisted her ankle .................... (get out of) the car.
11. .................... (enter) the room she saw the baby .................... (sleep) in a cot.
12. We were listening to the music .................... (be) played by the disc-jockey.
155
Unit 148 Zdania czasowe (1)  267
I. Połącz zdania uzupełniając je poprawną formą czasownika:
1. I will talk to Brian a. I .......... (ask) him for one.

2. She will wake up b. it .......... (stop) raining.
3. He will do me a favour when c. he .......... (come) home.
4. The boss will be surprised d. the alarm-clock .......... (ring).
5. We will go for a walk e. you .......... (tell) him the news.
II. Połącz zdania stosując spójniki czasowe:

1. They will find out the truth, but I will leave before that.
I ................................................ before .........................................................
2. She will sell her house. Then, she will move out.
When ..............................................................................................................
3. He will take an examination. Then, he will go on holiday.
Before he ........................................................................................................
4. I will return from the business trip. Later, I will take a long leave.
After I .............................................................................................................
5. First, he will make an appointment. Then, he will drive the children to school.
He .............................................. when .........................................................
6. Mr Jenkins will retire. He will get a pension.
As soon as ....................................................................................................
7. Martin will turn seventeen. Then, he will join the army.
When .............................................................................................................
8. First, I will talk to the director. Then, I will take a decision.
I .................................................. until .........................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania poprawną formą czasownika:

1. You .................... (not get) your money back until you .................... (threaten)
them with the police.
2. Before winter .................... (come) , we .................... (clean) the paths in our
garden.
3. I .................... (make) a phone call as soon as I .................... (find) the
correct number.
4. When we .................... (return) home, we .................... (take) a good rest.
5. Tom .................... (become) a tour guide after he .................... (go) through
the course.
6. I .................... (make) you some coffee before you .................... (go) away.
7. The Gibsons .................... (not obtain) another loan until they ....................
(pay) their debts back.
8. When it .................... (get) cold, we .................... (switch) on the electric fire.
156
Unit 149 Zdania czasowe (2)  267
I. Uzupełnij dialog czasownikami w poprawnej formie:
A: What are you going to do after you .................... (return) from school?
B: Immediately I ................... (come) home I .................... (start) doing my
lessons. When I .................... (write) all the exercises, I ....................
(prepare) lunch for myself. As soon as I ................... (finish) eating, I
................... (go) out to meet my girlfriend.
A: .................... (you / phone) her before to arrange the date?
B: No. I .................... (fix) it when I see her after my lessons.
A: .................... (you / talk) to your parents before you .................... (leave)
home?
B: No. I .................... (not meet) them until I .................... (return) from the
date in the evening.
II. Odpowiedz na pytania stosując spójniki czasowe:

1. When will Cindy go out to play with the other children? (until)
She / not go out to play / clean her room ...........................................................
2. When will you talk to Mr Thompson? (the moment)
I / talk to Mr Thompson / he / arrive ...................................................................
3. When will they go to sleep? (after)
They / go to sleep / their guests / leave .............................................................
4. When will Mary get a promotion? (as soon as)
Mary / get a promotion / she / pass her exams ..................................................
5. When will the house be built? (before)
The house / be built / the year / end ..................................................................

1. As soon as the chairman .................... (hand) in his resignation, Mr Jones
.................... (take) over.
2. We .................. (sing) a lot when we .................. (go) on the picnic tomorrow.
3. I .................... (make) up my mind before you .................... (withdraw) your
offer.
4. When she .................... (do) the housework, she .................... (visit) her
neighbour.
5. I ................... (forgive) for what they said when they ................... (apologise)
to me.
6. Immediately the snowstorm .................... (subside), we ................... (continue)
our journey.
7. Don’t do anything until the boss .................... (tell) you to.
8. As soon as the sun ................... (rise), roosters ................... (begin) to crow.
157
Unit 150 Zdania celowe  268
I. Połącz zdania stosując in order to:
1. I am going to the shops. I want to buy some food.
...........................................................................................................................
2. Stanley visited doctor Lee. He wanted to ask him for advice.
...........................................................................................................................
3. They are going to open the chest . They want to check its contents.
...........................................................................................................................
4. Ms McCarthy will go to work. She wants to earn some money.
...........................................................................................................................
5. I have just taken up jogging. I want to improve my condition.
...........................................................................................................................
II. Przepisz zdania stosując so as (not) to:

1. Mark has bought a newspaper because he wants to read the latest news.
...........................................................................................................................
2. We’ve hired a private teacher because we want to learn more effectively.
...........................................................................................................................
3. I switched the radio off because I didn’t want to make noise.
...........................................................................................................................
4. Brian is training hard now because he wants to win the race.
...........................................................................................................................
5. We’ll leave earlier because we don’t want to disturb you.
...........................................................................................................................
III. Odpowiedz na pytania stosując so that:

1. Why are the road workers putting this sign here?
(drivers / know about the danger) .....................................................................
2. Why is he wearing the label?
(people / recognise him) ..................................................................................
3. Why did you give Steven such a big loan?
(he / set up his own business) ..........................................................................
4. Why has he put the fence round his house?
(his children / be safe from stray dogs) .............................................................
5. Why are you renovating your house?
(my neighbours / admire it) ...............................................................................
6. Why did he send for a taxi?
(his wife / not have to walk back) ......................................................................
158
Unit 151 Zdania wynikowe  269
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując such ... that lub so ... that:
1. He is .................... rich .................... he can afford to buy everything.
2. She sleeps .................... little .................... she is usually very tired.
3. It was .................... a big venture .................... we had to find sponsors.
4. She is .................... a nice person .................... everyone likes her company.
5. The play was .................... boring ................... I fell asleep in the chair.
6. It is .................... a dirty joke .................... I don’t want to tell it.
7. He swam .................... fast .................... he broke the world record.
8. The exercise was .................. difficult .................. nobody knew how to do it.
9. It was .................... a strong wind ................... it blew off the rooftops.
10. The soup tastes .................... salty .................... I can hardly eat it.
II. Przepisz zdania stosując such ... that:

1. The boy is so strong that he can do five hundred press-ups.
He is .................................................................................................................
2. The puzzle was so hard that only one competitor managed to solve it.
It was ...............................................................................................................
3. The girl is so attractive that she catches the eye of all men.
She is ...............................................................................................................
4. The bed was so uncomfortable that I preferred to sleep in the hammock.
It was ...............................................................................................................
5. The painting is so precious that hardly anyone can afford to buy it.
It is ...................................................................................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując so lub such:

1. Jane is .......... a strict vegetarian that she won’t have meat at all.
2. It was .......... good a concert that I bought a ticket for another day.
3. We got to like Joseph .......... much that we didn’t want him to return home.
4. Bob is .......... a decent man that he never tells lies.
5. The atmosphere was .......... unpleasant that I decided to leave.
6. What’s the point in making .......... a fuss about this simple matter?
7. Her performance was .......... a success that a few producers wanted to
negotiate a contract with her right away.
8. We needn’t have watched the film. It was .......... boring.
9. The people are .......... poor that they have to beg for food.
10. It was .......... a horrible scene that I closed my eyes not to see it
159
Unit 152 Spójniki (1)  269
I. Uzupełnij zdania spójnikami although, besides, otherwise, therefore:
1. Mike can hardly speak French .................... he’s been learning it for two years.
2. We didn’t have money, .................... we couldn’t pay for the tickets.
3. .................... being a good athlete, Ronald is also a skilled swimmer.
4. .................... I’ve proposed to her a thousand times, she refuses to marry me.
5. Let’s hurry up .................... we’ll miss the beginning of the play.
6. There were too many people in the boat, .................... it capsized.
7. Stop being unruly ..................... you’ll be punished.
8. .................... we live together, we don’t talk much to each other.
9. I don’t feel like eating ice-cream. .................... , my throat is aching.
10. The management has objected to increasing our salaries, .................... we’re
going out on strike.
II. Przepisz zdania stosując podane w nawiasach spójniki:

1. We are neighbours, but we don’t like each other.
Although .........................................................................................................
2. They offered to pick me up, but I preferred to walk.
....................................................... however ..................................................
3. I was tired. That’s why I went to bed early.
....................................................... therefore .................................................
4. If you don’t water the flowers, they will fade away.
....................................................... otherwise ................................................
5. Paula is good at mathematics. She is also a talented poem writer.
Besides ...........................................................................................................
III. Wybierz poprawny spójnik:

1. Though / Besides being safe, the car is very economical.
2. The meeting had been cancelled, so / however everybody went home.
3. Therefore / Although the watch isn’t expensive, I’m not going to buy it.
4. Greg is shy and timid; yet / unless he’s very popular with girls.
5. Therefore / Though I don’t like children, I work in a nursery school.
6. Let’s put on our raincoats so / otherwise we’ll get soaked.
7. I wanted to take Lucy to the theatre despite / however she said she was busy.
8. They won’t install the pipes otherwise / unless you pay them extra money.
9. He cannot speak any foreign languages, nevertheless / besides he has
been employed as a travel guide.
10. Although / Yet she is almost hundred, she is still a very fit person.
11. Give up smoking therefore / otherwise you’ll ruin your health.
12. Unless / Despite you stop acting so selfishly, nobody will like you.
160
Unit 153 Spójniki (2)  269
I. Uzupełnij zdania spójnikiem in spite of oraz właściwymi zwrotami:
be under an anaesthetic do one’s best drive the car
have high blood pressure have little time use a lot of gas and water
1. ........................................ in the evening, Ken’s promised to come and help us.

2. She drinks a lot of coffee ........................................ .
3. I felt pain all over my body ........................................ .
4. ........................................ carelessly, Robin has never been fined yet.
5. ........................................ , the bills that we pay are fairly low.
6. We’ve failed to win the competition ........................................ .
II. Połącz właściwe zdania stosując spójnik because of lub despite:
1. You are overweight ...................... a. being paid so badly.

2. We’re strangers to each other ...................... b. drinking cold water.
3. He keeps working hard ...................... c. living in the same district.
4. They have been arrested ...................... d. having free tickets.
5. We didn’t go to see the film ...................... e. consuming too much food.
6. Your throat is aching ...................... f. setting fire to haystacks.
III. Przepisz zdania stosując podane spójniki:

1. Although I am quite brave, I was afraid to touch the snake.
Despite ............................................................................................................
2. If you don’t learn more, you’ll never pass the entrance examination.
........................................................ or else ......................................................
3. The weather was horrible, but the soldiers marched on.
In spite of ........................................................................................................
4. You shouldn’t drink this water because it’s not potable.
Since ...............................................................................................................
5. I have asked Alice warmly, but she still refuses to date me.
Even though ...................................................................................................
IV. Uzupełnij zdania spójnikami as, though, because of, despite lub yet:
1. The boy is blind, .......... he can play the piano beautifully.
2. We moved him to a lower group .......... he didn’t make any progress.
3. They have decided to divorce .......... having incompatible characters.
4. .......... it’s hot, I won’t let you bathe in the sea.
5. .......... having a good figure, Linda refuses to work as a model.
161
Unit 154 Pytania rozłączne (1)  271
I. Dopasuj pytania rozłączne do właściwych zdań:
1. Tom is very nice, ..... a. can’t she?

2. Sylvia lives nearby, ..... b. aren’t we?
3. The apples are ripe, ..... c. didn’t he?
4. The Browns have a cat, ..... d. weren’t you?
5. We are happy, ..... e. weren’t they?
6. You smoke cigars, ..... f. hasn’t he?
7. I am a scientist, ..... g. doesn’t he?
8. Tom writes novels, ..... h. haven’t they?
9. We have seen the film, ..... i. don’t we?
10. Lisa can dance very well, ..... j. doesn’t she?
11. You were tired, ..... k. don’t you?
12. Bob and Sally were playing, ..... l. isn’t he?
13. Simon has gone out, ..... m. aren’t they?
14. David stayed at home, ..... n. aren’t I?
15. We want to get slim, ..... o. haven’t we?
II. Dopasuj pytania rozłączne do właściwych zdań:
1. James doesn’t speak Italian, ..... a. had it?

2. I wasn’t very sleepy, ..... b. are you?
3. The place didn’t look nice, ...... c. were we?
4. There aren’t any ghosts, ..... d. did it?
5. She hasn’t left yet, ..... e. did she?
6. Mick isn’t listening to music, ..... f. does he?
7. We weren’t working, ..... g. have we?
8. It isn’t dark, ..... h. are there?
9. The bell hadn’t rung, ..... i. is it?
10. The Howells aren’t coming, ..... j. has he?
11. I don’t like writing tests, ..... k. was I?
12. We haven’t started yet, ..... l. are they?
13. Judy didn’t live here, ..... m. has she?
14. You aren’t a teacher, ..... n. do I?
15. Tom hasn’t got any pets, ..... o. is he?
162
Unit 155 Pytania rozłączne (2)  271
I. Uzupełnij zdania pytaniami rozłącznymi:
1. David looks sad today, ..............................?

2. We are in a hurry, ..............................?
3. They are having a discussion, ..............................?
4. George spent summer in the mountains, ..............................?
5. Alice has taken the car, ..............................?
6. Let’s go to a disco, ..............................?
7. You could play the guitar, ..............................?
8. I have been teaching them for a long time, ..............................?
9. Someone had locked the door before, ..............................?
10. Mike’s father is an architect, ..............................?
11. The bus is leaving at 7.45, ..............................?
12. It was a memorable experience, ..............................?
13. You have mentioned my name, ..............................?
14. Sue was still sleeping at five, ..............................?
15. We will try again, ..............................?
II. Uzupełnij zdania pytaniami rozłącznymi:
1. They didn’t tell us the truth, ..............................?

2. You aren’t going to resign, ..............................?
3. John isn’t your brother, ..............................?
4. We haven’t seen the performance yet, ..............................?
5. Nobody should come late, ..............................?
6. It hasn’t been a good journey, ..............................?
7. I won’t have to write the exam again, ..............................?
8. The Greens weren’t working at that time, ..............................?
9. Julia doesn’t belong to any party, ..............................?
10. He hardly ever plays with us, ..............................?
11. You wouldn’t do us a favour, ..............................?
12. I haven’t been studying, ..............................?
13. There weren’t any complaints, ..............................?
14. You have no experience, ..............................?
15. She hadn’t telephoned you before, ..............................?
163
Unit 156 Inwersja czasownika  273
I. Odpowiedz na pytania:
1. ‘Have you ever met a more eccentric person?’
‘Never before ..................................................................................................’
2. ‘Do you ever consult your decisions with the director?’
‘Hardly ever ....................................................................................................’
3. ‘Can we leave the hostel at night?’
‘On no account ..............................................................................................’
4. ‘How often does she clean the staircase?’
‘Seldom ..........................................................................................................’
5. ‘Was lying the only possible way to avoid trouble?’
‘Yes, only by ..................................................................................................’
II. Przepisz zdania stosując inwersję:

1. I found out that my documents were missing only when I came home.
Only when ......................................................................................................
2. Apart from being a good skier, William is also a judo champion.
Not only ..........................................................................................................
3. You shouldn’t forget about the conference in any circumstances.
In no circumstances ......................................................................................
4. The delivery boy had just left when the doorbell rang again.
No sooner .......................................................................................................
5. We don’t usually send messages by e-mail.
Scarcely ever ..................................................................................................
6. I didn’t realise my coat was torn till I looked at it in the mirror.
Not till .............................................................................................................
7. She couldn’t find the photographs anywhere.
Nowhere ..........................................................................................................
8. Jeff looked at me so angrily that I felt creeps all over my back.
So ....................................................................................................................
9. I had just switched the razor on when it broke down.
Hardly ..............................................................................................................
10. Ms Thorn hasn’t ever used the overhead projector during her lessons.
Never ...............................................................................................................
III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując than, till lub when:

1. Scarcely had the temperature fallen .......... the snow began to melt down.
2. No sooner had I retired .......... a new accountant took over.
3. Not .......... we opened the lid did we realise that the chest was completely
empty.
164
Unit 157 Czasowniki złożone (1)  273
I. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami złożonymi w poprawnej formie:
break into grow up look for make up
put off run into take after turn on
1. Where is my briefcase? I have been ......................... it for an hour and I still
haven’t found it.
2. Could you ......................... the radio, please. I’d like to listen to some news.
3. The burglars who ......................... my flat last month were caught by the police
yesterday.
4. We’ve had to ......................... our journey till the weather improves.
5. Doesn’t Mick ......................... his father? They both have similar characters.
6. Your son has really ......................... a lot since I last saw him as a small boy.
7. Two cars were badly damaged after a lorry ......................... them this morning.
8. Don’t believe everything Tony says. He tends to ......................... stories.
II. Połącz wyróżniony zwrot z czasownikiem złożonym o podobnym znaczeniu:

1. We saw the thieves but they escaped. a. take out
2. Soon, we’ll get to know if it’s true. b. care for
3. Can you show the mistakes to us? c. go off
4. My application has been rejected. d. get in
5. She doesn’t like ice-cream at all. e. point out
6. He will never stop drinking alcohol. f. clear up
7. The washing liquid should remove the stains. g. find out
8. It was midnight when I arrived home at last. h. stand by
9. The sky will become cloudless in a few hours. i. run away
10. She knows how to educate children. j. give up
11. The fireworks exploded with a bang. k. turn down
12. He says he will always support us. l. bring up
break carry fall give let move put run
1. After a two-month trial the juries have finally .................... out their verdict.
2. That skirt is too tight for me. I must have it .................... out a little.
3. Remember to .................... the fire out before going to bed.
4. The First World War .................... out in 1914.
5. Lisa and Nick had .................... out very often before they decided to divorce.
6. I don’t live in Salisbury any longer. I .................... out five months ago.
7. The corporal gave us an order and we had to .................... it out.
8. We can’t go any further. We have just .................... out of petrol.
165
I. Przepisz zdania stosując właściwe czasowniki zlożone:
back out of get by let down pick out run down set up
1. He lives alone, so he can easily survive on the high salary that he gets.
..........................................................................................................................
2. Why don’t you withdraw from the co-operation instead of wasting your money?
........................................................................................................................?
3. She tends to speak ill of her neighbours quite often.
..........................................................................................................................
4. Honestly, the quality of the receiver disappointed me.
..........................................................................................................................
5. My grandfather started the family business in 1907.
..........................................................................................................................
6. I find it hard to choose the colour that I like the best.
..........................................................................................................................

break off close down do up fall back on
go round see to set in turn up
1. Not everyone got the article. There weren’t enough copies to ..................... .
2. The war continued after the peace negotiations had .................... .
3. My leather gloves were torn, so I had to ................... the woollen ones.
4. The freezer isn’t working properly. I’ll .................... it tomorrow.
5. The demand for cleaning services was so low that we had to .................... the
business .................... .
6. Few people .................... at the TU meeting yesterday, so it didn’t last long.
7. Autumn has already .................... . It’s colder now and everything looks grim.
8. The ceiling is broken and the paint is flaking off. This room must be
.................... as soon as possible.

come back look make pick put set take
1. I’ve forgotten what erreur means. I must .................... it up in the dictionary.
2. A new block of flats will be .................... up in the area within six months.
3. After watching the exciting competition, Frank decided to .................... up
sailing himself.
4. I’m fed up with your argument. It’s high time you .................... it up.
5. We didn’t discuss finances at the meeting. This question didn’t ....................
up at all.
6. ‘Did you go by bus?’ ‘No, George .................... me up in his car.’
7. A special fund has been .................... up to support our cause financially.
8. Promise to .................... me up if everybody else is against my project.
166
I. Uzupełnij zdania stosując właściwe przyimki:
behind down for into on out round through
1. Mr Howard’s condition seemed critical, but he managed to pull ....................
after a few months of an intensive treatment.
2. At first, Phil rejected all my arguments, but then I succeeded in bringing him
.................... .
3. ‘What does MP stand ....................?’ ‘It means a Member of Parliament.’
4. We get .................... very well together. We’ve always been the best friends.
5. The Swedish competitor was the weakest. He fell .................... the other
riders right at the start.
6. What does the inscription read? Somehow, I cannot make it .................... .
7. Could you repeat your phone number? I’ll put it .................... in my notebook.
8. The police have been looking .................... the mysterious disappearance of
a few children in the area.

1. Old buildings are being demolished to make a. go over
space for a modern housing estate.
2. She didn’t recite the whole poem. She omitted b. wear off
the last part of it.
3. Next time, check all the documents carefully. c. put aside
4. I am saving money to go to Athens in summer. d. leave out
5. If we receive some support, our plans will surely e. take back
be successful.
6. Wait on the phone, please. I’ll ask if Mr Lee is in. f. pull down
7. I was wrong. I had to withdraw my critical remarks. g. come off
8. Swallow the pill and the pain will disappear. h. hold on
III. Uzupełnij zdania czasownikami we właściwej formie:

call catch keep live put take wait work
1. They offer 50 pounds a day. Don’t hesitate to .................... on the job.
2. Don’t stop now. .................... on playing the same tune.
3. Let’s .................... on the secretary to prepare the report as soon as possible.
4. The play that we are going to .................... on is by Shakespeare.
5. He must be an unusual guest. Everyone is .................... on him in the hotel.
6. They were all very poor. They had to .................... on roots and spring water.
7. People are crazy about this series in America. I believe it will .................... on
in Europe as well.
8. I haven’t finished my report yet. I’m still .................... on it.
167
I. Odpowiedz na pytania za pomocą czasowników złożonych:
account for call off come about come by
draw up give in go back on take in
1. ‘Where did you obtain this calendar?’ ‘I .............................. it in a store.’
2. ‘Which of them surrendered?’ ‘Adam .............................. after ten minutes.’
3. ‘Who cancelled the meeting?’ ‘The manager ............... it ............... .’
4. ‘How did that accident happen?’ ‘Nobody knows how it .............................. .’
5. ‘Did you understand what she said?’ ‘Yes, I .............................. everything.’
6. ‘Has John kept his promise to you?’ ‘No, he has .............................. it.’
7. ‘When will she explain the situation?’ ‘She will .............................. it soon.’
8. ‘When did you write the schedule?’ ‘We ............... it ............... last week.’
1. She has just regained consciousness. a. look up to

2. This factory stopped producing in 1992. b. pull off
3. She promises to deliver the documents soon. c. hit on
4. They wish to reduce black marketing. d. come round
5. I did it right because the teacher gave me a hint. e. touch on
6. Dave has always admired his older brother. f. tip off
7. He discovered the secret passage by chance. g. shut down
8. Mike stopped attending the lectures last month. h. clamp down on
9. Nobody believed this scheme would work well. i. hand in
10. He didn’t say much. He mentioned it briefly. j drop out
III. Uzupełnij zdania dwoma właściwymi przyimkami:
away down in on up + for on to with
1. I’ve missed a few lessons but I hope to catch .......... .......... the material soon.
2. There have been many complaints about this regulation. We’ll have to do
.......... .......... it.
3. The quality of the shoes isn’t satisfactory. It doesn’t come .......... .......... my
expectations.
4. Gloria is very conceited. She looks .......... .......... everyone else.
5. You’d better cut .......... .......... sweets if you hope to keep a good figure.
6. I haven’t got enough sleep for ages. I will make .......... .......... it on holiday.
7. Don’t give up the therapy. You will see its results if you carry .......... .......... it.
8. I have put .......... .......... the job of a programmer. My interview is on Monday.
168
REPETYTORIUM
GRAMATYCZNE
169
SPIS TREŚCI
Przedimki nieokreślone ‘a - an’ 172

Przedimek określony ‘the’ 173
Zaimki osobowe i dzierżawcze 175
Zaimki pytające / pytania 177
Many, much, a lot of, (a) little, (a) few 179
Some(one), any(one), no(one) 180
Another, the other, other(s) 181
Both, either, neither 182
So do I / Neither do I 183
All, every, each 184
Zaimki względne 185
There - It 188
Liczba mnoga rzeczowników 189
Przymiotniki 192
Przysłówki 195
Stopniowanie opadające 198
The same ... as, as ... as, than 199
So, so ... that, such ... that 199
Enough - too 200
Already, still, yet 201
Przyimki 202
Przyimki miejsca at - in - on 203
Przyimki czasu at - in - on 205
Przyimki ruchu at - from - in - into - to 206
Przyimki during - for - from - since - till - to 207
Przyimki before - by - until - while 208
Przyimek ‘to’ 209
Inne użycie przyimków at - by - in - on 210
Czasownik + przyimek 211
Przymiotnik + przyimek 212
Rzeczownik + przyimek 213
Czasowniki ‘be’ - ‘do’ - ‘have’ 214
Can - may 217
Can - could - be able to 219
May - might 220
May - be allowed to 220
Must - have to 221
Mustn’t - needn’t - don’t have to 222
Should - ought to 223
Used to 223
May / might / could + have done 224
170
Could - could have done - be able to 225
Must have done - had to do 226
Should / ought to + have done 226
Didn’t have to do - needn’t have done 227
Present Simple 227
Present Continuous 228
Present Simple - Present Continuous 229
Past Simple 231
Past Continuous 232
Past Simple - Past Continuous 233
Present Perfect 234
Present Perfect Continuous 236
Present Simple - Present Perfect (Continuous) - Past Simple 238
Future Simple 239
Be going to - Present Continuous 240
Future Continuous 241
Will - shall 242
Future Perfect - Future Perfect Continuous 243
Past Perfect 245
Past Perfect Continuous 246
Tryb warunkowy I 247
Tryb warunkowy II 248
Tryb warunkowy III 249
If - unless 250
Wish + Past Simple / Past Perfect / would 250
Wish - if only 251
Mowa zależna 252
Had better 256
Would rather - (would) prefer 256
It is (high) time 258
Strona bierna 258
Konstrukcje bezokolicznikowe 261
Gerund 263
Bezokolicznik - Gerund 264
Imiesłów czynny i dokonany 265
Zdania czasowe 267
Zdania celowe 268
Zdania wynikowe 269
Spójniki 269
Pytania rozłączne – ‘Question tags’ 271
Inwersja czasownika 273
Czasowniki złożone (phrasal verbs) 273
171
Przedimki nieokreślone a - an  1-4
Przedimki nieokreślone a / an występują przed rzeczownikami policzalnymi w liczbie

pojedynczej.
a - występuje przed rzeczownikiem rozpoczynającym się od spółgłoski np.
a book a car a ghost a postcard
an - występuje przed rzeczownikiem rozpoczynającym się od samogłoski np.
an ant an aerial an egg an object
an - występuje również przed rzeczownikiem oraz przydawką rozpoczynającą się
od spółgłoski ‘h’ w postaci bezdźwięcznej np.
an hour an honourable guest
Przedimki nieokreślone używane są:
- przed rzeczownikiem policzalnym, który jest wspomniany po raz pierwszy, a który
nie wskazuje na jeden określony obiekt np.
This is a lamp. She has a dog. We live in a detached house.
- przed rzeczownikiem reprezentującym grupę rzeczowników o danej nazwie np.
A flat must be comfortable. An egg is a symbol of life.
- przed rzeczownikiem opisującym charakter, cechę, rodzaj danej osoby rzeczy np.
Bill is an atheist. A frog is a reptile.
- przed rzeczownikiem będącym nazwą zawodu np.
Her brother is a teacher. George is an architect.
Przedimki nieokreślone występują również:
- z określeniami ilości np.
a couple a great many a lot of a number of a few
- z określeniami prędkości, stosunku liczbowego lub cen np.
ten kilometres an hour - dziesięć kilometrów na godzinę
three times a week - trzy razy w tygodniu
one dollar a metre - jeden dolar za metr
- z liczebnikami określającymi ciężar, czas, ilość w znaczeniu ‘jeden’ np.
a thousand pounds = one thousand pounds
a hundred tons = one hundred tons
Przedimki nieokreślone nie występują:
- przed rzeczownikami w liczbie mnogiej
- przed rzeczownikami niepoliczalnymi np.
cheese dirt furniture litter sand water
! rzeczowniki niepoliczalne na ogół poprzedza się zaimkiem ‘some’ np.
some sand some cheese some water
- przed nazwami posiłków nie poprzedzonymi przymiotnikami np.
I am eating breakfast. lub I am eating a good breakfast.
172
! Jeżeli rzeczownik określony jest przymiotnikiem, wówczas przedimek należy
umieścić przed przymiotnikiem np.
This is a nice coat. nie This is nice a coat.
Przedimek określony ‘the’  2-4
Przedimek określony the występuje przed rzeczownikami w liczbie pojedynczej

i mnogiej. Może on poprzedzać zarówno rzeczowniki policzalne, jak i niepoliczalne.
Przedimek określony jest stosowany:
- przed rzeczownikami określonymi tj. wspomnianymi już wcześniej np.
I have a room. The room is comfortable
We have borrowed chairs. The chairs are black.
- mówiąc o jednej szczególnej rzeczy / rzeczach lub osobie / osobach np.
The house that I lived in.
The child who is dressed in a flowery shirt.
The men on the roof.
- przed rzeczownikami opisującymi rzecz unikalną - niepowtarzalną w danym
otoczeniu np.
The government of our country. There’s a plane in the sky.
The earth is round. They travelled to the moon.
The town hall (in our city) is very old. The chimney (on our roof) is broken.
- przed przymiotnikami w stopniu najwyższym np.
the tallest boy the funniest comedy the worst experience
- przed liczebnikami porządkowymi np.
The first day of the month. The fourth month of the year.
- przed ‘only’ w znaczeniu ‘jedyny’ np.
She is the only girl that I love.
- przed rzeczownikiem stanowiącym ogólną nazwę danej grupy rzeczy lub zwierząt
np.
The elephant seldom attacks people. The radio was invented by Baird.
- przed rzeczownikami reprezentującymi daną grupę osób np.
The farmer (Every farmer) will find these accessories very useful.
The judge (Every judge) must be impartial.
- przed rzeczownikiem określającym kategorię osób np.
the young (młodzi) the rich (bogaci) the unemployed (bezrobotni)
- przed rzeczownikiem określającym narodową grupę społeczną np.
the English (Anglicy) the Polish (Polacy) the Swedish (Szwedzi)
- przed nazwiskami w pojęciu całej rodziny np.
the Simpsons the Hensons the Jacksons
173
- przed nazwami geograficznymi jak:
a) morza - the Aegean Sea, the Baltic Sea, the Bering Sea
b) oceany - the Pacific, the Indian Ocean, the Atlantic Ocean
c) rzeki - the Vistula, the Tiger, the Thames, the Amazon
d) łańcuchy górskie - the Andes, the Himalayas, the Alps
e) pustynie - the Gobi, the Sahara, the Atacama
- przed nazwami geograficznymi złożonymi z ‘of’ np.
the United States of America the Gulf of Alaska the Tropic of Cancer
- przed nazwami geograficznymi z ‘east / west / south / north’ np.
the South Pole the northern hemisphere
- przed nazwami z ‘east / west / south / north’ w funkcji rzeczownika np.
the west of Poland the south of England the West (Zachód)
Przedimek określony ‘the’ nie występuje:
- przed nazwami geograficznymi jak:
a) większość państw - Germany, Holland (the Netherlands), Egypt, Bulgaria
b) nazwy kontynentów - Australia, Europe, Africa, South America
c) wyspy - Tasmania, Madagaskar, Honshu
d) pojedyncze góry - Kilimanjaro, Ben Nevis, Olympus, Fuji
e) stany - Kentucky, Ohio, Alabama
- przed rzeczownikami nieokreślonymi w liczbie mnogiej np.
Ladybirds don’t sting. People will laugh at you.
- przed imionami oraz nazwiskami osób
- przed rzeczownikami określającymi stan umysłu lub pojęcia abstrakcyjne np.
fear joy humour boredom luck
- przed nazwami dyscyplin sportowych np.
She plays tennis / basketball / squash.
He practices judo / fencing / horse riding.
- przed rzeczownikiem ‘man’ jeżeli występuje on w pojęciu ‘ludzkiej rasy’ np.
Man had to fight to survive.
- przed nazwami własnymi w liczbie mnogiej lub rzeczownikami zawierającymi
dopełniacz saksoński np.
Tom’s pub My brother’s bicycle McDonald’s McGregors’
- przed nazwami większości firm np.
Fiat Phillips Hewlett Packard
- przed rzeczownikiem ‘nature’ w znaczeniu ‘środowisko naturalne’ np.
Observing nature can be an engrossing hobby.
- przed rzeczownikiem ‘home’ bezpośrednio po czasowniku np.
We returned home. ale We left the advisor’s home.
- przed rzeczownikami ‘church / hospital / prison / school / university’ jeżeli określa się
ich właściwe zastosowanie np.
174
I went to hospital (because I was ill).
I went to the hospital (because I wanted to talk to doctor Smith).
They went to church (because they wanted to pray).
They went to the church (to admire its inside structure).
Dean went to prison (because he had done something wrong).
Dean went to the prison (to make an interview with its administrators).
- przed rzeczownikiem ‘work’ w ogólnym pojęciu pracy np.
I went to work at the age of seventeen.
- przed rzeczownikiem ‘town’ jeżeli odnosi się do miasta rodzinnego osoby mówiącej
np.
I am coming to town tomorrow.
Zaimki osobowe i dzierżawcze  5-8
Poniższa tabela prezentuje odmianę zaimków przez przypadki w języku angielskim:
nominative
(mianownik) I you he she it we you they
genitive
(dopełniacz) my your his her its our your their
dative
(celownik) me you him her it us you them
accusative
(biernik) me you him her it us you them
Zaimki osobowe w mianowniku (nominative) używane są w funkcji podmiotu np.

He is my cousin. They went abroad
Mogą one również wystąpić w funkcji dopełnienia np.
This is she. Look, it’s they.
Jednak w tej funkcji częściej stosowaną formą jest trzeci przypadek np.
This is her. Look, it’s them.
Zaimek osobowy ‘you’ stosuje się jako formę bezosobową zamiennie z zaimkiem ‘one’.
Forma bezosobowa ‘you’ jest bardziej powszechna niż ‘one’, którą używa się przy bardziej
formalnych okazjach np.
You (Everyone) must take care of yourself.
One must take care of oneself.
Zaimek ‘they’ stosowany jest także jako forma bezosobowa w znaczeniu ‘wszyscy / ludzie’
np.
They say that money doesn’t bring happiness.
175
W odniesieniu do zwierząt używa się zaimka ‘it’, lecz jeżeli znana jest płeć zwierzęcia
i jest to zwierzę domowe można zastosować ‘he’ lub ‘she’.
Zaimki dzierżawcze.
Forma angielskiego zaimka dzierżawczego uzależniona jest od podmiotu i pozostaje
niezmienna niezależnie od rodzaju oraz liczby rzeczownika, do którego się odnosi np.
Paul has a house. His house is new. He lives in his new house.
Ann has friends. Her friends are nice. She likes her friends very much.
Zaimki dzierżawcze szczególnie często zastępują przedimek określony ‘the’ przed
rzeczownikami wyrażającymi:
- pokrewieństwo rodzinne np. Our mother is fantastic.
- nazwy części ciała np. My stomach is aching.
- nazwy części garderoby np. Your coat is dirty.
Zaimki dzierżawcze mine / yours / his / hers / its / ours / theirs stosuje się zamiast
wyrażenia złożonego z podstawowej formy zaimka dzierżawczego oraz rzeczownika np.
This is my room. It is mine.
Jane has a flower. It is hers.
Stosując tak zmienioną formę zaimka mówiący zakłada, iż opuszczony rzeczownik jest
określony i nie jest konieczne powtórzenie jego nazwy np.
Their neighbours are unpleasant. Ours (Our neighbours) are quite nice.
My seat is free. Yours (Your seat) is occupied.
Konstrukcja ‘rzeczownik’ + of + mine / yours etc. wyraża znaczenie: ‘jeden z ...’ np.
my dog - a dog of mine - one of my dogs
their son - a son of theirs - one of their sons
Zaimki zwrotne ‘myself / yourself / himself / herself / itself / ourselves /
yourselves / themselves’.
Zaimki zwrotne zajmują w zdaniu pozycję dopełnienia podkreślając, iż dana czynność
bezpośrednio odnosi się do podmiotu np.
Susan is dressing herself now. I am shaving myself.
Należy pamiętać, iż liczba mnoga zaimków zwrotnych przybiera nieregularną końcówkę ‘-
ves’ np.
The Browns are enjoying themselves on holiday.
Zaimki zwrotne można użyć dla podkreślenia faktu, iż podmiot wykonuje daną
czynność sam - bez niczyjej pomocy np.
He always prepares his expeditions (by) himself.
Zaimki each other oraz one another nie określają czynności odnoszącej się do samego
podmiotu. Ich znaczenie to ‘wzajemnie, na wzajem’ np.
George and Bob hate each other. = Bob hates George and George hates Bob.
176
Zaimki pytające / pytania  9-10
What - ‘co’ jest słowem pytającym odnoszącym się zasadniczo do rzeczowników

‘nieożywionych’ np.
What is there in the fridge? What music do you like?
‘What’ może jednak wystąpić w konstrukcjach pytających odnoszących się do osób np.
- What is the man? - pytanie to równoznaczne jest z pytaniem dotyczącym zawodu danej
osoby np.
‘What is your father?’ ‘He is a dentist.’
- What is ... like? - ‘Jaki jest ...? - pytanie to wymaga odpowiedzi za pomocą
przymiotnika, gdyż odnosi się do opisu wyglądu zewnętrznego lub cech charakteru
np.
‘What is Debbie like?’ ‘She is very attractive.’
‘What is Harry like?’ ‘He is very intelligent.’
To samo pytanie można jednocześnie użyć w odniesieniu do rzeczowników
‘nieożywionych’ np.
‘What was the concert like?’ ‘Oh, it was unforgettable.’
Podobne pytanie z użyciem czasownika ‘look’ ogranicza się tylko do wyglądu zewnętrznego
np.
‘What does the new teacher look like?’ ‘He’s tall and handsome.’
- ‘What is ... for?’ jest pytaniem analogicznym do pytania z zaimkiem ‘Why’ np.
What are you carrying the plates for? = Why are you carrying the plates?
Where - ‘gdzie, w jakim miejscu’ może wystąpić w konstrukcjach:
- Where ... be / come from? - jest pytaniem o pochodzenie np.
‘Where do the people come from?’ lub ‘Where are the people from?’
‘They come / are from Wales.’
How - ‘jak’ jest słowem stosowanym w pytaniach o sposób wykonania danej czynności. W
odpowiedzi ‘how’ wymaga przysłówka lub wyrażenia przysłówkowego np.
‘How do you like my coat?’ ‘I like it very much.’
‘How do they live?’ ‘They live very comfortably.’
- ‘How’ może również wystąpić w pytaniach z przymiotnikami np.
How dangerous can this disease be?
How real do you think the story is?
- ‘How’ występuje w pytaniach o ilość wraz z przysłówkami ‘much / many’ np.
How much money do you need?
How many places have you visited?
177
- ‘How’ oraz ‘What’ mogą wystąpić w pytaniach dotyczących określeń wymiaru lub
wieku. ‘What’ występuje z rzeczownikami typu ‘age / depth / height / length / width’
podczas gdy ‘how’ używany jest z odpowiadającymi im przymiotnikami tj. ‘old / deep / high
/ long / wide’ np.
What is the length of this rope? lub How long is the rope?
What is the depth of the river? lub How deep is the river?
What is the age of the minister? lub How old is the minister?
When - ‘kiedy’ występuje w pytaniach o czas, porę lub datę np.
‘When do you usually go fishing?’ ‘On Saturday.’
‘When does Mary come from work?’ ‘At five p.m.’
Inną formą pytania o określenie czasowe jest ‘What time ...?’ np.
‘What time does this train leave?’ ‘At seven thirty.’
Why - ‘dlaczego’ występuje w pytaniach o powód. W odpowiedzi najczęściej stosuje się
spójnik ‘because - ponieważ’ np.
‘Why are you leaving the party?’ ‘Because, I am tired.’
Zaimki pytające ‘Who / Which / Whose / What‘ mogą wystąpić w pytaniach w roli podmiotu.
Szyk takiego pytania przypomina zdanie twierdzące np.
Who lives here?
Which car broke down?
What made you angry?
Whose children cried?
Zaimki ‘who / whom / whose / which / what‘ mogą wystąpić w pytaniach w roli dopełnienia,
gdzie szyk zdania jest taki sam, jak w standardowym pytaniu np.
Who do you like?
konstrukcja formalna - Whom do you like?
Whose money did they steal?
What radio are you going to buy?
Zaimki pytające ‘who / whom / which / what‘ mogą wystąpić w konstrukcji pytającej w roli
dopełnienia przyimkowego. W pytaniach tego typu przyimek występuje przeważnie na końcu
zdania np.
Who are you looking at? What did he speak about?
Which book are you interested in? Who do they rely on?
Jedynie w zdaniach formalnych przyimek poprzedza słowo pytające np.
To whom are you going to write?
For what reason did they leave?
Zaimek pytający ‘which’ nie może stanowić podmiotu zdania w odniesieniu do osób. Może
on jednak wystąpić w tej roli wraz z przyimkiem ‘of’ lub rzeczownikiem określającym daną
grupę osób np.
Which of them came first, Eric or David?
Which teacher do you like the most?
178
‘Which’ stosowany jest w pytaniach dotyczących rzeczy jeżeli ich liczba jest określona, w
przeciwnym przypadku, używa się zaimka ‘what’ np.
We have apples and pears. Which (of them) would you like?
What fruit are your favourite?
Many, much, a lot of, (a) little, (a) few  11-12
Much oraz many występują przed rzeczownikami w roli zaimka nieokreślonego.

- much - ‘dużo, wiele, mnóstwo’ - występuje z rzeczownikami niepoliczalnymi np.
She doesn’t eat much ice-cream. I don’t have much time.
- many - ‘dużo, wiele, mnóstwo’ - występuje z rzeczownikami policzalnymi np.
Do you have many friends in Scotland?
She didn’t ask many questions.
Much oraz many stosowane są przeważnie w zdaniach pytających i przeczących.
W twierdzeniach występują najczęściej z modyfikatorami typu ‘so / too’ np.
She spends too much time watching TV.
We know so many foreigners here.
Many w zdaniach twierdzących może również wystąpić w złożeniach z ‘a good / a great’ w
znaczeniu ‘wiele, mnóstwo’ np.
She reads a good many books. John knows a great many actors.
Wyrażenie przysłówkowe very much - ‘bardzo’ - występuje po czasownikach typu admire /
enjoy / like / love / thank / want np.
We liked the show very much.
Fred loves his pets very much.
A lot of / lots of - ‘dużo, wiele, mnóstwo’ - występują zarówno z rzeczownikami
policzalnymi jak i niepoliczalnymi głównie w zdaniach twierdzących np.
They waste a lot of money. This dog needs lots of food.
- a lot of może wystąpić w przeczeniach oraz pytaniach jeżeli spodziewamy się
pozytywnej odpowiedzi np.
‘Did you meet a lot of people?’ ‘Of course, dozens of them.’
A little / little - występują z rzeczownikami niepoliczalnymi.
- a little - ‘trochę’ - określa niewielką ilość np.
‘How much flour do you want to borrow?’ ‘Just a little.’
- little - ‘niewiele, mało’ - określa niedostateczną ilość, często występuje
z modyfikatorami ‘so / too’ np.
She eats too little food. She is very thin.
He learns so little. His marks are really poor.
179
- a little oraz little mogą wystąpić w roli przysłówków z rzeczownikami, przymiotnikami oraz
przysłówkami np.
You look a little depressed.
Let’s finish work a little earlier.
She told me very little about him.
A few / few - występują z rzeczownikami policzalnymi.
- a few - ‘kilka, parę’
I can give you a few good examples. She took a few photos.
- few - ‘mało, niewiele’ - może wystąpić z modyfikatorami ‘so / too’ np.
We are strangers here. We know few people in this town.
You have received too few votes to become a chairman.
Przysłówek ‘quite’ poprzedzający ‘a few’ nadaje mu znaczenie ‘wiele, dużo’ np.
He’s a popular actor. He has starred in quite a few films.
A little oraz a few mogą być poprzedzone przysłówkiem ‘only - tylko, zaledwie’, który nadaje
im znaczenie negatywne np.
They aren’t rich. They earn only a few hundreds.
I have tried only a few of the dishes from the menu.
Some(one), any(one), no(one)  13, 21, 38
Zaimki some oraz any wyrażają znaczenie pewnej nieokreślonej ilości występując przed
rzeczownikami niepoliczalnymi lub nieokreślonymi w liczbie mnogiej np.
There is some water in the bottle.
There are some people in the office.
‘Some’ oraz ‘any’ mogą również pojawić się przed rzeczownikiem policzalnym w liczbie
pojedynczej jeżeli jest on nieokreślony np.
There is some man at the door. I don’t know him.
- some - ‘trochę, jakieś, kilka’ występuje w zdaniach twierdzących lub pytaniach jeżeli
spodziewamy się pozytywnej odpowiedzi np.
She has some pictures for you.
‘Would you like some coffee?’ ‘Yes, please.’
‘Did you see some wild animals in the zoo?’ ‘Lots of them.’
- any - ‘trochę, jakieś, kilka’ występuje w pytaniach oraz zdaniach przeczących np.
Have you made any friends in America?
I don’t have any more questions.
‘Any’ może wystąpić w zdaniach twierdzących w znaczeniu ‘każdy, jakikolwiek’ np.
Any accountant can do the calculations for you.
We need any help that is possible.
180
No / none
- no jest używany jako zaprzeczenie rzeczownika przed którym się znajduje.
‘No’ może stanowić formę zaprzeczenia alternatywnego dla ‘not any’ np.
We have not any free tickets. = We have no free tickets.
There were not any offers. = There were no offers.
‘No’ wraz z rzeczownikiem może stanowić podmiot zdania np.
No letters have been received. No food was served.
- none jest zaprzeczeniem nie wymagającym rzeczownika np.
They have some documents, but you have none.
We invited them all, but none arrived.
Zaimki złożone z some / any / no
someone / somebody - ktoś
something - coś
somewhere - gdzieś
somehow - jakoś
występują w zdaniach według takich samych zasad jak ‘some / any / no’ np.
Do you know anyone here?
Mr Burton lives somewhere here.
We haven’t anything for you this time.
Nobody could solve the puzzle.
Is anybody familiar with these French names?
Nothing wrong happened during the trip.
Another, the other, other(s)  14
Another - ‘jeszcze jeden, inny, następny’ może wystąpić w zdaniu w roli zaimka lub
przydawki przed rzeczownikiem w liczbie pojedynczej np.
I have eaten my piece of cake. Can I take another?
One policeman held me. Another (policeman) searched my pockets.
There’s no more wine in the bottle. Shall I bring another (one/bottle)?
Other - ‘inni/e’ występuje przed rzeczownikiem nieokreślonym lub zaimkiem ‘ones’ w liczbie
mnogiej np.
We like this place, but other people may not be satisfied with it.
I don’t like these postcards. Could you show me other ones?
Others - ‘inni/e’ występuje w zdaniu bez rzeczownika przyjmując rolę zaimka
nieokreślonego np.
A few books were saved; others burnt in the fire.
Some people agreed with me; (some) others raised objections.
181
The other - ‘ten drugi’ występuje z rzeczownikiem określonym lub zaimkiem ‘one’
w liczbie pojedynczej np.
We have employed two new workers.
One is hard-working, but the other (one) seems to be lazy.
The others - ‘inni/e, tamci’ występuje bez rzeczownika w roli zaimka określonego
w liczbie mnogiej np.
We were divided into two groups. We supported the reforms, but the others
were against them.
One another / each other - ‘wzajemnie, na wzajem’
John and Peter have known each other for ages.
A wife and a husband should respect one another.
Both - either - neither  15
Both - ‘obydwaj, obydwie, oboje’ - może wystąpić z rzeczownikiem lub bez niego jako
zaimek np.
Both boys were disobedient. Both were disobedient.
‘Both’ występuje także z zaimkami osobowymi w liczbie mnogiej, zaimkami dzierżawczymi,
zaimkami wskazującymi ‘these / those’ lub przedimkiem ‘the’ np.
They both are my friends.
Our both houses are very modern.
These both towers are really high.
The both bottles are empty.
Both of those dresses appeal to me.
Both of the cars cost a lot.
Both ... and ... - ‘ zarówno ... jak i ...’ - konstrukcja ta może występować
z rzeczownikami, czasownikami, przymiotnikami lub zaimkami np.
Both George and Andrew can drive a lorry.
She both answers the phone and types letters.
The engine is both practical and economical.
Either oznacza ‘jeden z dwóch’ i może wystąpić z rzeczownikiem oraz zaimkiem w liczbie
pojedynczej. ‘Either’ może także wystąpić sam np.
They have The Times and Newsweek. I will buy either (magazine / one).
‘Either’ występuje również z ‘of’ oraz ‘these / those / us / you / them’ np.
You can choose between either of these two concepts.
One is ugly and the other is fat. Can you accept either of them?
Either ... or ... - ‘albo ... albo ...’ - konstrukcja ta może występować z rzeczownikami,
czasownikami, przymiotnikami lub zaimkami np.
182
We will either play golf or have a barbecue.
Either a driving licence or a passport will be needed.
It can be either windy or foggy tomorrow.
Neither - ‘żaden z dwóch’ jest przeczeniem, dlatego czasownik z którym występuje nie
wymaga dodatkowego zaprzeczenia. ‘Neither’ może także występować
z rzeczownikami lub ‘of’ + ‘these / those / us / you / them’ np.
Neither coat is warm. = Neither of these two coats is warm.
I’ve tried the two caps on but neither (of them) suits me.
She could buy neither of the watches. They were too expensive.
Neither ... nor ... - ‘ani ... ani ...’ - konstrukcja ta może występować z rzeczownikami,
czasownikami, przymiotnikami lub zaimkami. Jest ona formą przeczącą, dlatego czasownik
w zdaniu z ‘neither ... nor’ nie wymaga dodatkowego zaprzeczenia np.
Henry is neither kind nor obedient.
Neither a motor-bike nor a car costs so much as a boat.
We neither had tickets nor wanted to see the performance.
! ‘Either’ może zastąpić ‘neither’ w zdaniach przeczących jeżeli zaprzeczony jest
główny czasownik zdania np.
She hasn’t written either of these letters. =
She has written neither of these letters.
‘Either ... or ...’ może wystąpić w przeczeniach zamiast ‘neither ...nor ...’ jeżeli
zaprzeczony jest główny czasownik zdania np.
Bill was not either surprised or shocked. = Bill was neither surprised nor shocked.
So do I / Neither do I  16
Konstrukcja ‘so / neither + czasownik posiłkowy + podmiot’ służy jako komentarz odnoszący
się do czasownika w zdaniu głównym. Przy użyciu takiego komentarza potwierdza się lub
zaprzecza wykonywanie danej czynności przez podmiot inny, niż podmiot zdania głównego.
‘So + czasownik posiłkowy + podmiot’ występuje wraz ze zdaniem twierdzącym. Czasownik
posiłkowy musi odpowiadać konstrukcji czasowej określonej w zdaniu głównym oraz
podmiotowi, do którego się odnosi np.
Mike smokes a lot, so does George.
Present Simple
We are going to the cinema, so are they.
Present Continuous
You came late, so did your wife.
Past Simple
183
‘Neither + czasownik posiłkowy + podmiot’ występuje wraz ze zdaniem przeczącym.
Należy pamiętać, iż czasownik posiłkowy po ‘neither’ nie występuje w formie przeczącej np.
Mike does not smoke, neither does George.
We are not going to the cinema, neither are they.
You did not come late, neither did your wife.
Jeżeli orzeczenie nie występuje z żadnym operatorem (czasowniki modalne), wówczas w
komentarzu po So lub Neither pojawia się właściwa odmiana tego samego orzeczenia np.
Betty can speak French, so can Alice.
We must work hard, so must you.
Tom should not drink alcohol, neither should Eric.
He could not understand me, neither could she.
We would like to see the play, so would the other people.
You had better hide, so had your companion.
Komentarz o przeciwnym znaczeniu można utworzyć przy użyciu:
‘but + podmiot + (zaprzeczone) orzeczenie’ np.
George is feeling well, but I am not.
Her car was badly damaged, but ours wasn’t.
I can be patient, but you cannot.
She would not support us, but her husband would.
Sam has not returned yet, but his brother has.
All - every - each  17
All - ‘wszyscy, wszystko’ - odnosi się do grupy osób lub obiektów w ogólnym pojęciu.
Zaimek ten może wystąpić w zdaniu sam, z rzeczownikiem lub ‘of’ + ‘this / that / these /
those / us / you / them’ np.
All of these people know the truth.
We all work for the same company.
All animals must be treated with respect.
All the stories are real.
‘How many of these sweets can I take?’ ‘You can take all (of them).’
‘All’ występuje z wyrażeniem: ‘all the time = always, continually’ lub z określeniami
czasu w znaczeniu ‘cały’ np ‘all day / night / week / month’ itp.
Every - ‘każdy’ - odnosi się do osoby lub rzeczy w pojęciu grupy do której należą.
‘Every’ występuje przeważnie z rzeczownikami reprezentującymi dużą grupę osób lub rzeczy
np.
184
Every child needs to be looked after very carefully. = All children need ...
Every enterprise must be registered. = All enterprises must ...
Each - ‘każdy’ - odnosi się w stopniu bardziej indywidualnym do pojedynczych osób lub
obiektów reprezentujących małą grupę np.
She came with four children. Each child / of them had an ice-cream.
Mr Dean has two dogs. Each is very bad.
Zarówno ‘each’ jak i ‘every’ określają rzeczownik, jednak tylko ‘each’ może wystąpić bez
niego np.
He didn’t buy any of the watches. Each had a defect.
‘Each’ oraz ‘every’ występują z zaimkiem ‘one’ np.
She owns three houses. Each one is very expensive.
A: ‘Have you checked all the boxes?’
B: ‘Yes, I have looked into every one.’
W złożeniu z ‘of’ można użyć konstrukcji ‘each of’ lub ‘ every one of’ np.
Every one of us is different.
Each of the codes is secret.
‘Every’ stosowany jest z wyrażeniami czasu przy określaniu częstotliwości np.
Jenny washes her baby every evening.
They broadcast the latest news every fifteen minutes.
! Jeżeli zaimek ‘each’ poprzedzony jest zaimkiem osobowym w liczbie mnogiej,
czasownik również przybiera formę liczby mnogiej np.
We each are taking a course in shorthand.
They each are taking a course in shorthand.
Zaimki względne  18-22
W języku angielskim występują trzy zaimki względne wyrażające znaczenie ‘który, która,
które, którym, którymi, których’ itp.
- who - używany w odniesieniu do osób
- which - używany w odniesieniu do rzeczy
- that - używany w odniesieniu do osób i rzeczy
Zaimki względne posiadają odmienną formę w dopełniaczu i celowniku.
nominative genitive dative

(mianownik) (dopełniacz) (celownik)
osoby who whose whom
rzeczy which of which / whose which
osoby / rzeczy that - that
185
Zdanie względne definiujące - opisuje daną osobę lub rzecz wyróżniając ją z całej grupy
ułatwiając przy tym zrozumienie do której osoby lub rzeczy odwołujemy się. Mówiąc o tej
jednej szczególnej osobie lub rzeczy wyróżniamy ją stosując przedimek określony ‘the’ np.
The neighbours who moved in last month are really nice.
I asked the girl that was sitting beside me.
W zdaniach względnych definiujących mogą również wystąpić przedimki nieokreślone oraz
rzeczowniki w liczbie mnogiej bez przedimka. W takim przypadku rzeczownik, który
definiujemy nie jest traktowany jako jeden szczególny, lecz jako reprezentujący daną grupę
osób lub obiektów np.
There are people who complain about everything.
I know a man who worked as a chimney sweeper.
Zdanie złożone niedefiniujące - stanowi dodatkową informację dotyczącą osoby lub
rzeczy, do której się odnosi, a która została już zdefiniowana. Zdania zawierające dodatkową
informację nie są niezbędne dla zachowania poprawności struktury całego zdania. Zdanie
niedefiniujące musi być oddzielone od zdania głównego przecinkami, natomiast zaimka
względnego nie można opuścić np.
Mr Bronco, whom I met at the ceremony, sells ironware.
Alice, who is my relative, knows the place where Alex lives.
! Zaimek względny ‘that’ nie jest używany w zdaniach niedefiniujących. Zamiast
niego używa się zaimka ‘which’ np.
The Pentagon, which was built in 1943 , is the biggest construction in the world.
Zdanie względne łączące - występuje z zaimkami ‘who, whom, whose, which‘, przed
którymi stawia się przecinek. Zadaniem zdań łączących jest kontynuacja wypowiedzi, która
nie definiuje danej osoby lub rzeczy np.
We spoke to Michael, who gave us a good advice.
I tried to comfort Brian, whose girlfriend was dating another boy.
Susan gave up smoking, which was very sensible.
Zaimek względny w roli podmiotu.
W funkcji podmiotu występują zaimki względne ‘who, which lub that’, których nie można w
zdaniu opuścić np.
The policeman who stopped us was rather unkind.
He owns a company which is bringing huge profit.
There is the boy that beat my brother.
Michael, who has just joined our group, comes from Dover.
Zaimek względny w roli dopełnienia.
W funkcji dopełnienia występują zaimki względne ‘who, whom, which, that’. Forma ‘whom’
stosowana jest w języku formalnym. Najczęściej używanym zaimkiem w funkcji dopełnienia
jest ‘that’ (! tylko w zdaniach definiujących). Często, jednak, zaimek w funkcji dopełnienia
jest w zdaniu opuszczany np.
186
The man (who / whom) you have just seen is a caretaker.
The girls (who / whom) I met yesterday come from Madrid.
The TV set (which) they have bought is very modern.
The music (that) you are listening to is quite nice.
! W zdaniach niedefiniujących oraz łączących zaimka względnego opuszczać nie
można np.
The unemployment problem, which we discussed at our last meeting,
is becoming more acute.
Arnold, whom I liked very much, was of my age.
She said she was a French official, which I knew wasn’t true.
Zaimek względny w roli dopełnienia z przyimkiem.
Zaimki względne ‘who’ oraz ‘which’ mogą wystąpić w roli dopełnienia wraz
z przyimkiem, który w zdaniach formalnych zajmuje miejsce przed zaimkiem.
W tej konstrukcji zaimek ‘who’ przybiera postać ‘whom’ np.
The gentleman with whom she is speaking is her father.
There are the boxes in which they keep their things.
George Johnson, with whom I lived for four years, has become a famous
politician recently.
W języku potocznym przyimek zajmuje miejsce po czasowniku, zaś zaimek względny można
opuścić (! tylko w zdaniach definiujących) np.
The boy (who / that) she is looking at is a newcomer.
I’ll show you the tree (which / that) I fell from.
Our van, which we have spend so much money on, is well equipped.
! W przypadku czasowników złożonych (phrasal verbs) przyimek jest nierozdzielny,
dlatego zawsze znajduje się po czasowniku np.
The match which has been put off is going to be very exciting.
The house that thieves broke into last month is now being protected by watch-dogs.
Zaimek względny w celowniku. (Forma dzierżawcza)
W odniesieniu do osób oraz rzeczy stosuje się zaimek względny ‘whose’ np.
I talked to a man whose farm was destroyed by flood.
They’ve hired a cottage whose windows look out on the sea.
My uncle, whose wife works overtime, cooks meals for himself.
W odniesieniu do rzeczowników ‘nieożywionych’ znacznie częściej stosowaną formą
dzierżawczą jest ‘of which’ np.
The Browns’ car, the wheels of which were punctured, was towed to a garage.
Zaimki pytające ‘where / when / why’ - mogą wystąpić w roli zaimków względnych.
- ‘where’ używany jest zamiast ‘in/on which’ np.
The office in which / where I worked before.
- ‘when’ używany jest zamiast ‘in/on which’ np.
The day on which / when you came.
187
- ‘why’ używany jest zamiast ‘for which’ np.
The reason for which / why she has quit is unknown.
What, which
- ‘what’ w roli zaimka względnego może zastąpić frazę o znaczeniu ‘the thing(s) that’
np.
The thing that / What made me angry was John’s resistance.
- ‘which’ w roli zaimka względnego łączącego odwołuje się do informacji zawartej w
zdaniu, które go poprzedza np.
Mary gave Greg a cold shoulder, which astonished each of us.
There - It  23
It - spełnia funkcję zaimka osobowego w liczbie pojedynczej zastępując rzeczownik

‘nieożywiony’ np.
This is a plate. It is clean.
- ‘It’ używany jest w odniesieniu do zwierząt np.
‘Is this Joan’s dog?’ ‘Yes, it is hers.’
- ‘It’ występuje jako podmiot zdania z określeniami czasu, warunków klimatycznych
lub dystansu np.
It is two o’clock.
It is Tuesday.
It was cold and cloudy yesterday.
It is two miles from the nearest village.
- ‘It’ występuje w zdaniach z zaimkami względnymi tzw. cleft sentences np.
It was George who told me how to solve the puzzle.
It is pictures that he collects, not coins.
- ‘It’ występuje w zdaniach z bezokolicznikiem czasownika np.
It is hard to learn Chinese.
It is dangerous to walk on thin ice.
- ‘It’ występuje z czasownikami ‘find / think’ np.
I find it easy to learn languages.
He thinks it (is) nice to offer women flowers.
- ‘It’ występuje w zdaniu jako podmiot bezosobowy np.
It seems that they will come late.
It happens very often that he plays out of tune.
It looks like rain, doesn’t it?
- ‘It’ wraz z przymiotnikiem występuje w zdaniu złożonym z ‘that; np.
It was obvious that Nick would win the race.
Isn’t it strange that they get promoted so often?
188
- ‘It’ występuje z czasownikiem ‘take’ dla określenia długości trwania danej czynności
np.
It takes a few hours to instal an aerial like this one.
There - występuje z czasownikiem ‘be’ w roli podmiotu np.
There is a bottle of whisky on the table.
There are a few questions that I want to ask you.
- ‘there’ występuje z zaimkami ‘something / anything / nothing’ oraz przymiotnikiem
lub bezokolicznikiem czasownika np.
There is nothing strange about cold weather at this time of the year.
Is there anything to do in the evening?
- ‘there’ występuje z czasownikami modalnymi np.
There might be another strike next week.
There could be someone in the cellar.
Liczba mnoga rzeczowników  24-26
Regularna liczba mnoga rzeczowników.

Rzeczowniki angielskie tworzą liczbę mnogą przy pomocy końcówki ‘-s’ np.
boy - boys lake - lakes pocket - pockets
Rzeczowniki zakończone spółgłoską syczącą tj. ‘ch / sh / ss / x’ oraz samogłoską ‘o’ tworzą
liczbę mnogą przy pomocy końcówki ‘-es’ np.
watch - watches loss - losses domino - dominoes
Jedynie rzeczowniki obcego pochodzenia zakończone samogłoską ‘o’ tworzą liczbę mnogą
przy pomocy ‘-s’ np.
radio - radios photo - photos video - videos
Rzeczowniki zakończone spółgłoską ‘y’, którą poprzedza samogłoska tworzą liczbę mnogą
przy pomocy ‘-s’ np.
tray - trays alloy - alloys guy - guys
Jeżeli przed spółgłoską ‘y’ kończącą dany rzeczownik znajduje się inna spółgłoska, wówczas
liczbę mnogą tworzy końcówka ‘-ies’ np.
colony - colonies trophy - trophies party - parties
Nieregularna liczba mnoga rzeczowników.
Niektóre rzeczowniki zakończone spółgłoską ‘f’ lub ‘fe’ tworzą liczbę mnogą przy pomocy
końcówki ‘-ves’ np
shelf - shelves wife - wives knife - knives
Do grupy tej należą również rzeczowniki:
calf, half, leaf, loaf, scarf, thief, wolf
Inne rzeczowniki zakończone na ‘f(e)’ tworzą liczbę mnogą regularnie np.
roof - roofs dwarf - dwarfs
189
Niektóre rzeczowniki tworzą liczbę mnogą poprzez zmianę samogłoski np.
man - men goose - geese foot - feet louse - lice
mouse - mice tooth - teeth woman - women
Rzeczownik ‘child’ posiada nieregularną liczbę mnogą - ‘children’.
Niektóre rzeczowniki, mimo że określają nazwę jednego obiektu posiadają stałą formę liczby
mnogiej, dlatego czasownik, który po nich następuje lub zaimek, który je zastępuje również
przybiera formę liczby mnogiej. Do grupy tej należą rzeczowniki stanowiące nazwy części
ubioru oraz narzędzi i urządzeń składających się z dwóch jednakowych części np.
pants, trousers, pyjamas, binoculars, scissors, glasses, scales, pliers
Where are my pyjamas? I cannot find them.
These trousers cost a lot, don’t they?
Do grupy rzeczowników posiadających stałą formę liczby mnogiej zaliczają się również:
arms, clothes, damages, earnings, goods, outskirts,
savings, stairs, surroundings, valuables
! Po rzeczowniku ‘the police’ czasownik przybiera formę liczby mnogiej np.
The police were in time to prevent riots.
Rzeczowniki zakończone na ‘-ics’, mimo iż stanowią nazwę pojedynczej dyscypliny
występują z czasownikiem w formie liczby mnogiej np.
Athletics are my favourite discipline.
Do grupy tej zaliczają się również rzeczowniki:
mathematics, physics, politics, economics, graphics
Niektóre rzeczowniki występują pod postacią liczby mnogiej, jednakże określają nazwę
pojedynczej rzeczy. Następujący po nich czasownik przybiera końcówkę liczby pojedynczej.
Do rzeczowników tych należą nazwy niektórych gier lub chorób:
bowls (kręgle), darts (rzutki), measles (odra), mumps (świnka)
Do grupy tej należy również rzeczownik ‘news - wiadomości’ np.
Is the news good today?
Measles is a curable disease nowadays.
Darts is very popular in England.
Niektóre rzeczowniki pochodzenia greckiego lub łacińskiego tworzą liczbę mnogą według
reguł języków, z których się wywodzą np.
crisis - crises erratum - errata phenomenon - phenomena
memorandum - memoranda oasis - oases
Niektóre rzeczowniki stanowiące nazwy zwierząt nie zmieniają formy w liczbie mnogiej. Do
grupy tej należą:
fish, deer, sheep, carp, salmon
190
Innymi rzeczownikami podlegającymi tej regule są:
aircraft, spacecraft, game (zwierzyna łowna)
W przypadku rzeczowników złożonych z dwóch członów, normalnie drugi człon przybiera
końcówkę liczby mnogiej np.
look-outs break-offs girl-friends play-offs
Jednakże, w przypadku rzeczowników złożonych połączonych przyimkiem pierwszy człon
przybiera końcówkę liczby mnogiej np.
brothers-in-law places of stay editors-in-chief
Rzeczowniki niepoliczalne.
Rzeczowniki niepoliczalne nie tworzą liczby mnogiej. Nie występują one z przedimkami
nieokreślonymi ‘a’ / ‘an’, natomiast często posiadają określniki takie jak: ‘some / any / a little’.
Do rzeczowników niepoliczalnych zalicza się:
- nazwy substancji w pojęciu ogólnym np.
bread, coffee, glass, ice, marmalade, meat, milk, oil, paper, stone, tea, water, wood
- pojęcia abstrakcyjne oraz zmysłowe jak:
advice, behaviour, death, dream, experience, fear, help, hope, faith,
luck, impression, information, knowledge, mind, pity, skill, work
- inne rzeczowniki uznawane za niepoliczalne w języku angielskim:
damage, furniture, hair, luggage, money, weather, work
I need (some) money.
She will give you (some) advice.
I have changed work.
Keep faith, don’t lose hope.
Niektóre z wyżej wymienionych rzeczowników można jednak użyć w sensie policzalnym
wraz z przymiotnikami. Występują one wówczas z przedimkami nieokreślonymi ‘a / an’ np.
We had a thrilling experience.
It was a good advice that you gave me.
John made a great impression on everybody.
Policzalną formę rzeczownika można niekiedy utworzyć przy pomocy złożenia z innym
rzeczownikiem, który jest policzalny np.
some coffee - a cup of coffee - two cups of coffee
some bread - a slice of bread - three slices of bread
some chocolate - a bar of chocolate - ten bars of chocolate
Niektóre rzeczowniki określające pojęcia abstrakcyjne mogą przybierać formę policzalną
jeżeli są one stosowane w szczególnym znaczeniu np.
You have a thorough knowledge of the subject, indeed.
It’s a pity that they didn’t bring Lena to the party.
It’s a shame he didn’t apologise for his bad behaviour.
191
Rodzaj rzeczownika.
Rzeczowniki różniące się formą rodzaju męskiego i żeńskiego:
boy - girl king - queen uncle - aunt

bachelor - spinster man - woman widower - widow
bridegroom - bride nephew - niece
father - mother prince - princess
husband - wife son - daughter
Rzeczowniki rodzaju męskiego i żeńskiego nie różniące się formą:

baby child cousin parent relative spouse
Większość rzeczowników określających nazwę zawodu posiada taką samą formę dla
obydwu rodzajów np.
accountant detective window cleaner
Wyjątki stanowią rzeczowniki:
actor - actress host - hostess
manager - manageress waiter - waitress
Wyjątkiem jest też rzeczownik ‘hero’, którego formą żeńską jest ‘heroine’.
Rzeczowniki określające rodzaj męski i żeński niektórych zwierząt mogą różnić się formą
np.
bull - cow lion - lioness stallion - mare

dog - bitch ram - ewe tiger - tigeress
Rzeczowniki określające nazwy grup osób mogą wystąpić z czasownikiem

z odmianą liczby mnogiej lub pojedynczej np.
Their family has / have big influences. The football team is / are well-paid.
Przymiotniki  27-29
Przymiotniki w języku angielskim są nieodmienne. Nie zmieniają swojej postaci

w zależności od rodzaju lub liczby rzeczownika, przy którym się znajdują np.
Jenny is a clever girl.
Bob is a clever boy.
Your book is very interesting.
Your books are very interesting.
Kolejność przymiotników w zdaniu.
1. Przymiotniki określające wielkość i rozmiar.
2. Przymiotniki opisujące cechy w pojęciu ogólnym.
192
3. Przymiotniki określające wiek.
4. Przymiotniki określające kształt.
5. Przymiotniki określające kolor.
6. Przymiotniki określające materiał, z którego wykonany jest dany obiekt.
7. Przymiotniki określające pochodzenie.
8. Przymiotniki określające zastosowanie danego rzeczownika.
Roberto is a short young singer.
This is a new round brown wooden table.
These are old Italian frescos.
This is a huge modern drilling machine.
Angela is a fair-haired German waitress.
! Przymiotniki opisujące cechy charakteru występują po przymiotnikach opisujących
wygląd zewnętrzny np.
He is a tall intelligent man.
She is a short unpleasant woman.
Przymiotniki - nie przysłówki - występują po czasownikach wyrażających czynności
narządów zmysłów - feel, look, seem, smell, sound, taste np.
This roastbeef tastes delicious.
Your excuse sounds incredible.
Debbie looks nice in her new dress.
Stopniowanie przymiotników.
- Stopień wyższy.
Stopień wyższy przymiotnika jedno lub dwusylabowego tworzy się przy pomocy końcówki ‘-
er’ lub samej spółgłoski ‘r’ jeżeli przymiotnik zakończony jest samogłoską ‘e’ np.
pale - paler fast - faster long - longer ripe - riper
Większość przymiotników składających się z trzech oraz więcej sylab tworzy stopień wyższy
przy pomocy operatora ‘more’ np.
similar - more similar expensive - more expensive
- Stopień najwyższy.
Przymiotniki jedno lub dwu sylabowe tworzą stopień najwyższy przy pomocy końcówki ‘-est’
lub ‘-st’ jeżeli przymiotnik zakończony jest samogłoską ‘e’ np.
big - bigger - biggest nice - nicer - nicest
Przymiotniki składające się z trzech lub więcej sylab tworzą stopień najwyższy przy użyciu
operatora ‘most’ np.
interesting - more interesting - most interesting
amusing - more amusing - most amusing
! Przymiotnik w stopniu najwyższym zawsze występuje w zdaniu z przedimkiem
określonym ‘the’, za wyjątkiem sytuacji kiedy przed przymiotnikiem znajduje się
zaimek dzierżawczy np.
193
Paula is the funniest person that I know.
Ted is the most faithful friend.
These were our happiest days.
Niektóre przymiotniki dwusylabowe mogą być stopniowane na obydwa sposoby np.
clever - cleverer - the cleverest
clever - more clever - the most clever
Przymiotniki zakończone na ‘-ful’ lub ‘-re’ stopniowane są przy pomocy operatorów ‘more’ i
‘most’ np.
playful - more playful - most playful
severe - more severe - most severe
Przymiotniki zakończone na ‘-er’, ‘-y’ lub ‘-ly’ zwykle stopniowane są przy pomocy końcówek
‘-er / -est’ , zaś spółgłoska ‘y’ przechodzi w samogłoskę ‘i’ np.
holy - holier – holiest
busy - busier - busiest
Przymiotniki stopniowane nieregularnie.
bad worse worst

far farther farthest
far further furthest
good better best
little less least
many more most
much more most
old older oldest
old elder eldest
- far
Formy ‘farther / farthest’ oraz ‘further / furthest’ mogą być stosowane przy określaniu
dystansu np.
There is a wooden chest in the farther corner of the room.
Tylko forma ‘further / furthest’ może wystąpić w znaczeniu przenośnym ‘dalszy, kolejny’ np.
What are the further steps that you are going to take?
Further questions will be answered by Mr Tanaka tomorrow.
- old
Forma ‘elder / eldest’ stosowana jest przy określaniu starszeństwa podkreślając szczególny
szacunek dla danej osoby np.
My father’s elder brother is seriously ill in hospital.
194
! Formy ‘elder’ nie używa się w porównaniach z ‘than’. Zamiast niej stosuje się ‘older’
np.
Karen is older than my sister.
Przysłówki  30-33, 38-43
Przysłówki w języku angielskim tworzy się od takich części mowy jak: rzeczowniki,
przymiotniki, imiesłowy lub liczebniki. Przysłówki tworzy się przy pomocy końcówki
‘-ly’ np.
nice - nicely cold – coldly
reported - reportedly first - firstly
- ‘-y’ po dodaniu końcówki ‘-ly’ przechodzi w ‘i’ np.
easy - easily noisy - noisily clumsy - clumsily
- końcówka ‘e’ po dodaniu ‘-ly’ pozostaje nie zmieniona np.
serene - serenely severe - severely sincere - sincerely
- w przymiotnikach zakończonych na ‘-le’ ostatnia samogłoska ‘e’ zanika po dodaniu
końcówki ‘-ly’ np.
terrible - terribly plausible - plausibly fashionable - fashionably
Niektóre przysłówki zakończone na ‘-ly’ mogą również pełnić funkcję przymiotników np.
He cleans his office room daily. (przysłówek)
Cleaning the office room is his daily routine. (przymiotnik)
He arrived early. (przysłówek)
He arrived by an early train. (przymiotnik)
Niektóre słowa zakończone na ‘-ly’ pełnią tylko funkcję przymiotników. Do grupy tej należą:
‘elderly, friendly, lonely, lovely, likely, homely, silly’.
Let’s forget about this silly idea.
I am rather lonely these days.
Istnieją także inne przysłówki oraz przymiotniki o takiej samej formie np.
He is a fast driver. (przymiotnik)
He drives fast. (przysłówek)
Do grupy tej należą również:
deep, hard, high, just, late, near, right, short, wrong
Powyższe przysłówki mogą jednakże pojawić się z końcówką ‘-ly’ jeżeli wyrażają szczególne
znaczenia.
- deeply - ‘głęboko’ występuje z określeniami uczuć, emocji
We found a cave deep underground.
I was deeply moved by the chairman’s words.
195
- hardly - ‘zaledwie, prawie nie’
I tried hard to convince him but it was all in vain.
She could hardly walk against the wind.
- highly - ‘wysoce, bardzo’ występuje w znaczeniu przenośnym
You certainly can jump high.
Tom was highly praised by his bosses.
- lately - ‘ostatnio, niedawno’
Who came too late?
Have you read any good books lately?
- nearly - ‘prawie’
We lived near the railway station.
She lost nearly everything in the fire.
- rightly - ‘sprawiedliwie, odpowiednio’
Turn right at the next junction.
We were rightly instructed by the people.
- shortly - ‘wkrótce, niebawem’
Our food supplies are running short.
Wait here. I’m coming shortly.
- wrongly - ‘niesprawiedliwie, nieodpowiednio’
Don’t treat us wrong.
He answered all the questions wrongly.
! Przymiotnik ‘good’ posiada osobną formę przysłówkową w postaci ‘well’ np.
Their behaviour was good.
They behaved well.
Miejsce przysłówka w zdaniu.
Miejsce jakie przysłówek zajmuje w zdaniu jest uzależnione od funkcji jaką spełnia.
- Przysłówki sposobu zajmują miejsce po czasowniku np.
Our team played beautifully.
He acted courageously.
Jeżeli jednak czasownik występuje z przyimkiem, przysłówek może zająć miejsce przed
przyimkiem np.
The teacher stared angrily at me. lub
The teacher stared at me angrily.
Przysłówki sposobu ‘well’ oraz ‘badly’ występują po orzeczeniu lub dopełnieniu np.
Laura can speak German well.
They worked badly.
Jednakże, ‘badly - bardzo, pilnie’ w funkcji przysłówka stopnia znajduje się przed
orzeczeniem np.
Your car badly needs to be repaired.
196
Przysłówek sposobu ‘badly’ występuje przed imiesłowem biernym np.
My ankle was badly damaged after the fall.
Honestly, their show was badly organised.
- Przysłówki miejsca umieszcza się na końcu zdania np.
We will stay in the hotel.
They have hidden my clothes somewhere.
- Przysłówki czasu mogą znajdować się na początku, lub na końcu zdania np.
We are resting now.
Soon, they will get into trouble.
Tomorrow, I am leaving for Bristol.
He went to Greece in spring.
W czasach złożonych przysłówki ‘eventually, just, lately, now, recently, soon’
umieszcza się po czasowniku posiłkowym np.
I have eventually renovated my garden shed.
George will soon be released from prison.
Przysłówki częstotliwości ‘always, never, often, seldom, sometimes, usually’
zajmują miejsce:
- po czasowniku ‘to be’ np.
Brian is never late.
You are often dissatisfied.
- przed czasownikiem w czasach prostych np.
Mark usually sleeps long on Saturday.
We always went swimming in free time.
- po czasowniku posiłkowym w czasach złożonych np.
Vera has always dreamt about visiting Egypt.
He will never tell you the whole truth.
Przysłówki stopnia ‘quite - dość’, ‘too - zbyt’ umieszcza się przed innymi przysłówkami, lub
przymiotnikami np.
Your speech was quite good.
They didn’t act too bravely.
Przysłówek ‘enough - dość, wystarczająco’ zajmuje miejsce po przymiotnikach oraz
przysłówkach, które określa np.
He is rich enough to buy the house.
You speak fluently enough.
Przysłówek ‘only - tylko’ znajduje się przeważnie przed słowem, które modyfikuje np.
We bought only one ticket.
We only bought one ticket.
I work only in the morning.
I only work in the morning.
197
Stopniowanie przysłówków.
Przysłówki jednosylabowe stopniowane są przy pomocy końcówek ‘-er’ i ‘-est’ np.
fast - faster - fastest
hard - harder - hardest
Przysłówki wielosylabowe stopniowane są przy pomocy operatorów ‘more’ i ‘most’ np.
comfortably - more comfortably - most comfortably
silently - more silently - most silently
Przysłówki stopniowane nieregularnie.
well better best

badly worse worst
far further futher
little less least
much / many more most
- przysłówka ‘far’ oraz jego form używa się przy określaniu dystansu np.
I won’t go any farther.
‘further / furthest’ posiadają również znaczenie przenośne ‘dalej’ np.
I will go further and say more about what happened.
Przysłówki ‘barely, hardly, scarcely’.
Przysłówki ‘barely’, ‘hardly’ i ‘scarcely’ posiadają znaczenie bliskie zaprzeczeniu - ‘prawie
nie, zaledwie’
- hardly występuje przeważnie z czasownikiem ‘can’ np.
We had hardly any time to relax.
She could hardly walk after the accident.
- scarcely / barely mogą występować zamiennie z ‘hardly’ np.
I could scarcely breathe in the heat.
They had barely a few pennies on them.
Stopniowanie opadające  34-35
Stopniowanie opadające przymiotników lub przysłówków tworzy się przy użyciu operatorów
less w stopniu niższym oraz least w stopniu najniższym.
- Stopień niższy.
Your arcticle is less elaborate than hers.
We worked less efficiently than we had expected.
Their team has played less skilfully than they did last season.
198
- Stopień najniższy.
This is the least interesting book I have ever read.
Jack is the least hard-working pupil of all.
You behaved the least obediently.
Stopień niższy można zastąpić konstrukcją: ‘not so ... as ...‘ np.
Your article is not so elaborate as hers.
Their team hasn’t played so skilfully as they did last season.
The same ... as, as ... as, than  36
as ... as - ‘tak ... jak ...’ - konstrukcja ta stosowana jest przy porównaniach przymiotników
oraz przysłówków w zdaniach twierdzących, pytaniach oraz przeczeniach np.
We live as comfortably as they do.
Is this clock as precise as that one?
Mark isn’t as reliable as Harry is.
not so ... as - ‘nie tak(i) ... jak ...’ - konstrukcja ta wyraża znaczenie przeczące np.
Gary is not so intelligent as Lenny.
We don’t speak Italian so fluently as they do.
the same ... as - ‘tak(i) sam(o) ... jak ...’
Today, the weather is the same as it was yesterday.
You are of the same height as I am.
than - ‘niż, od’ - występuje w porównaniach w stopniu wyższym lub niższym np.
Polo is less popular than baseball in this country.
This picture costs more than that one.
So, so ... that, such ... that  37
So oraz such - ‘tak, taki’ są określnikami, które wzmacniają znaczenie przymiotnika lub
przysłówka, z którym występują.
- So jest przysłówkiem. Umieszcza się go przed samym przymiotnikiem, lub rzeczownikiem
z przydawką przymiotnikową np.
She looks so sad today, doesn’t she?
I have never seen so impressive paintings before.
Przysłówek ‘so’ może wystąpić przed innym przysłówkiem np.
Only Ben could have acted so selfishly.
Don’t look at me so angrily.
199
- so ... that - ‘tak(i) ... że ...’
Mike is so nice that everybody likes him.
They work so hard that they earn more than the others.
! Chcąc umieścić ‘so’ przed rzeczownikiem z przydawką, należy pamiętać, iż
przedimek nieokreślony ‘a’ / ‘an’ musi znajdować się przed rzeczownikiem np.
Eric is so good a friend.
It was so nice an atmosphere.
- Such jest przymiotnikiem, który zajmuje miejsce przed przymiotnikiem będącym przydawką
rzeczownika np.
We have never stayed in such a luxurious hotel before.
Jenny is such a well brought-up girl.
Przedimki nieokreślone ‘a / an’ nie występują po ‘such’ jeżeli rzeczownik jest niepoliczalny
lub wyraża liczbę mnogą np.
It was Richard who made such silly comments.
‘Such’ nie jest używany z przysłówkami ilości ‘much’ i ‘many’. W zamian, stosuje się ‘so’ np.
You keep wasting so much time.
Don’t invite so many people next time.
- such ... that - ‘taki ... że …’
It was such an exhausting journey that we fell asleep right away.
The tourists made such a mess that we spent hours cleaning the place.
Enough - too  44
Enough - ‘dosyć, wystarczająco’ oraz too - ‘zbyt’ są przysłówkami stopnia. Obydwa te

przysłówki mogą być określnikami przymiotników lub innych przysłówków.
‘Enough’ - zajmuje miejsce za przymiotnikiem lub przysłówkiem, który określa np.
My English isn’t fluent enough.
I won’t buy these apples. They aren’t ripe enough.
She says she isn’t feeling well enough.
‘Enough’ występuje przed rzeczownikami np.
There isn’t enough food in our fridge.
You haven’t bought enough tickets for all of us.
We needn’t hurry; we have got enough time.
‘Enough’ może także wystąpić bez rzeczownika np.
I must buy some petrol; I haven’t got enough.
‘Too’ - zajmuje miejsce przed przymiotnikiem lub przysłówkiem, który określa np.
This notebook is too expensive.
You haven’t acted too bravely this time.
200
Konstrukcje z przysłówkami ‘enough’ oraz ‘too’.
- Przysłówki ‘enough’ oraz ‘too’ występują z konstrukcją bezokolicznikową np.
Is there enough bread to go round?
You aren’t experienced enough to do this job.
They played well enough to be praised.
This cake is too tough to eat.
I have too many things to do tomorrow.
He behaves too rudely to be tolerated.
- ‘Enough’ oraz ‘too’ mogą wystąpić z przyimkiem ‘for’ oraz rzeczownikiem lub
zaimkiem, a także z bezokolicznikiem czasownika np.
Those boots are too small for you.
She isn’t competent enough for the task.
This test is too difficult for me to do.
We hadn’t enough leaflets for everyone to take home.
! Łącząc zdanie nadrzędne z podrzędnym za pomocą przysłówka ‘too’ należy
pamiętać, iż dopełnienie ‘it, them’ po bezokoliczniku nie występuje np.
The typewriter was too old. We couldn’t use it.
The typeweriter was too old to use.
These forms are too complicated. I cannot fill them.
These forms is too complicated to fill.
Already - still - yet  39, 45
Already, still oraz yet są przysłówkami czasu.

Already - ‘już’ określa czynność dokonaną lub już rozpoczętą.
‘Already’ w zdaniu zajmuje miejsce:
- za czasownikiem ‘to be’ np
We are already back home.
Marilyn is already a graduate.
- przed innym czasownikiem w czasach prostych np.
Tom already knows everything.
I already remember the address.
- po czasowniku posiłkowym w czasach złożonych np.
She has already prepared breakfast.
They are already working over the project.
‘Already’ występuje przeważnie z czasem ‘Present Perfect’ podkreślając, iż dana czynność
została już wykonana np.
‘When are you going to mend the roof?’ ‘I have already done it.’
We have already visited Rome twice.
201
Still - ‘jeszcze, wciąż, nadal’ - używany jest przy określaniu czynności, która trwa np.
Tom is still sitting in his office.
Are they still talking to the director?
‘Still’ występuje przeważnie w zdaniach twierdzących oraz pytaniach, może jednakże
pojawić się w zdaniu przeczącym np.
We’ve worked together for two months and he still doesn’t remember my name.
‘Still’ umieszcza się w zdaniu według takich samych zasad jak ‘already’.
Yet - ‘już, jeszcze’ - występuje w zdaniach przeczących oraz pytaniach przeważnie z
czasem Present Perfect np.
‘Have you read the book yet?’
‘No, I haven’t even bought it yet.’
‘Yet’ umieszcza się zwykle na końcu zdania lub w środku jeżeli zdanie składa się z większej
ilości wyrazów np.
George hasn’t typed the letter yet.
George hasn’t yet typed the letter that I have asked him to.
Przyimki  46-60
Przyimki występują wraz z rzeczownikami, zaimkami oraz czasownikami. W języku

angielskim przyimki mogą spełniać funkcję podobną do tej, jaką w języku polskim spełnia
funkcja odmiany przez przypadki. Ponieważ, jednak, w języku angielskim rzeczowniki nie
otrzymują końcówek przypadków, przyimki stanowią poniekąd formę zastępczą. Zaimki
występujące po przyimkach zmieniają swoją postać zależnie od przypadka np.
He is thinking about her. They trust in us.
Miejsce przyimka w zdaniu.
Przyimki na ogół znajdują się przed rzeczownikami, zaimkami oraz czasownikami np.
Willy lives in the country.
Mike is at work.
There is no point in staying here any longer.
W pytaniach nieformalnych przyimek znajduje się na końcu zdania np.
Who are you looking at?
What did they talk about?
W języku formalnym przyimek zajmuje miejsce przed zaimkami pytającymi whom, which
lub what np.
With whom did you go?
At what did she laugh?
About which of them are you thinking?
202
W zdaniach z zaimkami względnymi who oraz which przyimek zajmuje miejsce przed
zaimkiem. Przyimka nie można umieścić przed zaimkiem względnym ‘that’ np.
They are the people to whom I spoke yesterday.
Is this the letter to which you are going to reply?
Przyimki można, jednakże, przemieścić na koniec zdania, zaś zaimek względny opuścić (!
Tylko w zdaniach definiujących) np.
Is London the city (which) he has settled in?
This is the message (that) I forgot about.
Mike is the man (who) we rely on.
! Czasowniki złożone (phrasal verbs) są nierozdzielne, dlatego przyimka nie można
oddzielić od czasownika, z którym występuje np.
It is her mother who she takes after.
Smoking is the habit that I gave up a long time ago.
These are the words which I must look up in the dictionary.
Przyimki miejsca at - in - on  46, 47
Zastosowanie przyimka ‘at’.

Przyimek ‘at’ wskazuje na miejsca mniejsze powierzchniowo np.
at home at university
at school at an office
at work at a church
at a bus-stop at a railway station
‘At’ występuje z rzeczownikami:

at the bottom
at the end of (the road)
at the traffic lights
at a party
at the front / back of (the house)
at sea
at an airport
at Peter’s (place)
203
Zastosowanie przyimka ‘in’.
Przyimka ‘in’ używa się wskazując na miejsca większe powierzchniowo np.
in a town in a field
in a village in a wood
in a street in a building
in a room in a shop
‘In’ występuje z rzeczownikami:
in my hand in Europe / Africa

in a photograph in Poland / Sweden
in a book / magazine in London / Warsaw
in the world in a museum
in the sky in a park
in hospital in a garden
in the sea in a car
in Peter’s house in a taxi
Zastosowanie przyimka ‘on’.

Przyimek ‘on’ określa miejsce położenia na danej powierzchni np.
on the table on the armchair

on the wall on the carpet
on the floor on the paper
on the desk on the ceiling
on the ground on the board
‘On’ występuje z rzeczownikami:
on an island on a river
on page twenty on the / my way to (London)
on the left (hand side) on a bus / a train / a plane
on the first floor on a ship
on the map on a horse
on the coast on a bicycle / a motorcycle
204
Przyimki czasu at - in - on  48-49
Przyimek ‘at’ służy do określania godziny lub pory dnia np.

at seven o’clock
at a quarter to five
at 12 p.m.
at midnight
at noon
Inne określenia czasu z przyimkiem ‘at’ to:
at the weekend / at weekends
at night
at the age of twelve / at twelve
at Christmas
at Easter
at this time
at the (present) moment
at present
Przyimek ‘in’ występuje z nazwami pór dnia, pór roku, miesięcy. ‘In’ określa również rok,
wiek lub epokę np.
in the morning, in the afternoon, in the evening
in June, in spring, in summer, in autumn, in winter
in 1245, in 1783, in 1998, in the 16th century, in Middle Ages
‘In’ występuje także w znaczeniu ‘za’ przy określaniu przyszłości np.
I will finish my work in two hours.
You’ll be all right in a week.
Przyimek ‘on’ występuje z nazwami dni lub konkretnymi datami odwołującymi się do dni
np.
on Monday, on Friday, on Saturday
on Sunday morning, on Wednesday evening
on Christmas day
on my birthday
on the 15th of December, on May the 26th, on 1 February
on 28 September 1972
on the evening of 24 March
On time - in time
Wyrażenie ‘on time’ - ‘na czas’ - oznacza ‘dokładnie na czas, o dokładnie określonej porze’
np.
The match started on time. It wasn’t delayed.
We began our meeting on time - at seven p.m.
205
Wyrażenie ‘in time’ - ‘na czas’ - oznacza ‘z bezpiecznym zapasem czasu’ np.
If we come in time, we won’t miss our bus for sure.
She arrived in time. We could discuss a few matters before the symposium started.
At the beginning / end (of) - in the beginning / end (of)
Wyrażenie ‘at the beginning / end (of)’ - ‘na poczatku / końcu’ - stosowane jest w znaczeniu
wskazującym na początek lub koniec danego przedsięwzięcia np.
At the beginning of our trip, we had a few problems.
At the end of our trip, we were all very satisfied.
Everyone was truly interested in the lecture at the beginning.
At the end of the lecture, everyone was truly bored.
Wyrażenie ‘in the beginning / end (of)’ - ‘na początku, najpierw / na koniec / w końcu’ -
stosowane jest w znaczeniu czasowym np.
In the beginning, there were storms and rain, but the weather improved in the end.
! in the beginning = at first
in the end = at last
He didn’t like me at first, but we became friends at last.
Przyimki ruchu at - from - in - into - to  50
Przyimki używane w języku angielskim dla określenia zmiany położenia to:

at, from, in, into, off, on, onto, out, out of, to, towards
Zastosowanie przyimka ‘to’.
Czasowniki oznaczające zmianę położenia ‘come, drive, go, return, run, travel, walk’
występują z przyimkiem ‘to’ - ‘do’ wskazującym na kierunek ruchu np.
Last week, we went to Paris.
She is walking to work now.
How do you travel to school?
Tom has driven to York.
! Po czasowniku opisującym ruch, użytym bezpośrednio z rzeczownikiem ‘home’
przyimek ‘to’ nie występuje np.
They went home rather early.
Mick returned home before us.
When will she get home?
ale:
Alice drove to her mother’s home.
We all walked to Freddie’s home.
Przyimek ‘to’ występuje z czasownikiem ‘be’ w czasie ‘Present Perfect’ np.
I have been to Venice three times.
Have you been to Mexico yet?
206
Czasowniki ‘come’, ‘get’, ‘go’ występują z pełną gamą przyimków określających ruch np.
They came into the room after a while.
Let’s go out of the place.
Get into the car now.
I went out after dinner.
We got off the bus in Norfolk.
Użycie czasownika ‘arrive’ z przyimkami ‘at’ oraz ‘in’.
Arrive in - ‘przybywać’ - używany jest z rzeczownikami ‘a town’, ‘a country’ oraz takich,
które określają nazwy miejsc większych powierzchniowo np.
We arrived in Glasgow at two a.m.
When did you arrive in Russia?
Arrive at - ‘przybywać’ - używany jest z rzeczownikami określającymi nazwy miejsc
mniejszych powierzchniowo lub punktów np.
She will arrive at the station in a few minutes.
Frank has just arrived at the hotel.
Przyimki during - for - from - since - till - to  51
For - ‘przez’ - używany jest z określeniami czasu np.

I lived in Boston for four years.
You should wait for a few minutes.
We’ve been playing cards for a half an hour.
Since - ‘od (określonego momentu)’ - podobnie jak przyimek ‘for’, ‘since’ występuje
z czasami ‘Perfect’ dla określenia długości trwania danej czynności np.
I haven’t seen Michael since last Friday.
We have been staying together for ten months.
They had known each other for a long time.
She hasn’t spoken to me since we quarrelled.
During - ‘przez (określony, znany okres czasu), podczas’ - przyimek ten występuje z
rzeczownikowym lub zaimkowym określeniem czasu np.
during winter during our holidays during the war
I suppose it will be cold during the day.
Did you meet any people during your stay in Italy?
From ... to / till / until - ‘od ... do’
We slept from two a.m. to twelve p.m.
I was working from morning till evening.
207
! Jeżeli określony jest moment zakończenia danej czynności, a nie jest określony
moment jej rozpoczęcia, zamiast przyimka ‘to’ należy użyć ‘till’ lub ‘until’ np.
We stayed awake till / until eleven.
She must wait till / until midnight to see a full moon.
Till oraz until mogą wystąpić w roli spójników czasowych np.
I won’t let you go until you tell me the whole truth.
Let’s wait till it stops raining.
Przyimki before - by - until - while  52
Przyimki before, by, until oraz while stosuje się z określeniami czasu. Mogą one
występować w zdaniach czasowych.
Before - ‘przed, zanim’ - może wystąpić w zdaniach czasowych z czasem ‘Present Simple’
lub ‘Past Simple’ np.
The ceremony will begin before Sally arrives.
The shed had burnt down before the fire brigade arrived.
By - ‘do (momentu, czasu) - przyimek ten używa się z czasami dokonanymi ‘Future Perfect’
lub ‘Past Perfect’ np.
George will have graduated from school by next year.
We had finished working by ten o’clock.
Z tymi samymi czasami może wystąpić wyrażenie ‘by the time - do czasu gdy’ np.
Will you have cooked a meal by the time we come back?
Simon had left by the time you phoned.
Until - ‘do, aż do, do momentu gdy’ - występuje w zdaniach czasowych z czasem ‘Present
Simple’ lub ‘Present Perfect’ np.
I won’t lend you any money until you promise to pay back.
You won’t go home until you have cleaned all the pipes.
While - ‘podczas gdy’ - występuje najczęściej z czasami przeszłymi ‘Past Continuous’ i
‘Past Simple’ np.
The baby was sleeping while we were having a chat.
I wrote a note while you were out.
208
Przyimek ‘to’  53
Przyimek ‘to’ jest wymagany po czasownikach:

‘bring, give, lend, offer, pass, pay, promise, sell, send, show, sing, take, tell’
przed dopełnieniem bliższym jeżeli zajmuje ono w zdaniu miejsce za dopełnieniem dalszym
np.
I gave this cheque to my wife.
dopełnienie dalsze dopełnienie bliższe
Mary offered some coffee to us.
Why don’t you send a letter to your mother?
Jeżeli, natomiast, ‘dopełnienie dalsze’ znajduje się po ‘dopełnieniu bliższym’, przyimka ‘to’
nie używa się np.
We have brought Helen flowers.
Andrew sold me his bicycle last month.
Did you tell your father the story?
Jeżeli ‘dopełnienie dalsze’ występuje w postaci zaimka ‘it’ lub ‘them’, należy wówczas użyć
przyimek ‘to’ np.
Give it to Joan.
Will you show them to me.
Can I offer them to you?
Przyimek ‘to’ z czasownikami wyrażającymi prośbę, polecenie itp.
Czasowniki: ‘advise, ask, beg, encourage, invite, order, recommend, remind, tell, warn’
występują z dopełnieniem bez przyimka ‘to’ np.
I asked Peter for a loan.
She invited a few friends to her party.
The man warned the hikers against the risk of an avalanche.
Powyższe czasowniki mogą wystąpić z konstrukcją bezokolicznikową bez
konieczności użycia przyimka ‘to’ np.
Joan advised me to wait patiently.
Eddie encouraged his brother to take a chance.
I ordered them to write a report.
Czasowniki ‘advise, remind, tell, warn’ mogą wystąpić w konstrukcji z ‘that’ oraz zdaniem
podrzędnym bez przyimka ‘to’ np.
Louis reminded me that I ought to speak to Mr Howard.
She told us that she was a native Indian.
Someone warned me that there were snakes around.
Jeżeli ‘dopełnieniem dalszym’ są zaimki ‘it’ oraz ‘them’, konstrukcja zdania wymaga użycia
przyimka ‘to’ np.
209
I advised it to the boss.
We recommended it to our workers.
She presented them to us.
Czasowniki: ‘complain, describe, explain, say, speak, suggest, talk’ wymagają przyimka ‘to’
przed ‘dopełnieniem bliższym’ np.
I described the situation to the people.
Will you explain the theory to me, please?
Can they speak to us now?
Inne użycie przyimków at - by - in - on  54
Większość przyimków może występować w stałych złożeniach z rzeczownikami również pod

postacią idiomów np.
at
at the age of - w wieku
at a temperature of - w temperaturze
at a speed of - z prędkością
at one’s own risk - na własne ryzyko
at a glance - na pierwszy rzut oka
by
by accident - przez przypadek, przypadkowo
by mistake - przez pomyłkę
by profession - z zawodu
by hand - ręcznie
by word of mouth - słownie
by chance - przypadkowo
to pay by credit card / cheque
to send sth by post
to go / travel by car / bus / plane / train
in
in the rain - w deszczu
in the shade of - w cieniu
in the sun - w słońcu
in one’s opinion / point of view - według czyjejś opini
in case of - w przypadku, na wypadek
in a hurry - w pośpiechu
in danger - w niebezpieczeństwie
in advance - z góry, z wyprzedzeniem
in good / bad condition - w dobrym / złym stanie
210
on
on a diet - na diecie
on the radio - w radio
on condition that - pod warunkiem że
on duty - na służbie
on the bus / train - w autobusie / pociągu
on schedule - punktualnie, według planu
on purpose - celowo
on behalf of - w imieniu
on sale - na sprzedaż
on fire - w ogniu
on the whole - ogólnie rzecz biorąc
to go on strike
to go on foot
to go on holiday / a trip / a tour
to talk on the phone
Czasownik + przyimek  55-56
Kombinacji czasowników z przyimkami należy nauczyć się na pamięć oraz przestrzegać ich
tak, aby zostało zachowane właściwe znaczenie danego czasownika. Niektóre częściej
stosowane złożenia czasowników z przyimkami to :
- abstain from - powstrzymywać się od - invite to - zapraszać na/do

- accuse of - oskarżać o - interfere in - wtrącać się do
- adapt to - przystosować się do - laugh at - śmiać się z
- agree with - zgadzać się z - leave for - wyjechać do
- aim at - zamierzać, planować - listen to - słuchać
- apologise for - przepraszać za - live on - żyć z (czegoś)
- apply for - ubiegać się o - long for - tęsknić za/do
- approve of - pochwalać, lubić - look after - opiekować się
- ask for - prosić o - look for - szukać, poszukiwać
- beg for - błagać, żebrać o - meditate on - rozmyślać nad
- believe in - wierzyć w - mislead into - wprowadzić w błąd
- belong to - należeć do - object to - sprzeciwiać się
- benefit from - odnosić korzyści z - prefer ... to ... - woleć ... od ...
- beware of - wystrzegać się - prepare for - przygotować się do
- blame for - obwiniać za - prevent from - przeszkodzić w
- call for - wzywać, nawoływać do - pride (oneself) on - szczycić się
211
- care for - dbać o; lubić - prize for - chwalić za
- charge with - oskarżać o - provide with - zapewnić, dostarczyć
- compare with - porównywać do - punish for - ukarać za
- compensate for - rekompensować - quarrel with - kłócić się z
- compliment on - chwalić za - refer to - odnosić / odwoływać się do
- comply with - stosować się do - rely on - polegać na, liczyć na
- concentrate on - koncentrować się na - remind sb of - przypomnieć (komuś) o
- congratulate on - gratulować z okazji - shout at - krzyczeć na
- consist of - składać się z - smile at - uśmiechać się do
- cope with - poradzić sobie z - specialise in - specjalizować się w
- deal with - poradzić sobie z - spend on - wydawać (pieniądze) na
- depend on - zależeć od - stare at - przyglądać się
- despair of - rozpaczać z powodu - succeed in - odnieść sukces w
- die of - umrzeć z powodu - suffer from - cierpieć z powodu
- differ from - różnić się od - suspect of - podejrzewać o
- dispose of - pozbywać się - sympathise with - wpółczuć
- excel at - być najlepszym w/z - think about - myśleć o
- fine for - ukarać grzywną za - think of - rozważać, brać pod uwagę
- forgive for - wybaczyć - translate into - tłumaczyć na
- hide from - ukrywać (się) - wait for - czekać na
- hope for - mieć nadzieję - wait on sb - obsługiwać (kogoś)
- insist on - nalegać na - warn of / against - ostrzegać przed
Przymiotnik + przyimek  57-58
Wiele przymiotników oraz imiesłowów występuje niezmiennie z określonymi przyimkami.

Najczęściej używane złożenia tego typu to:
- absorbed in - pochłonięty, zajęty - (be) fed up with - mieć dość

- accustomed to - przyzwyczajony do - (be) fit for - nadawać się do
- (be) afraid of - bać się - (be) fond of - być miłośnikiem
- alergic to - uczulony na - good at - dobry, doświadczony w
- amazed at - zdumiony - grateful for - wdzięczny za
- angry at/with - zły na - guilty of - winny
- annoyed with - poirytowany - impressed by/with - pod wrażeniem
- anxious for/about - zaniepokojony - independent on - niezależny od
- (be) ashamed of - wstydzić się - indifferent to - obojętny
- attached to - przywiązany do - interested in - zainteresowany
- aware of - świadomy - jealous of - zazdrosny o
212
- bad at - słaby, niedoświadczony - (be) keen on - pasjonować się
- bored with - znudzony - occupied with - zajęty
- (be) capable of - potrafić, umieć - pleased with - zadowolony z
- commited to - zaangażowany w - polite to - grzeczny, uprzejmy
- conscious of - świadomy - proud of - dumny z
- critical of - krytyczny - responsible for - odpowiedzialny za
- dependent on - zależny od - scared of - przerażony
- (be) desperate for - pragnąć - similar to - podobny do
- different from - inny niż, różny - (be) sorry for/about - żałować
- disappointed at/with - rozczarowany - (be) successful in - odnieść sukces w
- eager for - chętny, niecierpliwy - surprised at/with/by - zaskoczony
- excited at / about - podekscytowany - terrified of - przerażony
- exposed to - narażony na - tired of - zmęczony
- faithful to - wierny - typical of - typowy, charakterystyczny
- famous for - sławny, słynny z - used to - przyzwyczajony do
Rzeczownik + przyimek  59
Często stosowane złożenia rzeczowników z przyimkami to:
- access to - dostęp do - increase in - wzrost w

- addiction to - uzależnienie od - independence on - niezależność od
- advantage of - korzyść, zaleta - influence on - wpływ na
- answer to - odpowiedź na - intention of - zamiar
- (to pay) attention to - zwrócić uwagę na - interest in - zainteresowanie
- attitude towards - nastawienie wobec - invitation to - zaproszenie na/do
- belief in - wiara w - (to take) pride in - być dumnym z
- cheque for - czek na - punishment for - kara za
- comment to - komentarz do - reason for - powód
- damage to - zniszczenie - reply to - odpowiedź na
- decrease in - spadek, zniżka - request for - żądanie, prośba o
- demand for - popyt na - response to - odpowiedź na
- difference between - różnica pomiędzy - skill at - umiejętność, zdolność
- disadvantage of - wada, niekorzyść - solution to - rozwiązanie
- excuse for - wymówka - trust in - zaufanie
- experience in - doświadczenie w - vocation for - powołanie do
- gratitude for - wdzięczność za - weakness for - słabość do
213
Wiele rzeczowników utworzonych od czasowników występuje z tymi samymi przyimkami np.
apply for - application for
disapprove of - disapproval of
depend on - dependence on
rely on - reliance on
suspect of - suspicion of
Czasowniki be - do - have  61-67
Czasowniki ‘be - być’, ‘do - robić’ oraz ‘have - mieć, posiadać’ oprócz wyrażania własnych
znaczeń leksykalnych pełnią funkcje gramatyczne jako operatory
w czasach, wyrażeniach oraz rozmaitych konstrukcjach. Występując w funkcji operatorów
czasowniki te noszą nazwę ‘posiłkowych’.
be - występuje jako czasownik posiłkowy w czasach ‘Continuous’ np.
I am writing a letter.
Is Jimmy watching television?
Tom was sleeping at six.
do - występuje jako czasownik posiłkowy w czasach ‘Simple’ np.
Do you live here?
We don’t spend too much money.
Did Amy ask you about the books?
have - występuje jako czasownik posiłkowy w czasach ‘Perfect’ np.
We have made a small break.
Has she been working alone?
They had visited us before.
Występując w postaci orzeczenia czasowniki ‘be’ oraz ‘have’ tworzą pytania poprzez
inwersję, zaś zaprzeczenie przez dodanie słowa ‘not’ np.
They are happy. - Are they happy? - They are not happy.
Linda has a dog. - Has Linda a dog? - Linda has not a dog.
Zastosowanie czasownika ‘be’.
- czas teraźniejszy ‘Present Simple’:
I am, you are, he is, she is, it is
we are, you are, they are
twierdzenie: You are a rich man.
pytanie: Are you a rich man?
przeczenie: You are not a rich man.
skrót: are not = aren’t is not = isn’t
214
- czas przeszły ‘Past Simple’:
I was, you were, he was, she was, it was
we were, you were, they were
twierdzenie: She was ill yesterday.
pytanie: Was she ill yesterday?
przeczenie: She was not ill yesterday.
skrót: was not = wasn’t were not = weren’t
Czasownika be używa się dla określenia:
- wieku:
‘How old are you?’ ‘I am ten years old.’
- rozmiaru / ciężkości / wysokości itp.
‘How high is the tower?’ ‘It is fifty metres high.’
‘What is his height?’ ‘He is almost two metres high.’
‘What is the weight of the parcel?’ ‘It is half a kilo.’
- ceny:
‘How much is this watch?’ ‘It is two hundred pounds.’
Ponadto, czasownik be występuje w konstrukcjach:
- ‘be about to’ - ‘mieć coś do zrobienia wkrótce’ np.
I am about to sit an exam soon.
We are about to leave London tomorrow.
- ‘be supposed to’ - ‘mieć coś zrobić (według oczekiwań innej osoby)’ np.
They are younger than us. They are supposed to say ‘Hello’ to us.
- ‘How are you?’ - ‘Jak się masz?’ ‘How is your father?’ ‘Thanks, he is fine.’
Zastosowanie czasownika ‘do’.
- ‘Do’ oraz jego forma przeszła ‘did’ występuje jako operator tworzący pytania oraz
zaprzeczenia w czasach ‘Present Simple’ oraz ‘Past Simple’ np.
Do they come from Ireland?
I don’t know these people.
Did you forget to lock the door?
You didn’t tell me to do it.
- ‘Do’ oraz jego odmiana może wystąpić jako operator zastępujący orzeczenie,
którego nie ma potrzeby powtarzać np.
‘Do you like this kind of music?’ ‘Sure, I do.’
Mick spends a lot of time in the library, but Sue doesn’t.
You ran faster than I did.
- Forma ‘do not / don’t’ służy do tworzenia zaprzeczonego trybu rozkazującego dla
osoby ‘you’ – ‘ty, wy’ np.
Don’t touch the wire!
Don’t disturb us, please.
215
- ‘Do’ występuje w konstrukcji ‘emfatycznej’, przed orzeczeniem w zdaniu
twierdzącym. Dzięki tej konstrukcji znaczenie orzeczenia jest dodatkowo
wzmocnione tak, aby uczynić je bardziej wiarygodnym np.
It may sound incredible but we did win the main prize.
‘I think I look terrible.’ ‘Oh no! You do look wonderful.’
jako tryb rozkazujący:
‘Do tell me what you know.’
‘Do come to the party.’
Czasownik ‘do’ występuje w złożeniach kolokacyjnych z wieloma rzeczownikami.
Ze względu na bliskość znaczeniową pomiędzy ‘do’ i ‘make’ należy zwrócić szczególną
uwagę na poprawne zastosowanie obydwu czasowników
z rzeczownikami.
do ~ make ~
sb a favour a discovery
(physical) exercise a mistake
one’s work a decision
business a suggestion
one’s homework a choice
one’s best an offer
sb harm an attempt
one’s duties an effort
a crossword puzzle money
sb the honour of fun of sb
Zastosowanie czasownika ‘have’.

- czas teraźniejszy ‘Present Simple’:
I have, you have, he has, she has, it has
we have, you have, they have
twierdzenie: We have a new teacher.
pytanie: Have we a new teacher?
przeczenie: We have not a new teacher.
skrót: have not = haven’t has not = hasn’t
- czas przeszły ‘Past Simple’
Forma ‘had’ występuje przy każdej osobie liczby pojedynczej oraz mnogiej.
twierdzenie: Tom had a good idea.
pytanie: Had Tom a good idea?
przeczenie: Tom had not a good idea.
skrót: had not = hadn’t
216
Niekiedy do czasownika ‘have’ w znaczeniu posiadania dodaje się formę ‘got’.
Nie zmienia ona jednak znaczenia czasownika np.
I have got a few spare post-cards.
Have they got any money on them?
We had got a lot of friends in the city.
Had she got any books in her schoolbag?
Pytania oraz zaprzeczenia do czasownika ‘have’ mogą być również tworzone przy pomocy
operatorów ‘do / does / did’. Należy jednak pamiętać, iż słowo ‘got’ przy czasowniku
wówczas nie występuje np.
Do they have anything to eat?
She doesn’t have much time now.
I didn’t have any questions.
Operator ‘got’ nie występuje też przy czasowniku ‘have’ jeżeli jest on stosowany w znaczeniu
innym niż ‘mieć, posiadać’ np.
We are having (drinking) coffee now.
Everyone had a good time at the party yesterday.
Konstrukcja kauzatywna:
‘have’ + dopełnienie + imiesłów bierny czasownika np.
I had my room painted last month.
Konstrukcję kauzatywną używa się chcąc stwierdzić, że wykonanie danej czynności zostało
zlecone innej osobie np.
I will have the waste removed tomorrow.
Did they have their car repaired?
You must have this shoe mended.
Czasownik ‘have’ występuje w złożeniach z rozmaitymi rzeczownikami w znaczeniu innym
niż ‘mieć, posiadać’. Jedynie w tej postaci może on być użyty w czasach ‘Continuous’ np.
have a party / a meal / a good time / a rest / guests / a bath
We are having a party next Saturday.
Were you having a rest when she arrived?
Can - may  68
Czasowniki modalne posiadają szczególne cechy wspólne. Nie tworzą one regularnych form
czasu przeszłego lub przyszłego, nie otrzymują końcówki ‘-s’ w trzeciej osobie czasu
‘Present Simple’. Czasowniki modalne nie tworzą pytań ani zaprzeczeń przy pomocy
operatorów. Pytania do czasowników modalnych tworzy się
przez inwersję, zaś zaprzeczenie przy pomocy ‘not’ po orzeczeniu np.
He can dance. - Can he dance? - He can not (can’t) dance.
217
Czasowniki występujące po czasownikach modalnych mają postać ‘niepełnego’
bezokolicznika tj. bez partykuły ‘to’ np.
He can swim. nie He can to swim.
! Tylko czasowniki modalne ‘ought to’ - ‘powinien’ oraz ‘used to’ – ‘zwykł był’
występują z partykułą ‘to’ np.
You ought to rest more. We used to play together as children.
Czasownik ‘can’.
‘Can’ - ’móc, potrafić’ oraz jego forma przeszła ‘could’ używane są dla wyrażenia
umiejętności, zdolności lub możliwości wykonania danej czynności np.
George can speak Spanish.
I cannot understand the theory.
Sheila could sing beautifully when she was a child.
Can you type fast?
Could you skate when you were a boy?
Czasownik ‘may’.
‘May’ - ‘móc, mieć pozwolenie’ odnosi się tylko do czasu teraźniejszego lub przyszłego.
‘May’ wyraża pozwolenie, jego brak lub prośbę o pozwolenie na wykonanie danej czynności
np.
May I smoke a cigarette in this room?
You may not (mayn’t) leave the office before five.
Czasownika ‘may’ używa się szczególnie w sytuacji, gdy osoba mówiąca udziela pozwolenia
lub zakazu drugiej osobie np.
You may take my car tomorrow.
They may not bring their dogs here.
‘May’ oraz jego forma trybu przypuszczającego ‘might’ używane są gdy konieczne jest
szczególnie uprzejme zapytanie o pozwolenie np.
May we come back a little later this evening?
Might I leave the lecture earlier this time?
‘Might’ występuje również po czasowniku w czasie przeszłym (mowa zależna) np.
He said I might go with them.
Czasownik ‘can / could’ jest najbardziej potoczną formą wyrażającą znaczenie pozwolenia
lub zakazu np.
Can we stay in the disco until midnight?
You can’t drive so fast on this road.
Could I ask you a question?
‘Could’ występuje także po czasowniku w czasie przeszłym (mowa zależna) oraz
w trybie przypuszczającym np.
I would go climbing with you if I could.
She said we could use her computer.
218
Can - could - be able to  68-69
Czasownik can wyrażający zdolność, umiejętność posiada formę czasu przeszłego

w postaci ‘could’ np.
We couldn’t help you last week but we can do it today.
‘Can you play chess?’ ‘Well, I could a few years ago but I can’t now.’
Czasownik could odnosi się do teraźniejszości lub przyszłości tylko w trybie
przypuszczającym np.
Could you look after my baby if I asked you to?
I couldn’t learn to speak Chinese even if I tried hard.
‘Could’ występuje również pod postacią pytania wyrażającego uprzejmą prośbę np.
Could you lend me a few pounds?
Could you give us a helping hand?
Be able to stanowi formę alternatywną dla czasownika ‘can’ w czasie teraźniejszym lub
‘could’ w czasie przeszłym np.
Can you jump high? = Are you able to jump high?
Mick cannot answer this question = Mick isn’t able to answer this question
We could calculate the costs. = We were able to calculate the costs.
Could Joan dress herself as a child? = Was Joan able to dress herself as a child?
Wyrażenie ‘be able to’ w czasie przeszłym używane jest szczególnie w odniesieniu do
czynności pojedynczej np.
There was snow all around, but we were able to find our way easily.
I was able to record the song although my tape recorder wasn’t working properly.
Forma ‘be able to’ występuje zamiast czasownika ‘can’ w czasach:
- ‘Future Simple’ np.
We will be able to visit you next month.
Will Gregory be able to repair the fridge?
If I win the prize, I will be able to buy a new car.
We won’t be able to finish the job by six p.m.
- ‘Present Perfect’ np.
I have been able to play the guitar since I was ten.
How long has she been able to speak German?
We haven’t been able to go abroad since 1989.
- ‘Past Perfect’ np.
I had been able to run fast before I damaged my tendon.
She hadn’t been able to understand maths until she started taking private lessons.
219
May - might  70
Czasowniki modalne ‘may’ i ‘might’ służą do wyrażenia przypuszczenia lub możliwości w

czasie teraźniejszym lub przyszłym. Forma ‘might’ wzmacnia niepewność danego
przypuszczenia np.
I don’t know this man at all. He might be a new worker here.
John may be in the canteen now, but I’m not sure.
‘When is Louis coming back?’ ‘I don’t know exactly. He might come back next week.’
Czasowniki ‘may’ oraz ‘might’ mogą także wyrażać przypuszczenie w postaci czynności
trwającej np.
‘What is Ben doing?’ ‘He may / might be sitting in the garden.’
Hurry up! Your friends may already be waiting for you.
‘Might’ występuje w trybie przypuszczającym lub po czasowniku w czasie przeszłym (mowa
zależna) np.
She might help you with maths if you asked her to.
What might happen if I touched the fuse?
Debbie said she might be busy in the evening.
We knew there might be problems with communication.
May - be allowed to  71
Czasownik ‘may’ wyrażający pozwolenie lub zakaz wykonania danej czynności odnosi się
do czasu teraźniejszego lub przyszłego. Forma ‘might’ stosowana jest tylko w trybie
przypuszczającym lub po czasowniku w czasie przeszłym (mowa zależna).
Be allowed to - jest wyrażeniem alternatywnym dla czasownika ‘may’ w czasie
teraźniejszym np.
I may smoke cigarettes. = I am allowed to smoke cigarettes.
May they play here? = Are they allowed to play here?
‘Be allowed to’ występuje w czasach ‘Perfect’, ‘Past’ oraz ‘Future’, w których czasownika
‘may’ nie stosuje się. Zwrot ten używany jest szczególnie w odniesieniu do czynności
pojedynczej np.
I showed the membership card and I was allowed to enter the club.
We weren’t allowed to spend the night outside the boarding house.
W znaczeniu pozwolenia lub zakazu w czasie przeszłym zamiast ‘be allowed to’ można
zastosować czasownik ‘could’ np.
I was allowed to copy the files. = I could copy the files.
They weren’t allowed to use the room. = They couldn’t use the room.
220
Zastosowanie ‘be allowed to’ w czasach ‘Perfect’ i ‘Future’.
Czasownik modalny ‘may’ nie występuje w czasach ‘Future’ oraz ‘Perfect’. W tych
konstrukcjach ‘may’ zastępowany jest wyrażeniem ‘be allowed to’ np.
Simon has been allowed to borrow books from the library since he became a student. We
hadn’t been allowed to go abroad until the regulations changed.
I haven’t been allowed to drive since the accident.
Unless you sign the petition, you won’t be allowed to take part in the meeting.
By tomorrow, he will have been allowed to stay out of hospital for ten days.
Must - have to  72
Czasownik modalny ‘must - musieć’ służy do wyrażania konieczności w czasie

teraźniejszym oraz przyszłym np.
I must hurry up now.
You must talk to the professor tomorrow.
W znaczeniu wyrażającym konieczność czasownik ‘must’ występuje tylko w zdaniach
twierdzących i pytających np.
‘Must we clean the paths, too?’ ‘Yes, you must do it everyday.’
Mrs McGrath must cook meals for all her children.
Forma zaprzeczona ‘must not - mustn’t’ wyraża zakaz np.
Soldiers mustn’t leave the barracks without permission.
‘Have to - musieć’ służy do wyrażania konieczności we wszystkich czasach, stanowiąc
formę zastępującą ‘must’ w czasach ‘Future’, ‘Past’, oraz ‘Perfect’ np.
‘I must do my homework now.’ ‘I will have to do mine tomorrow.’
‘We must write a report today.’ ‘We had to write one last week.’
‘I must learn hard now.’ ‘I have had to learn hard for two years now.’
‘Must’ służy najczęściej do wyrażania konieczności narzuconej przez drugą osobę np.
A boss to a worker: ‘You must remember about the regulations.’
A teacher to a pupil: ‘You must rewrite your exercise.’
‘Have to’ służy do wyrażenia konieczności przez osobę, której bezpośrednio dotyczy np.
A worker: ‘I have to remember about the regulations.’
A pupil: ‘I have to rewrite my exercise.’
Czasownik ‘have to’ częściej używany jest do wyrażania konieczności regularnych,
natomiast ‘must’ wyraża zwykle konieczność w przypadku pojedynczym lub traktowaną jako
niezwykle pilną np.
We have to feed the geese twice a day.
Alan usually pays the bills, but he’s away, so I must do it this time.
221
! Czasownik ‘have to / had to’ ma postać zwykłego czasownika, dlatego pytanie
oraz przeczenie do niego tworzy się za pomocą operatorów czasu teraźniejszego
oraz przeszłego - ‘do / did’ - nie poprzez inwersję np.
Do you have to buy tickets everyday?
We don’t have to replace the wiring so often.
Did your sister have to find a new job?
I didn’t have to ask my parents for money.
Mustn’t - needn’t - don’t have to  73
Czasownik modalny ‘need - musieć’, wyrażający konieczność w czasie teraźniejszym lub

przyszłym występuje najczęściej w złożonych zdaniach twierdzących np.
I think I need ask her for permission.
‘Need’ występuje częściej pod postacią zaprzeczenia ‘needn’t’, wyrażając brak konieczności
w czasie teraźniejszym lub przyszłym np.
George needn’t come to work on Saturday.
We needn’t exchange any more money.
Czasownik ‘needn’t’ występuje często jako określenie braku konieczności wyrażone przez
inną osobę np.
Mike: ‘How about cleaning the stove?’
Adam: ‘You needn’t do it. Someone else will clean it.’
Anne: ‘Shall I mind the baby this evening?’
Betty: ‘No, you needn’t come tonight.’
! Czasownik ‘need’ może wystąpić zarówno w postaci czasownika modalnego, jak
i czasownika zwykłego. Jako czasownik modalny ‘need’ zachowuje wszystkie cechy
tej grupy np.
‘Need I work overtime this week?’
‘No, you needn’t stay longer in the office.’
Jako zwykły czasownik ‘need’ może wystąpić w każdej formie czasowej wraz
z pełnym bezokolicznikiem czasownika, tworząc pytania oraz zaprzeczenia przy użyciu
operatorów np.
We needed to replace the faulty circuit.
Did Helen need to ask for help?
You will need to talk to the teacher soon.
Mike doesn’t need to take the dog for a walk.
I have been needing you badly.
‘Mustn’t’ - służy jedynie do wyrażenia zakazu w czasie teraźniejszym lub przyszłym np.
‘Can we light a fire here?’ ‘No, you mustn’t do it in the approximity of the forest.’
222
‘Don’t / didn’t have to’ - służy do wyrażania braku konieczności szczególnie
w odniesieniu do czynności regularnej. Ponadto, forma ‘didn’t have to’ występuje zamiast
‘needn’t’ w czasie przeszłym np.
‘Is it necessary for you to see the doctor daily?’
‘Certainly not. I don’t have to call for him every day.’
‘Was it you who cleaned the paths?’
‘No, I didn’t have to do it. Someone had done it for me.’
! Zaprzeczenie ‘didn’t have to’ jest równoznaczne z formą ‘didn’t need to’.
Frank didn’t have to / need to wait long for his car to be repaired.
Should - ought to  74
Czasowniki ‘should’ oraz ‘ought to’ należą do grupy modalnych. Obydwa czasowniki służą
do wyrażania powinności, będąc niejako formą sugestii lub propozycji.
‘Ought to’ występuje z partykułą ‘to’, przez co stanowi wyjątek w grupie czasowników
modalnych np.
John’s car is out of order. He ought to have it repaired.’
We ought to ask Nick for advice. He will know better what to do.
‘Should’ jest bardziej potoczną formą niż ‘ought to’, jednakże nie ma żadnej różnicy
w znaczeniu pomiędzy obydwoma czasownikami np.
‘My tooth is aching.’ ‘You should go to a dentist.’
Fred shouldn’t waste so much time playing cards.
Used to  75
Czasownik ‘used to - zwykł był’ należy do grupy modalnych i występuje tylko

w odniesieniu do czasu przeszłego. ‘Used to’ stosuje się dla wyrażenia czynności, która
wykonywana była regularnie w przeszłości, a nie jest kontynuowana obecnie np.
I used to drink a lot of beer. Now, I don’t drink alcohol at all.
We used to be friends. Now, we don’t like each other.
Jeff used to eat a lot. Now, he is on a diet.
‘Used to’ występuje najczęściej w zdaniach twierdzących, chociaż formę pytającą oraz
przeczącą można utworzyć tak, jak w przypadku innych czasowników modalnych np.
Used Fiona to wear red hair?
Used you to travel abroad often?
I used not (usedn’t) to read poetry.
We usedn’t to organise parties.
223
Częściej jednak formę pytającą oraz przeczącą do czasownika ‘used to’ tworzy się jak w
czasie ‘Past Simple’ - przy pomocy operatora ‘did’ np.
Did Nigel use to get up late?
Did you use to like rock music?
I didn’t use to gamble.
We didn’t use to meet very often.
May / might / could + have done  76
Czasowniki ‘may’ oraz ‘might’ stosowane są w czasie teraźniejszym do wyrażenia

przypuszczenia np.
‘Who is the man?’ ‘I’m not sure; he may be our new teacher.’
‘What’s Bob doing?’ ‘He might be watching TV upstairs.’
Dla wyrażenia przypuszczenia w czasie przeszłym stosuje się formę dokonaną czasownika:
may / might + have done
‘My briefcase has disappeared.’ ‘Someone may have taken it by mistake.’
‘Why wasn’t Chris present?’ ‘He might have fallen ill.’
‘Why did he fail the exam?’ ‘He might not have learned enough.’
Podobne przypuszczenie można zastosować w zdaniu warunkowym trzeciego trybu np.
You might have got food poisoning if you had eaten the stale sausage. =
Perhaps, you would have got food poisoning if you had eaten the stale sausage.
Również czasownik ‘could’ używany jest do wyrażenia przypuszczenia w czasie
teraźniejszym lub przyszłym np.
‘Where are Mike and Sean?’ ‘They could be in the garage.’
Forma dokonana ‘could + have done’ wyraża podobne przypuszczenie w czasie przeszłym
jak ‘may / might + have done’ np.
‘How did he find out about my problems?’
‘Someone could have told him about them.’
‘Why are the crops damaged so much?’
‘There could have been torrential rains here.’
Forma przecząca ‘could not + have done’ stanowi wykluczenie możliwości zaistnienia
danej czynności w czasie przeszłym np.
Robert: ‘I have bought your new book.’
Karen: ‘You couldn’t have bought it. It hasn’t been published yet.’
Forma ciągła – ‘Continuous’.
Formę ciągłą od czasowników modalnych w znaczeniu dokonanym tworzy się przy pomocy
operatora ‘been’ oraz końcówki ‘-ing’ dodanej do głównego czasownika np.
224
Mike didn’t come out to say ‘Hello’. He might have been sleeping in his room.
I guess Stella was busy. She could have been typing some letter.
Could - could have done - be able to  77-78
Czasownik modalny ‘could’ może wyrażać:

- pozwolenie, możliwość lub jej brak w czasie przeszłym np.
I could enter the night club easily. I’m over eighteen.
Tim couldn’t go climbing with us. His mother objected to it.
- zdolność, umiejętność lub jej brak w czasie przeszłym np.
Sony could read well when he was five.
The man couldn’t repair the broken chain.
- pozwolenie, możliwość, umiejętność lub ich brak w trybie przypuszczającym
odnoszącym się do czasu teraźniejszego lub przyszłego. Tryb przypuszczający
najczęściej występuje z drugim trybem warunkowym np.
We could come to the party if they invited us.
If you had problems, I could certainly help you.
Forma dokonana ‘could have done’ wyraża przypuszczenie lub hipotetyczną możliwość
zaistnienia danej czynności w czasie przeszłym. Stosuje się ją także
z trzecim trybem warunkowym np.
‘Why didn’t he buy tickets?’ ‘They could have been sold out.’
We could have visited you if we had known the address.
If you had fired the gun you could have killed someone.
Forma przecząca ‘couldn’t have done’ stanowi wykluczenie możliwości zaistnienia danej
czynności w czasie przeszłym np.
You couldn’t have met Phil in the park. He is staying abroad now.
She knew nothing about the book. She couldn’t have read it.
Be able to - ‘móc, potrafić, umieć’. Wyrażenie to można użyć w każdej formie czasowej.
Stanowi ono formę alternatywną dla ‘can’ oraz ‘could’ np.
I can swim. = I am able to swim.
I could type. = I was able to type.
‘Be able to’ występuje najczęściej w formach, w których czasownika ‘can’ nie stosuje się tj.
czas ‘Future Simple’: I will be able to help you tomorrow.
czas ‘Present Perfect’: We have been able to start the production.
czas ‘Past Perfect’: They had been able to pass the border before.
III tryb warunkowy: I would have been able to speak to her if she
had appeared before midnight.
225
Must have done - had to do  79
Czasownik modalny ‘must’ oprócz konieczności może wyrażać przypuszczenie lub wniosek
w czasie teraźniejszym np.
Look at him. He is more than two metres high. He must be a basketball player.
There are no fish in the lake. The water must be terribly polluted.
‘Must have done’ służy do wyrażenia przypuszczenia lub wniosku w czasie przeszłym.
Forma ta nie występuje w postaci zaprzeczonej.
‘My throat is aching.’ ‘You must have eaten something cold.’
Jim looked furious. He must have quarrelled with his wife again.
Hundreds of cows died in the area. It must have been an epidemic.
‘Had to’ jest formą przeszłą od czasownika ‘must’ lub ‘have to’ wyrażającą konieczność np.
We had to ask for a permission whenever we wanted to go out.
Did you have to drink milk when you were a child?
Sam didn’t have to prepare his lessons yesterday.
Should / ought to + have done  80
Czasowniki modalne ‘should’ oraz ‘ought to’ wyrażają powinnność lub obowiązek
w czasie teraźniejszym np.
George should learn more.
Harry shouldn’t eat so many sweets.
Ought I to tell Sarah what has happened?
Jenny oughtn’t to forget about being polite.
Forma dokonana ‘should / ought to + have done’ wyraża powinność lub obowiązek, który
nie został spełniony np.
Nick crashed into another car. He should have driven more carefully.
Brian failed his exam. He ought to have prepared for it better.
Forma zaprzeczona ‘shouldn’t / oughtn’t to + have done’ wyraża przekonanie, iż dana
czynność nie powinna była zostać wykonana np.
You shouldn’t have called Rob a fool. That was very rude of you.
We oughtn’t to have invited so many guests. It was too crowdy in the house.
226
Didn’t have to do - needn’t have done  81
‘Didn’t have to’ - wyraża brak konieczności w czasie przeszłym. Użycie tej formy oznacza
przeważnie, iż czynność nie została wykonana np.
A: ‘Did you send a letter to your brother?’
B: ‘I didn’t have to do it. My mother did it for me.’
Brian didn’t have to worry about his future. His parents had left him a big fortune.
‘Needn’t + have done’ wyraża przekonanie, iż czynność została wykonana pomimo braku
takiej konieczności np.
You needn’t have bought another bottle of wine. We still have plenty of it.
Alice needn’t have phoned the agency. I had fixed her matters before.
Present Simple  84-85
twierdzenie pytanie przeczenie

I drive do I drive? I do not drive
you drive do you drive? you do not drive
he drives does he drive? he does not drive
she drives does she drive? she does not drive
it drives does it drive? it does not drive
we drive do we drive? we do not drive
you drive do you drive? you do not drive
they drive do they drive? they do not drive
skrócone formy przeczące: do not = don’t does not = doesn’t

Cechą charakterystyczną czasu ‘Present Simple’ jest końcówka ‘-s’ przy trzeciej osobie
liczby pojedynczej oraz operator ‘do / does’ tworzący pytania i zaprzeczenia.
! Do czasowników zakończonych spółgłoską ‘syczącą’ tj. ‘ss, sh, x, ch’ w trzeciej
osobie liczby pojedynczej dodaje się końcówkę ‘-es’ np.
Mike watches televison each evening.
Susan brushes her teeth three times a day.
Czas ‘Present Simple’ stosowany jest do wyrażenia:
- czynności powtarzanych regularnie z określoną częstotliwością w ogólnie pojętej
teraźniejszości. Czynność w ‘Present Simple’ może zostać określona jednym
z przysłówków częstotliwości:
always, often, seldom, sometimes, usually, never
lub przy pomocy określenia z ‘every’ -
every day, every week, every month itp.
227
I always ask my older brother for help.
Sharon often visits us on Saturday.
We never sit together in the classroom.
The Greens work in their garden every afternoon.
- czynności będącymi ogólnie obowiązującymi prawidłami np.
The sun rises in the east.
Water boils at 100 degrees.
Leaves fall off trees in autumn.
Czas ‘Present Simple’ stosowany jest także dla przytoczenia czyjejś wypowiedzi, myśli lub
cytatu np.
Alex says that his girlfriend is the most beautiful.
Patricia believes that she can become famous.
This note reads that we must be ready for the worst.
‘Present Simple’ używany jest zamiast czasu ‘Present Continuous’ z czasownikami:
hear, like, look, love, mind, smell, taste, think, want, wish np.
Now, I want to watch the boxing match.
Look at her. She looks so elegant, doesn’t she?
There’s someone downstairs. I hear some voices.
Present Continuous  86

I am reading am I reading? I am not reading
you are reading are you reading? you are not reading
he is reading is he reading? he is not reading
she is reading is she reading? she is not reading
it is reading is it reading? it is not reading
we are reading are we reading? we are not reading
you are reading are you reading? you are not reading
they are reading are they reading? they are not reading
skrócone formy przeczące: are not = aren’t is not = isn’t

Cechą szczególną czasu ‘Present Continuous’ jest końcówka ‘-ing’ dodawana do głównego
czasownika. Czasownikiem posiłkowym jest odmiana ‘be’. W większości przypadków jeżeli
czasownik zakończony jest samogłoską ‘e’ po dodaniu końcówki ‘-ing’ samogłoska ta jest
opuszczana np.
compare - comparing glare - glaring stare - staring
228
W przypadku czasowników jednosylabowych oraz niektórych dwusylabowych zakończonych
spółgłoską, przed którą znajduje się samogłoska, po dodaniu końcówki ‘-ing’ spółgłoska
ulega podwojeniu np.
dip - dipping set - setting nod - nodding control - controlling
Czas ‘Present Continuous’ stosowany jest do wyrażenia:
- czynności trwającej obecnie. Czynność taka może dodatkowo być określona
wyrażeniem czasowym ‘now’, ‘at the moment’, ‘at the present moment’ np.
I am listening to music at the moment.
Are the children sleeping now?
Where is he running right now?
- czynności wykonywanej obecnie, choć nie koniecznie w momencie, gdy o niej
mówimy np.
We are driving to the seaside, but we have stopped for lunch.
Mark is helping me renovate my cottage this week.
Many species of animals are dying out.
- czynności zaplanowanej w nieodległej przyszłości. Używając czas ‘Present
Continuous’ w tym znaczeniu należy pamiętać o konieczności zastosowania
wyrażenia czasowego określającego czas wykonania danej czynności, w
przeciwnym razie może ona zostać zinterpretowana jako czynność trwająca w chwili
obecnej np.
‘What are you doing this evening?’ ‘I am going to the theatre.’
Bob and Sally are visiting us tomorrow.
We are leaving for Athens next Sunday.
Present Simple - Present Continuous  84-88
Czas ‘Present Simple’ służy do wyrażenia czynności wykonywanej stale, regularnie

z określoną częstotliwością. Czynność taka odnosi się do ogólnie pojętej teraźniejszości np.
‘How often do you attend your English lessons?’
‘I attend them twice a week.’
We sometimes play cards in the evening.
Jeff always comes to help us in the garage.
The sun always sets in the west.
Czas ‘Present Continuous’ wyraża czynność trwającą – wykonywaną w chwili obecnej lub w
teraźniejszości ograniczonej określeniem czasowym np.
I am going to my grandparents now.
We aren’t playing cards at the moment.
Mike is writing his exams this week.
229
Czasownik ‘have’ wyrażający znaczenie posiadania nie jest używany w czasie ‘Present
Continuous’ np.
We have a lot of friends in England now.
Have you any good idea?
Mr Hanks has a lot of money.
‘Have’ występujący w kolokacji z rozmaitymi rzeczownikami w znaczeniu innym niż ‘mieć,
posiadać’ może być użyty w czasie ‘Present Continuous’ np.
We are having a good time at the party.
My neighbours are having guests from America.
Are you having fun?
Inne czasowniki nie występujące zwykle w czasie ‘Present Continuous’:
a) czasowniki wyrażające czynności narządów zmysłów:
feel, hear, look, see, smell, sound, taste
She looks gorgeous in the black coctail dress, doesn’t she?
This milk smells sour.
I don’t see anything through the binoculars.
Your cake tastes delicious, indeed.
It feels cold here, doesn’t it?
b) czasowniki wyrażające emocje lub czynności umysłowe -
agree, believe, forget, guess, hate, know, like, love, mean, mind,
realise, remember, suppose, suspect, think, understand, want, wish
I think Sheryl likes me.
Tom believes in this ghost story.
Do you remember me, sir?
Do you mind if I shut the window?
We don’t understand what you are saying.
I don’t agree with your theory.
c) czasowniki wyrażające przynależność lub posiadanie -
belong to, have, owe, possess
‘Who possesses this villa at present?’ ‘It belongs to my uncle now.’
We have a few similar things in our luggage.
Niektóre z powyższych czasowników można jednak użyć w czasie ‘Present Continuous’
jeżeli wyrażają szczególne znaczenie np.
- look at - ‘patrzeć na, przyglądać się’
This tall man is looking at you.
- look for - ‘szukać, poszukiwać’
I am looking for my keys.
- feel - ‘czuć się’
How are you feeling right now?
230
- hear - ‘przesłuchiwać’
The judge is hearing the suspect again.
- see - ‘spotykać się (na umówionym spotkaniu)’
I am seeing my new secretary this morning.
- taste - ‘próbować smak’
I’m tasting the soup to see if it’s not too salty.
- think - ‘myśleć, rozważać’
What are you thinking about, Lisa?
Past Simple  89-91

I drove did I drive? I did not drive
you drove did you drive? you did not drive
he drove did he drive? he did not drive
she drove did she drive? she did not drive
it drove did it drive? it did not drive
we drove did we drive? we did not drive
you drove did you drive? you did not drive
they drove did they drive? they did not drive
skrócona forma przecząca: did not = didn’t

Cechą szczególną czasu ‘Past Simple’ jest operator ‘did’ służący do tworzenia pytań oraz
zaprzeczeń. Innym istotnym elementem czasu ‘Past Simple’ jest podział czasowników na:
- regularne - tworzące formę przeszłą przy pomocy końcówki ‘-ed’ np.
warn - warned laugh - laughed play - played invite - invited
- nieregularne np.
find - found break - broke make - made come - came
Tworząc pytania oraz zaprzeczenia w czasie ‘Past Simple’ należy pamiętać, iż czasownik
główny powraca do formy bezokolicznikowej np.
She watched TV. Did she watch TV? She did not watch TV.
They brought wine. Did they bring wine? They did not bring wine.
Część czasowników regularnych jedno lub dwusylabowych zakończonych kombinacją
‘samogłoska + spółgłoska’ podwaja ostatnią spółgłoskę po dodaniu końcówki ‘-ed’ np.
stop - stopped refer - referred travel - travelled
Czas ‘Past Simple’ stosowany jest dla wyrażenia:
- czynności dokonanej - zakończonej w czasie przeszłym określonym przez
wyrażenie czasowe np.
231
We met in October 1985. Did your father work yesterday?
- czynności wykonywanej regularnie lub przez pewien okres czasu w przeszłości np.
We always went fishing on Saturdays.
They lived here ten years ago.
He never remembered my name.
- pytania o czas wykonania - zakończenia danej czynności np.
When did the building collapse?
When did you see her last time?
Określenia czasowe najczęściej używane z czasem ‘Past Simple’ to:
yesterday, (ten days) ago, last (week, month)
Czynność dokonana wyrażona w czasie ‘Past Simple’ nie wymaga jednak precyzyjnego
określenia czasowego jeżeli oczywiste jest dla mówiącego, iż czynność dotyczy przeszłości
np.
When I bought the flat it was empty.
Simon phoned from New York.
I was the happiest with my first wife.
Past Continuous  92

I was resting was I resting? I was not resting
you were resting were you resting? you were not resting
he was resting was he resting? he was not resting
she was resting was she resting? she was not resting
it was resting was it resting? it was not resting
we were resting were we resting? we were not resting
you were resting were you resting? you were not resting
they were resting were they resting? they were not resting
skrócone formy przeczące: was not = wasn’t were not = weren’t

Cechami szczególnymi czasu ‘Past Continuous’ są: czasownik posiłkowy ‘was / were’ oraz
końcówka ‘-ing’ przy czasowniku głównym.
Czas ‘Past Continuous’ stosowany jest dla wyrażenia:
- czynności trwającej w ściśle określonym momencie w czasie przeszłym np.
I was working at six p.m. yesterday.
We were having dinner at ten last Friday.
Wolves were crying at midnight.
Takie użycie czasu ‘Past Continuous’ zakłada, iż wykonywanie danej czynności rozpoczęto
przed określonym momentem i kontynuowano ją w dalszym ciągu np.
232
My mother was talking on the phone when I came into the hall.
- czynności wykonywanej przez dłuższy określony etap czasu np.
We were playing cards all evening.
He was feeling ill during the whole day.
Between two and three p.m. I was sitting in my office.
- dwu lub więcej czynności, które trwały jednocześnie w danym momencie lub czasie
w przeszłości. Tak wyrażone czynności często połączone są spójnikiem ‘while –
podczas gdy’ np.
Our baby was sleeping while we were driving home.
While I was reading a book, Steven was doing his homework.
When we arrived, Tom was having a bath and Jenny was resting.
- czynności zaplanowanej na przyszłość wyrażoną z perspektywy czasu przeszłego
np.
We couldn’t visit you in the evening because we were going to the cinema.
Tom was getting up early; that’s why he needed more sleep.
Past Simple - Past Continuous  93
Czas ‘Past Continuous’ w odróżnieniu od ‘Past Simple’ nie wyraża czynności dokonanej, a
jedynie podkreśla jej trwanie w danym momencie w przeszłości np.
Tom repaired his bike in the evening. - czynność została zakończona.
Tom was repairing his bike in the evening. - czynność była wykonywana
wieczorem, nie wiadomo jednak czy rower został naprawiony.
Pojedyncza czynność dokonana wyrażona w czasie ‘Past Simple’ może określać moment
trwania innej czynności np.
When we came, Mary was watching a film on TV.
I was cooking dinner when you rang.
George wasn’t sleeping when Sam entered his room.
What were you doing in the backyard when she saw you?
Jeżeli dwie lub więcej czynności wyrażonych zostanie w czasie ‘Past Simple’ oznaczać to
będzie, iż następowały one kolejno po sobie np.
When I came home I took a bath and went to sleep.
When Joan received her salary she bought herself a new coat.
Jeżeli dwie lub więcej czynności wyrażonych zostanie w czasie ‘Past Continuous’, oznaczać
to będzie, iż wykonywane były jednocześnie np.
I was reading a book and my sister was listening to music.
Bob was resting while his parents were working in the garden.
233
Present Perfect  94-95

I have forgotten have I forgotten? I have not forgotten
you have forgotten have you forgotten? you have not forgotten
he has forgotten has he forgotten? he has not forgotten
she has forgotten has she forgotten? she has not forgotten
it has forgotten has it forgotten? it has not forgotten
we have forgotten have we forgotten? we have not forgotten
you have forgotten have you forgotten? you have not forgotten
they have forgotten have they forgotten? they have not forgotten
skrócone formy przeczące: have not = haven’t has not = hasn’t

Cechą szczególną czasu ‘Present Perfect’ jest czasownik posiłkowy ‘have / has’,
za pomocą którego tworzy się pytanie oraz przeczenie. Czasownik główny przybiera formę
imiesłowu biernego. Imiesłów bierny czasowników regularnych tworzy się przy pomocy
końcówki ‘-ed’ np.
I have watched the film. We have closed the door.
Znaczeniem, które wyraża, czas ‘Present Perfect’ obejmuje zarówno przeszłość,
jak i teraźniejszość. Stanowi on niejako połączenie pomiędzy obydwoma formami, gdyż
wyrażając czynność dokonaną podkreśla jej skutek w teraźniejszości.
Czas ‘Present Perfect’ stosowany jest do wyrażenia:
- czynności dopiero co zakończonej, której skutki trwają lub są zauważalne.
Przysłówek ‘just - właśnie’ często wykorzystywany jest w tym użyciu czasu ‘Present
Perfect’ np.
I have just repaired my radio.
We have just returned from school.
The Howells have just moved to Newcastle.
- czynności zakończonej, której czas dokonania nie jest określony, gdyż istotny jest
sam fakt, iż dana czynność została wykonana np.
I have already been to Paris twice.
We have delivered the parcel.
Have you seen my glasses around?
I have phoned the travel agency.
- czynności dokonanej w czasie przeszłym -nieokreślonym - której skutki nadal trwają
lub są zauważalne np.
Tom has broken his right arm. He’s wearing it in plaster.
The factory has closed down. It’s not producing anything now.
Someone has spoiled the drill. I cannot use it.
234
Stosując przysłówki ‘already - już’ lub ‘yet - już, jeszcze’ można określić, czy dana czynność
została dokonana z pewnym skutkiem do chwili obecnej. Przysłówek ‘already’ stosowany
jest w pytaniach i twierdzeniach’, zaś przysłówek ‘yet’ występuje w pytaniach i przeczeniach
np.
‘Have you finished painting the picture yet?’ ‘No. I haven’t painted it yet.’
‘Has she done the washing up? ‘Yes, she has already done it.’
- czynności dokonanej w nadal trwającym okresie czasowym np.
We have met three times this week.
There have been seven earthquakes in the area this year.
I haven’t made any phone calls today.
Jeżeli jednak czynność dokonana wykonywana jest rutynowo w określonym czasie,
wówczas należy użyć czas ‘Past Simple’ np.
I got up at six this morning. (I always get up at six.)
I went to work today. (I normally go to work.)
Okresem czasowym może być także etap całego życia np
This director has made a lot of good films. –
(He’s still alive and continues making films.)
That director made a lot of bad films. -
(He’s dead or retired.)
Aby podkreślić trwający jeszcze okres czasowy stosuje się szereg przysłówków
obejmujących swym znaczeniem czas przeszły i teraźniejszy np.
always, ever, lately, often, never, recently
I have always dreamt of going to India.
Has she ever tried to learn Italian?
He has never said a good word to me.
Jenny has worked as an assistant her whole life.
We have spent too much money recently.
Takie użycie czasu ‘Present Perfect’ zakłada, iż czynność jest nadal wykonywana. Jeżeli
została ona jednak definitywnie zakończona, należy zastosować czas ‘Past Simple’ np.
I never tried to learn foreign languages as a child.
Jenny worked in the office her whole life. Now, she is a pensioner.
- czynności nadal wykonywanej od ściśle określonego momentu w przeszłości lub
czynności wykonywanej przez określoną długość czasu aż do chwili obecnej.
W tym znaczeniu czas ‘Present Perfect’ występuje z przyimkami:
for - ‘przez, od (jakiegoś czasu)’ - określa jak długo
since - ‘od’ - określa od kiedy np.
I have known Mrs Downey for two years.
We have lived in the village since 1959.
She has played the trumpet since she was ten.
235
Używając czasu ‘Present Perfect’ oraz przyimków ‘for’ lub ‘since’ można wyrazić czynność
dosłownie trwającą od przeszłości do chwili obecnej np.
We have talked for ten minutes now.
Jednakże dosłowną ciągłość takiej czynności najczęściej wyraża się przy użyciu czasu
‘Present Perfect Continuous’. ‘Present Perfect’, natomiast, częściej wyraża czynność
wykonywaną z pewną regularnością np.
I have dated Muriel several times since October.
We have changed our place of living twice since May.
! Należy pamiętać, iż pytając o długość trwania czynności od czasu przeszłego do
chwili obecnej używa się ‘Present Perfect’ nie ‘Present Simple’ np.
How long have they been married?
How long has Eric worked at university?
Present Perfect Continuous  96
twierdzenie pytanie
I have been travelling have I been travelling?
you have been travelling have you been travelling?
he has been travelling has he been travelling?
she has been travelling has she been travelling?
it has been travelling has it been travelling?
we have been travelling have we been travelling?
you have been travelling have you been travelling?
they have been travelling have they been travelling?
przeczenie
I have not been travelling
you have not been travelling
he has not been travelling
she has not been travelling
it has not been travelling
we have not been travelling
you have not been travelling
they have not been travelling
skrócone formy przeczące: have not been doing = haven’t been doing
has not been doing = hasn’t been doing
236
Czasownikiem posiłkowym w czasie ‘Present Perfect Continuous’ jest odmiana ‘have / has’
wraz z formą ‘been’. Główny czasownik otrzymuje końcówkę ‘-ing’.
Czas ‘Present Perfect Continuous’ używany jest dla wyrażenia:
- czynności rozpoczętej w przeszłości, a która jest wykonywana bez przerwy do chwili
obecnej. Określając długość trwania czynności w czasie ‘Present Perfect
Continuous’ podobnie jak w ‘Present Perfect’ posługujemy się przyimkami ‘for –
przez, od’ oraz ‘since - od’ np.
We have been playing computer games since twelve o’clock.
He has been sleeping for nine hours now.
- czynności wykonywanej bez przerwy, zakończonej przed chwilą. Efekty takiej
czynności trwają lub są zauważalne np.
I am very tired. I have been working.
Your shoes are wet. You have been walking in the rain.
Czasowniki nie występujące w czasie ‘Present Continuous’ nie są również używane
w czasie ‘Present Perfect Continuous’. Do grupy tej należą między innymi czasowniki:
agree, believe, belong, forget, have, hear, know,
possess, regret, remember, see, want
Czasowniki te w swoim podstawowym znaczeniu mogą wystąpić tylko w czasie ‘Present
Perfect’ np.
I have known Mr Thomas for six years.
She has had a driving licence since last month.
We have belonged to the association for a year.
Wyrażenia czasowe z ‘for’ lub ‘since’ nie są niezbędne jeżeli używając czasu ‘Present
Perfect Continuous’ wyrażamy czynność trwającą bez przerwy od przeszłości do chwili
obecnej np.
We have been walking so long.
Mark and Terry have been talking in the cafe.
Podobne znaczenie wyrażone w czasie ‘Present Perfect’ wymaga jednak zwrotu czasowego
dla podkreślenia jej ciągłości np.
We have walked for ten minutes.
The managers have discussed some important matters since morning.
237
Present Simple - Present Perfect -  97-99
Present Perfect Continuous - Past Simple
Czas Present Simple służy do wyrażenia czynności wykonywanych regularnie

w ogólnie pojętej teraźniejszości. Nie odnosi się on do przeszłości np.
I always visit my parents at weekends.
Sheila often reads books at night.
Czas Past Simple służy do wyrażenia czynności dokonanych w określonej przeszłości.
Czas ten nie odnosi się w żaden sposób do teraźniejszości np.
Eddie sold his house last week.
Mick opened a shop a month ago.
Czas Present Perfect służy do wyrażenia czynności dokonanej w nieokreślonej przeszłości,
podkreślając, iż jej skutki trwają lub są zauważalne obecnie np.
Eddie has sold his house. (He doesn’t live in it any more.)
Mick has opened a shop. (He is a shop owner now.)
Czas Present Perfect może służyć do określenia jak długo czynność jest wykonywana od
przeszłości do chwili obecnej, stanowiąc dosłowne połączenie przeszłości z teraźniejszością
np.
I have lived in the town for eleven years.
She has written poetry since 1979.
Zadając pytanie o długość trwania danej czynności od przeszłości do chwili obecnej należy
użyć czasu Present Perfect lub Present Perfect Continuous jeżeli czynność trwa bez
przerwy np.
How long has Mrs Howard worked at university?
How long have you composed music?
How long has your head been aching?
How long have they been arguing?
Jeżeli określamy dokładny czas dokonanej czynności, należy wówczas użyć Past Simple,
nie Present Perfect np.
Our lessons started last Monday.
Debbie took part in a sports competition last year.
Chcąc wyrazić czynność trwającą nieprzerwanie od określonego momentu
w przeszłości do chwili obecnej, należy użyć czasu Present Perfect Continuous
lub Present Perfect np.
Ronald has been reading a book since lunch time.
Ronald has read a book since lunch time.
Chcąc jedynie podkreślić trwanie czynności od przeszłości do chwili obecnej - nie czas, od
którego jest wykonywana lub jego długość, należy użyć Present Perfect Continuous np.
238
Ronald has been reading a book. (He is still doing it.)
We have been eating breakfast. (We are still eating.)
Używająć czasu Present Perfect bez określenia czasowego, wyraża sie znaczenie
czynności dokonanej - zakończonej np.
Ronald has read a book. (He knows its content now).
We have eaten breakfast. (We aren’t hungry any more).
Jeżeli chcemy podkreślić ile razy dana czynność została powtórzona od przeszłości do chwili
obecnej, należy użyć czasu Present Perfect, nie Present Perfect Continuous np.
Ronald has read this book twice (since he bought it).
I have telephoned Mary five times since noon.
Future Simple  100-101

I will / shall come will / shall I come? I will / shall not come
you will come will you come? you will not come
he will come will he come? he will not come
she will come will she come? she will not come
it will come will it come? it will not come
we will / shall come will / shall we come? we will / shall not come
you will come will you come? you will not come
they will come will they come? they will not come
skrócone formy przeczące: shall not = shan’t will not = won’t

Cechą charakterystyczną czasu ‘Future Simple’ jest czasownik posiłkowy ‘shall’ lub ‘will’, po
którym czasownik główny występuje w postaci niepełnego bezokolicznika. Operator ‘shall’
pojawia się niekiedy w języku formalnym w pierwszej osobie liczby pojedynczej i mnogiej.
Operator ‘will’ jest jednak formą najbardziej powszechną, występującą przy każdej osobie.
Czas ‘Future Simple’ używany jest do wyrażenia:
- czynności, która według oczekiwań osoby mówiącej nastąpi w określonym czasie
przyszłym. Znaczenie wyrażone przez czas ‘Future Simple’ bliskie jest
przypuszczeniu lub założeniu wynikającemu z domniemanego biegu wydarzeń.
Zdanie w czasie ‘Future Simple’ jest często poprzedzone frazą typu:
I guess / believe / suppose / expect / hope np.
We expect that our son will return next month.
Do you think someone will answer your advertisement?
239
Znaczenie wyrażone w czasie ‘Future Simple’ nie ma znamion czynności zaplanowanej. Jest
ono jedynie wyrażeniem przewidywanego biegu wydarzeń
w czasie przyszłym. Przewidywanie takie może jednakże wynikać z faktów, które
uzasadniają jego prawidłowość np.
It will rain when we arrive. (It always rains there at this time of the year.)
Tomorrow at ten, I will be at school. (I am always at school at this time.)
- czynności, która nastąpi w czasie przyszłym jako efekt działania rutynowego lub
stanu, który powtarza się niezależnie od woli osoby mówiącej np.
These trees will grow very slowly.
The clock will strike at midnight.
Tomorrow, I will get up at seven as usual.
- czynności, która nastąpi jako efekt właśnie podjętej decyzji wyrażającej chęć lub
wolę mówiącego np.
‘I can’t find my keys.’ ‘I will open the door for you.’
‘Your baby looks tired.’ ‘I will make him go to bed.’
‘Michael cannot do this exercise.’ ‘I will help him.’
Forma przecząca ‘won’t’ może wyrażać niechęć, odmowę wykonania czynności np.
Jack says he won’t go to the party. (He doesn’t like parties.)
I won’t answer your question. (It is too private.)
Be going to - Present Continuous  103
Czas Present Continuous można zastosować do wyrażenia czynności przyszłej. Forma ta

określa czynność zaplanowaną w nieodległej przyszłości. Należy pamiętać, iż czas
wykonania czynności musi być zdefiniowany np.
I am taking an exam next week.
We are going to the theatre this evening.
Mike is flying back to Australia next month.
‘What are you doing tonight?’ ‘I am staying at home.’
Czasowniki nie używane normalnie w czasie Present Continuous nie są także stosowane
do wyrażenia czynności przyszłej. Konstrukcja ‘be going to – ‘zamierzać’ służy do
wyrażenia zamiaru, na ogół wskazując, iż podjęte zostały określone działania zmierzające
do wykonania wyrażonego zamiaru np.
A: ‘Why have you bought so many rolls of wallpaper?’
B: ‘I am going to redecorate my flat.’
A: ‘Why are you carrying the watering can?’
B: ‘I am going to water plants in my garden.’
David has brought his guitar. He is going to play a few songs.
240
‘Be going to’ może także służyć do wyrażenia przewidywanej czynności, która nastąpi jako
skutek wskazujących na to okoliczności np.
Your temperature keeps rising. I’m afraid you are going to be ill.
The wind is blowing heavily. We are going to have a storm.
There hasn’t been a drop of rain for weeks. Our crops are going to be a failure.
! Czasowniki ‘come’ oraz ‘go’ nie są stosowane z formą ‘be going to’. Dla wyrażenia
planów lub zamiaru używa się je w czasie ‘Present Continuous’ np.
I am coming home late tonight.
Fred is going to Spain on holiday in summer.
Często zdarza się, iż zwrot ‘be going to’ oraz czas ‘Present Continuous’ mogą być
stosowane zamiennie jeżeli czas zamierzonej czynności jest określony np.
I am going to stay longer in the office tomorrow.
I am staying longer in the office tomorrow.
Future Continuous  104-105

I will be sleeping will I be sleeping? I will not be sleeping
you will be sleeping will you be sleeping? you will not be sleeping
he will be sleeping will he be sleeping? he will not be sleeping
she will be sleeping will she be sleeping? she will not be sleeping
it will be sleeping will it be sleeping? It will not be sleeping
we will be sleeping will we be sleeping? we will not be sleeping
you will be sleeping will you be sleeping? you will not be sleeping
they will be sleeping will they be sleeping? they will not be sleeping
Czas ‘Future Continuous’ używany jest do wyrażenia:

- czynności trwającej, która wykonywana będzie w określonym momencie
w przyszłości np.
We will be having fun at a disco tomorrow at midnight.
What will you be doing next Friday at this time?
When I come home, children will certainly be playing.
- czynności, która odbywać się będzie w czasie przyszłym o niekoniecznie określonej
porze. Takie użycie czasu ‘Future Continuous’ nie służy do wyrażenia czynności
zaplanowanej, lecz takiej, która nastąpi jako efekt normalnego - rutynowego toku
czynności np.
I will be going to the supermarket in the morning. (I always do it.)
We will be visiting our parents at the weekend. (We normally do it.)
What shall I tell Eric? I will be meeting him at the training.
241
- czynności bez dokładnego czasu jej trwania. Jest to stwierdzenie określające
jedynie, iż czynność taka nastąpi bez podania bliższych jej okoliczności lub
powodów np.
John will be sitting in a cafe.
I will be trying to get a few free tickets for the concert.
W porównaniu pomiędzy czasami ‘Future Simple’, a ‘Future Continuous’ istotny jest fakt, iż
czynność wyrażona w ‘Future Simple’ ma zabarwienie istniejącego powodu prowadzącego
do wykonania tej czynności, zaś czas ‘Future Continuous’ jeżeli nie podkreśla czasu
wykonania czynności ani jej celu, jedynie zwraca uwagę na sam fakt jej zaistnienia np.
I will talk to Mr Dean tomorrow. (I need or I want to do it.)
I will be talking to Mr Dean.
Will - shall  106
Czasowniki modalne ‘will / shall’ oprócz funkcji operatorów w czasach Future mogą służyć
do wyrażania rozmaitych znaczeń, na przykład: komend, poleceń, zamiarów. W niektórych
przypadkach czasownik ‘shall’ może wystąpić z trzecią osobą liczby pojedynczej lub
mnogiej. Czasownik ‘shall’ może wyrażać:
- zamiar, obietnicę np.
He shall be given a bonus. (I promise to give him a bonus.)
They shall go to the picnic with us. (We’re going to take them with us.)
I shall learn more next term. (I promise to learn more next term.)
Ralph shall never leave you. (I will never let Ralph leave you.)
- komendę, nakaz - w przepisach, regulaminach np.
Drivers shall not exceed the speed limit.
Club visitors shall leave their clothes in the cloakroom.
W języku mniej formalnym zamiast ‘shall’ stosuje się ‘should’.
- pytanie o polecenie, radę np.
‘What shall we do in this situation?’ ‘I suggest you wait.’
‘How shall I react to his rude behaviour?’ ‘Punish him.’
‘What shall I tell Peter?’ ‘Tell him the truth.’
- pytanie - propozycję np.
‘Shall I give you a lift?’ ‘Yes, please.’
‘Shall I help you with the task?’ ‘No, thank you.’
- sugestię np.
‘Shall we discuss the matter together?’ ‘Of course, let’s.’
(Let’s discuss the matter together, shall we?)
242
Czasownik ‘will’ może wyrażać:
- przypuszczenie, założenie np.
It’s three o’clock. Mary will be at work now.
(I assume Mary is at work now as usual.)
Jeff will not remember the address.
(I assume he will not remember the address.)
- nawyki, przyzwyczajenia w pojęciu ogólnym np.
A hunter will only speak about hunting.
- uporczywy nawyk np.
Uncle Terry will always call me a brat.
Mick is obssessed with his work. He will spend many hours in his office.
- wolę, chęć lub jej brak np.
A: I cannot answer the phone now.
B: Don’t worry. I will do it.
A: Why don’t you come to our party tomorrow?
B: I will not. I don’t want to meet Andrew again.
W zdaniu warunkowym:
If she will give me another chance, I won’t waste it, for sure.
We will be glad if you will play another piece of the composition.
- zaproszenie, prośbę np.
Will you have some more of the pie?
Will you be so kind as to ring us tomorrow, sir?
- polecenie, komendę - przeważnie w trzeciej osobie w regulaminach, przepisach,
notach ostrzegawczych np.
The Board members will report on their new ventures to the chairman.
Future Perfect - Future Perfect Continuous  107-108
Future Perfect

I will have taken will I have taken? I will not have taken
you will have taken will you have taken? you will not have taken
he will have taken will he have taken? he will not have taken
she will have taken will she have taken? she will not have taken
it will have taken will it have taken? it will not have taken
we will have taken will we have taken? we will not have taken
you will have taken will you have taken? you will not have taken
they will have taken will they have taken? they will not have taken
243
Czasownikiem posiłkowym w czasie ‘Future Perfect’ jest ‘will’ natomiast czasownik główny
przybiera postać imiesłowu biernego. Czas ‘Future Perfect’ służy do wyrażenia czynności,
która zostanie zakończona przed danym momentem w czasie przyszłym. Moment ten jest na
ogół zdefiniowany przy pomocy wyrażenia z przyimkiem ‘by’ np.
By tomorrow, I will have read all the articles in the magazine.
We will have returned from the trip by 1 January.
By next month, she will have passed her final examinations.
Future Perfect Continuous
twierdzenie pytanie
I will have been working will I have been working?
you will have been working will you have been working?
he will have been working will he have been working?
she will have been working will she have been working?
it will have been working will it have been working?
we will have been working will we have been working?
you will have been working will you have been working?
they will have been working will they have been working?
przeczenie
I will not have been working
you will not have been working
he will not have been working
she will not have been working
it will not have been working
we will not have been working
you will not have been working
they will not have been working
Czas ‘Future Perfect Continuous’ składa się z operatora ‘will’, formy ciągłej ‘Perfect’ - ‘have
been’ oraz czasownika głównego z końcówką ‘-ing’. Czas ten służy do
wyrażenia czynności, która do określonego momentu w przyszłości trwać będzie przez
zdefiniowaną długość czasu. Podobnie jak w czasie ‘Future Perfect’ wyrażenie czasowe
wprowadzane jest po przyimku ‘by’ np.
By next week, I will have been working for the firm for four years.
We’ll have been playing chess for two hours by ten o’clock.
W czasie ‘Future Perfect Continuous’ nie używa się czasowników, które nie występują
normalnie we formie ciągłej. Chcąc określić ile razy dana czynność zostanie powtórzona do
244
danego momentu w przyszłości, należy użyć czasu ‘Future Perfect’, nie ‘Future Perfect
Continuous’ np.
By October, I will have made four designs for the agency.
She will have delivered ten reports by next Friday.
Past Perfect  109

I had begun had I begun? I had not begun
you had begun had you begun? you had not begun
he had begun had he begun? he had not begun
she had begun had she begun? she had not begun
it had begun had it begun? it had not begun
we had begun had we begun? we had not begun
you had begun had you begun? you had not begun
they had begun had they begun? they had not begun
skrócona forma przecząca: had not = hadn’t

Czasownikiem posiłkowym w czasie ‘Past Perfect’ jest ‘had’ natomiast czasownik główny
przybiera formę imiesłowu biernego. Czas ‘Past Perfect’ określany jest mianem czasu
‘zaprzeszłego’, gdyż wyraża czynność dokonaną wcześniej
w przeszłości niż inna czynność przeszła stanowiąca punkt odniesienia.
Wraz z czasem ‘Past Perfect’ stosowane są przyimki ‘for’ oraz ‘since’ definiujące długość
trwania czynności ‘zaprzeszłej’ np.
The Browns moved to the house where their relatives had lived in 1920.
I had worked in the factory for ten years when it closed down.
Mark had been married for six years when he decided to ask for a divorce.
Przyimek ‘before - przed, wcześniej’ stosowany jest przy wyrażeniu zależności czasowej np.
Before we set out, we had gathered our equipment.
There had been a few strikes before the agreement was signed.
Relację czasową można również określić przy użyciu spójników ‘when’ oraz ‘after’, które
podkreślają, iż jedna czynność została definitywnie zakończona zanim nastąpiła kolejna np.
When I had written my homework, I took a bath.
When we had sold all the goods, we shared our profits.
After I had written the test, I was allowed to leave the classroom.
Jim moved to Newcastle after he had finished his studies in London.
245
Przyimki ‘till / until’ występują z czasem ‘Past Perfect’ dla określenia momentu definitywnego
zakończenia czynności ‘zaprzeszłej’ np.
The poor mother didn’t stop crying until her baby had been found safe.
I waited for my wife till she had done her shopping in the store.
Past Perfect Continuous  110
twierdzenie pytanie
I had been controlling had I been controlling?
you had been controlling had you been controlling?
he had been controlling had he been controlling?
she had been controlling had she been controlling?
it had been controlling had it been controlling?
we had been controlling had we been controlling?
you had been controlling had you been controlling?
they had been controlling had they been controlling?
przeczenie
I had not been waiting
you had not been waiting
he had not been waiting
she had not been waiting
it had not been waiting
we had not been waiting
you had not been waiting
they had not been waiting
skrócona forma przecząca: had not been doing = hadn’t been doing
Czas ‘Past Perfect Continuous’ składa się z czasownika posiłkowego ‘had’ formy ‘been’ oraz
czasownika głównego z końcówką ‘-ing’. ‘Past Perfect Continuous’ podobnie jak ‘Past
Perfect’ wyraża czynność ‘zaprzeszłą’ czyli wykonywaną wcześniej niż inna czynność
dokonana, będąca punktem odniesienia.
Czas ‘Past Perfect Continuous’ może wyrażać czynność, która wykonywana była
nieprzerwanie do momentu, gdy nastąpiła inna. W tym znaczeniu czynność ‘zaprzeszła
trwająca’ często określona jest wyrażeniem czasowym z przyimkiem ‘for’ lub ‘since’ np.
I had been sleeping for two hours before some noise woke me up.
The travellers had been walking since morning when they finally reached the frontier.
246
Długość trwania czynności ‘zaprzeszłej’ nie musi, jednakże, być zdefiniowana np.
I felt awfully tired. I had been working hard.
Wyrażamy w ten sposób jaka czynność była wykonywana zanim nastąpiła inna np.
He had white spots all over his face. He had been painting the walls.
We saw she was wearing headphones. She had been listening to music.
Chcąc podkreślić ile razy dana czynność ‘zaprzeszła’ została powtórzona należy użyć ‘Past
Perfect’, nie ‘Past Perfect Continuous’ np.
Before I was finally accepted, I had written three extensive tests.
We had met twice before we were formally introduced to each other.
Tryb warunkowy I  116, 119, 121
Zdanie warunkowe pierwszego trybu odnosi się do czasu teraźniejszego lub przyszłego.
Warunek wprowadzony po spójniku ‘if - jeżeli’ zakłada, iż określona czynność możliwa jest
do wykonania. Zdanie warunkowe składa się ze zdania podrzędnego wprowadzającego
warunek oraz zdania nadrzędnego, które określa
Skutek, jaki nastąpi po spełnieniu tego warunku. W zdaniu podrzędnym po spójniku ‘if’
stosuje się czas ‘Present Simple’, nie zaś czas przyszły jak w języku polskim.
W zdaniu nadrzędnym wyrażającym skutek występuje czas ‘Future Simple’ np.
If Paula gets the job, she will be very happy.
If we arrive too late, our parents will be angry.
If you don’t stop smoking, you will ruin your health.
Kolejność zdania podrzędnego i nadrzędnego jest dowolna, jednakże należy pamiętać, iż
jeżeli zdanie warunkowe poprzedza zdanie wynikowe na ogół są one oddzielone
przecinkiem np.
If I get up early, I won’t miss my bus.
I will miss my bus if I don’t get up early.
Zdania warunkowe mogą występować z czasownikami modalnymi, które zastępują
wyrażenie w czasie przyszłym w zdaniu nadrzędnym np.
If you give him the money, he may waste it.
You can refuse to speak if you don’t want to.
Frank might forget to come if I don’t remind him to.
Alice ought to work harder if she wants to earn more.
If they hope to win, they must run faster.
If I meet your wife, can I invite her to lunch?
Zdania warunkowe pierwszego trybu mogą również służyć do wyrażenia czynności
powtarzającej się regularnie jako skutek obowiązujących prawideł. W zdaniu nadrzędnym -
wynikowym występuje wówczas ‘Present Simple’ zamiast ‘Future Simple’ np.
247
If there is not enough food, people suffer.
Cats purr if you stroke their fur.
Tryb warunkowy II  117, 119-121
Zdanie warunkowe drugiego trybu odnosi się do czasu teraźniejszego lub przyszłego
i służy do wyrażenia przypuszczenia jak zmieniłaby się określona sytuacja, gdyby spełniony
został dany warunek lub warunki. Na ogół zdanie warunkowe drugiego trybu wyraża sytuację
nierealną - hipotetyczną - istniejącą jedynie w sferze przypuszczenia. W zdaniu podrzędnym
wprowadzającym warunek przy pomocy spójnika ‘if - jeżeli’ występuje czas ‘Past Simple’,
natomiast ewentualny skutek określony w zdaniu nadrzędnym wyrażony jest w trybie
przypuszczającym za pomocą operatora ‘would’. Jeżeli zdanie warunkowe rozpoczyna się
od zdania podrzędnego z ‘if’ jest ono zwykle oddzielone od zdania wynikowego przecinkiem
np.
If I had more time, I would certainly help you.
If James was with us now, I would feel safer.
We would spend the night in a hotel if we had enough money.
Czasownik ‘to be’ w drugim trybie warunkowym może wystąpić w postaci regularnej odmiany
‘Past Simple’, choć również w postaci ‘were’ przy każdej osobie liczby pojedynczej i mnogiej
np.
If I was / were more experienced, I would tell you how to cope with this problem.
If Elisabeth was / were at home, she would prepare supper for us.
If it was / were warmer, we would go swimming.
! Należy zwrócić szczególną uwagę na fakt, iż ściągnięta forma operatora ‘would’ jest
identyczna jak ściągnięta forma ‘had’. Dlatego konieczna jest ostrożność przy
interpretacji obydwu skróconych form np.
I’d (would) deliver these letters myself if I could.
I’d (had) delivered these letters myself. – ‘Past Perfect’
W zdaniu nadrzędnym oprócz operatora ‘would’ mogą pojawić się czasowniki modalne w
postaci trybu przypuszczającego tj. ‘could / might’ np.
The atmosphere might improve if they stopped nagging at us.
If you invited Tom, he could come with his jolly companions.
W zdaniu warunkowym można zastosować formę ciągłą ‘Past Continuous’ oraz ‘would /
could / might + be doing’ jeżeli warunek dotyczy chwili obecnej lub czynności zaplanowanej
w przyszłości np.
I wouldn’t be feeling so scared if you weren’t driving so fast.
If it was summer, we might be bathing in the sea.
If you were going to Leeds next week, I might be going with you.
248
W zdaniu nadrzędnym zamiast operatora ‘would’ może pojawić się czas ‘Past Simple’ jeżeli
wyrażona czynność nie jest regularnym warunkiem, lecz określeniem czynności realnej
będącej skutkiem innej czynności w czasie przeszłym np.
If you stamped your foot, the dog escaped.
If one shouted at Jim, he started crying.
Tryb przypuszczający może występować w postaci uprzejmych pytań lub próśb np.
Would you help me this evening, please?
Would you be so kind as to come and repair the fridge?
Tryb warunkowy III  118, 120-121
Trzeci tryb warunkowy łączy się z dokonanym trybem przypuszczającym w postaci:

‘would + have + imiesłów bierny’.
Czasownik w zdaniu warunkowym wprowadzonym przez spójnik ‘if - jeżeli’ występuje w
czasie ‘Past Perfect’. Hipotetyczny skutek w zdaniu podrzędnym wynikowym odnosi się do
sytuacji w czasie przeszłym. Trzeci tryb warunkowy wyraża skutek, który nie mógł nastąpić,
gdyż warunek określony w zdaniu nadrzędnym nie został spełniony.
Jeżeli zdanie warunkowe poprzedza zdanie wynikowe, są one na ogół oddzielone
przecinkiem np.
If we had hurried up, we wouldn’t have missed the bus.
If Simon had learned more, he would have passed his exam.
I wouldn’t have caught a cold, if I had put on warmer clothes.
W zdaniu nadrzędnym zamiast trybu przypuszczającego można użyć dokonaną formę
czasownika modalnego. Forma ta również wyraża skutek, który nie wystąpił ze
względu na fakt, iż określony warunek nie został spełniony np.
I could have gone home earlier if I had done the paperwork faster.
If you hadn’t slowed down, you might have paid a fine.
Zarówno w zdaniu nadrzędnym, jak i podrzędnym trzeciego trybu warunkowego może
wystąpić forma ciągła np.
If you had been standing still, you would have been hit by the rock.
We would have been crawling the whole morning if the captain hadn’t
withdrawn his punitive order.
Jeżeli skutek przeszłego warunku odnosi się do czasu teraźniejszego, możliwe jest
połączenie trzeciego trybu warunkowego z drugim np.
If I hadn’t drunk so much yesterday, I wouldn’t be feeling so bad now.
There would be more people at the party if we had distributed more free invitations.
249
If - unless  122
Zdania warunkowe wprowadzane są przez spójnik ‘if - jeżeli, gdyby’ np.

If you promise to arrive early, we’ll wait for you.
Podobne zdanie warunkowe może zawierać przeczenie np.
If you don’t promise to arrive early, we won’t wait for you.
Zaprzeczenie, które występuje w zdaniu podrzędnym - ‘if not’ można zastąpić spójnikiem
‘unless’, który swoim znaczeniem bliski jest polskiemu ‘jeżeli nie, chyba że’. Zdanie
warunkowe wprowadzone przy użyciu ‘unless’ nie wymaga formy przeczącej np.
Unless you learn more, you will not pass your examinations.
We will give up further climbing unless the conditions improve.
Unless I am made to stay longer in the office, I will call on you.
Konstrukcja warunkowa z ‘unless’ ma zastosowanie jako forma ostrzeżenia lub groźby np.
You won’t get any bonus unless you work better.
Unless they tell us the truth, they will have to be punished.
Wish + Past Simple / Past Perfect / would  123-124
Czasownik ‘wish’ służy do wyrażenia życzenia lub prośby w dowolnym czasie. Jako zwykły
czasownik w znaczeniu ‘życzyć sobie, chcieć, pragnąć’ występuje z formą bezokolicznikową
np.
Do you wish to listen to the recording once again?
She wished to express a complaint to the chef.
I don’t wish to disturb you, but I have to ask you a question.
‘Wish’ może również wystąpić z dopełnieniem wyrażając życzenie odnoszące się do drugiej
osoby np.
We wish our son to become a scientist.
Sally wished her father to take her to the show.
Czasownik ‘wish’ występuje w konstrukcjach z czasami przeszłymi wyrażając życzenia
‘nierealne’.
‘Wish (that) + ‘Past Simple’ / ‘Past Continuous’ - służy do wyrażenia życzenia lub żalu
odnoszącego się do sytuacji teraźniejszej, którą mówiący chciałby móc zmienić. Tak
wyrażone życzenie może odnosić się do samego podmiotu lub dopełnienia np.
I wish I had more free time for myself.
We wish our teachers didn’t give us so much homework.
Tom wishes he was resting now.
250
Podobne życzenia można wyrazić w czasie przeszłym np.
I wished I had some money on me.
She wished she was able to take part in the ceremony.
Powyższe życzenia odnoszą się do tego samego momentu w czasie przeszłym,
w którym zaszła potrzeba ich wyrażenia. Nie odnoszą się one do czynności wcześniejszej w
przeszłości. Niekiedy zamiast czasu ‘Past Simple’ po ‘wish’ można użyć ‘would +
bezokolicznik’. Znaczenie tej konstrukcji zakłada, iż wyrażone życzenie,
odnoszące się do teraźniejszości może zostać spełnione jeżeli dana osoba okaże chęć jego
wykonania. Tak wyrażone życzenie zawsze odnosi się do osoby innej niż podmiot zdania.
Pomimo faktu, iż konstrukcja ta zakłada możliwość spełnienia danego życzenia często ma
ona zabarwienie braku nadziei np.
I wish my sons would act more responsibly.
Alice wishes her boyfriend would bring her flowers more often.
I wish you would talk to me about your problems.
Konstrukcja ‘wish + Past Perfect’ służy do wyrażenia żalu lub życzenia ‘nierealnego’, które
odnosi się do czasu przeszłego. Konstrukcja ta całkowicie wyklucza możliwość zmiany
zaistniałej sytuacji, gdyż określa ona czynność już dokonaną np.
Nigel wishes he hadn’t sold his car.
Do you wish you had gone skiing with us?
I wish my parents had sent me to a public school.
Podobne życzenie wyrażone w czasie przeszłym odnosi się do czynności ‘zaprzeszłej’ np.
We wished we had followed your advice.
I wished Mary hadn’t left me.
Wish - if only  125
Zdanie wyrażające życzenie przy pomocy czasownika ‘wish’ można zastąpić konstrukcją ‘if
only’.
‘If only + Past Simple’ podobnie jak ‘wish + Past Simple’ wyraża życzenie odnoszące się do
teraźniejszości np.
I wish William earned more. = If only William earned more.
We wish we lived in a city. = If only we lived in a city.
‘If only + Past Perfect’ podobnie jak ‘wish + Past Perfect’ wyraża życzenie odnoszące się do
czasu przeszłego np.
I wish I hadn’t lost my job. = If only I hadn’t lost my job.
We wish she had agreed to stay. = If only she had agreed to stay.
Konstrukcja ‘if only + would’ wyraża to samo znaczenie, co ‘wish + would’ np.
251
If only Mark wouldn’t eat so much.
If only Harry would leave the bad company.
‘If only’ może wystąpić z czasem ‘Present Simple’ lub ‘Future Simple’ wyrażając nadzieję, iż
dana czynność zostanie wykonana np.
If only it stops raining so heavily.
If only Cindy will bring her new born baby.
Mowa zależna  126-131
Zdania twierdzące.
Mowa zależna występuje, gdy przytaczamy czyjąś wypowiedź, zamieniając oryginalną
wiadomość w relację wprowadzoną przy użyciu czasowników ‘relacjonujących’ typu: ‘ask’,
‘explain’, ‘remind’, ‘say’, ‘tell’ np.
Charles: ‘I am happy’ Eric: ‘Charles says that he is happy.’
Oprócz wyżej wymienionych czasowników inne często używane w mowie zależnej
czasowniki ‘relacjonujące’ to:
admit, answer, boast, claim, complain, deny, notice,
object, observe, promise, reply, whisper
Wypowiedzi relacjonowane w czasach ‘Present Simple’, ‘Present Continuous’, ‘Present
Perfect’ lub ‘Future Simple’ nie wymagają żadnych zmian czasowych
w zdaniu podrzędnym - relacjonowanym np.
Tom: ‘I am in love with Betty.’
Freddie: ‘Tom has just admitted that he is in love with Betty.’
Present Perfect
Alice: ‘I will come in time.’
Brenda: ‘Alice promises that she will come in time.’
Present Simple
Ronald: ‘I was not responsible for the accident.’
Harold: ‘Ronald claims that he was not responsible for the accident.’
Present Simple
Wypowiedzi relacjonowane w czasie przeszłym ‘Past Simple’ podlegają zmianom czasowym
określonym przez regułę następstwa czasów:
a) Present Simple  Past Simple
Nick: ‘I like dancing.’ Nick said he liked dancing.
b) Present Continuous  Past Continuous
David: ‘I am reading.’ David said he was reading.
c) Present Perfect  Past Perfect
Lisa: ‘I have eaten lunch .’ Lisa said she had eaten lunch.
252
d) Present Perfect Continuous  Past Perfect Continuous
Dan: ‘I have been running.’ Dan said he had been running.
e) Past Simple  Past Perfect
Jack: ‘I met Caroline.’ Jack said he had met Caroline.
f) Future Simple  Future Simple in the Past
Mike: ‘I will leave a note.’ Mike said he would leave a note.
g) Future Continuous  Future Continuous in the Past
Jeff: ‘I will be waiting.’ Jeff said he would be waiting.
Określenia czasowe również ulegają zmianom w mowie zależnej w czasie przeszłym np.
tomorrow  the next day, the following day
next week / month / year  the following week / month / year.
today  that day
now  then
yesterday  the day before, the previous day
last week / month / year  the previous week / month / year
a month / year ago  a month / year before
this week / month  that week / month
George: ‘I returned home last week.’
George said he had returned home the previous week.
Mary: ‘I am meeting Mr Giggs tomorrow.’
Mary said she was meeting Mr Giggs the next day.
! Jeżeli relacja dotyczy czynności określonej tego samego dnia, wówczas wyrażenie
czasowe nie ulega zmianie np.
Peter: ‘I am leaving today.’
Peter said he was leaving today.
W niektórych sytuacjach również forma czasowa zdania relacjonowanego w czasie
przeszłym nie ulega zmianie. Dzieje się tak często w języku potocznym jeżeli sens zdania
jest dobrze zrozumiały. Czas ‘Past Simple’ często pozostaje niezmieniony
w zdaniu relacjonowanym np.
Sue: ‘I went home at eleven.’
Sue says she went (had gone) home at eleven.
Czas 'Present Simple’ może pozostać niezmieniony jeżeli dana sytuacja jest nadal aktualna
np.
Nick: ‘I work for M & S.’
Nick said he works (worked) for M & S.
Czas ‘Past Continuous’ może pozostać niezmieniony jeżeli czynność, którą wyraża nie jest
określona jako dokonana np.
253
Sean: ‘I was typing letters at eight a.m.’
Sean said he was typing letters at eight a.m.’
Czasowniki modalne zmieniają swą postać w mowie zależnej:
can  could / was able may  might / was allowed to
Karen: ‘I can phone you in the evening.’
Karen said she could / was able to phone me in the evening.
Gordon: ‘I may have to stay longer at school.’
Gordon said he might have to stay longer at school.
Czasowniki modalne: ‘could / might / should / ought to / used to’ pozostają
niezmienione np.
Sheila: ‘I could sing well.’
Sheila said she could sing well.
Paul: ‘You might get into trouble.’
Paul said we might get into trouble.
Czasownik modalny ‘must’ przybiera formę ‘had to’ lub pozostaje niezmieniony.
Bill: ‘I must remember to water the plants.’
Bill said he must / had to remember to water the plants.
Wyrażenia określające nierealny czas przeszły tj. ‘had better’, ‘would rather’, ‘it is (high)
time’, tryb warunkowy II i III nie ulegają zmianom w mowie zależnej np.
Lena: ‘You had better consult a doctor.’
Lena said we had better consult a doctor.
Ted: ‘It is high time someone called the police.’
Ted said it was high time someone called the police.
Ruth: ‘If I were thinner, I could work as a model.’
Ruth said that if she were thinner she could work as a model.
Pytania w mowie zależnej.
Pytania zależne wprowadzane w czasie przeszłym podlegają takim samym przeobrażeniom
czasowym jak twierdzenia. Pytania zależne najczęściej wprowadza się przy użyciu
czasowników: ‘ask, inquire, want to know, wonder’.
Pytanie zależne podlega również przemianie strukturalnej przechodząc w formę twierdzącą,
w której orzeczenie występuje po podmiocie. W pytaniu zależnym nie używa się znaku
zapytania np.
Ann: ‘Where is the nearest post office?
Ann wanted to know where the nearest post office was.
Robert: ‘What is Tony doing in this brand new Jaguar?’
Rober wondered what Tony was doing in that brand new Jaguar.
Spójnikiem łączącym zdanie nadrzędne z podrzędnym może być zaimek pytający jak w
powyższym przykładzie. Jeżeli jednak pytanie jest natury ogólnej i nie zawiera zaimka
254
pytającego, wówczas spójnikiem jest ‘if - czy’ lub jego rzadziej stosowany odpowiednik
‘whether’ np.
Peter: ‘Does Jimmy like classical music?
Peter asked if / whether Jimmy liked classical music.
! W pytaniach o podmiot zdania, które posiadają strukturę twierdzącą przemianie
ulega jedynie postać czasownika np.
Angie: ‘Who damaged the machine?’
Angie wanted to know who had damaged the machine.
Louis: ‘What made you resign?’
Louis was curious what had made me resign.
Sugestie, propozycje, rozkazy, prośby w mowie zależnej.
Relacjonując sugestie, propozycje, jak również rozkazy i prośby istotne jest właściwe
rozpoznanie zabarwienia znaczeniowego danej wypowiedzi oraz użycie właściwego
czasownika relacjonującego. Wśród tych czasowników najczęściej stosowane to:
ask, advise, beg, command, encourage, invite, offer, order,
promise, recommend, remind, request, suggest, tell, urge, warn
Polecenia, rozkazy lub rady są zwykle relacjonowane przy użyciu konstrukcji składającej się
z dopełnienia oraz czasownika w formie bezokolicznikowej np.
Mike: ‘Wipe your feet clean !’
Mike told me to wipe my feet clean.
Stella: ‘You should be patient.’
Stella advised us to be patient.
John: ‘Don’t forget to bring the money.’
John reminded us to bring the money.
Eric: ‘Will you type the letter, please?’
Eric asked his secretary to type the letter.
Bob: ‘You should think about buying Greg a birthday present.’
Bob advised us to buy Greg a birthday present.’
! Przy relacjonowaniu poleceń przeczących lub sugestii używana jest zaprzeczona
forma bezokolicznika, którą tworzy się poprzez dodanie słowa ‘not’ przed partykułą
‘to’ np.
Frank: ‘Don’t forget about your duties.’
Frank advised me not to forget about my duties.
Alice: ‘You shouldn’t walk out alone at night.’
Alice warned us not to walk out alone at night.
Czasowniki ‘advise, command, order, recommend, remind, say, suggest, tell, urge, warn’
mogą wystąpić z konstrukcją: ‘that + podmiot + should’ np.
Lisa: ‘You had better give up smoking.’
Lisa advised her husband that he should give up smoking.
255
Adam: ‘Why don’t you change the schedule?’
Adam advised that we should change the schedule.
Mary: ‘Let’s set out earlier this time.’
Mary suggested that we should set out earlier that time.
Steve: ‘Don’t ever come late !’
Steve warned me that I should never come late.
Czasowniki ‘advise, recommend, suggest’ mogą także wystąpić z formą Gerund np.
Sylvia: ‘Let’s call for the Parkers.’
Sylvia suggested calling for the Parkers.
Nigel: ‘You had better consult Mr Turner on the matter.’
Nigel advised our consulting Mr Turner on the matter.
Had better  132
Konstrukcja ‘had better + bezokolicznik’ bez partykuły ‘to’ służy do wyrażenia sugestii lub
rady. Jej odpowiednikiem w polskim znaczeniu jest ‘lepiej będzie jeżeli’. Forma ‘had better’
występuje w jednakowej postaci przy każdej osobie, a swym znaczeniem odwołuje się do
teraźniejszości lub przyszłości np.
George had better get down to work.
We had better stop making so much noise.
Zaprzeczenie konstrucji ‘had better’ tworzy się przy użyciu słowa ‘not’ przed
bezokolicznikiem czasownika np.
You had better not use the faulty oven.
She had better not eat the grapes.
Forma pytająca tworzona przez inwersję czasownika posiłkowego ‘had’ występuje
stosunkowo rzadko, za wyjątkiem pytania przeczącego, które używane jest jako forma
sugestii lub rady np.
Hadn’t you better wait till you find out everything?
Hadn’t he better take off the wet shoes?
Would rather - (would) prefer  133-134
Konstrukcja ‘would rather’ oraz czasownik ‘prefer’ stosowane są przy wyrażaniu

preferencji.
‘Would rather ... than‘ występuje z czasownikami w formie niepełnego
bezokolicznika jeżeli obydwie czynności dotyczą tego samego podmiotu np.
I would rather listen to music than watch television.
She’d rather bathe in the sea than do the sightseeing.
256
Konstrukcja ‘would rather’ może wyrażać preferencję w odniesieniu do innej osoby, niż
podmiot zdania. Czasownik po dopełnieniu występuje wówczas w czasie ‘Past Simple’ np.
I would rather you arrived earlier.
Stella would rather her son didn’t play with Simon.
We’d rather our teachers weren’t so strict.
Preferencje wyrażone w powyższy sposób odnoszą się do czasu teraźniejszego lub
przyszłego. Aby wyrazić życzenie nierealne odnoszące się do czasu przeszłego, należy użyć
konstrukcję ‘would rather’ wraz z dokonaną formą bezokolicznika np.
We spent the day in the pub, but I’d rather we have spent it in the sports centre.
He worked as a constable, but he’d rather have worked as a secret agent.
(Would) prefer
Czasownik ‘prefer’ występuje z przyimkiem ‘to’. Może on wyrażać preferencje
z użyciem rzeczowników oraz zaimków np.
Cathy prefers American films to European ones.
My father prefers cigars to cigarettes.
Czasowniki występujące po ‘prefer’ przybierają postać Gerund np.
I prefer jogging to playing volleyball.
They prefer sunbathing to sailing.
Czasownik ‘prefer’ występując w czasie przeszłym zastępuje formę ‘would rather’, która nie
posiada własnej formy przeszłej np.
I preferred coffee to tea.
Angela preferred staying at home to walking round the city.
‘Would prefer’ występuje z pełnym bezokolicznikiem czasownika. Konstrukcja ta wyraża
preferencję odnoszącą się tylko do jednej czynności np.
Michael would prefer to live alone.
I would rather share a flat with my friends than live alone.
Konstrukcja ‘would prefer’ może wyrażać preferencję w odniesieniu do innej osoby.
Po dopełnieniu stosuje się wówczas pełny bezokolicznik czasownika np.
I would prefer my son to become an architect.
We’d prefer the Thompsons to move upstairs.
Bezokolicznik po ‘would prefer’ może przybrać formę dokonaną wyrażając preferencję
nierealną odnoszącą się do czasu przeszłego np.
We went to Greece, but we’d prefer to have gone to Spain.
She received free tickets, but she’d prefer to have received cash.
257
It is (high) time  135
Konstrukcja it’s (high) time służy do wyrażenia polecenia wykonania czynności, której
czas nadszedł lub minął. Konstrukcja ta występuje z pełnym bezokolicznikiem czasownika
np.
It is time to collect our children from the nursery.
It’s high time to leave.
Do formy bezokolicznikowej można dodać dopełnienie przy pomocy przyimka ‘for’ np.
It is time for us to make changes.
It is high time for you to start studying.
Jeżeli zamiast bezokolicznika po dopełnieniu pojawi się czasownik w postaci ‘Past Simple’,
będzie on podkreślał, iż wykonanie danej czynności opóźnia się za bardzo np.
It’s time I bought a new pair of shoes.
It’s time they returned the loan to the bank.
It’s high time Mary went to a doctor.
It’s high time we phoned the police.
Strona bierna  136-139
Stronę bierną w języku angielskim tworzy się przy użyciu odmiany czasownika posiłkowego
‘be’ oraz imiesłowu biernego głównego czasownika. Czasownik posiłkowy ‘be’ odmieniany
jest stosownie do czasu w zdaniu w stronie czynnej oraz osoby stanowiącej podmiot. W
stronie biernej podmiotem staje się dopełnienie ze zdania w stronie czynnej. Osoba będąca
wykonawcą czynności jest pomijana lub też
wspomina się ją po przyimku ‘by - przez’. Należy pamiętać, iż zaimki osobowe podlegają
odmianie przez przypadki zajmując miejsce po przyimku. Niekiedy, oprócz czasownika
posiłkowego ‘be’ w stronie biernej niektórych czasów występują dodatkowe formy posiłkowe,
określające czas zdania jak na przykład ‘being’
w czasach ‘Continuous’, lub ‘been’ w czasach ‘Perfect’.
Present Simple
I collect stamps.  Stamps are collected (by me).
We publish a magazine.  A magazine is published (by us).
Present Continuous
She is writing a letter.  A letter is being written (by her).
They are selling cars.  Cars are being sold (by them).
258
Present Perfect
He has made a mistake.  A mistake has been made (by him).
I have found a few coins.  A few coins have been found (by me).
Past Simple
He built a house.  A house was built (by him).
We kept cows.  Cows were kept (by us).
Past Continuous
She was eating icecream.  Icecream was being eaten (by her).
You were painting pictures.  Pictures were being painted (by you).
Past Perfect
We had opened an account.  An account had been opened (by us).
You had lost the bags.  The bags had been lost (by you).
Future Simple
I will clean the rooms.  The rooms will be cleaned (by me).
We will offer help.  Help will be offered (by us).
tryb warunkowy
They would increase rates.  Rates would be increased (by them).
We would close the gate.  The gate would be closed (by us).
czasowniki modalne
I can replace the pipe.  The pipe can be replaced (by me).
They should raise money.  Money should be raised (by them).
She must finish the task.  The task must be finished (by her).
Formy bezokolicznikowe w stronie biernej.

I would like you to cut the grass.  I would like the grass to be cut (by
you)
She wants me to repair her iron.  She wants her iron to be repaired
(by me)
! Czasy ‘Present Perfect Continuous’, ‘Past Perfect Continuous’, ‘Future Continuous’
oraz ‘Future Perfect Continuous’ nie posiadają form w stronie biernej.
Czasowniki ‘believe’, ‘claim’, ‘consider’, ‘find’, ‘know’, ‘report’, ‘say’, ‘think’ stosowane są w
stronie biernej z podmiotem bezosobowym lub wieloosobowym oraz konstrukcją
bezokolicznikową np.
Everybody knows that Peter is a good swimmer. =
Peter is known to be a good swimmer.
People consider you to be a real specialist. =
You are considered to be a real specialist.
Someone said that the statue had been stolen. =
The statue was said to have been stolen.
259
Czasowniki ‘advise, agree, decide, demand, determine, order, propose, recommend,
suggest’ mogą wystąpić w stronie biernej z konstrukcją: that ... (should) be np.
He advised to lower the prices. =
He advised that the prices (should) be lowered.
We have decided to invite more guests. =
We have decided that more guests (should) be invited.
Czasowniki z przyimkami.
W stronie biernej przyimki pozostają przy czasownikach, po których występują np.
They are looking after our children.
Our children are being looked after by them.
The people have asked for a new solution.
A new solution has been asked for.
He made up a good excuse.
A good excuse was made up by him.
Podobnie przyimek ‘by’ wprowadzający nazwę wykonawcy czynności w pytaniach lub
zdaniach złożonych w stronie biernej znajduje się po czasowniku np.
Who was the picture painted by?
I wonder who she has been employed by.
What were they being interviewed about?
He had no idea what he had been punished for.
Zastosowanie strony biernej.
W języku angielskim stronę bierną stosuje się znacznie częściej niż w języku polskim. Strona
bierna stosowana jest jeżeli wykonawca danej czynności jest nieistotny lub bliżej nieznany
np.
Light was switched on.
A new church is being built.
Stronę bierną używa się również kiedy wykonawcą czynności jest podmiot ogólny -
wieloosobowy ‘they, people, everybody itp.’ np
People say that the hotel is very expensive. =
The hotel is said to be very expensive.
Everybody knows that Lisa works as a model. =
Lisa is known to work as a model.
Podobne zdania w stronie biernej można wyrazić za pomocą konstrukcji ‘it is said /
believed / claimed itd. that ...’ np.
It is said that the hotel is very expensive.
It is known that Lisa works as a model.
It’s believed that this castle is haunted.
Stronę bierną można także zastosować jeżeli wykonawca czynności jest znany, lecz nie jest
tak istotny, jak sam fakt wykonania owej czynności np.
260
My neighbour produces these figures in Dover. =
These figures are produced in Dover.
W zdaniach, w których występuje dopełnienie bliższe oraz dopełnienie dalsze stronę bierną
można utworzyć na dwa sposoby np.
I gave Mr Harris the plan.
1. The plan was given to Mr Harris.
2. Mr Harris was given the plan.
She offered me the collection.
1. The collection was offered to me.
2. I was offered the collection.
Konstrukcje bezokolicznikowe  140-145
Pełny bezokolicznik angielskiego czasownika występuje z partykułą ‘to’ np.

to sleep to learn to rest to organise
Bezokolicznik w języku angielskim może przybierać następujące postacie:
- forma ciągła:
to teach - to be teaching
to work - to be working
Eric seems to be feeling fine in Jack’s company.
Jules is supposed to be living abroad at present.
- forma dokonana:
to miss - to have missed
to keep - to have kept
He is believed to have worked for the enemy’s intelligence.
The ring appeared to have been stolen.
- forma dokonana ciągła:
to live - to have been living
to listen - to have been listening
They pretended to have been working really hard.
You are known to have been practicing judo for ten years now.
Zastosowanie form bezokolicznikowych.
Bezokolicznik w języku angielskim stosowany jest jako:
- forma wyrażająca cel określonej czynności - ‘aby’ np.
I am phoning to ask you a favour.
They came to take us to the match.
- forma zastępująca zdanie dopełnieniowe np.
He is happy to be (that he is) with us.
We hoped to see (that we would see) the pyramids in Egypt.
261
- podmiot zdania np.
To live alone can be difficult.
- przydawka np.
We were anxious to see the new flat.
You were the first to come up with the idea.
Bezokolicznik może występować w konstrukcji z dopełnieniem np.
I asked Peter to go with me.
She invited us to take part in the conference.
We’ve found him to be a very sensitive man.
Niektóre z czasowników, po których występuje dopełnienie z bezokolicznikiem to:
advise, ask, allow, believe, consider, demand, encourage, expect,
know, persuade, remember, remind, require, think, want, would like
We recommended them to turn left.
Did you allow the children to play outside?
She wants me to lend her money.
! Po czasownikach ‘let’ oraz ‘make’ czasownik występuje bez partykuły ‘to’ np.
She let us walk round her garden.
They made me sign the petition.
Po orzeczeniu określającym czynności narządów zmysłów czasownik występuje bez
partykuły ‘to’. Reguła ta dotyczy czasowników:
feel, hear, listen to, notice, observe, see, watch np.
They probably saw me hide the box.
Did you hear her sing?
Należy jednak pamiętać, iż powyższe czasowniki wyrażone w stronie biernej
wymagają użycia partykuły ‘to’ np.
I was probably seen to hide the box.
Was she heard to sing?
Bezokolicznik czasownika może wystąpić po innym czasowniku w stronie biernej np.
George is expected to arrive at any time.
Mr Black is said to have a good knowledge of Russian.
Bezokolicznik występuje również w konstrukcji:
‘for + rzeczownik / zaimek + bezokolicznik’
It is too cold for little children to play outside.
The best advice for you to follow is to keep silent.
Inne czasowniki występujące z pełnym bezokolicznikiem to:
agree, begin, continue, decide, forget, hate, intend, learn, like, love,
mean, need, permit, persuade, plan, propose, regret, remember,
require, start, stop, tend, threaten, try, want
262
Gerund  143-145
Formę ‘gerundialną’ czasownika nazywanego również rzeczownikiem

‘odczasownikowym’ tworzy się poprzez dodanie końcówki ‘ - ing’ np.
play - playing run - running compose - composing
Forma ta może przybierać w zdaniu funkcje:
- podmiotu np.
Climbing in winter can be dangerous.
Cooking is what I like a lot.
- dopełnienia np.
She likes sunbathing.
He prefers bathing in the sea.
W funkcji dopełnienia ‘Gerund’ występuje po czasownikach:
avoid, begin, continue, dread, enjoy, excuse, finish, forget, hate, like,
love, mind, prefer, remember, regret, require, start, stop, suggest, try
Forma ‘gerundialna’ stosowana jest po czasownikach lub przymiotnikach występujących z
przyimkami np.
Simon succeeded in winning the first prize.
I am interested in taking part in this prestigious conference.
Mary is afraid of staying alone in the house.
‘Gerund’ występuje po przymiotnikach ‘busy’ oraz ‘worth’ np.
She is busy preparing her speech.
This example is worth following.
Forma ‘gerundialna’ występuje także po wyrażeniach:
accustomed to, look forward to, used to, it’s no use, can’t stand, can’t help np.
Paula couldn’t help expressing her point of view.
It’s no use asking the boss for a rise.
Don’t worry. We’re accustomed to sleeping in the open air.
I do look forward to meeting the film director.
Forma ‘gerundialna’ może być poprzedzona zaimkiem dzierżawczym lub rzeczownikiem w
dopełniaczu np.
I cannot understand your being so stubborn.
There’s a hope of the postman’s coming early.
They don’t like our nagging at the question of sales.
Please excuse my being so inquisitive.
I recommend your getting up early.
Forma dokonana ‘Gerund’.
Formę dokonaną - ‘Gerund’ tworzy się przy użyciu operatora ‘having’ oraz imiesłowu
biernego czasownika np.
263
make - having made take - having taken
The boys admitted having stolen (that they had stolen) the camera.
I was accused of having been (that I had been) a spy.
You didn’t seem to mind our having drunk (that we had drunk) too much.
Bezokolicznik - Gerund  144-145
Po niektórych czasownikach może wystąpić forma bezokolicznikowa lub ‘Gerund’ np.

I began to write a book.
I began writing a book.
Niekiedy wybór jednej z obydwu form określony jest różnicą w wyrażonym znaczeniu.
Uwaga ta dotyczy czasowników:
agree, forget, mean, regret, remember, stop, try
Forma ‘Gerund’ po czasownikach ‘forget, regret, remember’ wyraża czynność przeszłą np.
I regret calling Andrew names. (I called Andrew names.)
I remember reading this poem. (I read this poem.)
Czasowniki ‘forget’, ‘regret’ i ‘remember’ użyte z bezokolicznikem same wyrażają czynność
wcześniejszą, niż ta w bezokoliczniku np.
I will remember to switch the lights off.
She forgot to phone me yesterday.
I regret to say that this offer is invalid.
Czasownik ‘agree’ występuje z bezokolicznikiem np.
Sheila has agreed to marry me.
We won’t agree to dismiss Mr Jones.
‘Agree’ może jednakże wystąpić z przyimkiem ‘to’ oraz formą ‘Gerund’ np.
She agreed to our spending the night in her house.
Czasownik ‘mean’ wraz z formą bezokolicznikową wyraża zamiar np.
I mean to go fishing in the morning.
‘Mean’ z formą gerundialną wyraża znaczenie ‘oznaczać, wymagać’ np.
We want to be in time, which means getting up at dawn.
Czasownik ‘stop’ z bezokolicznikem wyraża cel np.
We stopped to take a short rest.
‘Stop’ z formą ‘Gerund’ oznacza, iż wykonywanie danej czynności zostało zaprzestane
zupełnie np.
Daniel stopped smoking a year ago.
Niekiedy czasownik występuje z jedną z dwu form w zależności od tego czy następuje po
nim dopełnienie np.
264
Does your wife allow smoking in the kitchen?
Did she allow you to smoke in the kitchen?
Peter advised going right away.
Peter advised me to go right away.
Czasowniki po których może wystąpić forma bezokolicznikowa lub ‘Gerund’ to:
advise forget mean remember

allow hate prefer start
begin like recommend stop
continue love regret try
Imiesłów czynny i dokonany  146-147
Imiesłów czynny w języku angielskim jest tworzony przy użyciu końcówki ‘-ing’ np.
take - taking (biorący) run - running (biegnący)
Imiesłów czynny stosowany jest:
- przy tworzeniu czasów ‘Continuous’ np.
I am studying. We’ve been travelling. They were talking.
- jako przymiotnik np.
a disturbing remark increasing demand rising unemployment
- jako forma zastępująca zdanie z zaimkiem względnym np.
This is the factory (that produces) producing the most waste.
I have a friend (who wishes) wishing to meet you.
- jako forma równoważnikowa zdania okolicznikowego np.
As I was standing opposite the display, I caught a glimpse of someone inside.
Standing opposite the display, I caught a glimpse of someone inside.
- jako forma relacjonująca wypowiedź w mowie zależnej np.
She told me to wait adding that it might take a few minutes.
- po czasownikach ‘come, go, spend, waste’ np.
We went skiing in the Alps last winter.
He spends a lot of time answering his fans’ letters.
I wasted two hours trying to repair the watch.
- po czasownikach określających czynności narządów zmysłów:
feel, hear, listen to, notice, see, smell, watch
We saw a few people walking around the park.
Nobody heard the bell ringing.
I can smell the soup burning.
Someone was watching us working in the hall.
265
Forma imiesłowowa po czasownikach określających czynności narządów zmysłów może
wyrażać czynność dokonaną lub niedokonaną. Konstrukcją alternatywną jest czasownik w
niepełnym bezokoliczniku, który określa czynność dokonaną np.
They saw the man enter the building.
We watched them leave the place.
- w konstrukcji dopełnieniowej z czasownikami catch / find / leave np.
Jack caught a few boys manipulating with the receiver.
I often found her crying in her room.
They left us discussing the most important matter.
- w konstrukcji: ‘have + someone / something + ~ ing’ wyrażającej znaczenie
‘nakłonić kogoś do’ np.
He seems to ignore my orders. Soon, I will have him working properly.
Imiesłów dokonany
Imiesłów dokonany czasowników regularnych tworzy się przy użyciu końcówki ‘ -ed’,
natomiast czasowniki nieregularne posiadają odrębne formy np.
damage - damaged (zniszczony) take - taken (zabrany, wzięty)
Imiesłów dokonany stosowany jest:
- przy tworzeniu czasów ‘Perfect’ np.
We have removed the faulty wiring.
We had finished everything by Monday.
- przy tworzeniu strony biernej np.
Dust was removed from the exhaust pipe.
Your tooth will be pulled out.
We have been invited to the ceremony.
- jako przymiotnik np.
a damaged engine opened doors a rejected application
- jako forma zastępująca podmiot oraz orzeczenie w zdaniach w stronie biernej np.
The tree collapsed as it was struck by a lightning.
Struck by a lightning, the tree collapsed.
Perfect Participle - forma dokonana imiesłowu.
Formę dokonaną imiesłowu ‘Perfect Participle’ tworzy się przy użyciu operatora ‘having’.
Konstrukcja ‘Perfect Participle’ stosowana jest dla podkreślenia, iż dana czynność została
definitywnie zakończona, zanim nastąpiła kolejna np.
Having eaten breakfast, I went out to school.
Having opened the chest, we saw jewels of different kinds.
Formę ‘Past Participle’ można stosować zamiennie ze zdaniem podrzędnym wprowadzonym
przy użyciu przyimka ‘after / as’ oraz czasem ‘Past Perfect’ np.
After I had eaten breakfast, I went out to school.
As we had opened the chest, we saw jewels of different kinds.
266
Stronę bierną ‘Perfect Participle’ tworzy się przy użyciu operatora ‘been’ np.
Having been removed from the lucrative post, the man decided to write a complaint. =
After he had been removed from the lucrative post, the man decided to write a complaint.
Zdania czasowe  148-149
Zdania czasowe wprowadzane są przez spójniki:
after - po, po tym jak the moment - z chwilą gdy, jak tylko
as - kiedy, gdy the minute - z chwilą gdy, jak tylko
as soon as - jak tylko the sooner ... - im prędzej ...
before - przed, zanim till / until - dopóki, aż do
immediately - jak tylko when - kiedy, gdy
next time - następnym razem while - podczas gdy
Zdania czasowe stanowią odpowiedź na pytania: ‘When?’ ‘How long?’

Po spójniku czasowym orzeczenie występuje w czasie ‘Present’, nie ‘Future’, mimo iż
określona czynność odnosi się do przyszłości. Zdanie podrzędne określające skutek, jaki
nastąpi po spełnieniu danego warunku czasowego wyrażone jest w czasie ‘Future’ np.
As soon as Tom arrives, I will speak to him.
When I have time, I will visit my friends.
The race will begin the moment the flag goes up.
We’ll wait until the shops open.
Before I go away, I will pay back my debts.
It will get warmer after the wind disperses the clouds.
Niekiedy, zdanie czasowe wymaga użycia czasu ‘Present Perfect’, który określa długość
trwania czynności lub jej definitywne zakończenie np.
When you have spent at least two years in the country, you’ll begin to
understand its inhabitants’ way of thinking.
As soon as I have returned from the delegation, I will take a few days off.
After we have made all the necessary arrangements, we’ll start preparing the
official part of the ceremony.
W mowie zależnej zdania czasowe podlegają regule następstwa czasów np.
Harry: ‘I will not speak to Eddie until he apologises to me.’
Harry said he would not speak to Eddie until he apologised to him.
Spójnik czasowy ‘while’ łączy zdania wyrażające czynności, które w czasie przeszłym trwały
jednocześnie np.
267
We were playing cards while the other people were walking round the casino.
‘While’ z czasem ‘Present Continuous’ może określać warunek czasowy odnoszący się do
czynności trwającej w przyszłości np.
While we are driving home, we’ll stop to do some shopping.
Zdania celowe  150
Zdania celowe stanowią odpowiedź na pytanie: ‘Why?’ ‘What for?’

Cel określonej czynności można wyrazić przy pomocy konstrukcji bezokolicznikowej jeżeli
czynność ta odnosi się do osoby, którą jest podmiot zdania głównego np.
I have come to the office to ask for a job.
We are going to London to learn English.
Jeżeli, jednak, w zdaniu występuje dopełnienie, czynność określona konstrukcją celową
może odnosić się do niego, zamiast do podmiotu np.
We asked Bill to tell us about his adventures.
She’s sent for a doctor to examine her baby.
Konstrukcja bezokolicznikowa w zdaniach celowych może wystąpić z wyrażeniami ‘in order
to’ / ‘so as to’ np.
Stella stopped for a while in order to read the map.
Let’s go to the restaurant so as to eat a good dinner.
We got out of the car and went on foot in order not to make noise.
Tim turned his head so as not to breathe smoke.
Wyrażenie ‘in order to’ może być stosowane dla podkreślenia, iż cel danej czynności był
jeden np.
The beggar would come up to everyone in order to ask for money.
Jeżeli cel danej czynności odnosi się do osoby innej niż podmiot zdania głównego wówczas
stosuje się wyrażenia ‘so that / in order that’.
‘So that’ występuje z czasownikami modalnymi ‘can / may / shall / will’ spełniającymi funkcję
pomocniczą np.
I want to paint the letters in gold so that everyone can see them clearly.
You should bring your wife flowers so that she will know you care for her.
‘Could / might / should / would’ występują po ‘so that’ jeżeli zdanie wyraża czas przeszły np.
I had to change my lifestyle so that my friends would accept me again.
We wanted him to write everything down so that he should not forget about his duties.
Najpowszechniej stosowanymi formami po ‘so that’ są ‘can / could / will / would’.
Wyrażenie ‘in order that’ występuje z czasownikami modalnymi ‘may / might / shall / should’ i
jest mniej powszechne niż ‘so that’.
268
Forma ‘should’ może być również stosowana jeżeli zdanie wyraża czas teraźniejszy lub
przyszły np.
Jackie is going to bring her new book so that we should see it.
Zdania wynikowe  151
So ... that - tak(i) ... że

‘So’ pełni w zdaniu rolę przysłówka określającego przymiotnik lub inny przysłówek, który nie
określa rzeczownika np.
The music was so loud that we couldn’t sleep.
This animal is so dangerous that it must be kept in a cage.
She sang so wonderfully that we asked her for another encore.
James acted so bravely that everyone admired him.
‘So’ może, jednakże, występować przed przysłówkami ‘much’ oraz ‘many’, które określają
rzeczownik np.
You have so much time that you don’t know what to do.
We have grown so many tomatoes that we will have to sell some of them.
Such ... that - taki ... że
‘Such’ występuje w zdaniu w roli przymiotnika określającego inny przymiotnik, po którym
znajduje się rzeczownik np.
Bill is such a boring guy that he never gets invited to any parties.
It was such an exciting idea that I could hardly resist it.
‘Such’ nie występuje z przysłówkami ‘much’ oraz ‘many’.
! Konstrukcja ‘so ... that’ może zastąpić ‘such ... that’ jeżeli przedimek nieokreślony
‘a / an’ umieszczony zostanie bezpośrednio przed rzeczownikiem np.
Lucy is such a reliable person that I always confide in her.
Lucy is so reliable a person that I always confide in her.
Spójniki  152-153
Funkcją spójnika jest łączenie zdania nadrzędnego z podrzędnym. Niektóre spójniki

w języku angielskim mogą także pełnić inne funkcje gramatyczne. Miejsce, w którym należy
umieścić określony spójnik uzależnione jest od roli jaką spełnia w zdaniu.
Although - ‘mimo że’ - spójnik ten występuje na początku lub w środku zdania. ‘Although’
wymaga pełnej konstrukcji podmiotu z orzeczeniem np.
Although I felt sleepy, I stayed awake until two a.m.
Although her skills were most admirable, she didn’t get the job.
I couldn’t repair the CD player although I tried hard.
269
Spójnik ‘though’ - ‘mimo że’ może wystąpić na początku zdania w tej samej funkcji co
‘although’ np.
Though he knows very little, I’m sure he is a good worker.
Though we don’t know you, we will lend you some money.
‘Though’ może spełniać rolę łącznika pomiędzy dwoma zdaniami nadrzędnymi. Występuje
wówczas pomiędzy obydwoma zdaniami lub na końcu drugiego zdania nadrzędnego w
znaczeniu ‘jednakże, mimo to’ np.
Mary has spent hours preparing for the audition; I don’t think she will get the
main part, though.
You seemed to do your best; though, your results were worse than ever.
Besides - ‘oprócz’ występuje przed rzeczownikiem, zaimkiem lub formą ‘gerundialną’ np.
Besides my main job, I also run accounts at home.
Besides having a bad character, he is also very lazy.
‘Besides’ w roli przysłówka o znaczeniu ‘oprócz tego’ występuje w zdaniu samotnie np.
You cannot take part in the race. You aren’t a professional driver. Besides,
your car is too old.
Despite - ‘pomimo’ występuje na początku zdania lub pomiędzy zdaniem nadrzędnym, a
podrzędnym przed rzeczownikiem, zaimkiem lub formą ‘gerundialną’ np.
Despite feeling unwell, Sue decided to continue working.
He says he is really happy despite having no friends around.
Frank is very incompetent; despite that, he still supervises our department.
Zamiennie z ‘despite’ używa się spójnika ‘in spite of’ np.
In spite of heavy conditions, the mountaineers kept climbing.
We’ll hire the detective in spite of the big fee that he is demanding.
However - ‘jednakże, lecz’ występuje na początku lub końcu zdania np.
Tom’s a bit selfish. However, I like him.
There were crowds in front of the bank. We waited patiently, however.
‘However’ można także umieścić po pierwszym słowie w zdaniu np.
We offered to pay a big price. The man, however, refused to sell the painting to us.
Otherwise - ‘w przeciwnym razie’ występuje na początku zdania, które wprowadza np.
Put on some warm clothes, otherwise you will catch a cold.
We must buy a map, otherwise we won’t know which way to go.
So - ‘więc, dlatego’ występuje na początku zdania, które wprowadza np.
Bill had a high temperature, so we called an ambulance.
The bus drivers went on strike, so most of us travelled to work on foot.
270
Zamiennie ze spójnikiem ‘so’ używa się ‘therefore’, który jest jego bardziej formalnym
odpowiednikiem np.
I was alone, therefore I felt a little uneasy.
Spójnik ‘therefore’ może zająć miejsce po pierwszym słowie w zdaniu lub przed głównym
czasownikiem np.
I had parked my car in a wrong place. The constable, therefore, administered a fine.
Unless - ‘jeśli nie, chyba że’ występuje w zdaniu warunkowym zamiennie ze spójnikiem ‘if
not’. ‘Unless’ zajmuje miejsce na początku zdania warunkowego np.
Unless you tip the waiter, he won’t go away.
They will reject your application unless you hand it yourself.
Yet - ‘pomimo tego, niemniej jednak’ występuje na początku zdania, które wprowadza np.
He played miserably; yet, the press is praising him.
She eats a lot; yet, she weighs very little.
Spójnik ‘nevertheless’ stosowany jest zamiennie z ‘yet’ np.
The rent is big; nevertheless, we have hired the flat.
Because - ‘ponieważ’ występuje na początku zdania, które wprowadza np.
I punished him because he was unruly.
Because I had lost the book, I had to buy another one.
Because of - ‘ponieważ, z powodu’ występuje z rzeczownikiem, zaimkiem lub formą
‘gerundialną’ np.
It was raining the whole afternoon. We were sitting at home because of it.
She has destroyed her sight because of reading at night.
As - ‘ponieważ’ występuje na początku zdania, które wprowadza np.
David gave up his last job as he didn’t earn much enough.
As we didn’t know the area, we stopped to ask for the way.
Since - ‘ponieważ’ występuje na początku zdania, które wprowadza np.
Since there was no snow, we couldn’t go skiing.
Pytania rozłączne – question tags  154-155
Pytania rozłączne ‘question tags’ występują po zdaniach twierdzących i przeczących.

Stanowią one formę pytania - prośby o potwierdzenie informacji zawartej w głównym zdaniu,
lub o udzielenie zgody. Odpowiednikiem pytań rozłącznych jest polski zwrot ‘nieprawdaż?’
Pytanie rozłączne znajduje się na końcu zdania. Tworzy się je zgodnie z formą czasową,
którą wyraża orzeczenie. Pytanie rozłączne składa się z operatora lub czasownika
tworzącego pytanie oraz zaimka osobowego odpowiadającego podmiotowi zdania. W
zdaniach przeczących forma pytania rozłącznego przypomina standardowo utworzone
pytanie w danym czasie np.
271
We don’t live nearby, do we?
You haven’t got a car, have you?
They didn’t arrive too late, did they?
She hasn’t found her ring, has she?
We aren’t having fun, are we?
You hadn’t left before, had you?
W zdaniach twierdzących pytania rozłączne mają postać pytania przeczącego np.
He went abroad, didn’t he?
You have been playing cards, haven’t you?
Bob was reading, wasn’t he?
Niekiedy stosuje się pełną formę przecącego pytania rozłącznego np.
We could open the door, could we not?
They were happy together, were they not?
Betty is resting now, is she not?
! Czasownik ‘to be’ w I osobie liczby pojedynczej posiada nieregularną formę pytania
rozłącznego ‘aren’t I?’ np.
I am a surgeon, aren’t I?
I am working hard, aren’t I?
Wyrażenia oraz słowa o znaczeniu przeczącym tworzą pytania rozłączne w takiej samej
postaci jak zdania przeczące. Do zwrotów tych należą: ‘barely / hardly / hardly ever / neither
/ no / none / nobody / nothing’ np.
You hardly ever drink milk, do you?
Nobody brought any food, did they?
There were no free seats, were there?
They have found nothing, have they?
Zaimkiem w pytaniach rozłącznych, odnoszących się do zdań, w których podmiotem są
zaimki ‘someone / somebody / anybody / anyone / no one / nobody / none / neither’ jest
‘they’ np.
Somebody has discovered my presence here, haven’t they?
No one can beat him, can they?
Anyone might have done it, mightn’t they?
Neither appealed to you, did they?
! Pytanie rozłączne odnoszące się do trybu rozkazującego w postaci ‘Let’s ...’ tworzy
się przy pomocy czasownika ‘shall’ np.
Let’s make a phone call, shall we?
Let’s finish work earlier today, shall we?
272
Inwersja czasownika  156
Po niektórych przysłówkach oraz wyrażeniach przysłówkowych rozpoczynających zdanie

twierdzące orzeczenie ulega inwersji czyli przemianie w formę pytającą.
Tak zbudowana konstrukcja zdania szczególnie wzmacnia znaczenie, jakie wyraża
czasownik. Inwersję stosuje się po następujących przysłówkach i wyrażeniach
przysłówkowych:
hardly ever - rzadko kiedy, prawie nigdy
hardly ... when ... - ledwie ..., gdy ...
in / under no circumstances - w żadnym wypadku
never - nigdy
no sooner ... than ... - ledwie ..., gdy ...
not only - nie tylko
not till - dopóki nie
nowhere - nigdzie
on no account - pod żadnym pozorem
only by - jedynie dzięki, tylko poprzez
only when - dopiero gdy
scarcely ever - rzadko kiedy, prawie nigdy
scarcely ... when ... - ledwie ..., gdy ...
seldom - rzadko
Przykłady:
Seldom do we leave our baby alone in the house.
Not only did he work longer on Friday, he also came to the office on
Saturday morning.
Only by selecting the correct answer can you score a point.
Hardly had I gone to bed when I heard knocking at the door.
On no account should they withdraw their troops.
Not until I went out of the house did I feel how cold it was outside.
Only when we offered a bribe did he agree to speak to us.
273
Czasowniki złożone (phrasal verbs)  157-160
Czasowniki złożone - ‘phrasal verbs’ - stanowią niezwykle bogaty dział słownictwa

angielskiego. Przyimek dodany do czasownika w większym lub mniejszym stopniu
modyfikuje lub zmienia jego podstawowe znaczenie. Jeden czasownik złożony może
wyrażać kilka znaczeń. Opanowanie jak największej ilości czasowników złożonych niezwykle
ułatwia swobodne wyrażanie myśli oraz poprawne rozumienie
przekazywanych informacji. Czasowniki złożone dzielą się na przechodnie (transitive), po
których występuje dopełnienie oraz nieprzechodnie (intransitive), które występują bez
dopełnienia. Dopełnieniem czasownika złożonego przechodniego może być rzeczownik,
który zajmuje miejsce za przyimkiem lub niekiedy pomiędzy
czasownikiem a przyimkiem, lub zaimek, który zawsze zajmuje miejsce pomiędzy
czasownikiem a przyimkem np.
I have put down your address.
I have put your address down.
I have put it down.
Należy również pamiętać, iż czasownik występujący po przyimku zawsze przyjmuje formę
‘gerundialną’ (-ing) np.
We gave up going fishing because of bad weather.
Go on working, don’t waste your time.
Poniższa lista zawiera czasowniki złożone występujące w jednostkach ćwiczeniowych 157-

160.
account for - 1. wyjaśniać, tłumaczyć 2. rozliczać się z (money)

back out - wycofać się
back up - popierać, wspierać
break into - włamywać się
break off - 1. odłamywać (się) (a piece of bread, a piece of rock)
2. przerywać, zrywać (negotiations, a meeting)
break out - 1. wybuchać (a war, a revolution) 2. zbiegać, uciekać (prison)
bring on - spowodować, doprowadzić do (trouble, a crisis)
bring round - 1. nakłonić 2. ocucić
bring up - 1. wychowywać, nauczać (children) 2. wspominać (a question)
call off - odwoływać (a meeting, a conference)
call on - 1. ~ sb to do sth - apelować do kogoś, prosić 2. odwiedzać
care for - 1. opiekować się, doglądać 2. lubić
carry on with - kontynuować
274
carry out - 1. przeprowadzać (an experiment, a research)
2. spełniać (a promise) 3. wypełniać, wykonywać (an order)
catch on - przyjąć się, stać się popularnym (a trend / style / fashion)
catch up on - nadrabiać zaległości, nadganiać
clamp down on - ograniczyć, zredukować, ukrócić (violence, an illegal trade)
clear up - 1. sprzątać, porządkować (the kitchen) 2. wyjaśniać (a mystery)
3. przejaśniać się
close down - zamykać, likwidować (a shop, a factory)
come about - wydarzyć się
come by - zdobyć, nabyć, wejść w posiadanie
come off - 1. odnieść sukces, powieść się (a plan, a scheme) 2. odpaść,
oderwać się (a button, a handle)
come round - 1. odzyskać świadomość 2. ~ to - przekonać się do,
zaakceptować (an idea, a theory)
come up - 1. pojawiać się (a question, a problem) 2. wydarzyć się
3. podejść bliżej, zbliżyć się
cut down on - 1. zmniejszyć, zredukować (expenses) 2.ograniczyć (smoking)
do away with - znieść (a regulation, a decision)
do up - remontować, odnawiać (a house / flat / room)
draw up - projektować, przygotowywać (a plan, a project)
drop out - 1. przestać uczęszczać, zrezygnować (school, a course)
fall back on - uciekać się do, zdawać się na, zadowolić się
fall behind - 1. pozostawać w tyle 2. zalegać
fall out - pokłócić się
find out - 1. dowiedzieć się 2. przekonać się
get by - otrzymać, zdobyć, kupić
get in - wejść, dostać się do środka
get on - żyć w zgodzie
give in - poddawać się, ustępować
give out - 1. rozdawać (food, copies) 2. ogłaszać (a message)
3. wyczerpywać się (supplies) 4. emitować (a sound)
give up - 1. zrezygnować (a training, a job) 2. rzucić (smoking) 3. poddać się
go back on - nie dotrzymywać, łamać (a promise)
go off - 1. eksplodować, wybuchać (a bomb, fireworks) 2. psuć się (food)
go over - 1. przeglądać, sprawdzać (documents) 2. powtarzać (a topic)
go round - 1. wystarczyć 2. rozprzestrzeniać się (a disease)
275
grow up - dorastać
hand in - 1. wręczyć, przekazać 2. składać (an application)
hit on - 1. natknąć się, znaleźć przypadkowo 2. wpaść na (an idea, a solution)
hold on - zaczekać (przy telefonie)

keep on - kontynuować
leave out - opuszczać, pomijać
let down - 1. zawieść 2. przedłużać (a sleeve, a dress)
let out - 1. wydawać, emitować (a sound) 2. wypuszczać (air, gas)
live on - 1. żyć dzięki czemuś (water, plants) 2. trwać (memories ~)
look down on - pogardzać, traktować z poniżeniem, wywyższać się
look for - szukać, poszukiwać
look into - badać, przeprowadzać dochodzenie, rozpatrzyć (a crime, a complaint)
look up - 1. poprawić się (conditions, a situation) 2. sprawdzać (w słowniku)
look up to - podziwiać, respektować kogoś
make out - 1. wypełniać (a form) 2. wypisywać (a cheque) 3. odczytać,
zrozumieć (a meaning)
make up - 1. nakładać makijaż 2. wymyślić, zmyślić (an excuse) 3. pogodzić się
make up for - zrekompensować, nadrabiać
move out - wyprowadzić się
pick out - 1. wybierać 2. dostrzec, zauważyć
pick up - 1. podnieść 2. pozbierać 3. pozbierać siły 4. zdobyć
5. nauczyć się 6. zabrać, odebrać kogoś 7. podrywać
point out - wskazywać
pull down - zburzyć (a building)
pull off - powieść się, udać się
pull through - wyzdrowieć
put aside - oszczędzać, odkładać (money)
put down - 1. odkładać (a magazine, a pencil) 2. zapisywać (an address)
3. stłumić (a rebellion) 4. usypiać (a dog)
put in for - składać podanie o, ubiegać się o
put off - 1. odkładać (a meeting, a conference) 2. zniechęcać, odstraszać
put on - 1. zakładać (clothes, jewellery) 2. włączać (the radio / TV)
3. przybierać na wadze (weight)
put out - 1. zdenerwować, rozzłościć (kogoś) 2. gasić (the fire / light)
put up - 1. postawić, zbudować (a house, a cottage) 2. postawić, rozbić (a tent)
3. zaoferować nocleg, przenocować (kogoś) 4. podnosić (prices, wages)
276
run away - uciekać
run down - 1. potrącić 2. wyczerpać się (a battery) 3. oczerniać, obgadywać
run into - napotkać, natknąć się na kogoś
run out of - zużyć, wyczerpać (supplies)
see to - dopilnować, zająć się, zabrać się za
set in - nadejść, rozpocząć się (the wet season, winter)
set up - 1. zakładać (an organization, a party, a business)

2. ustanawiać (a record)
shut down - zakończyć działalność, zamykać (a shop, a factory)
stand by - 1. wspierać, popierać (kogoś) 2. dotrzymywać (a promise)
3. stać bezczynnie 4. być w pogotowiu
stand for - 1. oznaczać, znaczyć 2. przedstawiać, reprezentować
take after - być podobnym do, przypominać (kogoś)
take back - cofać, odwoływać (previous ideas)
take in - 1. zapewnić komuś nocleg 2. zrozumieć, pojąć 3. oszukać
take on - 1. zatrudnić 2. podejmować (a work, duties)

take up - 1. zabrać się za, zainteresować się (a hobby, a sport) 2. zajmować
czas 3. przyjąć (a job, responsibility)
tip off - udzielić tajnej informacji; ostrzec
touch on - wspomnieć o, poruszyć (a question, a subject)
turn down - 1. odrzucić (an offer, an application) 2. ściszyć 3. zwolnić
turn on - 1. odkręcić (the hot tap) 2. włączyć (the light / radio)
turn up - 1. robić głośniej (the radio / sound) 2. pojawiać się, przybywać
wait on - obsługiwać (customers)
wear off - przechodzić, zanikać (a pain, sadness, anger)
work out - 1. opracować, ułożyć (a plan, a strategy) 2. obliczyć (costs)
3. powieść się, zadziałać (an idea, a scheme)
277
278
Klucz do ćwiczeń
Unit 1 Przedimki nieokreślone a - an str. 9
I. a book a lamp a union an ape

a pocket a boat an onion a fish
a shirt an apple a mouse a lorry
an eye a cap an hour a tin
a chicken a watch a figure an effect
II. 1. a 2. an 3. a 4. a 5. an
6. a 7. an 8. an 9. a 10. a
11. An 12. a 13. an, an 14. an 15. an, a
III. a, -, -, -, a, a, a, a, a, -, -, a, a, -, A, -, -,
Unit 2 Przedimki a - an - the (1) str. 10
I. 1. a 2. an 3. the, the 4. an 5. a
6. The 7. The 8. a 9. An, a 10. The, the
II. 1. a, The 2. The 3. - 4. a 5. a, The, a, a

6. The 7. a 8. -, the 9. - 10. the, a
11. a 12. the 13. -, - 14. -, - 15. The, the
16. a 17. the, - 18. An 19. - 20. the
I. 1. a knife 2. a foreigner 3. an umbrella 4. a kettle 5. a thief

6. an exercise 7. a judge 8. a brush 9. a razor 10. an architect
II. 1. the front door 2. an idea 3. the capital 4. the trumpet

5. the price 6. a note 7. a snake 8. the truth
III. 1. the, - 2. -, - 3. -, -, - 4. -, a, - 5. an 6. a, a, a 7. the, The 8. -, -
I. 1. The 2. -, the 3. The, the 4. - 5. -

6. the 7. -, - 8. -, the 9. - 10. the, the, the
II. -, a /the, the, -, a, The, a, the, -, an

The, -, -, -, a, -, a, -, -, the, the, -
a, the, -, the, a, the, the, a, the, -
279
Unit 5 Zaimki osobowe i dzierżawcze str. 13
I. 1. I 2. She 3. He 4. He 5. She 6. We
II. 1. him 2. She 3. They 4. me 5. us

6. Their 7. He 8. her 9. him 10. them
III. 1. her 2. it 3. Their 4. them 5. my

6. him 7. its 8. your, me 9. us 10. his, him
Unit 6 Zaimki dzierżawcze - mine, yours etc. str. 14
I. 1. This passport is hers.

2. That glass of beer was mine.
3. Are those exercise-books yours?
4. Is that piano theirs?
5. Those reports are ours.
6. Is this cassette his?
7. These toys are not yours.
8. Is this ticket mine?
9. This restaurant is theirs.
10. Are these newspapers hers?
II. 1. his, hers 2. their, his 3. her, mine 4. his 5. ours

6. their, mine 7. your, theirs 8. Its 9. my, hers 10. ours
III. 1. my, yours 2. his 3. My, his 4. Its 5. their, ours
Unit 7 Zaimki zwrotne / each other str. 15
I. 1. himself 2. yourself 3. herself 4. myself 5. ourselves

6. himself 7. themselves 8. myself 9. yourself 10. itself
II. 1. himself 2. each other 3. herself 4. yourself/ves 5. each other

6. yourself 7. myself 8. each other 9. herself 10. each other
11. himself 12. each other 13. yourself / 14. themselves 15. each other,
yourselves each other
Unit 8 Zaimki zwrotne i dzierżawcze str. 16
I. 1. his - himself 6. us - ourselves

2. herself - her 7. his - him
3. ourselves - us 8. theirs - themselves
4. hers - herself 9. you - yourself
5. its - it 10. me - myself
II. 1. me, it 2. Your, ours 3. his, myself 4. himself, our 5. your, mine
6. his, himself 7. my, me 8. us, them 9. my, my 10. your, you
III. 1. myself, it 2. your, you 3. her 4. them 5. myself
280
Unit 9 Zaimki pytające ‘Wh -?’ str. 17
I. 1. Where does Mr Palmer live?

2. Who went on holiday to Acapulco?
3. What have you bought?
4. When were you cleaning the attic?
5. Which of you can speak Italian?
6. How will they arrive?
7. What is she looking at?
8. Whom do you believe?
9. Why was the train late?
10. What made him very angry?
II. 1. Where did Robert prefer to stay?

2. Who(m) did you meet in a department store?
3. How often does she go to the disco?
4. What time were you having dinner?
5. Who has damaged his tendon?
6. When is your son returning?
7. Whose project was the best?
8. What does Mr Taylor do? What is Mr Taylor’s job / profession?
9. How old is Jack’s brother?
10. How many questions will you ask me?
III. 1. Where 2. How long 3. Why 4. When 5. How

6. Since when 7. How much 8. Who / Which (one) 9. How 10. How many
Unit 10 Konstrukcje pytające str. 18
I. 1. What is your name?

2. Where do you come from?
3. Who do you live with? / Do you live alone?
4. Where were you yesterday evening? / What did you do yesterday evening?
5. Was anyone with you? / Were you alone at the swimming pool?
6. What did you do after that? / Where did you go after that?
7. What did you take / eat / order?
8. Do you meet each other often?
9. What is Thomas’ telephone number?
10. When will you see / meet Thomas?
II. 1. What does John Johnson do? What is John’s job / profession?
2. Where does he work?
3. How long has he worked in this profession?
4. (How) Does he like his job?
5. Who says that John is a very decent man?
6. When was he given an honourable award?
7. What was he given the award for?
8. Who thanked him warmly?
9. What did the Chief Constable promise John?
10. What is Mark going to do when he grows up?
281
Unit 11 Many - much - a lot of str. 19
I. 1. many 2. a lot of / many 3. many 4. many 5. a lot of / many

6. many 7. much 8. a lot of / much 9. many 10. a lot of / many
II. 1. many 2. much 3. much 4. many 5. many
III. 1. a lot 2. many 3. much 4. a lot of / 5. much 6. a lot of /

many many
7. much 8. a lot of / 9. many 10. Much 11. a lot of / 12. much
much many
Unit 12 A little - little - a few - few str. 20
I. 1. few 2. little 3. a few 4. little 5. a little

6. a few 7. a few 8. little 9. few 10. a few
II. 1. a lot of 2. much 3. much 4. few 5. much

6. a few 7. many 8. few 9. a little 10. little
Unit 13 Any - some - no - none str. 21
I. a jug some coffee some soup some cream

a door a tomato a towel a glove
some water some furniture some honey a bicycle
an ant an orange a waiter an apron
some food a road some sugar some flour
II. 1. any 2. some 3. any 4. any 5. any

6. any 7. some 8. any, any 9. some 10. some
III. 1. I have visited no places here.

2. There is no sweet juice in the jug.
3. She has got no matches.
4. Tom brought no gifts for us.
5. She keeps no animals.
IV. 1. any, no 2. Some 3. None 4. any

5. No 6. some 7. None 8. no
Unit 14 Another - the other - other(s) str. 22
I. 1. another 2. other 3. another 4. others 5. others

6. another 7. another 8. other 9. other 10. another
II. 1. another 2. the other 3. another 4. another 5. another

6. the others 7. another 8. other 9. another 10. other
282
Unit 15 Both - either - neither str. 23
I. 1. Neither 2. either 3. Both 4. Neither 5. both

6. neither 7. Neither 8. either 9. both 10. either
II. 1. She neither sings nor plays the guitar.

2. It is neither cold nor hot outside.
3. There is neither milk nor juice in the fridge.
4. I can neither ski nor skate.
5. We live neither in a villa nor in a flat.
6. He works neither in a shop nor in a bank.
7. You are neither happy nor sad now.
8. I eat neither ice-cream nor sweets.
9. Tom loves neither Cathy nor Muriel.
10. Uncle Ted is neither fat nor thin.
III. 1. Alice is both rich and pretty.

2. My son both works and studies.
3. The climate is both hot and humid.
4. She looked both nervous and worried.
5. John speaks both English and French.
6. Her meals were both tasty and nourishing.
7. We like both fruit and vegetables.
8. Ike studies both economics and sociology.
9. The advice sounds both sensible and useful.
10. Harry breeds both horses and sheep.
Unit 16 So do I / Neither do I str. 24
I. 1. so does 2. so did 3. neither is 4. so have 5. neither are

6. so does 7. so has 8. neither has 9. neither is 10. so did
II. 1. neither did 2. so will 3. so do 4. so should 5. so had

6. so were 7. so did 8. neither was 9. so might 10. neither had
III. Odpowiedzi według własnego uznania.
Unit 17 All - every - each str. 25
I. 1. all 2. Each 3. All 4. Each 5. every 6. each

7. all 8. Each 9. all 10. all 11. Each 12. Each
II. 1. Each 2. each 3. All 4. every 5. Every

6. All 7. Each 8. All 9. each 10. each
III. 1. Each of us played well.

2. All students made complaints.
3. Each code / Each of the codes is often changed.
4. We each / all understand the lecture.
5. Every person must learn to read.
6. All my rings are made of gold.
7. Each of them is paid a lot.
8. All walls were painted white.
9. Every project must be printed clean.
10. All her decisions are right.
283
Unit 18 Zaimki względne who - which - that str. 26
I. 1. which 2. which 3. who 4. which 5. who 6. who(m)

7. which 8. who 9. which 10. who(m) 11. which 12. who
II. 1. The people who got lost in the mountains were from Sweden.
2. The film which she was watching was rather boring.
3. The woman who was taken to hospital is our neighbour.
4. The bridge which we saw is the biggest in the world.
5. The room which we will hire will be very spacious.
III. A pillow is something that you put your head on.

A tailor is someone who makes clothes.
A kettle is something that you boil water in.
A mushroom is something that can be poisonous.
A sculptor is someone who makes monuments.
A brush is something that you paint with.
A rucksack is something that you carry your luggage in.
A rifle is something that you can shoot with.
A surgeon is someone who works in hospital.
A lawn-mower is something that you use for cutting grass.
Unit 19 Who - whose - of which - whom - where str. 27
I. 1. The car the bumper of which is broken is not new.

2. I like the mirror the frame of which is ornamented.
3. This is the city the streets of which are very narrow.
4. The skirt the colour of which is pink looks really nice.
5. He wore glasses the lenses of which were broken.
II. 1. where 2. whom 3. whose 4. where 5. whose

6. whom 7. whose 8. where 9. whom 10. whose
III. who(m), who, which, which, whose, who, who, who, which, which, whom
Unit 20 Who - which - that - whose - where str. 28
I. 1. This is the girl who I smiled at.

2. This is the child who you will look after.
3. There is the house which we live in.
4. I know the boy who she is talking to.
5. This is the book which I thought about.
6. This is the design which we have worked on.
7. He is the professor who we are afraid of.
8. There is the kid who you can play with.
9. This is the case which you must cope with.
10. She is the actress who I know a lot about.
II. 1. Ben Nevis, which I climbed last spring, is the highest mountain in Britain.
2. The new model of Ferrari, which will be produced next year, will cost a lot.
3. Mr Saxon, whose son teaches us mathematics, is a taxi driver.
4. The Hilton hotel, where we have stayed a few times, is rather expensive.
5. George, whom I met at a computer course, has been my friend since 1990.
6. Mary, whose intentions I know, is planning to move to Boston.
284
III. 1. bez przecinków
2. bez przecinków
3. Christopher Columbus, who discovered America, was a Spanish sailor.
4. bez przecinków
5. Professor Jenkins, whom I remember from a symposium in Stockholm, has
been awarded the Nobel Prize.
6. My parents live in Newcastle, which is not far from here.
7. Rome, where we went on summer holidays, appealed to us a lot.
8. Michael Jackson, whose songs everybody knows, is a famous pop star.
Unit 21 Zaimki złożone - someone str. 29
I. 1. Are the children playing with anyone in the backyard?

The children aren’t playing with anyone in the backyard.
2. Does Mandy want to tell us anything important?
Mandy doesn’t want to tell us anything important.
3. Have they hidden their money anywhere?
They have hidden their money nowhere.
4. Should Bobby ask anybody for help?

Bobby should ask nobody for help.
II. 1. anyone / 2. anything 3. anywhere 4. anyone / 5. anywhere

anybody anybody
III. 1. anyone, No one 2. anything, nothing 3. anywhere, someone

4. anything, anywhere, anyone 5. anyone, something 6. anything, nothing
Unit 22 Who - which - what str. 30
I. 1. What 2. Which 3. what 4. Which 5. What

6. what 7. Which 8. which 9. which, which 10. What
11. Which 12. which 13. what 14. Which 15. What
II. 1. The people made a bonfire in the woods, which was very stupid.
2. She has promised to stay with the children, which is very kind of her.
3. The train came late again, which made me angry.
4. He used to eat a lot of sweets, which damaged his teeth.
5. The secretary took bribes, which spoiled her reputation.
III. 1. Who 2. which 3. What
Unit 23 There - It str. 31
I. 1. There is a lot of sand on the land.

2. There are a lot of people on the beach. / There is a big crowd on the beach.
3. There are a lot of clouds today.
4. There is a lot of fat in the salad.
5. There is a lot of smoke in the room.
6. It is a salty soup.
7. It is sunny today.
8. It is a dirty room.
9. It is a grassy field.
10. It was frosty in the morning. / It was a frosty morning.
285
II. 1. it 2. there 3. It 4. There 5. It
6. There 7. There 8. There 9. It 10. It, it
III. 1. It is 2. Is there 3. It is 4. It is, there is

5. it is 6. was it, there was 7. there is 8. It is
Unit 24 Liczba mnoga rzeczowników (1) str. 32
I. bottles classes boxes ladies days

trains buses brushes babies plays
tins masses potatoes cherries keys
cards glasses branches flies abbeys
roses passes foxes berries rays
clubs kisses torches bodies guys
chairs bosses marshes pansies preys
masks guesses taxes diaries turkeys
cigars misses tomatoes enemies alloys
plugs dresses bushes colonies bays
II. 1. stories 2. matches 3. ferries 4. toys 5. wishes

6. losses 7. Storms 8. benches 9. dreams 10. heroes
III. 1. fish 2. times 3. riches 4. information 5. furniture

6. mathematics 7. hair 8. luggage 9. advice 10. damages
Unit 25 Liczba mnoga rzeczowników (2) str. 33
I. knives shelves feet children

crises mothers-in-law wives men
women lice sheep wolves
teeth forget-me-nots geese deer
mice phenomena aircraft lives
II. 1. thieves 2. leaves 3. children 4. mice 5. loaves

6. sisters-in-law 7. spacecraft 8. housewives 9. geese 10. handkerchiefs /
handkerchieves
III. 1. savings 2. news 3. scales 4. goods 5. politics

6. pyjamas 7. spectacles 8. outskirts 9. Measles 10. gymnastics
Unit 26 Rzeczowniki str. 34
I. actor - actress nephew - niece bridegroom - bride

hero - heroine prince - princess host - hostess
man - woman heir - heiress ram - ewe
uncle - aunt manager - manageress widower - widow
tiger - tigress lion - lioness bachelor - spinster
286
II. 1. a can / a bottle 6. a plate / a can 11. a glass / a bottle
2. a jar 7. a jug / a carton / a glass 12. a glass
3. a bar / a piece 8. a bottle / a glass 13. a can / a bottle / a glass
4. a joint / a piece 9. a bag 14. a cake / a piece
5. a loaf 10. a piece 15. a sheet / a piece
III. 1. slice of bread 2. grain of truth 3. cube of ice

4. speck of dust 5. roll of cloth
Unit 27 Przymiotniki str. 35
I. 1. dirty 2. brave 3. rude 4. sour 5. dull

6. smart 7. hostile 8. pure 9. tame 10. rapid
II. 1. This is an interesting old American film.

2. This is a small broken plastic plate.
3. This is an elegant wooden rocking chair.
4. This is an old-fashioned ruined brick house.
5. This is a tiny brown leather wallet.
6. This is a lovely ancient gold earring.
7. This is a strong oval rubber doormat.
8. This is delicious French grape wine.
9. This is a new Teflon frying pan.
10. This is a wonderful Greek marble statue.
III. 1. smells 2. feels 3. sound

4. seem 5. tastes 6. looks
Unit 28 Przymiotniki i przysłówki (1) str. 36
I. 1. skilfully 2. terribly 3. brilliantly

4. excellently 5. hastily
II. 1. a. exhausting b. exhausted 2. a. amazing b. amazed

3. a. satisfying b. satisfied 4. a. interested b. interesting
5. a. frustrating b. frustrated 6. a. boring b. bored
7. a. depressed b. depressing 8. a. embarrassing b. embarrassed
9. a. surprising b. surprised 10. a. entertaining b. entertained
Unit 29 Przymiotniki i przysłówki (2) str. 37
I. 1. nice 2. interesting 3. heavily

4. bravely 5. badly 6. inconsiderate
7. carefully 8. coldly 9. wrong
10. hot 11. late 12. slowly
13. awfully 14. safe 15. completely
II. 1. furious 2. productive 3. helpless

4. objectionable 5. dangerous 6. painful
7. windy 8. childish 9. successful
10. lasting 11. reasonable 12. offensive
13. useful 14. selfish 15. cautious
287
Unit 30 Przysłówek badly, fairly, hardly ... str. 38
I. 1. fairly 2. lately 3. badly 4. well 5. Hardly
II. 1. Albert seldom forgets to prepare his lessons.

2. Is the porridge warm enough to give it to the baby?
3. Have you seen a flying saucer yet?
4. My family never spends holidays at the seaside.
5. We have scarcely enough bread to go round.
6. There is usually a big crowd in front of the embassy.
7. Susan has already visited China three times.
8. I’m still waiting for an important message.
9. I’ve seen quite a few good films recently. Recently, I have seen quite a few …
10. There were nearly twenty complaints about your services.
11. The tourists were highly amazed by the landscapes.
12. You must always obey the captain’s orders.
13. I’ll come back shortly.
14. She says she loves her boyfriend very much.
15. She hardly ever writes letters to us.
III. 1. hardly buys anything

2. hardly know anyone
3. hardly eaten anything
4. hardly see anything
5. hardly walked anywhere
Unit 31 Stopniowanie - przymiotniki / przysłówki (1) str. 39
I. nicer heavier bigger more experienced

lower drier thinner more careful
harder funnier fatter more famous
broader dirtier madder more boring
faster sillier fitter more necessary
wider happier hotter more sensible
colder tinier sadder more important
softer greedier redder more attractive
greater cosier grimmer more suitable
closer lazier wetter more delicate
II. tallest heaviest most pleasant

wisest purest most frightening
thickest sweetest most generous
hottest brightest most excellent
boldest longest most colourful
easiest richest most humble
slowest fattest most essential
funniest warmest most obstinate
deepest strangest most incredible
fullest craziest most difficult
III. bad worse worst

far further furthest
good better best
little less least
many more most
288
much more most
old elder eldest
old older oldest
well better best
I. 1. An ocean is deeper than a lake

2. A bicycle is slower than a car
3. A book is thicker than a newspaper
4. A river is wider than a stream
5. An elephant is heavier than an ant
6. An orange is sweeter than a lemon
7. A mountain is higher than a hill
8. A grandfather is older than a father
9. A cottage is smaller than a skyscraper
10. A plane is faster than a lorry
II. 1. A general is more important than a captain

2. A sofa is more comfortable than a stool
3. A tiger is more dangerous than a monkey
4. Jogging is more exhausting than walking
5. A judge is more trustworthy than a criminal
6. America is more powerful than Poland
7. Plastic is more fragile than iron
8. Gold is more precious than bronze
9. A clock is more precise than a sundial
10. The cinema is more popular than the opera
III. 1. farther / further 2. best 3. more 4. worse 5. most
I. 1. A car is more expensive than a bicycle.

A plane is more expensive than a car.
A plane is the most expensive of all.
2. A snake is more dangerous than a mouse.
A lion is more dangerous than a snake.
A lion is the most dangerous of all.
3. Wine is stronger than beer.
Whisky is stronger than wine.
Whisky is the strongest of all.
II. small, the most beautiful, more brilliant, the youngest, noisier, older,
the oldest, more diligent, worse, more beautifully, the laziest
III. 1. more carefully 2. more quickly

3. the most obediently 4. more soundly
5. the most badly 6. more friendly
7. the most elegant 8. more
289
Unit 34 Stopniowanie opadające str. 42
I. 1. A strawberry is less sour than a lemon.

2. Russian is less popular than English.
3. A cat is less fierce than a puma.
4. Jogging is less exhausting than jogging.
5. A minister is less important than a president.
6. Horse riding is less risky than car racing.
7. A drama is less amusing than a comedy.
8. A clerk is less influential than a director.
9. Fried food is less healthy than vegetables.
10. Wood is less fragile than glass.
II. 1. A horse-cart is less modern than a bicycle.

A bicycle is less modern than a car.
A horse-cart is the least modern of all.
2. The opera is less popular than the drama.
The drama is less popular than the cinema.
The opera is the least popular of all.
3. A trainee is less competent than a secretary.
A secretary is less competent than a manager.
A trainee is the least competent of all.
III. 1. less polite 2. the least sensible 3. the least demanding

4. less angrily 5. the least hard-working 6. the least difficult
Unit 35 Stopniowanie rosnące / opadające str. 43
I. harder, more, wealthier, more comfortable, more luxurious, the happiest
II. less attractive, fewer, larger, more brightly, grimmer, the most broken-
hearted, farther / further, gloomier, the most astounding
III. 1. better 2. the least interesting 3. the worst

4. the most delicious 5. slimmer
Unit 36 The same ... as, as ... as, than str. 44
I. 1. I don’t know as much about politics as David does.

2. Nobody else can speak French as well as Sheila can.
3. I don’t learn as often as my brother does.
4. We don’t own as many shops as our neighbours does.
5. Tim doesn’t receive as many letters as Patrick does.
II. 1. We are leaving on the same day as they are.

2. Frank bought his car in the same place as I did.
3. You are the same age as she is.
4. I attended the same self-defence course as Peter did.
5. Rick comes from the same country as Audrey does.
III. as, than, as, as, as, than, than, as, than, as
290
Unit 37 So, so ... that, such ... that str. 45
I. 1. so pleasant 2. so jealous 3. so awful

4. so precious 5. so impractical 6. so evident
II. 1. It was such a boring film that we left before it ended.

2. Tim is such a talented player that he has been qualified for the national team.
3. It is such a pleasant music that I could listen to it for hours.
4. He is such a good soloist that the audience always gives him a standing ovation.
5. It is such an engrossing book that I have already read it twice.
III. 1. so 2. such a 3. so 4. so 5. so
6. such a 7. so 8. such a 9. so 10. such
Unit 38 Przysłówek miejsca - somewhere str. 46
I. 1. anywhere 2. nowhere 3. somewhere 4. everywhere

5. somewhere 6. anywhere 7. any / every - where 8. anywhere
II. 1. I have not travelled anywhere.

2. Anywhere you go, you will need your credit card.
3. Nowhere did we stay long.
4. You were nowhere to be found yesterday evening.
5. You will not see more beautiful landscapes anywhere else.
III. somewhere, anywhere, nowhere, somewhere, everywhere
Unit 39 Przysłówki czasu str. 47
I. 1. still 2. yesterday 3. today 4. just 5. tomorrow
II. 1. yet 2. at present 3. soon 4. already 5. since
III. 1. She is still having a bath.

2. I have already written six letters.
3. They have built three houses recently.
4. I have known Muriel since 1986.
5. Deborah has not watched the film yet.
6. Eric lost his school bag last month.
7. I have been abroad lately.
8. You must wait till six o’clock.
9. I have just fixed it.
10. He has been studying law for four years.
Unit 40 Przysłówki częstotliwości str. 48
I. 1. Your bicycle is always dirty.

2. I often get up late on Sunday.
3. He never forgets about his duties.
4. She usually works at home.
5. We seldom go shopping together.
6. Julia is sometimes busy. / Sometimes, Julia is busy. / Julia is busy sometimes.
7. He can always answer my questions.
291
8. He rarely takes me for a walk.
9. He never worked hard.
10. They are always disturbing us.
II. Robert sometimes gets up late. He always has dinner in a restaurant. He is

usually tired after work. He never watches TV at night.
Maggie ...
III. 1. Sam frequently takes a rest after school.

2. She may sometimes become angry. / Sometimes, she may become angry. / She
may become angry sometimes.
3. You never take sleeping pills.
4. Sue rarely walks alone at night.
5. I hardly ever play computer games.
6. They occasionally lend a helping hand. / Occasionally, they lend a helping hand. /
They lend a helping hand occasionally.
7. You can seldom give the correct answer.
8. We scarcely ever go to school by train.
9. You should always ask for a permission.
10. Tim is often in a hurry.
11. There are usually a lot of people in front of the bank.
12. The Browns are hardly ever kind to us.
Unit 41 Przysłówki sposobu str. 49
I. 1. rapidly 2. wrongly 3. comfortably 4. splendidly 5. sharply

6. ineffectively 7. selfishly 8. irresponsibly 9. unjustly 10. soundly
II. 1. reluctantly 2. generously

3. courageously 4. radically
5. favourably 6. reasonably
7. silently 8. shamelessly
9. skilfully 10. frankly
III. 1. bad 2. badly 3. badly 4. bad 5. bad

6. badly 7. bad 8. badly 9. bad 10. badly
Unit 42 Kolejność przysłówków str. 50
I. 1. John often plays noisily in his room.

2. The birds sing loudly on the trees in the park.
3. You sometimes learn hard at night.
4. She seldom travels to school by bus.
5. I am still waiting patiently in the hall.
6. It has been raining heavily all day.
II. 1. N - My sister is usually busy in the afternoon.

2. N - You have been sitting in front of the TV all day.
3. P
4. P
5. P
6. P
7. N - She will often have to stay in the office longer.
8. P
9. N - I have just welcomed my guests warmly.
292
10. N - You hardly ever eat breakfast quickly in the morning.
III. 1. I stood patiently at the door all the time.

2. I knocked loudly on the window for ten minutes.
3. He was playing roughly in my backyard as usual.
4. Someone entered the office secretly in the morning.
5. He never answers questions politely.
Unit 43 Przymiotnik czy przysłówek? str. 51
I. 1. deep 2. deeply 3. highly 4. high 5. pretty 6. prettily

7. wrong 8. wrongly 9. hard 10. hardly 11. shortly 12. short
13. late 14. lately 15. Most 16. mostly 17. rightly 18. right
II. 1. przysłówek 2. przymiotnik 3. przymiotnik 4. przysłówek

5. przymiotnik 6. przymiotnik 7. przysłówek 8. przymiotnik
III. 1. kindly 2. directly 3. hard

4. fairly 5. most
Unit 44 Enough - too str. 52
I. 1. This soup is too cold to eat.

2. She is too young to (be able to) walk.
3. Your bag is too heavy to carry.
4. We have too little money to buy anything.
5. The exercise is too difficult (for me) to do.
6. Jack is too inexperienced to (be able to) do the task.
7. The water is too cold (for us) to bathe.
8. There is too little firewood to make a bonfire.
9. I am too busy to help you.
10. He is too stupid to answer your question.
II. 1. She isn’t brave enough to join us.

2. You aren’t clever enough to do the puzzle.
3. I am not strong enough to carry the box.
4. He isn’t skilful enough to repair the sledge.
5. You aren’t healthy enough to play outside.
6. The article isn’t good enough to be printed.
7. He doesn’t sing well enough to be a soloist.
8. The idea isn’t logical enough to be accepted.
9. The place isn’t safe enough to camp in.
10. The fruit aren’t ripe enough to eat.
III. 1. enough 2. too 3. too 4. enough 5. enough

6. too 7. too 8. enough 9. too 10. enough
Unit 45 Already - still - yet str. 53
I. 1. still 2. yet 3. still 4. yet 5. still

6. yet 7. yet 8. still 9. yet, still 10. yet
II. 1. He has not cleaned it yet.

2. I have already eaten my breakfast.
293
3. I have not spent it yet.
4. We have already repaired it.
5. She has not met him yet.
6. I have already finished studying.
7. He has not painted it yet.
8. I have already been operated on.
III. 1. He is still feeling unwell.

2. I have already done it for you.
3. Have you made many friends here yet?
4. Does Harry still smoke so many cigarettes daily?
5. There hasn’t been much interest in our programme yet.
IV. 1. We are still eating it. 2. He is still reading a book.

3. I am still using your pen. 4. We are still collecting money.
5. She is still looking for it.
Unit 46 Przyimki miejsca at - in - on str. 54
I. in a shop at home on the beach

on the third floor in the park at work
in the city at school on a plane
in the house on a train in a car
at a bus-stop in hospital in a restaurant
II. 1. in the garden 2. on the roof

3. at university 4. at the airport
5. in prison 6. in bed
7. on the floor 8. at the seaside
9. in the garage 10. at the reception desk
III. 1. in 2. on 3. on 4. in 5. on 6. at
7. on 8. at 9. on 10. in 11. on 12. in
Unit 47 Przyimki miejsca at - in - on str. 55
I. at, in, in, at, in, at, at, in, on, in, on, on, in
II. 1. on stage 2. at the hairdresser’s

3. in the cinema 4. on the taxi
5. on the map 6. in the casino
7. at the post-office 8. in the mountains
9. on the blackboard 10. in the office
Unit 48 Przyimki czasu at - in - on str. 56
I. on Monday at night on Friday evening

in the morning in winter in the 17th century
at four o’clock on Sunday in spring
in August in the afternoon on 28 September
in 1492 at the weekend at midnight
294
II. On, In, at, at, In, in, At, In, at, in, On, at, on, In, at, at, at
III. 1. in 2. on 3. at 4. at 5. in
6. At 7. on 8. on 9. In 10. on
11. at 12. at 13. in 14. At 15. on
Unit 49 Przyimki czasu at - in - on str. 57
I. 1. I usually meet Sally at lunchtime.

2. I will return from Italy in two weeks.
3. Tom’s birthday is on 22 June.
4. Winston Churchill died in 1965.
5. Sue has free time at weekends.
6. The workers get up at dawn.
7. Alex will go to school on Thursday.
8. I am leaving in the morning.
9. Julie lost her bag in summer.
10. The ceremony will begin on Friday night.
II. 1. in 2. In 3. on 4. in 5. on 6. in 7. on 8. on
III. 1. at, in 2. at, at 3. In, on

4. at 5. At, at
Unit 50 Przyimki ruchu at - from - in - into - to str. 58
I. -, to, to, to, at, from, to, -, at, at, to, at, into, -, -, to
II. 1. out of 2. in 3. from, at 4. on 5. out of

6. to 7. to 8. - 9. off 10. on
III. 1. travelled around 2. returned from 3. come into

4. arrived at 5. walking along
Unit 51 Przyimki during, for, from, since, till, to str. 59
I. 1. I have known Adam for six years.

2. Joan has been ill since last Friday.
3. He has been unemployed since September.
4. Tom has had this dog for two months.
5. They have been married since 1963.
6. I have been in London since Christmas.
7. He has played cricket for one year.
8. Alice has worked here for five weeks.
9. I have been a student since 1995.
10. They have been living here since January.
II. 1. I usually work in my office from 8 a.m. till 5 p.m.

2. My mother stayed abroad from February till October.
3. Michael watched TV from morning till afternoon.
4. Ann has to practice the piano from 10 a.m. till 1 p.m.
5. He repaired my car from Tuesday till Saturday.
295
III. 1. for 2. during 3. Since 4. till 5. from, till / to 6. till
7. during 8. for 9. from, till 10. during 11. for 12. during
Unit 52 Przyimki before, by, until, while str. 60
I. 1. while I was on holiday

2. while we were driving
3. while I was bathing in the sea
4. while he was reading a book
5. while he was walking in the woods
II. 1. I will have finished painting the picture by next Monday.

2. We will have left school by 29 June.
3. The church will have been renovated by 2010.
4. She will have memorised the poem by tomorrow.
5. You won’t have recorded a new CD by next month.
III. 1. until 2. by 3. until 4. while 5. by

6. while 7. until 8. by 9. until 10. by
IV. 1. by 2. before 3. while 4. until

5. By 6. before 7. while 8. by
Unit 53 Przyimek ‘to’ str. 61
I. 1. N 2. T 3. N 4. N 5. T 6. T 7. N 8. N 9. T 10. T
II. 1. We have brought a gift to him.

2. Ann didn’t show her new dress to us.
3. They will pay a hundred pounds to me.
4. I am telling the truth to you.
5. Could you sell this picture to us?
6. We must give the money to Ronald.
7. Let’s send a parcel to Mr Lindsay.
8. They didn’t leave any food to me.
9. She has promised the tickets to us.
10. How about lending our radio to them?
III. 1. - 2. to 3. - 4. to 5. - 6. -
7. to 8. to 9. - 10. - 11. to 12. to
Unit 54 Inne użycie przyimków at, by, in, on str. 62
I. 1. on foot 2. on a diet 3. by train 4. in a hurry 5. on holiday

6. at sea 7. in cash 8. on duty 9. by accident 10. at risk
II. 1. He made the discovery at the age of 35.

2. You can hide in the shade of the trees.
3. No, our train was on schedule.
4. One can meet with the managing director by appointment.
5. Yes, he hit me on the head on purpose.
296
III. 1. in 2. at 3. at 4. in 5. by
6. on 7. on, in 8. on 9. by 10. by
Unit 55 Czasownik + przyimek (1) str. 63
I. 1. Mrs Benson is talking to / with her husband.

2. Harry is thinking about his girlfriend.
3. The baby is looking at the sky.
4. Alice is smiling at Peter.
5. Eddie is waiting for his parents.
II. 1. looking for 2. depend on 3. invited them to

4. believe in 5. listening to
III. 1. to 2. at 3. for 4. of 5. at / on
6. to 7. for 8. at 9. with 10. on
11. to 12. to, with 13. on 14. with 15. for
16. to / with, for 17. to 18. for 19. of 20. from
Unit 56 Czasownik + przyimek (2) str. 64
I. 1. A policeman fined me for driving / having driven too fast.

2. He was participating in a sports competition.
3. They always interfere in our privacy.
4. I disposed of it last week.
5. They adapted to new conditions quickly.
II. 1. staring at 2. contributed to 3. despairing of 4. comply with

5. specialises in 6. complimented on 7. compensated for 8. abstain from
III. 1. on. 2. with 3. with 4. into 5. for 6. with 7. with 8. from 9. to 10. at
Unit 57 Przymiotnik + przyimek (1) str. 65
I. Simon is good at physics. He is bad at French. He is proud of his dog.

He is interested in classical music.
Debbie is ...
II. 1. keen on 2. fit for 3. annoyed with 4. anxious about

5. amazed at / by 6. aware of 7. scared of 8. pleased with
III. 1. of 2. for 3. of 4. from 5. for 6. of

7. in 8. for 9. of 10. at / with 11. of 12. of
Unit 58 Przymiotnik + przyimek (2) str. 66
I. 1. similar to 2. absorbed in 3. capable of 4. terrified of

5. satisfied with 6. bored with 7. suspicious of 8. accustomed to
II. 1. He was critical of it

2. I am fed up with it.
3. I was confident of that.
297
4. He has been successful in passing it.
5. She is desperate for getting it.
III. 1. at / with 2. of 3. to 4. to 5. on
6. with 7. to 8. to 9. for 10. to
11. with 12. of 13. to 14. on 15. with
Unit 59 Rzeczownik + przyimek str. 67
I. 1. There is a big difference between these two pictures.

2. Jerry has good experience of constructing boats.
3. What was the reason for your resignation?
4. There was a general disapproval of my suggestions.
5. Did he give / offer any excuse for his bad behaviour?
II. 1. independence from 2. demand for 3. skill of

4. response to 5. intention of
III. 1. for 2. in 3. on 4. to 5. in
6. on 7. to / towards 8. to 9. for 10. in
11. in 12. to 13. in 14. to 15. of
Unit 60 Miejsce przyimka w zdaniu str. 68
I. 1. F 2. P 3. P 4. F 5. P 6. F 7. F 8. P 9. F 10. P
II. 1. I don’t know the people (who) you were talking to.
2. The enemy (which) they surrendered to was rather weak.
3. The articles (which) you have asked for are out of stock.
4. Who is the man (who) you are so grateful to?
5. The theory (which) we base our assumptions on can be mistaken.
6. The new watch, which I have exchanged my old one for, is faulty.
III. 1. which / that 2. Who 3. which 4. which

5. which / what 6. which 7. whom 8. What
9. Who / Which 10. which / that 11. who 12. which / that
Unit 61 ‘Be’ - czas teraźniejszy str. 69
I. 1.am 2. are 3. is 4. is 5. is 6. are 7. are 8. are
II. 1. Is Alex eight years old? Yes, he is.

2. Are you an only child? Yes, I am.
3. Is Lisa short haired? Yes, she is.
4. Are Bob and Eric friends? Yes, they are.
5. Are we in danger? Yes, we are.
6. Is Angie Harry’s sister? No, she isn’t.
7. Is Nigel a manager? No, he isn’t.
8. Are the clothes cheap? No, they aren’t.
9. Am I lonely? No, I am not.
10. Is her dog bad? No, it isn’t.
III. Eddie is eight years old. He is a pupil. He is small and red-haired.
298
IV. is, is, is, is, is, are, are, am, is, is, is
Unit 62 ‘Be’ - czas przeszły str. 70
I. 1. I was busy yesterday.

2. You were at home on Friday.
3. She was angry two days ago.
4. He was in Rome in 1995.
5. It was an accident.
6. We were in London a long time ago.
7. You were rich in the past.
8. They were at our place last month.
II. 1. was 2. Were, wasn’t 3. were 4. was 5. Were

6. were 7. Were 8. was 9. were, were 10. Were
III. Ćwiczenie ustne.
IV. was, was, was, was, was, was, was, were, was, were
Unit 63 ‘Have’ - czas teraźniejszy str. 71
I. Lenny has (got) a mobile phone and a snowboard.

He hasn’t (got) a private plane and a computer.
Betty ...
II. 1. has 2. Have 3. haven’t 4. have 5. Has

6. hasn’t 7. hasn’t 8. Have 9. have 10. haven’t
III. 1. Has Samantha two dogs? No, she hasn’t.

2. Has Mr Parker’s son a flat? Yes, he has.
3. Have David’s parents a car-wash? Yes, they have.
4. Have you a new pair of trousers? No, you haven’t.
5. Have the Graths one daughter? Yes, they have.
6. Has she a computer? Yes, she has.
7. Has the camera a battery? No, it hasn’t.
8. Have we much time to spare? Yes, we have.
9. Have they a shoe-factory? No, they haven’t.
10. Have you a map of London? Yes, you have.
Unit 64 ‘Have’ - czas przeszły str. 72
I. 1. Did Bob have an accident in 1996?

2. Did Fred have an operation last Monday?
3. Did Fred have an exam yesterday?
4. No, he didn’t.
5. Did Bob have guests yesterday?
6. Did Fred have a promotion in 1996?
7. Yes, he did.
8. Jim had (a divorce in 1996). / Jim did.
9. Did Bob have a headache last Monday?
10. No, he didn’t.
299
II. 1. Did your father have / Had your father 2. didn’t have / hadn’t
3. had 4. had
5. Did Mr Trump have / Had Mr Trump 6. didn’t have / hadn’t
7. didn’t have / hadn’t 8. didn’t have / hadn’t
9. had 10. did you have / had you
III. 1. had a toothache 2. had a good time 3. have a rest

4. had a puncture 5. had good luck
Unit 65 ‘Have’ forma ‘kauzatywna’ str. 73
I. 1. I will have the broken water-pipe replaced.

2. I had the sore tooth pulled out.
3. We have had the paths cleaned.
4. My mother had the iron repaired.
5. We are having our house renovated.
II. 1. have it cleaned 2. have the broken part replaced

3. having my flat redecorated 4. had new wiring installed
5. have your computer seen to 6. have it shortened
7. have the post delivered 8. have the data printed
9. have it overhauled 10. have it refilled
III. 1. had it cut 2. have it recharged

3. have it examined 4. having it exchanged
5. have them cooked 6. has them tailored
7. have it taken 8. have it proof-read
Unit 66 Be / have str. 74
I. 1. is, is 2. are, am 3. don’t have / 4. is, is 5. have

haven’t
6. Are 7. had 8. is / was 9. Is, was 10. have
11. is, is 12. has had 13. was 14. have 15. am
II. 1. Is Eddie’s brother a painter? No, he isn’t.

2. Was Angela at school yesterday? No, she wasn’t.
3. Did she have an accident in 1987? Yes, she did.
4. Is your friend a good pianist? Yes, he is.
5. Were the Parkers busy last morning? No, they weren’t.
6. Does Bob have a new computer now? Yes, he does.
7. Did his wife have a headache last night? Yes, she did.
8. Are there bookcases in the room? No, there aren’t.
III. had, have, had, is, is, is, has, am, have had, has been, having
Unit 67 ‘Do’ - różne zastosowania str. 75
I. 1. does 2. do 3. do 4. doesn’t, does

5. do 6. Did, didn’t 7. did 8. done
9. does 10. Do 11. Do, don’t 12. doing
300
II. 1. John does love Linda.
2. We do want you to come.
3. Do help us this time.
4. Sonia did want to keep that dog.
5. He did see a UFO last night.
III. 1. do 2. make 3. made 4. do 5. made

6. do 7. make 8. does 9. do 10. do
11. making 12. make 13. do 14. Make 15. did
Unit 68 Can - may str. 76
I. Judy can dance. She cannot speak German. She cannot play the piano.
She can drive a car.
Sammy ...
II. Brian may not smoke. He may not stay up late. He may drink beer.
He may eat sweets.
Cindy ...
III. 1. Can Celine swim? Yes, she can.

2. Can you sleep long on Sunday? No, you can’t.
3. Can Ms Dean read in Swedish? Yes, she can.
4. Can your dog jump high? Yes, it can.
5. Can the secretary write a memo? No, she can’t.
IV. 1. May Joan smoke cigarettes? No, she mayn’t.

2. May this man enter the office? Yes, he may.
3. May we read the secret files? No, we mayn’t.
4. May Arnold drink alcohol? No, he mayn’t.
5. May you come home late? Yes, you may.
Unit 69 Can - could - be able to str. 77
I. 1. couldn’t, Can / Could, can / could

2. Could, can’t, can / could, can / could
3. Can / Could, can’t, Can / Could, can’t
II. 1. couldn’t / weren’t able to 2. can’t / am not able to, can / will be able to
3. can / is able to 4. hasn’t been able to
5. couldn’t / wasn’t able to 6. Could / Were you able to
7. can / am able to 8. could / was able to
9. won’t be able to 10. have been able to
III. 1. was able to learn 2. won’t be able to recognise

3. be able to write 4. won’t be able to pay
5. was able to defeat 6. be able to set
Unit 70 May - might str. 78
I. 1. He may be our new copywriter.

2. He may live in the next village.
3. I may go to the mountains.
4. She may be waiting for someone.
301
5. It may be ready next month.
II. 1. They might not arrive on time.

2. He might not be for our suggestions.
3. He might be a spy.
4. The place might not be safe.
5. It might be some trick.
6. They might be in danger.
7. We might not win.
8. This plant might be poisonous.
9. It might not belong to me.
10. They might mistake my name.
III. 1. might 2. may / might 3. may / might

4. may / might 5. might 6. might
Unit 71 May - be allowed to str. 79
I. 1. I may not / am not allowed to play computer games after school.

2. You weren’t allowed to take the cap off in the sun.
3. The people weren’t allowed to pick fruit from our trees.
4. We may not / aren’t allowed to speak during the lessons.
5. I will be allowed to eat as much ice-cream as I want to.
II. 1. aren’t allowed to smoke

2. haven’t been allowed to eat
3. were allowed to ski
4. will be allowed to meet
5. weren’t allowed to make.
III. 1. has been allowed to 2. might not / weren’t allowed to

3. hasn’t been allowed to 4. may / are allowed to
5. weren’t allowed to 6. might / were allowed to
7. mayn’t / aren’t allowed to 8. hasn’t been allowed to
9. may / will be allowed to 10. mayn’t / aren’t allowed to
Unit 72 Must - have to str. 80
I. 1. have to / must 2. had to divide 3. have to / must take 4. will have to give up
hurry up
5. had to wait 6. have had to fulfil 7. has to / must look 8. had to ask for
after
II. 1. have to 2. will have to 3. has had to 4. have to 5. having to

6. have to 7. will have to 8. had to 9. has to 10. has had to
III. 1. I had to clean the deck each morning.

2. You will have to work as long as your boss tells you to.
3. Jerry has had to type every letter for Mr Black.
302
Unit 73 Mustn’t - needn’t - don’t have to str. 81
I. 1. needn’t 2. mustn’t 3. needn’t 4. needn’t 5. mustn’t
II. 1. One mustn’t feed the animals.

2. One mustn’t drink pond water.
3. One mustn’t smoke inside.
4. One mustn’t touch the exhibits.
5. One mustn’t make noise.
6. One mustn’t drop litter.
7. One mustn’t tread on the plants.
8. One mustn’t tease the dogs.
III. 1. don’t have to pay

2. didn’t have to walk
3. didn’t have to put on
4. don’t have to translate
5. doesn’t have to convince
IV. 1. needn’t mend 2. needn’t swallow 3. needn’t call

4. needn’t water 5. needn’t get up
Unit 74 Should - ought to str. 82
I. 1. should put on 2. should go to 3. should set

4. should leave 5. should study
II. 1. oughtn’t to eat 2. oughtn’t to leave 3. oughtn’t to read

4. oughtn’t to drink 5. oughtn’t to be driving / to drive
III. 1. Where ought we to go? 2. Why shouldn’t he obtain the salary?

3. How should I answer? 4. When ought they to return?
5. How often should I take the pill? 6. What shouldn’t she tell / do?
7. Where ought we to go? 8. What should he leave / do?
9. Why oughtn’t they to cross the 10. What time should I be back home?
road?
IV. 1. Ought 2. should 3. should 4. ought

5. should 6. should 7. Should 8. ought
Unit 75 Used to str. 83
I. Mr Gordon used to smoke a lot ten years ago. He used to work in a mine
five years ago. He used to go fishing often three years ago.
Benny ...
II. 1. used to quarrel 2. used to be 3. used to play 4. used to behave

5. used to wear 6. used to listen to 7. used to bring 8. used to like
III. 1. did Peter use to work 2. used to type

3. did Paul use to tell, used to tell 4. did Ann use to go
5. Did you use to learn 6. did Simon use to travel
7. used to prepare 8. Did Sandra use to get up
303
Unit 76 May - might - could + have done str. 84
I. 1. May have been 2. may have exceeded

3. may have been feeling / have felt 4. may not have come
5. may have dropped 6. may not have liked
7. may have hurt 8. may have committed
9. may not have been able to 10. may have wanted to
II. 1. could have forgotten 2. could not have been

3. could not have eaten 4. could have been carrying out
5. could have discovered 6. could have been suffering / suffered from
7. could have won 8. could not have told
III. 1. Mr Williams might / could have become angry.

2. Miriam might / could have misunderstood my remarks.
3. The telephone couldn’t have been out of order.
4. Might / Could Richard have got offended with us?
5. There might / could have been too many candidates for the job.
Unit 77 Could - could have done - be able to str. 85
I. 1. could have told 2. could / was able to

3. could 4. could have broken in
5. could / were able to 6. couldn’t have been
7. could not / were not able to 8. could have happened
9. could not / was not able to 10. could not / was not able to
II. 1. could invite 2. could help

3. could have broken 4. could go to
5. could have had 6. could translate
7. could have shown / showed 8. could make
Unit 78 Could not have done str. 86
I. 1. David couldn’t have damaged Sarah’s rollers because he didn’t even touch them.
2. Sarah couldn’t have seen David in a coffee-bar because he was working
all the morning.
3. David couldn’t have eaten Sarah’s ice-cream because he hates ice-cream.
4. David couldn’t have dated another girl because Sarah was the only one
he loved.
5. Sarah couldn’t have met David’s mother yesterday because she is still in
France.
6. Sarah couldn’t have lost weight because she keeps eating sweets all the
time.
7. David couldn’t have devastated the flowers in the garden because he hasn’t
gone out there for a few days.
8. Mr Benson couldn’t have borrowed a lawn-mower from David because he
doesn’t have one.
Unit 79 Must have done - had to do str. 87
I. 1. must have been 2. must have taken 3. must have eaten

4. must have done 5. must have misunderstood
304
II. 1. had to get up 2. must have forgotten
3. must have been feeling / felt 4. had to keep
5. had to read 6. must have been
7. had to take 8. must have cut
III. 1. Robert had to park the hotel guests’ cars.

2. Someone must have discovered the secret passage.
3. Did you have to report on your every action?
4. They must have got stuck in a traffic jam.
5. Jeff must have used this database.
Unit 80 Should / ought to + have done str. 88
I. 1. You should have called the police.

2. She should have gone to the dentist.
3. You should have put on a warm coat.
4. He should have talked to someone.
5. We should have asked Jim for help.
6. He should have learned more.
7. You should have been more careful.
8. She should have been taken to hospital.
9. You should have taken a sleeping pill.
10. He should have practised more.
II. 1. I oughtn’t to have touched it.

2. You oughtn’t to have called him a fool.
3. They oughtn’t to have got so drunk.
4. You oughtn’t to have teased it.
5. He oughtn’t to have driven / been driving so fast.
6. I oughtn’t to have borrowed it.
7. She oughtn’t to have shouted at him.
8. We oughtn’t to have picked her flowers.
9. They oughtn’t to have played / been playing with matches.
10. She oughtn’t to have been sunbathing so long.
III. 1. should have done 2. shouldn’t have touched

3. should have come 4. shouldn’t have eaten
5. should have been 6. shouldn’t have borrowed
7. should not have watched / been watching 8. should have thought
Unit 81 Didn’t have to - needn’t have done str. 89
I. 1. George didn’t have to deliver the mail.

2. They needn’t have replaced the water pipe with a new one.
3. You needn’t have sent a telegram to Mr Talbot.
4. I didn’t have to help them with the preparations.
5. Sheila needn’t have made a copy for each of us.
II. 1. didn’t have to do 2. needn’t have checked

3. needn’t have done 4. didn’t have to beat
5. needn’t have brought 6. didn’t have to do
7. needn’t have called 8. needn’t have brought
305
III. 1. needn’t have told 2. needn’t have thrown 3. needn’t clean
4. needn’t go 5. needn’t have given
Unit 82 Czasowniki modalne - dokonane (1) str. 90
I. 1. have dropped 2. have forgotten 3. have hurt 4. have won

5. have washed 6. have damaged 7. have suffered 8. have been
II. 1. needn’t have gone 2. couldn’t have met

3. shouldn’t have been 4. needn’t have called
5. needn’t have brought 6. couldn’t have been
7. couldn’t have broken 8. shouldn’t / needn’t have locked
III. 1. He couldn’t have given you a fine because he isn’t a policeman.

2. Linda must have dressed Mike’s wounds because she is a nurse.
3. He may have cured her hamster because he is a vet.
4. She cannot have worn a uniform because she isn’t a policewoman.
5. He might have controlled the traffic because he is a policeman.
Unit 83 Czasowniki modalne - dokonane (2) str. 91
I. 1. should / could have taken

2. couldn’t have seen, must / may / might / could have been
3. shouldn’t / needn’t have walked, should / could have taken
4. may / might / could have had, may / might / could have dropped
5. needn’t have gone
6. could / should have told
7. must / may / might / could / will have gone
8. must / may / might / could have been
9. shouldn’t have forgotten
10. could have done
Unit 84 Present Simple (1) str. 92
I. 1. read 2. watch 3. complains 4. likes

5. barks 6. eat 7. look 8. make
II. 1. I don’t write poems. I write novels.

2. She doesn’t eat meat. She eats vegetables.
3. They don’t play rock. They play reggae.
4. You don’t own a factory. You own a shop.
5. Chris doesn’t like golf. He likes cricket.
6. It doesn’t taste sweet. It tastes sour.
III. 1. Do you feel all right? No, I don’t.

2. Does Susan read magazines? Yes, she does.
3. Do the Browns run a business? Yes, they do.
4. Do we waste time? No, we don’t.
5. Does it look like rain? Yes, it does.
6. Does she drive a car? No, she doesn’t.
IV. Ćwiczenie ustne.
306
Unit 85 Present Simple (2) str. 93
I. come from, live, own, work, get up, drives, cleans

likes, makes, attends, says, gives, studies, wants
look, milks, takes, return, sit, eat, talk, find, helps, meets
II. 1. What time does Alex go to sleep?

2. Where does Mary keep her jewels?
3. What does Albert like?
4. Where do you live?
5. Who quarrels quite often?
6. When does he usually come?
7. How do you travel to work?
8. How often do you write reports?
9. What does she look like? / How does she look?
10. Where do they often meet?
Unit 86 Present Continuous str. 94
I. 1. Is Mark sleeping? No, he isn’t. He is listening to the news.

2. Are you dancing? No you aren’t. You are talking to your friends.
3. Is Angela having a bath? No, she isn’t. She is studying.
4. Is Mr Barth working? No, he isn’t. He is resting.
5. Are they eating lunch? No, they aren’t. They are playing tennis.
6. Is she sewing? No, she isn’t. She is washing her clothes.
7. Are we going to school? No, we aren’t. We are sitting in a cafe.
8. Am I watching TV? No, I am not. I am cleaning the house.
II. 1. Are you using 2. is riding

3. is still shaving 4. are studying
5. is doing 6. is driving
7. are moving 8. is raining
9. are falling 10. is occupying
III. 1. is going on, are screaming, is crying

2. is having, Is he talking, are discussing
3. is Joan packing, are sending
Unit 87 Present Simple - Present Continuous (1) str. 95
I. 1. do you usually travel 2. does your uncle keep 3. paints

4. do you usually return 5. plays, isn’t doing 6. is your mother feeling
7. borrows, forgets 8. am asking 9. cheats
10. are having 11. does Cindy visit 12. breaks down
II. 1. does Steve do 2. rises 3. is having

4. wins 5. is breaking 6. explains
III. 1. talks 2. take 3. enjoy 4. freezes

5. meets, isn’t meeting 6. goes 7. is getting 8. sets
307
Unit 88 Present Simple - Present Continuous (2) str. 96
I. 1. no - It smells ...
2. yes
3. no - it belongs
4. yes
5. yes
6. yes
7. no - What do you think of ...
8. yes
9. no - I owe ...
10. no - she supposes ...
II. 1. owns 2. tastes 3. don’t see 4. smells 5. hates

6. feels 7. am tasting 8. does the hotel look 9. hear 10. am looking
III. 1. wants to 2. possesses 3. believe 4. Do you understand

5. count 6. love 7. doesn’t agree 8. sounds
Unit 89 Past Simple - czasowniki regularne str. 97
I. 1. Did you go home? No, I didn’t. I stayed till midnight.

2. Did Ann bathe? No, she didn’t. She washed her hair.
3. Did Mrs Dean cry? No, she didn’t. She laughed.
4. Did he live in Harlem? No, he didn’t. He moved out.
5. Did the plane crash? No, it didn’t. It landed safely.
6. Did they steal jewellery? No, they didn’t. They robbed a bank.
7. Did you spoil the toys? No, I didn’t. I repaired them.
8. Did the Greys swim? No, they didn’t. They sunbathed.
II. 1. Did Harry work 2. wanted

3. contained 4. behaved
5. Did the police arrest 6. tried, failed
7. organised 8. did not return
9. did not grant 10. happened, jumped, twisted
III. 1. travelled 2. opened 3. saved 4. lasted

5. turned off 6. served 7. passed 8. apologised
Unit 90 Past Simple - czasowniki nieregularne str. 98
I. 1. understood 2. took 3. made 4. brought

5. knew 6. found 7. forgot 8. taught
II. 1. fell, broke 2. flew 3. got, told

4. drove, went 5. rang 6. wore
7. sold 8. had to, began 9. paid
10. threw 11. gave 12. read
13. chose 14. sent 15. won
308
Unit 91 Present Simple - Past Simple str. 99
I. 1. tells 2. got
3. settled 4. shone
5. Does Mary often borrow 6. don’t usually drink
7. left 8. Do you feed
9. grow 10. did the police catch
11. did Simon live 12. causes
13. didn’t give 14. did anybody set
15. usually makes 16. bit
17. burnt 18. don’t manage
19. grows 20. shrank
II. is, makes, says, puts, wears, differ, remember, did, dressed, pretended,
wandered, asked, is, has, know
Unit 92 Past Continuous str. 100
I. Yesterday at 9 a.m. George was sleeping. He was having lunch at 1 p.m.

He was working at 6 p.m. He was reading a paper at 9 p.m.
II. 1. I was listening to the radio while I was driving to work.
2. The children were making noise while they were playing outdoors.
3. The hunters were talking while their dogs were chasing a hare.
4. The thief was escaping while the police were following him.
5. Water was running into the bath while I was looking for the plug.
III. 1. was / were having 2. was revising 3. was emitting

4. was doing 5. was raining
IV. 1. was writing 2. is going on 3. were looking for

4. was spending 5. was Jack doing 6. is still studying
Unit 93 Past Simple - Past Continuous str. 101
I. 1. arrived, was sleeping 2. was reading

3. were the children doing, saw 4. was feeling
5. had 6. were going, met
7. Was Eric talking, saw 8. wanted, didn’t have
9. did they react, saw 10. knew, was still sleeping
11. put on, ate 12. was / were screaming, entered
II. 1. happened, were driving, boiled, stopped

2. came, was doing, arrived, was waiting, was ironing
3. Did you think / Were you thinking, were walking, didn’t have, were
Unit 94 Present Perfect (1) str. 102
I. 1. I have seen a polar bear twice.

2. Dr Brown has just started his experiment.
3. She has always been in love with Tom.
4. He has had an accident recently.
5. There have been no walk-outs this year.
6. We have already planned our tour.
309
7. You have never visited Scotland.
8. They have told many lies.
9. Rob has never met Angelica.
10. Our uncle has just bought a new villa.
II. 1. Has Lisa ridden a horse three times?

2. Has Ann ridden a horse once?
3. No, she has never been in hospital.
4. Has Ann worked in a garden many times?
5. Yes, she has been in hospital once.
6. Has Betty worked in a garden several times?
7. No, she has never worked in a garden.
8. has Betty ridden a horse
9. Has Lisa been in hospital recently?
10. Yes, I have. / No, I haven’t.
III. 1. have eaten 2. has quit 3. have lost

4. has chosen 5. has gone
Unit 95 Present Perfect (2) str. 103
I. 1. How long have you known Muriel? I have know her since 1989.
2. How long have they been married? They have been married for ten years.
3. How long has Peter had a dog? He has had it for one week.
4. How long have they worked together? They have worked together for many years.
5. How long has Eddie been on a diet? He has been on a diet for a long time.
6. How long has Dan lived here? He has lived here since January.
II. 1. Yes, he has already prepared his lecture.

2. No, I haven’t phoned Adam yet.
3. Yes, she has already seen the film.
4. No, they haven’t apologised to me yet.
5. Yes, he has already paid his debts.
6. No, there haven’t been any responses yet.
7. Yes, we have already reached the place.
8. No, the party hasn’t begun yet.
III. 1. Has Nigel told, hasn’t talked

2. has supported
3. Have you already seen, haven’t visited
4. have just repaired
5. have treated
6. have never met
7. Has Mr Dalton ever invested, has done
8. hasn’t been
Unit 96 Present Perfect Continuous str. 104
I. 1. We have been sitting in the cafe since two p.m.

2. Arnold has been sleeping for six hours.
3. I have been learning English for four years.
4. Fiona has been reading a book since morning.
5. They have been playing cards since midday.
6. Terry has been studying physics for three months.
7. You have been staying in hospital since last Saturday.
310
8. She has been swimming in the sea for a half an hour.
9. I have been painting the picture for two years.
10. It has been snowing since yesterday.
II. 1. have been waiting for 2. has been ringing since

3. have been dancing for 4. have been running for
5. has been resting since 6. has been singing since
7. have been fighting for 8. have been trying since
9. has been composing since 10. have been talking since
III. 1. Have you opened, have already done

2. have been cutting
3. has been writing, has written
4. haven’t finished, have been doing
5. has been going on
6. haven’t found, have been looking for
7. have they been discussing, hasn’t ended
8. have you been doing
Unit 97 Present Simple - Present Perfect (Continuous) str. 105
I. 1. has Michael been studying / has Michael studied

2. prefer
3. has just moved
4. have been speaking
5. have never operated
6. Does Brian know
7. haven’t been
8. have you been riding
9. don’t want, have just taken
10. haven’t recorded, have been looking for
11. Does Sharon work
12. Have you ever tried
13. know, have been living / have lived
14. have been making
15. have always dreamt
III. 1. does it usually take, have never ironed

2. haven’t seen, have you been doing, have been travelling
3. Have you started, have been trying
4. has been using
5. has your bank granted, don’t grant
6. Does she always, has been
Unit 98 Present Perfect - Past Simple str. 106
I. 1. My wife fell ill yesterday.

2. Chris has just started work.
3. She went to sleep an hour ago.
4. We haven’t visited London this year.
5. He has won two medals so far.
6. I didn’t live here in 1977.
7. They haven’t bought a car yet.
8. Ann left Leeds last week.
9. You have already got your ticket.
311
10. It has been hot recently.
II. 1. hasn’t travelled 2. was 3. Did you talk, came

4. settled 5. has planted 6. spent
7. Have you already been 8. haven’t had 9. has been, phoned
10. Did anyone help 11. left, have been 12. did she decide
13. haven’t eaten, set out 14. lost, found 15. have never invested
Unit 99 Present, Past, Perfect - Simple str. 107
I. goes, spent, discovered, has made, cherishes, has already explored,

has found, doesn’t wish, started, has spent, likes, accompanies, organises,
didn’t use, had to, take(s), is / was, decided, has retrieved, smiles, tells, smoked
II. have heard, did you start, was, came, did you work, worked, (has) made,
have always wanted, Have you ever investigated, have solved
Unit 100 Future Simple str. 108
I. 1. Robert will stay at home tonight.

2. I will return from Chelsea next week.
3. Our mother will go to work in a few days.
4. They will be very surprised.
5. Muriel will answer your questions soon.
II. 1. Will I buy a pencil? No, I won’t. I will buy a ballpen.

2. Will Mark work in a factory? No, he won’t. He will work in a bank.
3. Will we keep sheep? No, we won’t. We will keep horses.
4. Will Mr Cox drink tea? No, he won’t. He will drink coffee.
5. Will you play basketball? No, you won’t. You will play handball.
III. 1. will you know 2. will not do

3. will be 4. Will Joan bring
5. will change 6. will sleep
7. will not take 8. will they stay
9. will never give up 10. will be
IV. 1. will not go 2. will develop 3. will make

4. will control 5. will bring 6. will not manage
Unit 101 Present Continuous - Future Simple str. 109
I. 1. Where are you spending this weekend?

I am staying at home, but my family is / are going to
2. When are coming back, I am staying in Hawaii
3. I am leaving for Warsaw
4. He is getting married
5. What are you doing, I am taking care of
II. 1. He is starting it tomorrow.

2. I am becoming a soldier.
3. She is leaving next week.
4. I am having it on Sunday.
312
5. He is going to prison.
IV. 1. will forget 2. is driving 3. will help

4. will be 5. will do
Unit 102 Be going to - Future Simple str. 110
I. 1. Christine is going to visit her dentist tomorrow. She is going to start a new job next
week. She is going to get married soon.
Martin ...
II. 1. Where is she going to hang it? 2. Who is going to repair it?
3. When are you going to listen to it? 4. How are they going to pay?
5. What is he going to do?
III. 1. am going to see to 2. will get

3. Will you do 4. What is she going to study?
5. is going to make 6. will come
7. is going to change 8. Will you have
Unit 103 Be going to - Present Continuous str. 111
I. 1. am going to 2. am having 3. is going to be

4. Are you going to read 5. is getting 6. are going to wither
7. are spending 8. is going to resign 9. am having
10. aren’t going to buy 11. am going to take 12. is meeting
13. am leaving 14. is going to 15. are you going to climb
II. 1. is going, Are you going, am not going to fish

2. is merging / is going to merge, am going to ask
3. am taking
4. am going to buy / am buying
5. are going, Are they going to climb, are going to have
6. am thinking, is going to collapse
Unit 104 Future Continuous str. 112
I. 1. will be giving 2. will be broadcasting 3. will be watching

4. will be celebrating 5. will be working 6. will be practising
II. 1. What will Robert be doing tomorrow at 5 p.m.? He will be learning German.
2. Will Josh be doing shopping next Saturday at 10 a.m.?
3. No, they will not.
4. What will Robert be doing next Friday between 2 and 4 p.m.?
He will be driving to Devon.
5. Will Sue and Helen be acting in a play tomorrow at 5 p.m.?
6. Will Robert be talking to his boss next Saturday at 10 a.m.?
7. What will Josh be doing next Friday between 2 and 4 p.m.?
He will be preparing a speech.
8. No, he will not.
313
III. 1. will be listening 2. will explain 3. will send, will be going
4. will not be doing 5. will bring
Unit 105 Future Simple - Future Continuous str. 113
I. 1. will be using 2. will be giving

3. Will they be, will be having 4. will not do
5. will be arriving 6. will do
7. will she be delivering 8. will not do
9. will be leaving 10. will meet, will wait / be waiting
II. 1. will be sleeping 2. will have to 3. will be having

4. will be writing 5. will forget 6. will not have to
7. will be touching 8. will Tom be doing 9. will be
10. will not be singing 11. will give 12. will be standing
Unit 106 Will - shall str. 114
I. 1. Shall I buy any bread for you?

2. Shall I switch the lights on?
3. Shall I fix the button for you?
4. Shall I clean the floor?

5. Shall I give you a ride to London?
II. 1. won’t play / take part 2. won’t cook / prepare

3. will bite / hurt 4. won’t let
5. will do 6. won’t give / grant
7. will make / have 8. won’t sign / make
III. 1. Will 2. shall 3. Shall 4. will 5. will

6. will 7. shall 8. shall 9. will 10. will
11. shall, will 12. shall 13. will 14. will 15. Will
Unit 107 Future Perfect str. 115
I. Gregory will have had his hair cut by next week. He will have found a new job
by July. He will have learnt French by next year.
Debbie ...
II. 1. I will have done the repairs 2. You will not have read the book
3. Stella will have prepared lunch 4. John will not have finished his novel
5. They will have left 6. The film will have ended
7. We will have gathered the crops 8. She will not have got married
III. 1. will have been 2. Will the Browns have sold

3. will have finished 4. will have recorded
5. will have prepared 6. will have gone
7. will have cleaned 8. Will you have delivered

9. will have fallen 10. will have typed
314
Unit 108 Future Perfect Continuous str. 116
I. 1. Our relatives will have been living in South America for ten years ...
2. ... Tom’s sister will have been working as a deputy for six months.
3. The ministers will have been discussing some important matters for four hours ...
4. ... Gregory will have been studying social sciences for four years.
5. ... we will have been travelling around Europe for seven days.
II. 1. will have been staying 2. will they have been repairing
3. will have been living 4. will have been watching
5. will she have been learning 6. will have been doing
7. will have been keeping 8. will not have been working
9. will you have been dating 10. will have been renovating
III. 1. will not have seen 2. will have been staying

3. will have known 4. will have finished
5. will have been listening 6. will not have painted
7. will Mark have been staying 8. will have had
9. will have begun 10. will have been crying
Unit 109 Past Perfect str. 117
I. 1. had lost 2. had already begun 3. had quarrelled 4. had quit

5. had met 6. had eaten 7. had kidnapped 8. had driven
II. 1. had gone 2. had booked 3. had broken 4. had damaged

5. had reprimanded 6. had not been 7. had read 8. had exchanged
III. 1. set, had spent 2. had written, died

3. had lost, went 4. (had) finished, appeared
5. (had) caused, had to 6. had passed, decided
7. called, had escaped 8. had the flat belonged to, moved
Unit 110 Past Perfect Continuous str. 118
I. 1. She had been feeling unwell all night. 2. Someone had been using them.
3. He had been working hard. 4. I had been drinking beer.
5. She had been crying. 6. It had been snowing all day.
7. He had been reading a newspaper. 8. She had been eating.
9. It had been raining hard. 10. Somebody had been smoking.
II. 1. had been drifting 2. had been blowing

3. had been fighting 4. had been walking
5. had been cooking 6. had been grating
III. 1. had not met 2. had been working

3. had been reading 4. had read
5. had damaged 6. had been taking
7. had launched 8. had tested
9. had mentioned 10. had occupied / had been occupying
315
Unit 111 Past Perfect (Continuous) - Past Simple str. 119
I. 1. had been working 2. had been snowing

3. had been waiting 4. had been using
5. had been building 6. had been reading
7. had been doing 8. had been playing
II. 1. saw, called 2. (had) subsided, started

3. had been sleeping, woke 4. had already been practising, won
5. returned, had been 6. had been trying, arrived
7. came, had already fallen 8. told, had been listening
III. 1. Did you go, didn’t want, had seen

2. did the soldier look, had been keeping
3. happened, returned, thought, had broken, had stolen, remembered,
had forgotten
Unit 112 Użycie różnych czasów (1) str. 120
I. 1. hasn’t gone 2. goes 3. didn’t meet

4. am having 5 have you been, have been 6. was raining, were driving
waiting
7. hasn’t sent 8. doesn’t usually have 9. will have turned
10. had run, saw 11. Was Alex standing 12. are kissing
13. Have you seen 14. was using 15. will be packing
II. 1. are Rich and Carol doing, are talking, have been sitting
2. had you lived / been living, decided, don’t remember, have changed
3. happened, was, was walking, approached, asked
4. Did Adam ask, had arranged
5. Has Maurice ever seen, flew, will be, are taking / are going to take
I. 1. saw 2. had been studying

3. are leaving 4. has owned
5. move 6. have been
7. were stealing 8. started
9. will have undergone 10. became
II. 1. have been, began 2. had paid, was

3. worked 4. have never read
5. has been ringing 6. was going on, heard
7. returned, have been keeping 8. does Bill have to
9. will have arranged, arrive 10. will happen, obey
I. met, was, has grown, has become, is, has just graduated, is writing,
wants, hopes, have known, joined, had spent, had travelled / had been
travelling / travelled / was travelling, (had) settled, didn’t feel / wasn’t feeling,
made, took, began, has been, haven’t heard, emigrated, had worked / had
been working, didn’t give / wasn’t giving, (has) left, got, are going to have
316
II. have you been waiting, came, have you been doing, have been reading,
(have been) talking, were looking, have been dreaming, have you done,
have worked, seem, will give, (will) have to, am I starting / do I start
I. 1. has always dreamt, left, has taken up, has applied, has not been
2. decided, had been travelling, reached, saw, had built, were, made
3. is taking, has been studying, has already mastered, will do, does not
make, will be
4. have been falling, have already flooded, still remains, will not be,
ease off, will not change / isn’t going to change
5. had not been, revealed, believed, would have to, had been working,
had changed / had been changing, took over
Unit 116 Tryb warunkowy I str. 124
I. 1. d 2. c 3. e 4. b 5. a
II. 1. If I find my keys, I will open the door.

2. If they get a loan, they will set up a private enterprise.
3. If you come early, you will buy tickets for the performance.
4. If Alice passes her exams, she will study chemistry.
5. If Jim catches a thief, he will get a prize.
III. 1. will not make 2. is 3. will start

4. don’t ask 5. will catch
IV. 1. will feel, don’t get 2. will reprimand, don’t write

3. will quit, doesn’t get 4. has, will talk
5. will not be, don’t stop 6. finds, will arrest
7. will fade, doesn’t rain 8. will not improve, don’t go
Unit 117 Tryb warunkowy II str. 125
I. 1. c 2. b 3. d 4. e 5. a
II. 1. If we had a radio, we would listen to some music.

2. If David knew Italian, he would translate these documents.
3. If I earned a lot / more, I would / could afford to buy expensive clothes.
4. If you set your alarm-clock, you would not wake up too late.
5. If Andrew were experienced, he would know how to use the tools.
III. 1. would smile 2. closed 3. was / were

4. would take 5. would be
IV. 1. weren’t / wasn’t, would enjoy / be enjoying 2. wouldn’t feel / be feeling, weren’t
3. gave, would find 4. would answer, knew
5. weren’t, wouldn’t get 6. would go, offered
317
Unit 118 Tryb warunkowy III str. 126
I. 1. e 2. d 3. a 4. c 5. b
II. 1. If John had taken an umbrella, he wouldn’t have got wet through.
2. If we hadn’t played miserably, we wouldn’t have lost the game.
3. If Linda had been careful, she wouldn’t have made too many mistakes.
4. If you had handled the vase gently, you wouldn’t have broken it.
5. If there hadn’t been a car crash, the police wouldn’t have closed the road.
III. 1. would have visited 2. had arrived 3. wouldn’t have given up

4. had come 5. wouldn’t have spread
IV. 1. would have become, hadn’t met

2. hadn’t had, would have suffered / been suffering
3. wouldn’t have been, hadn’t worked / been working
4. hadn’t gone, would have stolen
5. would have been, hadn’t attacked
Unit 119 Tryby warunkowe I - II str. 127
I. 1. e 2. c 3. d 4. a 5. f 6. b
II. 1. was / were 2. asks

3. would look 4. doesn’t fit
5. will show 6. would be
7. took 8. would kill
9. sees 10. would burn
III. 1. would happen, found 2. do 3. moved, wouldn’t be

4. would bite 5. takes
Unit 120 Tryby warunkowe II - III str. 128
I. 1. If I had known you were reading the newspaper, I wouldn’t have taken it.
2. I wouldn’t have felt terrible if I hadn’t drunk so much the previous day.
3. If he learned more, he wouldn’t get poor marks.
4. If she made new friends, she wouldn’t feel lonely.
5. Tom wouldn’t have paid a fine if he hadn’t smoked a cigarette in a non-smoking
compartment.
6. If they hadn’t started too late, they would have been ready.
7. If I earned more money, I could buy a new flat.
8. She would have given me a prescription if I had asked for it.
9. The air wouldn’t be polluted if the factories didn’t emit toxic fumes.
10. If you kept your food in your refrigerator, it wouldn’t go stale.
II. 1. had played 2. would you do

3. wouldn’t be 4. drew
5. had been able to 6. would feel / be feeling
7. wouldn’t suffer 8. wouldn’t have fired
9. would believe 10. hadn’t forgotten
318
Unit 121 Tryby warunkowe I - II - III str. 129
I. 1. starts, won’t 2. would have bought, hadn’t shown

3. wouldn’t, didn’t 4. will collapse, doesn’t
5. wouldn’t have got, hadn’t eaten 6. were, wouldn’t
7. would tip, were 8. wouldn’t have been, hadn’t been
9. sees, will raise 10. hadn’t, wouldn’t have been
II. 1. will not speak 2. would have been

3. had arrived 4. asks
5. moved 6. hadn’t been
7. take 8. doesn’t receive
9. would have stayed 10. would have known
Unit 122 If - unless str. 130
I. 1. I will never talk to you again unless you tell me the truth.
2. Unless the storm subsides, we’ll have to give up going sailing.
3. John will go to prison unless he starts paying alimony.
4. Unless the workers get higher wages, there will be disturbances.
5. You will be punished unless your behaviour changes.
6. Unless we find some sponsors, our plans will turn into a failure.
7. All crops will go waste unless rain falls.
8. Unless you ask more questions, you will not find out anything.
9. We will arrive late unless we speed up.
10. Unless she makes progress, she will be moved to a lower group.
II. 1. Unless 2. if 3. If 4. unless 5. unless 6. if

7. Unless 8. If 9. if 10. Unless 11. if 12. if
Unit 123 Wish + Past Simple / would str. 131
I. I wish I had more time for myself. I wish I read more books and I wish I spent
more time with my family. I wish I could work in my garden in the afternoon.
I wish I didn’t work too long. I wish my work wasn’t / weren’t so exhausting.
Sue wishes she met a rich boyfriend. She wishes she lived in a big house.
She wishes she moved out of the village. She wishes she bought new clothes
everyday. She wishes she found work in a big company.
II. 1. Alan wishes he could swim very well.

2. We wish we got some bonuses.
3. Mr Hicks wishes his students respected him.
4. The Hardys wish their neighbours stopped interfering in their matters.
III. 1. Alice wishes her boyfriend would bring her flowers.

2. Steven wishes his parents would give him some pocket money.
3. We wish our boss would give us some interesting tasks.
4. Mrs Bronco wishes her son would stop being disobedient.
5. I wish my brother wouldn’t waste any more money in the casino.
319
Unit 124 Wish + Past Perfect str. 132
I. 1. I wish I had passed the driving test last Monday.

2. Danny wishes he had not spoken so rudely to Muriel.
3. The Browns wish they had invited Ms Simmons to the barbecue.
4. I wish I had proposed to Caroline.
5. Brian wishes the ice had not been too thin to skate on.
II. 1. had not forgotten 2. had been

3. had hurried up 4. had collected
5. had taken 6. had not enrolled
7. had refilled 8. had chosen
9. had not melted 10. had prepared
III. 1. We wish we hadn’t been playing so noisily.

2. I wish I hadn’t shouted at my baby.
3. I wish I hadn’t been driving too fast.
4. I wish I hadn’t manipulated with the knobs.
5. I wish I hadn’t had my car repainted.
Unit 125 Wish - if only str. 133
I. 1. If only my boss was / were less strict.

2. If only we hadn’t sold our boat.
3. If only my brother stopped quarrelling with me.
4. If only I had given up smoking earlier.
5. If only I travelled more.
II. If only I had treated Mary right. If only I hadn’t shouted and teased at her.
If only I hadn’t cheated at her. If only she was / were with me now. If only she hadn’t
dropped me.
III. 1. hadn’t worked / been working 2. had been

3. had 4. had not damaged
5. had obeyed 6. could
7. had not been 8. was / were wearing
9. had been shining 10. knew
Unit 126 Mowa zależna (1) - twierdzenia str. 134
I. Bob said that he liked Catherine very much.

Ron said that she was an intelligent girl.
Bob said that had got a sense of humour.
Ron said that she was also very beautiful.
Bob said that she caught the eye of many boys.
Ron said that he was in love with her.
Bob said that he loved her, too.
II. 1. Sue said that her brother was learning then.

2. Tom answered that Nigel lived in Glasgow.
3. Liam said that he spent his weekends at home.
4. Eva said that she didn’t know Mr Winston.
5. Nick told Jim that he was feeling all right.
320
6. Jeff answered that Brian worked in a car factory.
7. Diane said that she only earned five hundred.
8. Fiona told Terry that Peter returned home at ten p.m.
III. 1. He said he was a writer.

2. They said they liked doctor Green.
3. She said she didn’t need help.
4. He said they couldn’t come.
5. He said I might not sleep there.
6. I said it was raining outside.
7. Mrs Lee said Jim was riding a bike.
8. They said they had too little time.
9. I said I was resting.
10. He said I couldn’t stay longer.
I. 1. Brian said their family was going to the theatre that night.
2. Deborah told me she would come back late at night the next day.
3. Thomas explained they were discussing an important problem then.
4. Ellen said she was leaving for Greece that month.
5. Robert told me I would have to change the tyres the following year.
II. Mary said she was going to Italy the following summer.
Julie said she would certainly have a good time there.
Mary added her boyfriend was going with her.
Julie told Mary she was thinking of visiting her uncle in Chicago.
Mary said he would be delighted to see her.
Julie explained she would make a decision soon.
III. 1. Tom told me he would be able to help me the following Friday.

2. Betty said her sister was coming that day.
3. Gregory told me he was planning a trip around the world.
4. Jack promised that he would phone me that week.
5. Steve told me Debbie was dating Raymond that evening.
I. 1. He told me he had lived there in 1979.

2. She said I had to / must wait.
3. They explained they had had many problems.
4. He said the building was burning / had been burning.
5. Bob told us Tom had moved out of the flat.
6. The clerk said I would have to pay more.
7. She said someone was knocking.
8. I told him we had bought the dog from Mr Parker.
9. He said he had been resting since midday.
10. She told me that I should be patient.
II. Elisabeth said she had met Roland at a pilgrimage two years before.
Cindy explained she had known him for five years.
Elisabeth said they had been getting on very well since they (had) met.
Cindy admitted they had quarrelled once a year before.
321
Elisabeth said Ronald had told her about it.
Cindy told Elisabeth they had made up a week later.
III. Jerry told the interviewer that he was born in 1955 in a small village. He said he
had attended a private school in Edinburgh. He said he had started his studies
in 1973 in London where he had met his future wife. He told the man he (had) got
married in 1977. He said his son was born a year later. He said he had started
working in a private enterprise in 1980 where he had been working until that day.
Unit 129 Mowa zależna (4) - pytania str. 137
I. 1. She asked if I could speak German.

2. He wanted to know where I had been.
3. Mr Dean asked how I had slept.
4. Paul wanted to know if I was a student.
5. I asked the porter if there would be any foreign guests.
6. He inquired if they had to / must make a statement.
7. I wanted to know if John had told the truth.
8. They were curious who ran the company.
9. I asked Jane if she had found her purse.
10. She wanted to know where the meeting was taking place.
II. Kate asked Lena where she had bought such a beautiful dress.
Lena answered that her husband had brought it from Italy the previous month.
Kate wanted to know if Jim was going to Italy again soon.
Lena told her that he wasn’t and that his boss was sending him to Turkey.
Kate asked if he was going to do any shopping there.
Lena said she hoped he would find some time for it.
III. 1. Mrs Pitt asked when Michael had graduated from elementary school.
2. I asked what the officer had received.
3. The manager asked if Jessica could speak Spanish fluently.
4. He asked what Marianne had told the man at the interview the previous day.
5. The lifeguard asked if Tony had been swimming since early morning.
Unit 130 Mowa zależna (5) - pytania str. 138
I. 1. Alice wanted to know if Mr Bloom had travelled to Japan.

2. Lisa was curious if John had won a trip.
3. Mick asked if the guests were feeling comfortable.
4. Bob inquired if the boss was returning on Monday.
5. Sue wanted to know if Tim was feeling depressed because of the weather.
II. 1. I didn’t know if there was any message for Lucy.

2. I hadn’t got a clue who the picture had been painted by.
3. I wasn’t sure if they would offer me a new job.
4. I didn’t know what time the fast train left.
5. I had no idea what topic was being discussed then.
III. 1. Jim asked the restaurant owner what time they were opening the next day.
2. Fred asked his wife if she had done any shopping the previous week.
3. Pupils asked their teacher if they could put off writing the test.
4. Ray asked the supplier if he would be delivering any goods the following week.
5. The doctor asked his patient if he had ever been on a diet.
322
Unit 131 Mowa zależna (6) - sugestie etc. str. 139
I. 1. He advised me to relax / that I should relax more often.

2. She promised that she would buy us some sweets.
3. Julia begged the attacker to leave her alone.
4. He warned us to keep / that we should keep off the grass.
5. They recommended that I shouldn’t drink the water.
6. Bob offered to paint the walls for me.
7. The doctor suggested that I had better / should give up smoking.
8. He explained to me that I shouldn’t touch the substance.
9. I ordered him to clean the pistons.
10. She warned me not to tease / that I shouldn’t tease the dog.
II. 1. She ordered her husband to take her luggage to the car.
2. He advised me to look her straight in the eyes.
3. I asked her not to switch the light off.
4. The clerk advised the applicant to send an extra copy of his CV.
5. The man warned the people not to approach the lion’s cage.
III. 1. The mother advised her son to put on a warm sweater.

2. The boss ordered the cleaner to wipe the floor clean while he was away.
3. The guide warned a climber not to go down the cave.
4. Mrs Graver promised her neighbours to feed their cat.
5. Ronald offered to help his wife with doing the accounts.
Unit 132 Had better str. 140
I. 1. You had better take some medicine.

2. Muriel had better take private lessons.
3. He had better have a serious discussion with professor Hicks.
4. You had better not spend too much time in the sun.
5. They had better take the matter to court.
6. Hadn’t she better stay at home this evening?
II. 1. He had better go to a throat specialist.

2. I had better have a nap.
3. We had better ask someone to see to it.
4. You had better set the alarm-clock.
5. He had better walk slowly.
6. I had better put on new tiles.
7. She had better change her job.
8. We had better take a torch.
Unit 133 Would rather str. 141
I. 1. I would rather drink 2. I would rather lie 3. I would rather have

4. I would rather take 5. I would rather watch
II. 1. I’d rather stay at home than go shopping with you.

2. I’d rather travel alone than join the group of hikers.
3. I’d rather play squash than go jogging.
323
4. I’d rather eat something than drink wine.
5. I’d rather stay with you than go home now.
III. 1. I’d rather they were quiet.

2. We’d rather you told the truth.
3. I’d rather she didn’t smoke so much.
4. I’d rather he listened to me.
5. I’d rather it didn’t use so much of it.
6. We’d rather she told us everything.
7. Their mother would rather they were more obedient.
8. We’d rather he paid us more money.
9. I’d rather it were longer.
10. I’d rather she read more books.
IV. 1. were 2. than 3. didn’t

4. went 5. were / lived 6. go
Unit 134 (Would) prefer str. 142
I. 1. Simon prefers football to tennis.

2. I prefer novels to crime stories.
3. We prefer chocolate to ice-cream.
4. Jim prefers theatre to opera.
5. Mr Lee prefers his village to a big city.
II. 1. John prefers swimming to running.

2. They prefer singing to dancing.
3. I prefer watching TV to doing exercise.
4. We prefer skating to skiing.
5. Tiffany prefers acting to writing plays.
III. 1. John prefers to swim rather than run.

2. They prefer to sing rather than dance.
3. I prefer to watch TV rather than do exercise.
4. We prefer to skate rather than ski.
5. Tiffany prefers to act rather than write plays.
IV. 1. prefer 2. prefer 3. rather 4. prefer

5. prefers 6. rather 7. prefer 8. rather
V. 1. had given him 2. have written 3. had smiled

4. have eaten 5. have paid
Unit 135 It is (high) time str. 143
I. 1. It is time for us to pay the workers.

2. It is time for me to wash the carpet.
3. It is time for Jane to start some work.
4. It is time for you to read some book.
5. It is time for Dan to brush his teeth.
6. It is time for us to apologise to Betty.
7. It is time for me to answer his letter.
8. It is time for him to clean the paths.
9. It is time for them to go home.
10. It is time for you to see our baby.
324
II. 1. It’s high time they sent a response to my letter of application.
2. It is high time they paid back our five hundred pounds.
3. It is high time you watered your flowers.
4. It is high time he turned off this loud music.
5. It is high time you had it cut.
III. 1. It’s high time she went on a diet.

2. It’s high time I took a day off.
3. It’s high time he dropped a line.
4. It’s high time she made up her mind.
5. It’s high time we scored a point.
6. It’s high time we went out on strike.
7. It’s high time you earned your own living.
8. It’s high time the business brought profit.
Unit 136 Strona bierna (1) - czasy ‘Present’ str. 144
I. 1. Coffee is being drunk (by Tom).

2. Stamps are collected (by Sue).
3. Dinner is being cooked (by Mary and Celia).
4. Sheep are kept (by Mr Wells).
5. Lunch has been eaten (by us).
6. A picture is being painted (by some boy).
7. History is taught (by you).
8. The window has been broken (by someone).
9. Mistakes are made (by John).
10. Blackberries are being picked (by me).
II. A homeless dog has been found by Jack. The dog is kept at home and food is
given to it (it is given food) everyday. The dog is taken for a walk three times
a day. It is called Bonk. Now, it is being shown to his friends. It is being admired
by them.
Our cottage is being renovated. The walls are being painted by our father and
the rotten floorboards are being removed by uncle Jeff. The windows are being
cleaned by our mother. The curtains are being washed by my sister and the
carpets are being beaten by me.
III. 1. The houses have been built for two years.

2. My watch is being repaired at the moment.
3. The Minister is often asked questions.
4. The machine is hardly ever used.
5. The singer is being interviewed now.
6. English is spoken all over the world.
7. He has been paid a pension since 1994.
8. Wheat is grown in Poland.
9. A speech is being made at present.
10. Table cloths are changed everyday.
Unit 137 Strona bierna (2) - czasy ‘Past’ str. 145
I. A party was organised by us last weekend. A lot of friends were invited. Food and
drinks were brought by them. Dance music was played by Mike. Extravagant clothes were
worn by some people. The party was enjoyed very much by everyone.
325
TV was being watched by me at the time yesterday. A book was being read by my
brother. Flowers were being watered in the garden by my mother and the fence was
being mended by my father. Grass was being cut by our neighbour and news were being
listened to by his wife.
II. 1. I was knocked down (by him).

2. The trumpet was played (by George).
3. Ice-cream was being eaten (by some people).
4. The alarm-clock had been set (by Sheila).
5. The construction was spoiled (by someone).
6. The hedges were being trimmed (by Harry).
7. Beer was drunk (by me).
8. The door had been locked (by Alfred).
9. An appointment was made (by the Kellys).
10. We were being followed (by some children).
III. 1. Had the shelters been built 2. the fire brigade was called
3. Was the computer being used 4. Our flight was cancelled
5. the show was being prepared 6. everything had been eaten
7. The bicycle was stolen 8. The streets were being decorated
9. the trees were cut down 10. Everything had been changed
Unit 138 Strona bierna (3) - różne formy str. 146
I. 1. The letter will be opened (by someone).

2. The worker would be fired (by me).
3. The exercise will be finished (by her).
4. A message will be left (by him).
5. A mistake would be made (by Tom).
II. 1. The role may be taken (by George).

2. The receiver can be sold (by me).
3. Uniforms must be worn (by us).
4. Reports should be delivered (by them).
5. The jewellery might be stolen (by someone).
6. The money ought to be returned (by you).
7. The matter couldn’t be solved (by us).
8. Cigarettes shouldn’t be smoked (by me).
9. They may be seen (by somebody).
10. The duties mustn’t be neglected (by her).
III. 1. I was told to go.

2. Jerry was advised to be quiet.
3. The soldiers are often ordered to march.
4. He is believed to be a Lord.
5. Bob has been recommended not to lie.
6. She is known to love Tony.
7. Eddie was said to be in prison.
8. I was urged to play.
9. It is claimed to look nice.
10. Tom is considered to be friendly.
IV. 1. He advised that an account should be opened.

2. We suggest that photographs should be taken.
3. Everyone agreed that money should be offered.
326
4. He demanded that the salary should be increased.
5. I suggested that a dictionary should be used.
Unit 139 Strona bierna (4) - różne formy str. 147
I. 1. was decided 2. will be delivered 3. were being cleaned

4. is being cut 5. must be loaded 6. has been restored
7. are controlled 8. were closed 9. would have been dismissed
10. can be switched 11. was hit, is still being kept 12. is being carried out
13. is / was said 14. will be finished / 15. has been grown
will have been finished
II. 1. A pencil is being looked for (by Mike).

2. The furniture was covered with dust.
3. These words must be looked up (by you).
4. This matter will be thought over (by me).
5. The pictures are being laughed at (by her).
6. The house is looked after (by my mother).
7. The planes were being pointed to (by the child).
8. The matter should be looked into (by us).
9. Stories are made up (by him).
10. An electrician has been sent for (by Mr Davids).
III. 1. Where were the keys found?

2. When will the pool be opened?
3. Since when has this flat been occupied?
4. What is being written?
5. How often is the insulation changed?
Unit 140 Konstrukcje bezokolicznikowe (1) str. 148
I. 1. I go to a party to have a good time.

2. I go to a doctor to ask for a prescription.
3. I go to a greengrocer’s to buy vegetables.
4. I go to a laundry to wash dirty clothes.
5. I go to a library to borrow books.
6. I go to a tobacconist’s to buy cigarettes.
7. I go to a stadium to watch a game.
8. I go to a florist’s to buy flowers.
II. 1. The management agreed to increase the workers’ wages.

2. Eric has decided to stay at home this evening.
3. He told me to write a complaint.
4. We have decided to send our son abroad.
5. She pretends to be the most important in the office.
III. 1. Muriel seems to know Mr Thurman very well.

2. Our bills turned out to be overdue.
3. The man happened to be a policeman.
4. Timothy appears to love Sally.
5. Joan seemed to look upset.
327
I. 1. I expect some of you to be willing to help me.

2. We believe it to be easy to learn English.
3. She found it hard to swim against the tide.
4. Betty expected Mike to send her flowers.
5. I believe it to be advantageous to spend some time in the open air.
II. 1. Jerry is the last person to offer any assistance.

2. Mr Bead was the only worker to attend the TU meeting.
3. I was the first to see the eagle.
4. Eric was the second student to be expelled from the course.
5. Alice is the only woman to support our cause.
III. 1. where / how to find 2. how to use

3. when to start 4. what to say
5. which one to buy 6. how to solve
7. what to do 8. where to sit
9. when to come 10. how to spell
I. 1. Brenda wants Tom to tell her the truth.

2. Mick begged Alice to marry him.
3. Lisa asked Simon to answer the letter quickly.
4. Craig advised Debbie not to give up fighting for her rights.
5. Nick has promised Danny to visit him in Las Vegas.
6. The teacher ordered the students to write the exercises at home.
7. Mr Taylor instructed his wife to phone early in the morning.
8. David warned Richie not to touch his money.
II. 1. We have failed to do the task.

2. Bob seemed to be scared.
3. We managed to find the station easily.
4. She has offered to mind the baby.
5. They appeared to be from abroad.
6. Josh pretends to know better.
7. I refuse to pay extra money.
8. He tends to play truant quite often.
9. We can afford to spend more money.
10. She claims to have seen a ghost.
III. 1. whether to wait 2. whether to apply for 3. whether to call

4. whether to buy 5. whether to put on
Unit 143 Konstrukcje ‘gerundialne’ str. 151
I. 1. Can you imagine your being in my place?

2. She admits being in love with Robert.
3. John suggests (our) asking Mr Howard for advice.
4. Helen denies having an affair.
5. I propose taking the other road.
328
II. 1. We remembered meeting / having met the people before.
2. Joshua reported having gathered a lot of information.
3. I regretted calling / having called Jeff a fool.
4. She forgot losing / having lost the diskettes.
5. They appreciated having been treated so generously.
III. 1. He denies her being his lover.

2. Did you recall his making / having made a phone call?
3. We remember his being / having been rather unkind.
4. Somebody suggested her asking for a day off.
5. I advised their taking the camcorder.
Unit 144 Bezokolicznik / Gerund (1) str. 152
I. 1. hates cooking 2. threatened to beat

3. avoided giving 4. stopped smoking
5. love playing 6. agreed to have
7. want to become 8. hope to see
9. forgot to do 10. decided to go
II. 1. staging 2. to put forward 3. to say 4. losing

5. to operate 6. having 7. to offend 8. to mind
III. 1. to break 2. waiting 3. to sign 4. to forget 5. to see

6. being 7. playing, (to) fix 8. to invite 9. cleaning / 10. to go
to be cleaned
Unit 145 Bezokolicznik / Gerund (2) str. 153
I. 1. to type, to do 2. to reach, walking

3. listen, not to touch 4. buy, regenerating
5. smoking, smoking 6. to win, beating
7. changing, turning 8. minding, doing
9. cancelling, having 10. being, behaving
II. 1. have, starting 2. acting 3. calling / having called

4. meeting 5. to explain 6. reading, watching
7. being, telling 8. to harm 9. giving up, going
10. not to take 11. not saluting / having saluted 12. stay
Unit 146 Imiesłów czynny str. 154
I. 1. a road passing through the hills 2. a girl wishing to recite a poem

3. the table standing in the kitchen 4. the man teaching us biology
5. fruit growing on the tree 6. bills introducing changes
II. 1. I noticed her giving the boy a kiss.

2. I’m watching the bird building a nest.
3. I smelt burning soup. / I smelt the soup burning.
4. I can feel my hands getting numb.
5. I saw you dropping the bag.
6. I was listening to her telling her husband off.
7. I was watching them trying to break into the van.
8. I heard her telling him everything.
329
III. 1. Knowing how to deal with the matter, I will help you.
2. Being too timid she won’t go down the cave.
3. Earning a lot of money he can afford a new house.
4. Not having any map we don’t know which way to go.
5. Working as a salesman he meets a lot of people.
Unit 147 Imiesłów czynny i dokonany str. 155
I. 1. breaking 2. climbing 3. trying 4. digging 5. switching
II. 1. Having eaten breakfast Lena went to school.

2. Having watched the film I went to bed.
3. Having taken a pill Sam started to feel better.
4. Having written a letter Mr Tanner posted it.
5. Having finished school Nicole went to work.
III. 1. Having discussed the matter we had a ballot.

2. Having prepared my lessons I went to the disco.
3. Having returned from abroad Charles settled down in Greenwich.
4. Having been introduced profession Nicey started his lecture.
5. Having abandoned the sinking ship we were picked up by helicopters.
IV. 1. slamming 2. hoping

3. walking 4. Having written
5. trying 6. Having approached / Approaching, hiding
7. running 8. Having
9. writing 10. getting out of
11. Having entered, sleeping 12. being
Unit 148 Zdania czasowe (1) str. 156
I. 1. I will talk to Brian when he comes home.

2. She will wake up when the alarm-clock rings.
3. He will do me a favour when I ask his for one.
4. The boss will be surprised when you tell him the news.
5. We will go for a walk when it stops raining.
II. 1. I will leave before they find out the truth.

2. When she sells / has sold her house she will move out.
3. Before he goes on holiday, he will take an examination.
4. After I return / have returned from the business trip, I will take a long leave.
5. He will drive the children to school when he has made / makes an
appointment.
6. As soon as Mr Jenkins retires, he will get a pension.
7. When Martin turns seventeen, he will join the army.
8. I will not take a decision until I talk to the director.
III. 1. will not get, threaten 2. comes, will clean / will have cleaned
3. will make, find 4. return, will take
5. will become, goes / has gone 6. will make, go
7. will not obtain, pay / have paid 8. gets, will switch
330
Unit 149 Zdania czasowe (2) str. 157
I. return / have returned, come, will start, write / have written, will prepare,
finish, will go, Will you phone, will fix, Will you talk, leave, will not meet,
return / have returned
II. 1. She will not go out to play until she cleans her room.
2. I will talk to Mr Thompson, the moment he arrives.
3. They will go to sleep after their guests leave / have left.
4. Mary will get a promotion as soon as she passes / has passed her exams.
5. The house will be built before the year ends.
III. 1. hands, will take 2. will sing, go

3. will make / will have made, withdraw 4. does / has done, will visit
5. will forgive, apologise 6. subsides, will continue
7. tells 8. rises, will begin
Unit 150 Zdania celowe str. 158
I. 1. I am going to the shops in order to buy some food.

2. Stanley visited doctor Lee in order to ask him for advice.
3. They are going to open the chest in order to check its contents.
4. Ms McCarthy will go to work in order to earn some money.
5. I have just taken up jogging in order to improve my condition.
II. 1. Mark has bought a newspaper so as to read the latest news.

2. We’ve hired a private teacher so as to learn more effectively.
3. I switched the radio off so as not to make noise.
4. Brian is training hard now so as to win the race.
5. We’ll leave earlier so as not to disturb you.
III. 1. They are putting the sign so that the drivers may / will know about the danger.
2. He is wearing the label so that people can / may / will recognise him.
3. I gave him a big loan so that he could / should set up his own business.
4. He has put the fence round his house so that his children can / will be
safe from stray dogs.
5. I am renovating my house so that my neighbours will / should admire it.
6. He sent for a taxi so that his wife shouldn’t / wouldn’t have to walk back.
Unit 151 Zdania wynikowe str. 159
I. 1. so ... that 2. so ... that 3. such ... that 4. such ... that 5. so ... that
6. such .. that 7. so ... that 8. so ... that 9. such ... that 10. so ... that
II. 1. He is such a strong boy that he can do five hundred press-ups.

2. It was such a hard puzzle that only one competitor managed to solve it.
3. She is such an attractive girl that she catches the eye of all men.
4. It was such an uncomfortable bed that I preferred to sleep in the hammock.
5. It is such a precious painting that hardly anyone can afford to buy it.
III. 1. such 2. so 3. so 4. such 5. so

6. such 7. such 8. so 9. so 10. such
331
Unit 152 Spójniki (1) str. 160
I. 1. although 2. therefore 3. Besides 4. Although 5. otherwise

6. therefore 7. otherwise 8. Although 9. Besides 10. therefore
II. 1. Although we are neighbours, we don’t like each other.

2. They offered to pick me up, however I preferred to walk.
3. I was tired, therefore I went to bed early.
4. Water / You should / had better water the flowers otherwise they will fade away.
5. Besides being good at mathematics, Paula is also a talented poem writer.
III. 1. Besides 2. so 3. Although 4. yet

5. Though 6. otherwise 7. however 8. unless
9. nevertheless 10. Although 11. otherwise 12. Unless
Unit 153 Spójniki (2) str. 161
I. 1. In spite of having little time

2. in spite of having high blood pressure
3. in spite of being under an anaesthetic
4. In spite of driving the car
5. In spite of using a lot of gas and water
6. in spite of doing our best
II. 1. because of (e) 2. despite (c) 3. despite (a)

4. because of (f) 5. despite (d) 6. because of (b)
III. 1. Despite being quite brave I was afraid to touch the snake.
2. Learn / You should learn / You had better learn more or else you’ll never
pass the entrance examination.
3. In spite of the horrible weather, the soldiers marched on.
4. Since this water is not potable you shouldn’t drink it.
5. Even though I have asked Alice warmly, she still refuses to date me.
IV. 1. yet 2. as 3. because of 4. Though 5. Despite
Unit 154 Pytania rozłączne (1) str. 162
I. 1. l 2. j 3. m. 4. h 5. b
6. k 7. n 8. g 9. o 10. a
11. d 12. e 13. f 14. c 15. i
II. 1. f 2. k 3. d 4. h 5. m.
6. o 7. c 8. i 9. a 10. l
11. n 12. g 13. e 14. b 15. j
Unit 155 Pytania rozłączne (2) str. 163
I. 1. doesn’t he 2. aren’t we 3. aren’t they 4. didn’t he 5. hasn’t she

6. shall we 7. couldn’t you 8. haven’t I 9. hadn’t they 10. isn’t he
11. isn’t it 12. wasn’t it 13. haven’t you 14. wasn’t she 15. won’t we
332
II. 1. did they 2. are you 3. is he 4. have we 5. should they
6. has it 7. will I 8. were they 9. does she 10. does he
11. would you 12. have I 13. were there 14. have you 15. had she
Unit 156 Inwersja czasownika str. 164
I. 1. Never before have I met a more eccentric person.

2. Hardly ever do I consult my decisions with the director.
3. On no account can you leave the hostel at night.
4. Seldom does she clean the staircase.
5. Yes, only by lying could I / was I able to / did I manage to avoid trouble.
II. 1. Only when I came home did I find out that my documents were missing.
2. Not only is William a good skier; he is also a judo champion.
3. In no circumstances should you forget about the conference.
4. No sooner had the delivery boy left than the doorbell rang again.
5. Scarcely ever do we send messages by e-mail.
6. Not till I looked at my coat in the mirror did I realise it was torn.
7. Nowhere could she find the photographs.
8. So angrily did Jeff look at me that I felt creeps all over my back.
9. Hardly had I switched the razor on when it broke down.
10. Never has Ms Thorn used the overhead projector during her lessons.
III. 1. when 2. than 3. till
Unit 157 Czasowniki złożone (1) str. 165
I. 1. looking for 2. turn on 3. broke into 4. put off

5. take after 6. grown up 7. had ran into 8. make up
II. 1. i. 2. g 3. e 4. k 5. b 6. j 7. a 8. d 9. f 10. l 11. c 12. h
III. 1. given 2. let 3. put 4. broke

5. fallen 6. moved 7. carry 8. run
I. 1. He lives alone, so he can easily get by on the high salary that he gets.
2. Why don’t you back out of the co-operation instead of wasting your money?
3. She tends to run down her neighbours quite often.
4. Honestly, the quality of the receiver let me down.
5. My grandfather set up the family business in 1907.
6. I find it hard to pick out the colour that I like the best.
II. 1. go round 2. broken off 3. fall back on 4. see to

5. close ... down 6. turned up 7. set in 8. done up
III. 1. look 2. put 3. take 4. made

5. come 6. picked 7. set 8. back
333
I. 1. through 2. round 3. for 4. on

5. behind 6. out 7. down 8. into
II. 1. f 2. d 3. a 4. c 5. g 6. h 7. e 8. b
III. 1. take 2. Keep 3. call 4. put

5. waiting 6. live 7. catch 8. working
I. 1. came by 2. gave in 3. called it off 4. came about

5. took in 6. gone back on 7. account for 8. drew it up
II. 1. d 2. g 3. i 4. h 5. f 6. a 7. c 8. j 9. b 10. e
III. 1. up on 2. away with 3. up to 4. down on

5. down on 6. up for 7. on with 8. in for
334
CZASOWNIKI NIEREGULARNE
bezokolicznik / infinitive Past Simple Past Participle

be - być * was / were been
bear - znosić, wytrzymywać bore borne
beat - bić, uderzać beat beaten
become - stawać się became become
begin - rozpoczynać (się) began begun
bite - gryźć bit bitten
break - łamać, broke broken
bring - przynosić brought brought
build - budować built built
buy - kupować bought bought
catch - łapać, chwytać caught caught
choose - wybierać chose chosen
come - przychodzić came come
cost - kosztować cost cost
cut - ciąć, ścinać cut cut
deal - poradzić sobie dealt dealt
do - robić, czynić did done
draw - rysować drew drawn
dream - śnić, marzyć dreamed / dreamt dreamed / dreamt
drink - pić drank drunk
drive - jechać, prowadzić drove driven
eat - jeść ate eaten
fall - upaść, spaść fell fallen
feed - karmić fed fed
feel - czuć się felt felt
fight - walczyć fought fought
find - znajdywać found found
fly - lecieć, latać flew flown
forget - zapominać forgot forgotten
forgive - przebaczać forgave forgiven
get - otrzymywać got got / gotten
give - dawać gave given
go - pójść went gone
grow - rosnąć, hodować grew grown
hang - wieszać hung / hanged hung / hanged
have - mieć, posiadać had had
hear - słyszeć heard heard
hide - ukrywać (się) hid hidden / hid
hit - uderzać hit hit
hold - trzymać held held
hurt - ranić hurt hurt
keep - trzymać kept kept
know - wiedzieć, znać knew known
lead - prowadzić led led
learn - uczyć się learnt / learned learnt / learned
leave - opuszczać, odchodzić left left
335
lend - pożyczać (komuś) lent lent
let - pozwalać let let
lie - kłaść się lay lain
lose - gubić lost lost
make - robić, czynić made made
mean - oznaczać meant meant
meet - spotykać met met
pay - płacić paid paid
put - kłaść put put
read - czytać read read
ride - jeździć rode ridden
ring - dzwonić rang rung
rise - wznosić się rose risen
run - biec ran run
say - powiedzieć said said
see - zobaczyć saw seen
sell - sprzedawać sold sold
send - wysyłać sent sent
set - ustawiać set set
shine - świecić shone / shined shone / shined
shoot - strzelać shot shot
show - pokazywać showed shown / showed
sing - śpiewać sang sung
sink - tonąć, zatopić sank / sunk sunk
sit - siedzieć sat sat
sleep - spać slept slept
smell - pachnieć smelt smelt
speak - mówić spoke spoken
spend - spędzać, wydawać spent spent
spill - rozlewać spilt spilt
spoil - popsuć (się) spoiled / spoilt spoiled / spoilt
stand - stać stood stood
steal - kraść stole stolen
strike - bić, uderzać struck struck
swear - przysięgać; przeklinać swore sworn
swim - pływać swam swum
take - brać took taken
teach - nauczać taught taught
tear - podrzeć tore torn
tell - powiedzieć told told
think - myśleć thought thought
throw - rzucać threw thrown
understand - rozumieć understood understood
wake - budzić woke / waked woken / waked
wear - nosić (ubranie) wore worn
win - zwyciężać won won
write - pisać wrote written
* obok czasowników nieregularnych podane zostały ich podstawowe znaczenia
336
337

Jezyk Angielski Cwiczenia Oraz Repetytorium Gramatyczne Matasek

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Jezyk Angielski Cwiczenia Oraz Repetytorium Gramatyczne Matasek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

##7#52#aMTgwNTc1M0E2NjM4MzMzNA==

Uczniom początkującym zaleca się wcześniejsze odwołanie do objaśnień w repetytorium, zaś

Repetytorium zaopatrzone zostało również w słowniczek czasowników złożonych (phrasal verbs),

Unit 1 Przedimki nieokreślone a - an 9

II. Wstaw przedimek nieokreślony a lub an:

III. Wstaw przedimki a, an jeżeli są wymagane:

II. Wstaw a , an lub the jeżeli są wymagane:

II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując właściwe rzeczowniki z przedimkami a, an lub the:

III. Uzupełnij zdania przedimkami a, an lub the jeżeli są wymagane:

II. Wstaw przedimki a, an, the jeżeli są wymagane:

.................... first capital in our itinerary was to be .................... Rome in

However, .................... small argument broke out about .................... ending

III. Wstaw odpowiednią odmianę zaimka osobowego lub zaimki dzierżawcze:

I. Przepisz zdania według przykładu:

1. This is her passport. ................................................................

III. Wpisz poprawną formę zaimka dzierżawczego:

II. Wstaw zaimki zwrotne lub each other:

II. Wybierz właściwą odpowiedź:

III. Uzupełnij zdanie właściwym zaimkiem dzierżawczym, zwrotnym lub osobowym:

1. Mr Palmer lives in Leeds. Where .................................................?

II. Ułóż pytanie dotyczące wytłuszczonej części zdania:

1. Robert preferred to stay at home. .............................................................?

III. Wstaw odpowiednie zaimki pytające:

1. ‘..................... does Betty keep her money?’ ‘In her purse.’

II. Napisz pytania dotyczące wytłuszczonych części zdań w tekście:

II. Wstaw many lub much:

III. Wstaw many, much lub a lot (of):

II. Wybierz poprawną odpowiedź:

.............. jug .............. coffee .............. soup .............. cream

II. Wstaw any lub some:

1. I haven’t visited any places here. .............................................................

IV. Wstaw any, some, no lub none:

II. Wybierz poprawną formę:

II. Przepisz zdania stosując konstrukcję neither ... nor ... :

III. Ułóż zdania z konstrukcją both ... and ... :

II. Uzupełnij zdania stosując wyrażenia z so lub neither:

III. Uzupełnij zdania stosując wyrażenia z so oraz neither lub but:

II. Wybierz poprawną formę:

III. Przepisz zdania zaczynając je od podanych słów:

II. Połącz zdania za pomocą zaimków względnych who lub which:

III. Ułóż poprawne definicje:

II. Wstaw whose, whom lub where:

III. Wstaw who, whom, whose lub which:

II. Połącz zdania przy pomocy zaimków względnych jak w przykładzie:

III. Wstaw przecinki w zdaniach, w których są one niezbędne:

II. Uzupełnij pytania poprawnym zaimkiem:

III. Uzupełnij dialogi poprawnymi zaimkami:

II. Połącz zdania przy pomocy zaimka which:

III. Wstaw zaimki who, which lub what:

6. There is a lot of salt in the soup. It ............................................... soup.

II. Wstaw there lub it:

III. Wstaw there / it + be:

II. Uzupełnij zdania podanymi rzeczownikami w liczbie mnogiej:

1. Don’t believe in any of Jack’s .................... . He is a notorious liar.

III. Wybierz poprawną formę:

II. Uzupełnij zdania podanymi rzeczownikami w liczbie mnogiej:

child goose handkerchief housewife leaf

III. Uzupełnij zdania podanymi rzeczownikami:

goods gymnastics measles news outskirts

II. Uzupełnij frazy rzeczownikami określającymi ilość (w niektórych przykładach

a bag a bar a bottle a bowl a cake

1. ................ of Coke 6. ................ of soup 11. ................ of water

III. Połącz w pary podane rzeczowniki i wstaw je w poprawne zdania:

brave dirty dull hostile pure